SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-Line Systems

SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-Line Systems
SKF @ptitude Analyst
and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
Documents features applicable to SKF DMx, IMx, WMx
Part No. 32296700-EN
Revision D
User Manual
Read this manual before using this product. Failure to follow the
instructions and safety precautions in this manual can result in serious
injury. Keep this manual in a safe location for future reference.
Copyright  2015 by SKF USA Inc.
All rights reserved.
5271 Viewridge Court., San Diego, CA 92123-1841 USA
Telephone: (858) 496-3400, Fax: (858) 496-3531
Customer Service: 1-800-523-7514
SKF USA Inc.
® SKF is a registered trademark of the SKF Group.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
© SKF 2015
The contents of this publication are the copyright of the publisher and may not be reproduced (even
extracts) unless prior written permission is granted. Every care has been taken to ensure the accuracy of
the information contained in this publication but no liability can be accepted for any loss or damage whether
direct, indirect or consequential arising out of the use of the information contained herein. SKF reserves the
right to alter any part of this publication without prior notice.
Patents: US 4,768,380 • US 5,633,811 • US 5,679,900 • US 5,845,230 • US 5,852,351 •
US 5,854,553 • US 5,854,994 • US 5,870,699 • US 5,907,491 • US 5,992,237 • US 6,006,164 •
US 6,124,692 • US 6,138,078 • US 6,199,422 • US 6,202,491 • US 6,275,781 • US 6,301,514 •
US 6,437,692 • US 6,489,884 • US 6,513,386 • US 6,633,822 • US 6,789,025 • US 6,792,360 •
US 7,103,511 • US 7,697,492 • WO/2003/048714
Product Support – Contact Information
Product Support – To request a Return Authorization, Product Calibration or a Product Support Plan, use
the web page links for direct contact and support.
Product Sales - For information on purchasing condition monitoring products, services or customer
support, contact your local SKF sales office.
General Product Information
For general product information (i.e., product data sheet, accessories catalog, etc.), visit the Condition
Monitoring Products page on SKF.com and select the appropriate product link.
Technical Support Group
Discuss/review issues of specific interest with maintenance and reliability specialists from around the world
at the SKF Knowledge Centre.
For technical support on issues like troubleshooting product installation, troubleshooting product
performance, etc., use our technical support web page to contact one of our Technical Support Groups.
Product Registration
Please take a moment to register your product at www.skf.com/cm/register to receive exclusive benefits
offered only to our registered customers, including receiving technical support, tracking your proof of
ownership, and staying informed about upgrades and special offers. (Please visit our website for more
details on these benefits.)
Tell us how we’re doing!
It’s important that you’re satisfied with the quality of our product user manuals. We appreciate your
feedback; if you have comments or suggestions for improvement, please tell us how we’re doing!
111115jg
End-User License Agreement
THIS END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (this
“Agreement”) is entered into by and between
SKF USA Inc. and/or SKF Condition Monitoring
Center AB (hereinafter referred to collectively as
the “Licensor”) and any person or business that
executes this Agreement by clicking the “I agree”
icon at the end of this Agreement or by
accessing, using, or installing the Software
(“Licensee” or “You”). Licensor and Licensee
shall be referred to collectively in this
Agreement as the Parties.
BY CLICKING THE ACCEPTANCE BUTTON OR
ACCESSING, USING, OR INSTALLING THE
SOFTWARE, OR ANY PART THEREOF, YOU
EXPRESSLY AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ALL OF
THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU
DO NOT AGREE TO ALL OF THE TERMS OF
THIS AGREEMENT, THE BUTTON INDICATING
NON-ACCEPTANCE MUST BE SELECTED,
AND YOU MAY NOT ACCESS, USE, OR
INSTALL ANY PART OF THE SOFTWARE.
1. DEFINITIONS
(a)
Derivative Works. The Term
“Derivative Works” shall have the
same meaning as set forth in the U.S.
Copyright Act, as amended from time
to time, in title 17 of the United States
Code.
(b)
Effective Date. The term “Effective
Date” shall mean the date on which
Licensee assents to the terms of this
Agreement by clicking the “I agree”
button at the bottom of this
Agreement.
(c)
Intellectual Property Rights. The
term Intellectual Property Rights shall
mean all rights arising or protectable
under the copyright, trademark,
patent, or trade secrets laws of the
United States or any other nation,
including all rights associated with the
protection of computer programs
and/or source code.
(d)
Person. The term “Person” shall
mean an individual, a partnership, a
company, a corporation, an
association, a joint stock company, a
trust, a joint venture, an
unincorporated organization, or a
governmental entity (or any
department, agency, or political
subdivision thereof).
(e)
Software. The term “Software” shall
mean the software application entitled
Software for Wireless Monitoring
System V/T, SKF @ptitude Analyst,
SKF @ptitude Inspector, SKF @ptitude
Observer, SKF @ptitude Decision
Support or any other software within
the SKF @ptitude family suite, which
is an application developed, owned,
marketed, and licensed by Licensor.
The term Software shall include the
object code of Software for Wireless
Monitoring System V/T, SKF @ptitude
Analyst, SKF @ptitude Inspector, SKF
@ptitude Observer, SKF @ptitude
Decision Support or any other object
code within the SKF @ptitude family
suite and any and all user manuals, or
other technical documentation,
authored by Licensor in connection
with Software for Wireless Monitoring
System V/T, SKF @ptitude Analyst,
SKF @ptitude Inspector, SKF @ptitude
Observer, SKF @ptitude Decision
Support or any other software within
the SKF @ptitude family. The term
“Software” includes any corrections,
bug fixes, enhancements, releases,
updates, upgrades, or other
modifications, including custom
modifications, to Software for
Wireless Monitoring System V/T, SKF
@ptitude Analyst, SKF @ptitude
Inspector, SKF @ptitude Observer,
SKF @ptitude Decision Support or any
other software within the SKF
@ptitude family suite and any and all
user manuals. The term Software
also includes any supplemental, addon, or plug-in software code provided
Software on as many
networked clients
(workstations) as authorized
by your network license, as set
forth more particularly in the
applicable purchase order or
other ordering documents
memorializing your license
acquisition; provided, however,
that all network clients
(workstations) are connected
to a single licensed database
residing in your principal
business office.
to Licensee in the course of receiving
Product Support Plan services from
Licensor. The term Software shall not
be construed to include the source
code for Software for Wireless
Monitoring System V/T, SKF @ptitude
Analyst, SKF @ptitude Inspector, SKF
@ptitude Observer, SKF @ptitude
Decision Support or any other
software within the SKF @ptitude
family suite.
2. LICENSE
(a) Grant of License. Licensor grants
Licensee, pursuant to the terms and
conditions of this Agreement, a nonexclusive, non-transferable, and
revocable license to use the Software
in strict accordance with the terms
and conditions of this Agreement,
including any concurrent use, network
or other limitations set forth in
subsection (b) below. All rights not
specifically granted by Licensor under
this Agreement are retained by
Licensor and withheld from Licensee.
(b)
Installation and Use Rights.
Licensee shall use the Software only
on its internal computer equipment,
whether such equipment is owned,
leased, or rented, at the Licensee’s
principal business office. The
following paragraphs govern your
installation and use rights with regard
to the Software, depending on the
type of license you have obtained from
Licensor.
(i)
If you obtained a stand-alone
license of the Software, you
may install one (1) copy of the
Software on one (1) computer
residing in your principal
business office.
(ii)
If you obtained a network
license of the Software, you
may install one (1) copy of the
(iii)
(c)
If you obtained a network
license of the Software, you
may connect to multiple
licensed databases, you may
install the database-dedicated
clients up to the total number
of networked clients acquired
by you under the applicable
purchase order or other
ordering documents
memorializing your license
acquisition.
Other Conditions of Use. Licensor
understands and agrees that the
Software works in conjunction and is
compatible with database software
licensed to you by Microsoft or
Oracle. Upon installation of the
Software, the Software may detect
an installed database software
application from Oracle or Microsoft,
and if so, the Software will be fully
installed. If no installed database
software application from Oracle or
Microsoft is detected, the Software
will not install until such time as
Licensee installs a valid and Software
compatible copy of an Oracle
database or a Microsoft SQL Server
database and consents to the license
terms of such database software
application. If Licensee does not
agree to the terms of the the Oracle
database license or the Microsoft
SQL Server license, or if the Licensee
fails to install such database
software, the Software will not work.
Licensee is responsible for
maintaining a valid database license
in accordance with the Oracle or
Microsoft license agreement (which
ever is applicable) at all times.
(d)
Restrictions on Use. Licensee may
use the Software only for its internal
business purposes and on the
identified equipment on which the
Software was first installed or for
which it is otherwise licensed;
provided, however, that Licensee
may temporarily use the Software on
a back-up system in the event that
the primary licensed system is
inoperative or test system not used
for production but solely for the
purposes of testing the Software.
Licensee may not use the Software
for any other purpose. Licensee shall
not:
(i)
permit any parent,
subsidiaries, affiliated entities
or third parties to use the
Software;
(ii)
use the Software in the
operation of a service bureau;
(iii)
allow access to the Software
through any workstations
located outside of Licensee’s
principal business offices;
(iv)
rent, resell, lease, timeshare
or lend the Software to any
Person;
(v)
sublicense, assign, or transfer
the Software or this license for
the Software to any Person;
(vi)
reproduce, distribute, or
publicly display the Software;
(vii)
make the Software accessible
to any Person by any means,
including posting on a web site
or through other distribution
mechanisms over the Internet;
(viii)
reverse assemble,
disassemble, reverse engineer,
reverse compile, decompile, or
otherwise translate the
Software or prepare
Derivative Works based on the
Software;
(ix)
place, reproduce, or make
available the Software on
Licensee’s computer network
if Licensee is only authorized
by this Agreement to operate
the Software on a single
workstation;
(x)
exceed at any given point in
time the total number of
network clients authorized by
the applicable purchase order
or ordering document to use
or access the Software;
(xi)
edit or modify the Software
except as expressly authorized
by Licensor, including altering,
deleting, or obscuring any
proprietary rights notices
embedded in or affixed to the
Software;
(xii)
use the Software in any
manner that disparages
Licensor, Microsoft, or Oracle,
or use the Software in a way
that infringes the Intellectual
Property Rights of the
foregoing parties; or
(xiii)
use the Software in a manner
that violates any federal, state,
or local law, rule or regulation,
or use the Software to violate
the rights of any third party, or
valuable copyright and contains
valuable trade secrets of Licensor.
Licensee agrees not to discover or
attempt to discover, or assist or
permit any Person to discover or
attempt to discover, by any means
whatsoever the source code of the
Software.
use the Software to promote
pornography, hatred, or
racism.
(e)
Copies. Licensee, solely to enable it
to use the Software, may make one
archival copy of the Software’s
computer program, provided that the
copy shall include Licensor’s copyright
and any other proprietary notices.
The Software delivered by Licensor to
Licensee and the archival copy shall
be stored at Licensee’s principal
business office. If you purchased a
network license of the Software, you
may install one additional copy of the
Software on your network for the
limited purpose of testing the
Software’s operation. Except for the
limited reproduction rights set forth in
this paragraph, Licensee shall have no
other right to copy, in whole or in part,
the Software. Any copy of the
Software made by Licensee is the
exclusive property of Licensor.
(f)
Modifications. Licensee agrees that
only Licensor shall have the right to
alter, maintain, enhance or otherwise
modify the Software.
(g)
Protection of Software. Licensee
agrees that it will take action by
instruction, written agreement, or
otherwise as appropriate with any
person permitted access to the
Software to enable Licensee to comply
with its obligations hereunder.
Licensee shall maintain records of the
number and location of all copies of
Software. Licensee shall not provide,
permit access to or use of, or
otherwise make available any
Software in any form without
Licensor’s prior written agreement,
except to Licensee’s employees for
purposes specifically authorized by
this Agreement. Licensee
understands and agrees that the
source code for the Software is a
(h)
Licensor’s Audit Rights. Licensor
shall possess the right to audit
Licensee’s use of the Software to
determine compliance with this
Agreement (hereinafter referred to as
“Licensor’s Audit Rights”). Licensor’s
Audit Rights shall be exercised in
accordance with the following
paragraphs:
(i)
Notice of Audit. Licensor
shall provide Licensee with at
least five (5) calendar days
advance written notice of its
intent to exercise the
Licensor’s Audit Rights.
(ii)
Conduct of Audit. The audit
conducted by Licensor shall
consist of a physical review of
the computer hardware,
software, and middleware
operated by Licensee at its
principal business office and
any other office for which
Licensor, in its sole and
arbitrary discretion, deems an
audit appropriate. Licensee
shall provide Licensor with
unrestricted access to its
computer hardware, software,
and middleware in connection
with any audit conducted by
Licensor.
(iii)
Costs of Audit. If Licensor’s
audit uncovers a violation of
this Agreement by Licensee,
Licensee shall pay all costs
and expenses incurred by
Licensor in exercising the
Licensor Audit Rights,
including, without limitation,
all attorneys’ fees and agent
fees incurred by Licensor. If
Licensor concludes that no
violation of this License
Agreement has occurred,
Licensor shall bear all costs
and expenses incurred in
exercising the Licensor Audit
Rights. If Licensee obstructs,
restricts, or otherwise
prevents Licensor from
conducting a full and
unrestricted audit, Licensee
shall bear all costs and
expenses, including attorneys’
fees, incurred by Licensor in
enforcing this Section 2(h)
before any court or judicial
tribunal.
(iv)
(i)
(j)
terminate this Agreement and the
license granted hereunder
immediately and without an
opportunity to cure. This subsection
2(j) shall not be construed to preclude,
or in any way effect, a finding of
materiality with respect to any other
provision of this Agreement.
3. LICENSE FEE
The applicable licensee fees will be set forth
in the quote issued to Licensee by Licensor
or otherwise established in the applicable
purchase order or other ordering
documents memorializing your license
acquisition.
4. OWNERSHIP
(a)
Title. Licensee understands and
agrees that Licensor owns all
Intellectual Property Rights related to
the Software, including custom
modifications to the Software,
whether made by Licensor or any
third party. Licensee agrees that this
Agreement effects a license, not a
sale, of the Software and that the first
sale doctrine, as codified in 17 U.S.C.
§ 109, does not apply to the
transaction effected by this
Agreement.
(b)
Transfers. Under no circumstances
shall Licensee sell, license, sublicense,
publish, display, distribute, assign, or
otherwise transfer (hereinafter
referred to collectively as a “Transfer”)
to a third party the Software or any
copy thereof, in whole or in part,
without Licensor’s prior written
consent. Any Transfer effected in
violation of this Section 4(b) shall be
void ab initio and of no force or effect.
Frequency of Audits.
Licensor’s Audit Rights shall be
exercised no more than two
(2) times in any one calendar
year.
Validity of Intellectual Property
Rights. In any action, dispute,
controversy, or lawsuit arising out of
or related to this Agreement, Licensee
shall not contest the validity of
Licensor’s Intellectual Property Rights
related to the Software. Licensee
hereby agrees that it has had an
opportunity to investigate the validity
of Licensor’s Intellectual Property
Rights, and acknowledges that
Licensor’s Intellectual Property Rights
related to the Software are valid and
enforceable.
Material Terms and Conditions.
Licensee specifically agrees that each
of the terms and conditions of this
Section 2 are material and that failure
of Licensee to comply with these
terms and conditions shall constitute
sufficient cause for Licensor to
5. MAINTENANCE AND SUPPORT
Licensor may provide you with support
services related to the Software called
Product Support Plan (“PSP”) services. Use
of PSP is governed by the policies and
Licensor aware of any defect with the
Software within seven (7) days after
the occurrence of the defect; (ii)
Licensee has paid all amounts due
under this Agreement; and (iii)
Licensee has not breached any
provision of this Agreement. The
foregoing warranty does not apply in
the event that: (i) the Software and
documentation have been subject to
misuse, neglect, alteration,
modification, customization, improper
installation, and/or unauthorized
repair; (ii) the Software or any
associated software or equipment
have not been properly maintained in
accordance with applicable
specifications and industry standards
or have been maintained in unsuitable
environmental conditions; or (iii)
Licensee has used the Software in
conjunction with other equipment,
hardware, software, or other
technology that created an adverse
impact on the operation, functioning,
or performance of the Software.
programs described in the PSP literature or
other material from Licensor’s Product
Support Department (hereinafter referred
to as the “PSP Policies”) that may be
updated by Licensor from time to time. If
you select and pay for PSP, the PSP
Policies shall be specifically incorporated
into this Agreement by this reference.
Licensee acknowledges that Licensor may
use any technical information provided by
Licensee in the course of receiving PSP
services for Licensor’s business purposes,
including for product support and
development. Licensor will not utilize such
technical information in a manner that
identifies Licensee.
6. CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION
Licensee agrees that the Software contains
proprietary information, including trade
secrets, know-how and confidential
information (hereinafter referred to
collectively as the “Confidential
Information”), that is the exclusive property
of Licensor. During the period this
Agreement is in effect and at all times after
its termination, Licensee and its employees
and agents shall maintain the confidentiality
of the Confidential Information and shall not
sell, license, publish, display, distribute,
disclose or otherwise make available the
Confidential Information to any Person nor
use the Confidential Information except as
authorized by this Agreement. Licensee
shall not disclose the Confidential
Information concerning the Software,
including any flow charts, logic diagrams,
user manuals and screens, to persons not
an employee of Licensee without the prior
written consent of Licensor.
(b)
EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THIS
SECTION 7 AND TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW,
ALL EXPRESS AND/OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR
CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY,
MERCHANTABILITY OF A COMPUTER
PROGRAM, INFORMATIONAL
CONTENT, SYSTEM INTEGRATION,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, AND NONINFRINGEMENT, ARE HEREBY
DISCLAIMED AND EXCLUDED BY
LICENSOR.
(c)
The remedies set forth in this Section
7 are the exclusive remedies available
to Licensee for any problem in the
performance of the Software.
7. LIMITED WARRANTIES
(a)
Licensor warrants that the Software
will perform substantially in
accordance with its documentation for
a period of 180 days from the date of
shipment of the Software; provided,
however, that the foregoing warranty
only applies if: (i) Licensee makes
8. LIMITATIONS ON LIABILITY
(a)
(b)
Limitations and Exclusions. IN NO
EVENT WILL LICENSOR BE LIABLE
TO LICENSEE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
OTHER SPECIAL DAMAGES, LOST
PROFITS, OR LOSS OF INFORMATION
SUFFERED BY LICENSEE ARISING
OUT OF OR RELATED TO THIS
AGREEMENT OR THE USE OF THE
SOFTWARE, FOR ALL CAUSES OF
ACTION OF ANY KIND (INCLUDING
TORT, CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE,
STRICT LIABILITY, BREACH OF
WARRANTY OR CONDITION, AND
STATUTORY) EVEN IF LICENSOR HAS
BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGES. THE
PRECEDING EXCLUSION AND
DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES SHALL
APPLY TO ALL CLAIMS MADE BY
LICENSEE RELATED TO OR ARISING
OUT OF LICENSEE’s USE OF THE
SOFTWARE, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, CLAIMS ALLEGING THAT
THE SOFTWARE, OR ANY
COMPONENT THEREOF, FAILED OF
ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OR FAILED
IN SOME OTHER RESPECT.
Acknowledgment. Licensee agrees
that the limitations of liability and
disclaimers of warranty set forth in
this Agreement will apply regardless
of whether Licensor has tendered
delivery of the Software or Licensee
has accepted the Software. Licensee
acknowledges that Licensor has set its
prices and entered into this
Agreement in reliance on the
disclaimers of warranty and the
limitations and exclusions of liability
set forth in this Agreement and that
the same form an essential basis of
the bargain between the Parties.
9. TERM AND TERMINATION
(a)
Term. This Agreement shall
commence on the Effective Date and
shall continue in existence until it is
terminated in accordance with Section
9(b) below.
(b)
Termination. Licensor may
terminate this Agreement and the
license conveyed hereunder in the
event that Licensee breaches any
provision, term, condition, or
limitation set forth in this Agreement,
including but not limited to the license
restrictions set forth in Section 2(d) of
this Agreement.
(c)
Effect of Termination. Within ten
(10) days after termination of this
Agreement and the license granted
hereunder, Licensee shall return to
Licensor, at Licensee’s expense, the
Software and all copies thereof, and
deliver to Licensor a certification, in
writing signed by an officer of
Licensee, that all copies of the
Software have been returned to
Licensor and that Licensee has
discontinued its use of the Software.
10. ASSIGNMENT
Licensee shall not assign or otherwise
transfer the Software or this Agreement to
anyone, including any parent, subsidiaries,
affiliated entities or third Parties, or as
part of the sale of any portion of its
business, or pursuant to any merger,
consolidation or reorganization, without
Licensor’s prior written consent. Any
assignment or transfer effected in violation
of this Section 10 shall be void ab initio
and of no force or effect.
11. FORCE MAJEURE
Neither party shall be in default or
otherwise liable for any delay in or failure
of its performance under this Agreement if
such delay or failure arises by any reason
beyond its reasonable control, including
any act of God, any acts of the common
enemy, the elements, earthquakes, floods,
fires, epidemics, riots, failures or delay in
transportation or
communications;
provided, however, that lack of funds shall
not be deemed to be a reason beyond a
party’s reasonable control. The Parties
will promptly inform and consult with each
other as to any of the above causes that in
their judgment may or could be the cause
of a delay in the performance of this
Agreement.
12. NOTICES
All notices under this Agreement are to be
delivered by depositing the notice in the
mail, using registered mail, return receipt
requested, to the party’s last known
principal business address or to any other
address as the party may designate by
providing notice. The notice shall be
deemed delivered four (4) days after the
notice’s deposit in the mail, if such notice
has been sent by registered mail.
13. CHOICE OF LAW
This Agreement (including all Exhibits),
including its formation, execution,
interpretation, and performance, and the
rights and obligations of the Parties
hereunder, shall be governed by and
construed in accordance with the laws of
the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania,
without regard to any conflicts of law (or
choice of law) principles thereof.
14. CONSENT TO JURISDICTION
In the event that either party initiates
litigation relating to or arising out of this
Agreement, Licensor and Licensee
irrevocably submit to the exclusive
jurisdiction of the state or federal court in
or for Philadelphia, Pennsylvania for the
purposes of any suit, action or other
proceeding relating to arising out of this
Agreement or any transaction
contemplated hereby or thereby (“Legal
Proceedings”). Licensee further agree that
service of any process, summons, notice,
or document by U.S. registered mail to
such Party’s respective address shall be
effective service of process for any Legal
Proceeding. Licensor and Licensee
irrevocably and unconditionally waive any
objection to personal jurisdiction and/or
the laying of venue of any Legal
Proceeding in the state or federal court in
or for Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, and
hereby further irrevocably and
unconditionally agree not to plead, argue,
or claim in any such court that any Legal
Proceeding brought in any such court has
been brought in an inconvenient forum
and otherwise waive any and all objections
to the forum.
15. EXPORT CONTROLS
Licensee shall not export or reexport,
directly or indirectly, the Software without
complying with the export controls
imposed by the United States Export
Administration Act of 1979, as amended
(or any future U.S. export control
legislation) and the regulations
promulgated thereunder.
16. GOVERNMENT END USERS
If Licensee is acquiring the Software for or
on behalf of a subdivision of the U.S.
federal government, this Section 16 shall
apply. The Software was developed
completely at private expense, is existing
computer software, is a trade secret for all
purposes of the Freedom of Information
Act, is “restricted computer software” and
in all respects proprietary data belonging
solely to Licensor, and all rights are
reserved under the copyright laws of the
United States. Use, duplication, or
disclosure by the Government is subject to
restricted rights as set forth in
subparagraphs (a) through (d) of the
Commercial Computer Software Restricted
Rights clause at FAR 52.227-19, or for
DoD units, the restrictions as set forth in
subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in
Technical Data and Computer Software
clause at DFARS 252.227-7013.
17. TRADEMARKS
Licensee agrees that SKF @ptitude
Analyst, SKF @ptitude Inspector, SKF
@ptitude Observer, SKF @ptitude Decision
Support or any other software within the
SKF @ptitude family suite and the trade
dress, logos and other designations of
source used by Licensor to identify the
Software are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Licensor. Licensee shall not
use Licensor’s trademarks or service
marks without the prior written consent of
Licensor. If the Software contains any
active links to web sites, you agree to
maintain such active links and not redirect
or modify them.
18. GENERAL PROVISIONS
(a) Complete Agreement. The Parties
agree that this Agreement is the
complete and exclusive statement of
the agreement between the Parties,
which supersedes and merges all
prior proposals, understandings and
all other agreements, oral or written,
between the Parties relating to the
use of the Software.
(b)
(c)
Amendment. This Agreement may
not be modified, altered or amended
except by written instrument duly
executed by both Parties. Any
purchase orders or other ordering
documents issued to Licensee by
Licensor shall not have the effect of
amending or modifying this
Agreement, and shall only serve to
memorialize the number of licenses
or products ordered by Licensee. In
the event of a conflict between the
PSP Policies and this Agreement, the
terms of this Agreement shall
control.
Waiver. The waiver or failure of
either party to exercise in any respect
any right provided for in this
Agreement shall not be deemed a
waiver of any further right under this
Agreement.
(d)
Severability. If any provision of this
Agreement is invalid, illegal or
unenforceable under any applicable
statute or rule of law, it is to that
extent to be deemed omitted. The
remainder of the Agreement shall be
valid and enforceable to the
maximum extent possible.
(e)
Read and Understood. Each party
acknowledges that it has read and
understands this Agreement and
agrees to be bound by its terms.
(f)
Limitations Period. No action
arising under, or related to, this
Agreement, may be brought by
either party against the other more
than two (2) years after the cause of
action accrues, unless the cause of
action involves death or personal
injury.
(g)
Attorneys’ Fees. In the event any
litigation is brought by either party in
connection with this Agreement, the
prevailing party in such litigation will
be entitled to recover from the other
party all the costs, reasonable
attorneys’ fees, and other expenses
incurred by such prevailing party in
the litigation.
(h)
Authorized Representative. The
person installing or using the
Software on behalf of Licensee
represents and warrants that he or
she is legally authorized to bind
Licensee and commit Licensee to the
terms of this Agreement.
(i)
Injunctive Relief. Licensee agrees
that Licensor may suffer irreparable
harm as a result of a violation of
Sections 2, 4, 6, 10, 15, and 17 of
this Agreement and that monetary
damages in such event would be
substantial and inadequate to
compensate Licensor. Consequently,
Licensor shall be entitled to seek and
obtain, in addition to such other
monetary relief as may be
recoverable at law or in equity, such
injunctive other equitable relief as
may be necessary to restrain any
threatened, continuing, or further
breach by Licensee without showing
or proving actual damages sustained
by Licensor and without posting a
bond.
CM-F0176 (Revision F, January 2011)
Contents
Introduction to SKF @ptitude Analyst and
SKF Multilog On-line Systems
1-1
About This Manual ..................................................... 1-1
Definition of On-line Systems .................................. 1-2
What is the SKF @ptitude Analyst and On-line
Systems System? ................................................... 1-2
Communications ......................................................... 1-2
The Host Computer ................................................... 1-3
SKF @ptitude Analyst Software .............................. 1-3
The IMx System .......................................................... 1-5
The WMx System ....................................................... 1-8
Setting Up Your WMx Device
2-1
Overview ...................................................................... 2-1
WMx Devices Levels Overview ................................. 2-3
Device Level ................................................................ 2-7
Channels Level............................................................ 2-9
Device Diagnostic POINTs Level ............................ 2-10
Unassigned POINTs Level .......................................2-13
Device Properties .....................................................2-14
WMx Service Memory Watch .................................2-29
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst
Hierarchy
3-1
Creating a Paper Copy Hierarchy ............................ 3-1
Overview ...................................................................... 3-2
Displaying Existing SKF @ptitude Analyst for
Hierarchies in the Hierarchy Window ................. 3-3
Creating a New SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy. 3-4
Setting Your Primary Hierarchy .............................. 3-4
Inserting @ptitude Analyst Groups ......................... 3-5
Group Properties Screen .......................................... 3-5
Inserting New POINTs .............................................3-11
POINT Properties .....................................................3-12
Setup Log ..................................................................3-75
Setting Up a Control POINT ...................................3-76
POINT Setup Validation Dialog .............................. 3-78
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
TOC - 1
Multiple POINT Properties...................................... 3-80
Modify by Attribute .................................................. 3-88
Measurement Properties ........................................ 3-90
Set Baseline .............................................................. 3-91
Set Speed (Multiple) ................................................ 3-92
Calculate Derived POINTs ....................................... 3-96
Manual Archive ......................................................... 3-97
@ptitude Analyst Scheduler ................................... 3-98
Customize / Database Operations ...................... 3-104
Frequency Sets ...................................................... 3-108
Online Settings ...................................................... 3-114
Alarm Settings ....................................................... 3-138
Statistical Overall Alarms Wizard ....................... 3-152
Statistical Band Alarms Wizard .......................... 3-157
Templates ............................................................... 3-166
Working with Filters.............................................. 3-172
Customize / Derived POINTs ............................... 3-186
Canary Lab Settings ............................................. 3-190
Data Collection ROUTEs and Other Data
Transfer Operations
4-1
Overview ...................................................................... 4-1
How to Build ROUTEs ............................................... 4-1
Downloading ROUTEs to the On-line Device ........ 4-4
Automatic Data Retrieval ........................................ 4-10
Manual Data Entry ................................................... 4-12
Displaying Graphic Plots
5-1
Overview ...................................................................... 5-1
How To Display Graphic Plots .................................. 5-2
Plot Window ................................................................ 5-6
Plot Types .................................................................. 5-12
Working with Overlays ............................................ 5-36
Overlay Types ........................................................... 5-38
Live Data Displays .................................................... 5-71
Live Bar Display........................................................ 5-73
Generating and Printing SKF @ptitude
Analyst Reports
6-1
Overview ...................................................................... 6-1
Reports Window ......................................................... 6-2
Multilog DMx Machine Monitoring Module
7-1
Overview ...................................................................... 7-1
Hardware Configuration ........................................... 7-1
Configuring DMx Settings ......................................... 7-3
Creating DMx POINTs ............................................... 7-8
TOC - 2
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Viewing DMx Hierarchy Items ................................ 7-11
Working with DMx Data .......................................... 7-26
Viewing DMx Data in Plots ..................................... 7-29
Transient Data Analysis
8-1
Overview ...................................................................... 8-1
Setting up DMx Transient POINTs .......................... 8-2
Transient Hierarchy Configuration ......................... 8-5
Transient Data Collection ....................................... 8-12
Viewing Transient Data Plots ................................. 8-15
SKF @ptitude Analyst Toolbars
A-1
Toolbar Tools .............................................................. A-1
Custom Toolbars ........................................................ A-4
Event Log Redirection
B-1
Overview ...................................................................... B-1
Example ....................................................................... B-1
Data Collection Gating
C-1
Overview ...................................................................... C-1
Parametric Gating ...................................................... C-1
Logic Gating................................................................. C-2
Sensor Bias-Output-Voltage Gating ...................... C-4
Tachometer Gating .................................................... C-5
Glossary of Terms
Index
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
TOC - 3
1
Introduction to SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog
On-line Systems
About This Manual
The SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems manual describes the
operation of online and protection systems supported in @ptitude Analyst. In these
pages you will find information on the operation of the:
•
Multilog Wireless Monitoring System (WMx)
•
Multilog IMx Monitoring System (IMx)
•
Multilog DMx Machine Monitoring System (DMx)
and their @ptitude Analyst for Multilog On-line Systems features.

For the purposes of this documentation, all supported online
systems are included in the Multilog On-line Systems category.
Since all On-line features work in conjunction with standard @ptitude Analyst
operations, you should be familiar with @ptitude Analyst and its sections before using
@ptitude Analyst software.
The @ptitude Analyst and Multilog On-line Systems manual is organized as follows:
Chapter 1, Introduction - Introduces manual conventions and overviews the @ptitude
Analyst Software and the On-line Systems.
Chapter 2, Setting Up Your WMx Device – Describes how to manage your WMx
devices in @ptitude Analyst.
Chapter 3, Working With Your @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy – Describes in detail how
to organize your machinery measurement POINTs into @ptitude Analyst hierarchies,
SETs, machines, and POINTs. Also details how to establish @ptitude Analyst’s many
alarm criteria. Describes Hierarchy editing procedures using @ptitude Analyst’s
Templates, Modify by Attribute feature, and Filters.
Chapter 4, Data Collection ROUTEs and Other Data Transfer
Operations - Describes how to create @ptitude Analyst measurement collection
ROUTEs, how to download ROUTEs to the data collection devices, how to upload
measurements from the data collection devices, and how to manually enter data into
the @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy.
Chapter 5, Displaying Graphic Plots - Describes methods for displaying collected
machinery measurements in graphic plot format, and describes in detail @ptitude
Analyst’s menu options for manipulating graphic plots to obtain useful analysis data.
Chapter 6, Generating and Printing SKF @ptitude Analyst Reports - Describes in
detail how to create report templates and how to generate and print @ptitude Analyst
reports.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
1-1
Introduction to SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
Definition of On-line Systems
Chapter 7, Multilog DMx Machine Monitoring Module - Provides an overview of
@ptitude Analyst configuration for DMx Machine Monitoring System
Chapter 8, Transient Data Analysis - Describes setup and collection methods for runup and coast-down data.
Appendix A, SKF @ptitude Analyst Toolbars - Offers an overview of @ptitude
Analyst’s toolbars and details the custom toolbar creation procedure.
Appendix B, Event Log Redirection - Describes Event Log redirection codes and
terminology.
Appendix C, Data Collection Gating – Describes the data collection gating methods for
the online systems.
Definition of On-line Systems
Throughout this @ptitude Analyst manual, SKF's Multilog IMx Monitoring System,
Multilog WMx Monitoring System, and Multilog DMx Monitoring System are referred to
as SKF's On-line Systems.
References specific to the IMx Machine Monitoring System use the term IMx.
References specific to the WMx Machine Monitoring System use the term WMx.
References specific to the DMx Machine Monitoring System use the term DMx.
References that apply to the WMx, IMx, and DMx systems use the general term “on-line
device.”
Each of these systems is discussed in detail later in this introduction chapter.
What is the SKF @ptitude Analyst and On-line Systems System?
An SKF @ptitude Analyst and On-line Systems System consists of the following
components:
1.
A WMx, IMx, or DMx
2.
@ptitude IMx Service, @ptitude WMx Service, or @ptitude Analyst Monitor (for
DMx)
3.
A host computer with:
-
an Ethernet connection (for IMx or DMx) or wireless network access (for WMx)
-
the appropriate Windows OS drivers
-
@ptitude Analyst
Communications
An Ethernet (TCP / IP) connection allows you to create a network consisting of several
PCs and IMxs / DMxs. The Ethernet connection type is only available for use with IMxs
or DMxs.
1-2
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Introduction to SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
The Host Computer
•
A single PC running the @ptitude IMx Service can communicate with the IMxs and
with several additional PCs running @ptitude Analyst software via the Ethernet
connection.
•
A single PC running the @ptitude Analyst Monitor application can communicate
with the DMxs and with several additional PCs running @ptitude Analyst software
via the Ethernet connection.

A DMx does not natively talk Ethernet and must therefore rely on
a 9420 B&B Ethernet Gateway to convert from RS485 to
Ethernet.
The online devices behave like any other peripherals on the intranet (for instance, a
laser printer).
For detailed communication protocol installation information, refer to your on-line
device’s installation manual.
The Host Computer
The host computer has Microsoft Windows 7 or Windows XP Professional with Service
Pack 2+, an Intel Core 2 Duo, 2.0 GHz, 32 or 64-bit CPU (minimum Intel 1.0 GHz, 32 or
64-bit), with 4.0 GB or more of RAM (minimum 2.0 GB), and a 3 Gbyte hard disk
(minimum 1.2 Gbyte); and enough free disk space to store your @ptitude Analyst for
On-line Systems measurement Hierarchy (whose size depends on the number of
monitored measurement POINTs).
Together, the host computer and @ptitude Analyst software perform Hierarchy
management, trending, display, and reporting functions for the On-line System.
SKF @ptitude Analyst Software
The easy-to-use @ptitude Analyst software works with DADs (Data Acquisition Devices)
to assist machinery maintenance personnel in managing and analyzing their collected
data. @ptitude Analyst automatically uploads measurement data from DADs and
performs the tedious clerical work required in sorting, storing, and pre-analyzing
measurement data. Use @ptitude Analyst to easily configure measurement POINTs (a
machinery location at which measurement data is collected), for downloading
measurement POINT setups to DADs, for Hierarchy manipulation of collected data, and
to graphically display and generate reports on collected measurement data.
Exception Reports - @ptitude Analyst automatically compares current measurement
values to past measurement values, and to pre-defined alarm values to detect changes
from normal machinery conditions. Using hierarchy list alarm status indicators and
detailed printed reports, @ptitude Analyst alerts maintenance personnel to alarm
conditions (exceptions from normal conditions).
Analysis - @ptitude Analyst displays and prints various plots and reports for analyzing
machinery condition.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
1-3
Introduction to SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
SKF @ptitude Analyst Software
Figure 1 - 1.
Two Graphic Displays of an @ptitude Analyst Measurement.
Trend plots, FFT spectra (including waterfall and palogram plots), time waveforms,
polar vector plots, and other plot types are easily displayed to help determine if
machinery condition changes are occurring, and if so, to help with analyzing the cause
of machinery condition changes.
For the easiest and most effective use of the On-line System, you should:
Use @ptitude Analyst to:
•
Organize your hierarchy into SETs and machines.
•
Add measurement POINTs to these Hierarchy machines, configuring each POINT's
measurement and alarm settings as it is created.
•
Download the measurement POINTs to the On-line System.
Use the On-line System to:
•
Collect measurement data and detect alarms.
Use @ptitude Analyst to:
1-4
•
Upload the collected data to @ptitude Analyst software.
•
Run alarm detection features to quickly scan for abnormal machine conditions.
•
Generate plots and reports to analyze, trend, report, and store measurement data.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Introduction to SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
The IMx System
The IMx System
Together with SKF @ptitude Analyst software, the SKF Multilog On-line System IMx
provides a complete on-line system for early fault detection and prevention, automatic
advice for correcting existing or impending conditions, and advanced condition-based
maintenance to improve reliability, availability, and performance. @ptitude Analyst
supports four IMx units: the IMx-M, IMx-P, IMx-S, and IMx-T.
The IMx-M
The SKF Multilog On-line System IMx-M is a powerful, cost effective solution for a
variety of machinery monitoring applications. Together, with SKF @ptitude Analyst, the
IMx-M can provide a complete system for initiation of machinery shutdown, early fault
detection, and diagnosis. In addition, the SKF Multilog On-line IMx-M system provides
automated advice for correcting existing or impending conditions which can affect
machine reliability, availability, and performance. Each SKF Multilog IMx-M is equipped
with four cards: up to 64 analog inputs (dynamic and static), 32 digital / speed inputs,
and 96 relay outputs.
The IMx-P
The SKF Multilog On-line System IMx-P is portable and battery powered with a battery
life of approximately four hours in continuous operation (mains powered). The 16
analog signal inputs are configurable for a wide variety of sensors. Signals such as
acceleration, velocity, and displacement or other parameters are easily adopted. In
addition to the analog channels, eight digital channels may be used for measuring
speed, trigger, or digital status (for example, indicating when a measurement can take
place).
The SKF Multilog IMx-P can be used as a trouble-shooting device or as part of a
condition monitoring system with several units together in a network. The system can
also run in an existing LAN together with other computers, printers, servers, etc., or
over the internet. The unit’s unique built-in “hardware auto-diagnosis system”
continuously checks all sensors, cabling and electronics for any faults, signal
interruption, or power failure. Any malfunction triggers an alarm. If the main voltage
fails or for some reason is disconnected, the battery power automatically takes over. In
the case of system power failure, the system will automatically restart when the power
returns.
The IMx-S
SKF Multilog On-line System IMx-S is a key component in an advanced condition
monitoring system. It is a robust measurement unit designed for tough industrial
environments. Each SKF Multilog IMx-S is equipped with 16 analog signal inputs and
the SKF Multilog IMx-S 32 with 32 analogue signal inputs. The dynamic signal inputs
are configurable for a variety of sensors. Signals such as acceleration, velocity and
displacement or other parameters are easily adopted. Each input can be configured for
standard accelerometers, proximity probes, 4–20 mA or ±25 V.
In addition to the analogue channels, 8 digital channels on the SKF Multilog IMx-S 16
and 16 digital channels on the SKF Multilog IMx-S 32 may be used for measuring
speed, trigger or digital status (e.g., indicating when a measurement can take place).
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
1-5
Introduction to SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
The IMx System
Several measurement points may be attached to one channel and both AC and DC
measurements can be measured on the same channel. Individual conditions for
warning and alarm may be set for each point. Warning and alarm levels may be
controlled by machine speed or load.
The SKF Multilog IMx-S works as a machine condition monitoring system with several
other units together in a network with SKF @ptitude Analyst. The system can run in an
existing LAN together with other computers, printers, servers, etc., or over the Internet.
The unit’s unique built-in hardware auto-diagnosis system continuously checks all
sensors, cabling and electronics for any faults, signal interruption, or power failure and
any malfunctions triggers an alarm. In the case of system power failure, the system will
automatically restart when the power returns.
The IMx-T
SKF Multilog On-line System IMx-T is a key component in an advanced condition
monitoring system. Designed to fit into a 19” rack enclosure, the Multilog IMx-T is
equipped with 16-64 analogue signal inputs. The dynamic signal inputs are
configurable for a wide variety of sensors. Signals such as acceleration, velocity and
displacement or other parameters are easily adopted. Each input can be configured for
ICP (accelerometers), 4-20 mA or ± 25 V.
In addition to the analogue channels, 8-32 digital channels may be used for measuring
speed, trigger or digital status (e.g., indicating when a measurement can take place).
Several measurement points may be attached to one channel and both AC and DC
measurements can be measured on the same channel. Individual conditions for
warning and alarm may be set for each point. Warning and alarm levels may be
controlled by machine speed or load.
The Multilog IMx-T works as a machine condition monitoring system with several other
units together in a network with SKF @ptitude Analyst. The system can also run in an
existing LAN together with other computers, printers, servers, etc., or over the Internet.
The unit’s unique built-in hardware auto-diagnosis system continuously checks all
sensors, cabling and electronics for any faults, signal interruption, or power failure. Any
malfunction triggers an alarm. In the case of system power failure, the system will
automatically restart when the power returns.
1-6
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Introduction to SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
The IMx System
Figure 1 - 2.
Example of a Condition Monitoring System.
In the figure above, IMx units are connected using @ptitude LAN to @ptitude IMx
Service. @ptitude IMx Service is also connected to a LAN network. Several @ptitude
Analyst clients may be connected to this network. It is also possible to connect different
types of on-line devices in the same network, for example an IMx and WMx.
To set up your IMx system for data collection:
•
Install the IMx hardware. Reference your IMx Hardware User Manual for details.
•
Identify the computer to run the SKF @ptitude IMx Service. You will need this
information for the following step.
•
Run SKF IMx Configurator. Identify the IP addresses for the IMx and the computer
running IMx Service. You may need to contact your IT administrator to obtain IP
address information.

•
Run the SKF @ptitude Analyst Configuration Tool to add an IMx Service to the
system. This step is necessary for setting up IMx devices in @ptitude Analyst. You
may add multiple services on the same computer.

•
Reference the SKF IMx Configurator manual for details.
Reference the SKF @ptitude Analyst Configuration Tool manual
for details.
In @ptitude Analyst, set up your IMx devices, channels, and POINTs. Create
measurement ROUTEs and download measurement data to the IMx.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
1-7
Introduction to SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
The WMx System
Transaction Service
SKF Transaction Service is a support application that runs in the “background.” It is
responsible for processing data received from the IMx, handling communication
between @ptitude Analyst and IMx Service, and deleting POINTs on the IMx. SKF
Transaction Service can also handle communication between @ptitude Analyst and
@ptitude Analyst Monitor in an IMx system where data coming from the IMx is archived.
IMx Service
SKF Multilog IMx Service is also a support application that runs in the “background,”
similar to @ptitude Analyst Monitor for the DMx.
Each IMx Service communicates with a set of IMxs. It is responsible for communicating
with IMx devices, for processing data from IMxs and storing the data to the database.
IMx Service uses the Transaction Service to report status information to @ptitude
Analyst.
The WMx System
Together with SKF @ptitude Analyst software, the SKF Multilog On-line System WMx
provides a complete on-line system for early fault detection and prevention, automatic
advice for correcting existing or impending conditions, and advanced condition-based
maintenance to improve reliability, availability, and performance.
The WMx unit is a compact, eight-channel, temporarily / permanently mounted, battery
powered on-line data acquisition unit that communicates using your existing wireless
network. It is ideal for monitoring machines in areas that are inaccessible, difficult or
dangerous to reach, or where it would be expensive or hazardous to install cables.
Figure 1 - 3.
WMx Network Overview.
1-8
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Introduction to SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
The WMx System
To set up your WMx system for data collection:
•
Install the WMx hardware. Reference your WMx Hardware User Manual for details.
•
Identify the computer to run the SKF @ptitude WMx Service. You will need this
information for the following step.
•
Connect the WMx to the host computer using the supplied USB cable, and run the
SKF Wireless Configuration Utility from the SKF @ptitude Analyst DVD’s Tools /
WMx folder to set up the network configuration. Reference your WMx Hardware
User Manual for details.
•

You may download the Wireless Configuration Utility from the
SKF website. Select SKF Multilog WMx Series.

(Windows XP users only) The WMx USB device drivers are
automatically installed when you install the WMx Configuration
Utility or SKF @ptitude Analyst. For proper USB driver
installation, you must connect and power on the WMx device
before installing the software. When the Windows XP Found
New Hardware Wizard displays, click Cancel. If the WMx device
is not available at the time of software installation, you must
reinstall the device drivers when you first connect and power on
the WMx. When the Windows XP Found New Hardware Wizard
displays, proceed through the wizard to reinstall the drivers from
SKF @ptitude Analyst DVD’s Tools / WMx / WMx USB Drivers
folder.
Run the SKF @ptitude Analyst Configuration Tool to add a WMx Service to the
system. This step is necessary for setting up WMx devices in @ptitude Analyst.
You may only add one service on a computer.

•
Reference the SKF @ptitude Analyst Installation manual for
details.
In @ptitude Analyst, set up your WMx devices, channels, and POINTs.
Transaction Service
SKF Transaction Service is a support application that runs in the “background.” It is
responsible for processing data received from the WMx, handling communication
between @ptitude Analyst and WMx Service, and deleting POINTs on the WMx. SKF
Transaction Service can also handle communication between @ptitude Analyst and
@ptitude Analyst Monitor in a WMx system where data coming from the WMx is
archived.
WMx Service
SKF Multilog WMx Service is also a support application that runs in the “background,”
similar to @ptitude Analyst Monitor for the DMx.
Each WMx Service communicates with a set of WMxs. It is responsible for
communicating with WMx devices, for processing data from WMxs and storing the data
to the database. WMx Service uses the Transaction Service to report status information
to @ptitude Analyst.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
1-9
2
Setting Up Your WMx Device
Management of your WMx devices takes place from the View menu’s WMx Device
screen.
Overview
The WMx Device screen displays all WMx devices currently connected to @ptitude
Analyst, and allows you to edit WMx device settings and channel settings.

To configure a new device’s network connection settings, use the
@ptitude Analyst Configuration Tool’s WMx Service screen.
To open the WMx Device screen:
•
Click the View menu’s WMx Device… option. The WMx Device screen displays.
The WMx Device screen is divided into two panes. The left pane is set up in a
hierarchical structure, displaying each device, and each device’s assigned channels,
diagnostic POINTs, and Unassigned POINTs. The right pane displays information for the
item that is selected in the left pane. Each hierarchy level is detailed in the sections that
follow.
Figure 2 - 1.
The WMx Device Screen.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
2-1
Setting Up Your WMx Device
Overview
Fields include:
Select items to view – Displays each connected WMx and its assigned channels and
POINTs in a hierarchical structure. Click an item to display its information in the right
panel.
Filter – Select None, By bad channel, or By name from the Filter drop-down list to
filter the items that display in the left pane.
None – All items display in the standard hierarchical structure.
By bad channel – Only those channels which have collected BOV out of range
data display in the left pane.
By name – Enter the name of the item(s) you wish to display in the left pane.
Refresh – Click to refresh the view.
Print – Click to print a summary of the right panel view.
Edit – Click to display the Device Properties screen and modify device and channel
settings.
Add – Click to display the Device Properties screen and add a new WMx device to
@ptitude Analyst.

Adding a device allows you to set up and assign POINTs to the
device before it is online. The device must still be registered
through the WMx Service before it can communicate with the
@ptitude Analyst software.
Remove – Click to remove the selected device. When you remove a device from
@ptitude Analyst, the device is automatically powered down. Select Yes or No when
prompted to continue with the removal.

When you remove a device from @ptitude Analyst, you should
physically disconnect the device. Otherwise, the next time you
connect to the WMx Service, the device will reappear in @ptitude
Analyst.
Disable – Click to disable data collection for the selected device. You are prompted to
power down the device. Select Yes, No, or Cancel.
Yes – Disable and power down the device.
No – Disable data collection only.
Cancel – Abort disabling the device.
Close – Click to exit the WMx Device screen.
2-2
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Setting Up Your WMx Device
WMx Devices Levels Overview
WMx Devices Levels Overview
When the WMx Devices level is selected in the left pane, the right pane displays three
tabs – WMx Devices, Battery Status, and Network.
Figure 2 - 2.
The WMx Device Screen’s WMx Devices Tab.
WMx Devices Tab
The WMx Devices tab displays a list of WMxs currently connected to @ptitude Analyst.
The name of the device, MAC address, device type (WMx / WVT), device IP address, last
wakeup time, and next scheduled wakeup time display. You may edit currently
connected devices, remove / disable currently connected devices, or add a new device to
@ptitude Analyst.
To edit a device:
•
Select a device from the Devices list.
•
Click the Edit button. The Device Properties screen displays.
•
Click the Device Setup and Channels tabs and edit as necessary.

Reference the Device Properties section later in this chapter for
details.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
2-3
Setting Up Your WMx Device
WMx Devices Levels Overview
To add a new WMx device:
•
Click the Add button. The Device Properties screen displays.
•
Click the Device Setup or Channels tabs and edit as necessary.

Reference the Device Properties section later in this chapter for
details.
To remove a device:
•
Select a device from the Devices list.
•
Click the Remove button. A message displays, informing you that the device is
automatically powered down upon removal.
Figure 2 - 3.
Continue with removal prompt.
•
Click Yes or No when prompted to continue with the removal.
To disable a device:
•
Select a device from the Devices list.
•
Click the Disable button. A message displays, asking if you wish to power down the
device.
Figure 2 - 4.
Continue with disable prompt.
•
2-4
Click Yes or No when prompted to continue with the disable.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Setting Up Your WMx Device
WMx Devices Levels Overview
Battery Status Tab
The Battery Status tab displays the battery / power status for each connected WMx
device.
Figure 2 - 5.
The WMx Device Screen’s Battery Status Tab.
To edit a device’s battery information:
•
Select a device from the Devices list.
•
Click the Edit button. The Device Properties screen displays.
•
Click the Device Setup tabs and edit the Battery information area as necessary.

Reference the Device Properties section later in this chapter for
details.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
2-5
Setting Up Your WMx Device
WMx Devices Levels Overview
Network Tab
The Network tab displays the network connection and diagnostic information for each
connected device.
Figure 2 - 6.
The WMx Device Screen’s Network Tab.

WMx network information is read-only in @ptitude Analyst’s WMx
Device screen. To modify your network settings reference the
SKF @ptitude Analyst Installation Manual for details.
To view more network information details:
•
Select a device from the Devices list.
•
Click the Edit button. The Device Properties screen displays.
•
Click the Network Info tab.

2-6
Reference the Device Properties section later in this chapter for
details.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Setting Up Your WMx Device
Device Level
Device Level
When you select a device from the left pane, the right pane displays two tabs – Device
Info and Channels.
Figure 2 - 7.
The WMx Device Screen’s Device Info Tab.
Device Info Tab
The Device Info tab displays a summary of the selected device’s settings, wakeup,
battery, network, and diagnostic information.
To edit the selected device’s settings:
•
Click the Edit button. The Device Properties screen displays.
•
Click the Device Setup tab and edit as necessary.

Reference the Device Properties section later in this chapter for
details.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
2-7
Setting Up Your WMx Device
Device Level
Channels Tab
The Channels tab displays a summary of the channels assigned to the selected device.
Figure 2 - 8.
The WMx Device Screen’s Channels Tab.
To edit the selected device’s channels:
•
Select a device from the Devices list.
•
Click the Edit button. The Device Properties screen displays.
•
Click the Channels tab and edit as necessary.

2-8
Reference the Device Properties section later in this chapter for
details.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Setting Up Your WMx Device
Channels Level
Channels Level
When you select the Channels hierarchy item or a specific channel in the left pane, the
right pane displays a summary of the channel settings.
Channels Tab
If you select the Channels hierarchy item, the Channels tab displays. Reference the
Device Level / Channels Tab section above for details.
Channel Info Tab
If you select a specific channel hierarchy item, the Channel Info tab displays a summary
of the selected channels information.
Figure 2 - 9.
The WMx Device Screen’s Channel Info Tab.

The Channel Info tab is a read-only tab and the Edit button is
not available. To modify the selected channels settings, reference
the Device Level / Channels Tab section above.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
2-9
Setting Up Your WMx Device
Device Diagnostic POINTs Level
Device Diagnostic POINTs Level
Device Diagnostic POINTs are used to trend the WMx battery status and wireless
connection performance parameters. The diagnostic POINTs assigned to the device
display below the Device Diagnostic POINTs hierarchy item.

Diagnostic POINTs are created and assigned to a WMx device
using the Insert menu’s Insert POINT option. Reference Chapter
3, Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy for
details on inserting new POINTs.
Figure 2 - 10.
The WMx Device Screen’s Device Diagnostic POINT’s POINT Info Tab.

2 - 10
For the battery diagnostic POINT level alarm, there are many
factors that affect battery life. Two main influential factors are
how long the WMx has to stay on to collect a set of
measurements, and how often the measurements are collected.
Both vary from site to site. To determine a baseline, it is
recommended that you set up a typical route and run the WMx
with your typical collection schedule until the batteries are
completely depleted. Then use the trended battery level to set up
your site specific alert and danger alarm levels. When the battery
is below critical level (which may be above 0% battery level), no
more measurements will be collected and a “battery level below
critical” message is entered in the @ptitude Analyst Event Log.
Reference the Battery Life Estimation and Optimization section
in your WMx Hardware User Manual for more details.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Setting Up Your WMx Device
Device Diagnostic POINTs Level

For the wireless link, signal, and noise POINT level alarms, you
must first establish baseline readings for a working Wi-Fi
connection, and then adjust the alert and danger alarm threshold
levels.
POINT Info Tab
When you select a diagnostic POINT the POINT Info tab displays, allowing you to view
details and edit settings for the selected diagnostic POINT.
To edit a diagnostic POINT’s settings:
•
Select the diagnostic POINT you wish to modify.
•
Click the Edit button. The selected diagnostic POINT’s POINT Properties screen
displays.
•
Make any necessary changes to the POINT’s settings. Reference Chapter 3,
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy for details on the POINT
Properties screen.
•
Click OK when you are finished editing the diagnostic POINT’s settings.
To locate the diagnostic POINT in the @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy:
•
Select the diagnostic POINT you wish to locate.
•
Click the To Hierarchy button. The WMx Device screen closes and the diagnostic
POINT is highlighted in the @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy.
Diagnostic POINT Overview
Four diagnostic POINT types are available for trending battery level and wireless
network parameters:
Battery Level
Wireless Link
Wireless Signal
Wireless Noise
Battery Level - Trends the remaining battery life in % for lower out-of-window alarm
thresholds.
There are many factors that affect battery life. Two of them are, how long the WMx has
to stay on collecting the measurements, and how often the measurements are
collected. Both vary from site to site. To determine a baseline, it is recommended that
you set up a typical route and run the WMx with your typical collection schedule until
the batteries are completely depleted. Then use the trended battery level to set up your
site specific alert and danger alarm levels.
When the battery is below critical level (which may be above 0% battery level), no more
measurement will be collected and a “battery level below critical” message is entered in
the @ptitude Analyst event log.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
2 - 11
Setting Up Your WMx Device
Device Diagnostic POINTs Level
Wireless Link – Percentage that trends the Wi-Fi overall link quality with lower out-ofwindow alarm thresholds. Higher percentages indicate stronger links.
Wireless Signal - Trends the Wi-Fi signal level in dBm with lower out-of-window
alarm thresholds.
Wireless Noise - Trends the noise level in dBm with upper out-of-window alarm
thresholds.

Although the diagnostic POINTs are created under the channel
node in the hierarchy, they are system parameters. Only one of
each POINT type is needed for each WMx.

You must first establish baseline readings for a working Wi-Fi
connection, and then adjust the alert and danger alarm threshold
levels.
For your reference, the following table describes wireless parameters in a typical office
environment with reliable connections.
2 - 12
Distance from axis point
Link quality
Signal level - dBm
Noise level - dBm
10 m (30 ft)
60
-50
-85
13 m (40 ft)
45
-60
-85
30 m (100 ft)
25
-70
-85
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Setting Up Your WMx Device
Unassigned POINTs Level
Unassigned POINTs Level
Unassigned POINTs are POINTs that have been assigned to device but not to one of
the device’s channels.
Figure 2 - 11.
The WMx Device Screen’s Unassigned POINT’s POINT Info Tab.
POINT Info Tab
When you select an UnassignedPOINT the POINT Info tab displays, allowing you to view
edit settings for the selected unassigned POINT. For example, you may wish to assign
channels to the unassigned POINT from this screen.
To edit an unassigned POINT’s settings:
•
Select the unassigned POINT you wish to modify.
•
Click the Edit button. The selected unassigned POINT’s POINT Properties screen
displays.
•
Make any necessary changes to the POINT’s settings. Reference Chapter 3,
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy for details on the POINT
Properties screen.
•
Click OK when you are finished editing the unassigned POINT’s settings.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
2 - 13
Setting Up Your WMx Device
Device Properties
To locate the unassigned POINT in the @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy:
•
Select the unassigned POINT you wish to locate.
•
Click the To Hierarchy button. The WMx Device screen closes and the unassigned
POINT is highlighted in the @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy.
Device Properties
The Device Properties screen allows you modify the selected device’s settings, view the
device’s network information, and modify its channel settings.
To open the Device Properties screen, click the Edit button from the WMx Device
screen.
Figure 2 - 12.
The Device Properties Screen’s Device Setup Tab.
Depending on the level from which the Device Properties screen is launched, up to three
tabs display – Device Setup, Network Info, and Channels.
2 - 14
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Setting Up Your WMx Device
Device Properties
Device Setup tab
The Device Setup tab allows you to edit the WMx device’s settings.
Fields include:
Device Information area
MAC address – Enter the MAC address of the physical device. The MAC address can be
found on the device’s packaging.
No MAC address – Enable if you do not yet have the MAC address. This would allow
the user to create a new device, channel configuration, and POINT assignments.
Swap button – Click to replace the selected device with a new device, but still retain the
channel configuration and POINT assignments for both devices, without the user having
to recreate the channel configuration / POINT assignments for the new device. The
Swap Device dialog displays a list of devices available for swapping. Select the new
device and click OK.

Devices can not be downgraded. For example, you cannot swap
device channel configuration and POINT assignments from a
device with 16 MB of memory to a device with 8 MB of memory;
also you cannot swap device channel configuration and POINT
assignments from a WMx to a WVT.
Device name – Enter a unique name to identify the device.
Device Type – Displays the device type (WMx or WVT). This field is only editable for
new devices.
Service Name – Select the WMx Service name that the device uses to connect to
@ptitude Analyst from the drop-down list.
Memory Size – Displays the device’s memory size. This field is only editable for new
devices.
Location – Enter the physical location of the device.
Update PCB: (read-only) – Displays the device’s PCB information.
SKF Part No.
PCB
Memory
size
Features
CMWA WVT
ICON0603
8 MB
Obsolete, limited functionality
CMWA 7810
0703E
8 MB
Full functionality with original
resolution for the enveloped
measurements
CMWA 7810
0703E
16 MB
Expanded memory, full
functionality, improved enveloped
POINT resolution.

Reference the WMx POINTs’ End Frequency and Lines
Validation for 8 MB WMx devices and enveloped POINTs and
16 MB WMx devices and enveloped POINTs tables in Chapter 3
- Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy / Setup
Tab – WMx POINTs section.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
2 - 15
Setting Up Your WMx Device
Device Properties
Firmware version – (read-only) Displays the device’s current WMx firmware version.
Protocol version – (read-only) Displays the device’s current protocol version.
Time zone – Select the time zone of the device’s physical location from the drop-down
list.
Wakeup Information area
Timeout – Specify how long the WMx should remain idle while waiting for commands
from the WMx Communication Service before going back to sleep.
Timout enabled – Disable if you do not wish to use the network timeout.
Wakeup interval – Specify the amount of time between wakeups.

At wakeup, the unit has a limit on the time that it remains
powered up if it is unable to make contact with the network. This
reduces battery drain when, for example, the network is
temporarily down. If the unit wakes up and is unable to establish
communication with its network it attempts to retry to connect.
Reference the Retry Strategy section later in this chapter for
details.
Wakeup enabled – Allows you to switch between WakeUp Mode and Contintuous
mode.
•
Check this box to enable WakeUp Mode.
WakeUp Mode is when the WMx automatically takes measurements on a specified
schedule. The wakeup schedule is set using the Wakeup Interval and Wakeup Sync
Time fields on the Device Setup tab. This tells the unit at what time it should take data
for the first time followed by the interval at which repetitive data collection should occur.
•
Unchecked to enable Continuous Mode.
In Continuous Mode, the device does not follow a wakeup schedule. If the device’s ON /
OFF button is switched to OFF, it will not wakeup until the device is switched ON again
by pressing the ON / OFF button on the device.
The WMx can also power down automatically in Continuous Mode if the WMx loses
connection with the host computer and no command has been received from the host
computer within the timeout period specified in the Timeout field described above. If
this happens, you must press the ON / OFF button to manually restart the device.
Wakeup sync time – It is possible to synchronize the wake-up to a particular time
using these fields. For example, if Wakeup sync time is set to a time of 15:00, Wakeup
interval is set to two hours, and the time now is 17:00, then the unit will wake up at
17:15 (13:15, 15:15, 17:15, etc.) and every two hours thereafter. This value is used
the first time you use the WMx.

2 - 16
For systems with a large number of WMxs, it is helpful to stagger
the synchronization of each unit by at least two minutes. This
prevents all of the units from waking up together and all trying to
connect to the host computer simultaneously, causing potential
memory issues. Battery life is optimized if WMxs do not need to
wait to be serviced by the host.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Setting Up Your WMx Device
Device Properties
Last wakeup time – Displays the date and time of the last wakeup.
Next wakeup time – Displays the time of the next scheduled wakeup.
Power down between measurements – This mode is the only mode available when
the WMx is battery powered, in order to conserve battery power. It is also available
when the WMx is externally powered. The WMx powers down between measurements;
therefore, any schedule changes are not effective until the next scheduled wake up
time. When the unit is switched off, a real-time clock remains running that is used to
power the unit up at pre-determined intervals.
Remain on between measurements - This mode is available only when the WMx is
externally powered. After the WMx has completed taking measurements, it stays on
and waits for the next scheduled interval to take the next round of measurements. It
continues to listen between measurements, and immediately acts on any received
commands. The WMx is more responsive to schedule changes in this mode. This is the
recommended mode for an externally powered WMx.
Battery Information area
Battery alarm level – Specify a low battery life percentage to trigger a low battery
event in the Event Log. For example, if set to 20%, when the remaining battery life
reaches 20%, an event is initiated.
Battery level – (read-only) Displays the percentage of remaining battery run-time.
External power – (read-only) Displays Yes if powered by external power or No if
powered by battery.
•
Click OK to apply any changes and return to the WMx Device screen.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
2 - 17
Setting Up Your WMx Device
Device Properties
Network Info tab
The Network Info tab displays the device’s network connection information and
network diagnostic information.

The information on this screen is read-only. To make changes to
the network information, reference the SKF @ptitude Analyst
Installation Manual for details.
Figure 2 - 13.
The Device Properties Screen’s Network Info Tab.
Fields include:
Network information area
Host IP – Displays the host computer’s IP address.
Host Port – Displays the host computer’s host port.
DHCP enable – Displays Yes or No, dependin on if the device is using a dynamic IP
address.
Gateway IP – Displays the device’s gateway IP address.
2 - 18
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Setting Up Your WMx Device
Device Properties
Device IP – Displays the device’s IP address.
Subnet – Displays the device’s subnet mask address.
Wireless mode – Displays the type of wireless network being used (Ad-hoc for peer-topeer or Structured Network if an access point is used).
Wireless channels – Displays the wireless channel being used.
SSID – Displays the wireless network name.
Encryption type – Displays the encryption type (Disabled (None), WEP 64 bit, WEP 128
bit, WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES), WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES).
Wireless card – Displays the model name of the wireless card.
Diagnostic information area (read-only)
Link quality – Displays the current quality of the link to the network (0 to 100 %).
Noise level – Displays the current noise level (0 to -255 dBm). The lower the number,
the lower the noise is; therefore, the closer to zero, the higher the noise level is.
Wi-Fi signal level – Displays the current Wireless Network signal quality (0 to -255
dBm). The closer to zero, the stronger the received signal is. The lower the number,
the weaker the received signal is.
Last updated – Displays a date/time stamp of the device’s last wakeup.
•
Click OK to apply any changes and return to the WMx Device screen.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
2 - 19
Setting Up Your WMx Device
Device Properties
Channels tab
The Channels tab allows you to view and edit the device’s channel settings.
Figure 2 - 14.
The Device Properties Screen’s Channels Tab.
Fields include:
Units system – Select the system units (English or Metric) to use on this tab.
Channels – Displays a list of the channels assigned to the device. The name, status
(enabled / disabled), sensor type, sensitivity, units, and BOV status display for each
channel.
Properties area – When a channel is selected in the Channels list, the channel
properties display for editing purposes. Edit the following fields to make changes to a
channel’s settings:
Channel enabled – Click the Channel Enabled checkbox to enable a channel
on the WMx. If the channel is disabled, the WMx skips the POINTs assigned to
that channel during data collection.
Channel name – Assign the channel a unique name.
2 - 20
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Setting Up Your WMx Device
Device Properties
Sensor type – Specify the type of sensor used by the selected channel
(Accelerometer, Displacement Probe, Velocity Sensor, DC, and Tach).
Sensitivity - Enter a value for the sensitivity of the sensor to be used in
making the measurement.
Check sensor ok status - Click to enable this option. When enabled, @ptitude
Analyst will check the sensor status, and will display the sensor status in
Device status and Online Data View dialogs. If data is outside specified range,
the WMx does not collect the data.
Lower BOV – Type in the BOV upper limit value.
Upper BOV – Type in the BOV lower limit value.
Offset - Enter a value in milivolts to offset the zero point of the measurement.
Click the Autoset button to adjust the sensitivity and offset calculation using
the Offset Calculator. The Offset Calculator allows you to set the sensitivity
and offset values for scaling the WMx process input from channels 5 to 8 using
two signal levels and their corresponding engineering units.
The calculator uses simple algebra to calculate the Sensitivity (slope) and the
Offset (Y-intercept of a linear sensor curve).
POINT1 / POINT2 – Enter the Engineering Unit (X) from the sensor (i.e., °C,
°F, etc.) and the corresponding Signal level (Y) in mV for both points from a
sensor curve (X1, Y1 / X2, Y2). The calculator uses the following equation:
Sensitivity = (Y2 - Y1) / (X2 - X1)
Offset = Y1 - X1 * sensitivity
For example, MSS2100T temperature range is from 2 to 120 °C and
10 mV / °C in the 0-3 VDC range:
For setting up the input temperature in °C,
(POINT1) at signal = 20 mV, the temperature = 2 °C
(POINT2) at signal = 1200 mV, the temperature = 120 °C
Figure 2 - 15.
The Offset Calculator Dialog in °C.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
2 - 21
Setting Up Your WMx Device
Device Properties
Sensitivity = (1200 – 20) / (120 – 2) = 10 mV / °C
Offset = 20 mV – 2 °C * 10 mV / °C = 0 mV
For setting up the input temperature in degF,
(POINT1) at signal = 20 mV, the temperature = 35.6 °F
(POINT2) at signal = 1200 mV, the temperature = 248 °F
Figure 2 - 16.
The Offset Calculator Dialog in °F.
Sensitivity = ( 1200 – 20 ) / (248 – 35.6 ) = 5.56 mV / °C
Offset = 20 mV – 35.6 °C * 5.56 mV / °C = -177.9 mV
•
Click OK to accept the calculated values and return to the Channels tab. The
Sensitivity and Offset fields automatically update to reflect the calculated values.
Range – Select 0-3 V, 0-10 V, or 4-20 mA input range from the drop down
list. Input range must match the hardware’s range jumper setting.

For details on jumper settings, reference the SKF Multilog Online System WMx CMWA 7810 User Manual’s Jumper
Summary section in Chapter 2.
Sensor notes – Type in any additional information you would like to store with
the selected sensor settings.
To edit channel properties:
•
Select the channel you wish to edit from the Channels list.
•
In the Properties area, edit channel name, enable / disable the channel, and edit
the sensor information.

•
2 - 22
When you start to edit a field in the Properties area, the
Channels list turns gray, allowing you to only make changes to
the selected channel. Also, the Save and Undo buttons become
available.
To cancel changes to the selected channel, click Undo.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Setting Up Your WMx Device
Device Properties
•
When you have finished editing the channel properties, click Save to save your
changes.
•
Use the Copy / Paste function to copy the selected channel’s properties and paste
to another channel. To copy channel properties to multiple channels, select the
Number checkbox of each channel, then click Paste.
•
Click OK to apply any changes and return to the WMx Device screen.
Retry Strategy for WMx versions 1.1.22 or older and WVT
At wakeup, the unit has a limit on the time that it remains powered up if it is unable to
make contact with the network. This reduces battery drain when, for example, the
network is temporarily down. If the unit wakes up and is unable to establish
communication with its network, the sequence of retries occurs as per the table below:
Wakeup
Interval
Retry Strategy
One hour or
less
The WMx unit tries to connect six times when it wakes up (for
five seconds each time), then powers down and waits for next
wakeup interval. If no connection is made after three interval
periods, then a six hour wait is inserted. Powering of the unit
manually restores the scheduled interval timing.
Between one
hour and 24
hours
The WMx unit tries to connect six times when it wakes up (for
five seconds each time), then powers down. It then powers up
twice five minutes apart. If no connection is established, it
waits for next wakeup interval.
If the WMx is disconnected during continuous mode, it will shut down after the network
timer times out and will stay off until it is manually powered up.
If the WMx is disconnected during the “remain on between measurements” mode, it will
stay on and remain disconnected untill it is manually powered off and then powered
back on. It will then try to reconnect.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
2 - 23
Setting Up Your WMx Device
Device Properties
Retry Strategy for WMx version 1.1.25
The retry strategy in version 1.1.25 has been improved from the previous version.
WMx Mode
Power Up or Wake up
Communication Interrupted
Power Down
Between
Measurements
The WMx tries to connect to the WMx Service
for 40 seconds, then powers down for up to 3
minutes (see note 1 below for next retry time
calculation). It then wakes up to retry for
another 40 seconds. If no connection is
established, it will shut down until the next
scheduled wakeup time.
After the network timer times out, the
WMx runs the wakeup retry strategy. If
no connection is established, it shuts
down until the next scheduled wakeup
time.
Remain On
Between
Measurements,
or in Continuous
Mode
The WMx continues to try to connect to the
WMx Service. It resets after the network
timer times out and continues to try after the
reset. It continues to repeat the cycle until
connection is established.
It resets after the network timer times
out and continues to try after the reset.
It continues to repeat the cycle until
connection is established.
Note 1: The next retry time is calculated by rounding up to the minute, then adding two
minutes.
2 - 24
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Setting Up Your WMx Device
Device Properties
New retry strategy examples
Power down between measurements
Wake-Up
This example shows the execution of the new retry strategy using a WMx scheduled to
wake up at 15 minute intervals. In this example, The WMx woke up at 14:45:10 and
tried to connect. It tried for 40 seconds and shut down at 14:45:53. To calculate the
next retry time, it rounded the current time up to 14:46, and added two minutes to
14:48. At 14:48:10, it woke up to retry. After trying for 40 seconds, it shut down at
14:48:53. The next wake up time is 14:45 + 15 minutes equaling 15:00 hours.
Figure 2 - 17.
Previous Example Shown in the WMx Configuration Utility’s Communication Log.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
2 - 25
Setting Up Your WMx Device
Device Properties
Interrupted communication
In the example below, the WMx network watchdog was set at five minutes, and the
wake up schedule was a 15 minute interval. The WMx was connected and
communicating but was interrupted at 10:20:20. Since it did not receive any further
commands from the WMx Service, the network watchdog timeout expired five minutes
later, at 10:25:34 and shut down. Before it shut down, it calculated the next retry time
according to Note 1 (rounded the current time up to the next minute and added two
minutes) to 10:28. It woke up at 10:28:11 to retry for 40 seconds and finally shut
down again at 10:28:52, with the next wake up time scheduled for 10:30.
Figure 2 - 18.
Previous Example Shown in the WMx Configuration Utility’s Communication Log.
2 - 26
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Setting Up Your WMx Device
Device Properties
WMx in “Remain on between Measurements” or “Continuous Mode”
Manually Powered Up
In this example, the WMx’s network watchdog timer was set at five minutes. After it
was manually powered up, it was unable to connect to the WMx Service. It continued to
try, and reset five minutes later at 16:36:32. After the reset, it continued to try to
connect.
Figure 2 - 19.
Previous Example Shown in the WMx Configuration Utility’s Communication Log.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
2 - 27
Setting Up Your WMx Device
Device Properties
Interrupted communication
In the “Remain On Between Measurements” mode, the WMx Service sends a probe
command (PB) every minute to refresh the network watchdog timer. In the event the
network is disconnected, the WMx will reset after the watchdog expires and then try to
reconnect.
In the example below, the WMx’s network watchdog was set at five minutes. It
completed a scheduled measurement at 15:00:05 and went into idle. The WMx Service
sent a PB command every minute to keep the watchdog from resetting. There was a
network issue at 15:08:07. As a result, the WMx no longer received the PB command.
After five minutes (when the watchdog expired), the WMx reset at 15:13:21. After the
reset, WMx continued to try to connect.
Figure 2 - 20.
Previous Example Shown in the WMx Configuration Utility’s Communication Log.
2 - 28
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Setting Up Your WMx Device
WMx Service Memory Watch
WMx Service Memory Watch
The Memory Watch function allows the WMx Service to periodically monitor the amount
of physical and virtual memory being used by the server, and refreshes the service
whenever memory consumption exceeds a specified threshold.
To configure the Memory Watch function’s wakeup period:
•
Open the skfWMxService.exe.config file located in the C:\Program Files\SKFRS\SKF @ptitude Analyst folder.
Figure 2 - 21.
The skfWMxService.exe.config Configuration File.
•
Scroll down to locate the WmxService_default section.
•
Edit the value fields for the following keys to configure the Memory Watch settings:
Do not edit any other value fields in the skfWMxService.exe.config configuration file
than the fields specified below.
MemoryWatchDelaySec – Specify how often the Memory Watch function checks the
server’s memory consumption. Default is 900 seconds (15 minutes).
MaxPhysicalMemoryMB – Specify the maximum limit of physical memory in
megabytes. A setting of zero seconds means monitoring is not enabled. Default is zero.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
2 - 29
Setting Up Your WMx Device
WMx Service Memory Watch
MaxVirtualMemoryMB – Specify the maximum limit of virtual memory in megabytes.
A setting of zero seconds means monitoring is not enabled. Default is zero.

•
2 - 30
In order to trigger the Memory Watch function to refresh the
service, the MaxPhysicalMemoryMB and MaxVirtualMemoryMB
must be set to a value greater than zero. When either value is set
to zero, monitoring is disabled.
Click File / Save and close the configuration file.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Selecting which of your machinery requires monitoring, what measurements to perform
on the selected machinery, and how often to perform these measurements requires a
careful study of the needs of the plant.
Creating a Paper Copy Hierarchy
It is advisable to create a paper copy Hierarchy before creating your @ptitude Analyst
Hierarchy. This paper copy Hierarchy of your machinery measurement POINTs should
be organized in hierarchical format by machines and POINTs for each machine.
HIERARCHY
POWER GENERATION
GAS TURBINE
GT INLT 1HV
GT INLT 1VV
GT INLT 1XV
GT INLT 2HV
GT INLT 2VV
GT INLT 2X
MAIN PUMP
WATER TREATMENT
For each Hierarchy, use an outline format to create your Hierarchy’s organizational
hierarchy, with measurement POINTs branching from machines, which branch from
SETs.
Take time to organize your paper copy Hierarchy thoroughly. A complete and organized
paper copy Hierarchy makes building your @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy much easier.
When naming POINTs, it is helpful to keep machine names and POINT identifiers in
columns (as exampled above).

If you have several machines with the same title (for example, GAS
TURBINE), use an alpha or numeric prefix or suffix to uniquely
identify one machine only (for example, GAS TURBINE INLT).
About POINT Names
In the @ptitude Analyst system, each measurement must be identified by a descriptive
name. This can be accomplished by adding a suffix to each equipment name to denote
the specific location, measurement orientation, and type of measurement.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3-1
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Overview
Suffixes such as AHV, 1VD, and so on, can be used to identify specific MCD Probe
vibration measurements, with letters denoting which end of the machine (A, B, 1, 2,
etc.), direction (H - horizontal, V - vertical, or A - axial), and type of measurement
(V - velocity, D - displacement, etc.).

In a hierarchy list, POINTs branching from the same machine must
have unique names. However, POINTs branching from different
machines may share the same name. Also, each machine must
have a unique name. If you try to create a machine with the same
name as another in the hierarchy list, SKF @ptitude Analyst
automatically adds a numeric suffix to the machine’s name. The
same holds true for POINTs branching from the same machine.
For example, if you have a machine named Pump and try to name
another machine with the same name, @ptitude Analyst adds a
suffix, and the new machine is named Pump.1.
Overview
In @ptitude Analyst, you create a Hierarchy that organizes your monitored machinery
measurements into a hierarchy structure consisting of Groups (which consist of
organizational SETs, machines, or custom groups) and measurement POINTs.
Each @ptitude Analyst hierarchy displays in the Hierarchy window in which its hierarchy
items list. Multiple databases display in the same Hierarchy window, and only one
Hierarchy window may be open at a time.
When building your Hierarchy, you insert hierarchy Groups, which you identify as either
a Machine hierarchy item or an organizational SET hierarchy item, or a custom Group
Type you create.
IMPORTANT
All hierarchy lists must contain Machine hierarchy items from which measurement
POINTs branch. Measurement POINTs cannot branch from a SET hierarchy item or
the root node. They must branch from a “Machine” hierarchy item.
After creating your paper copy hierarchy, your next task is to use your paper copy
hierarchy to input your organizational hierarchy into @ptitude Analyst to build your
@ptitude Analyst hierarchy. This chapter walks you through the usual @ptitude Analyst
steps for creating a new hierarchy. These steps are:
•
Create one or more new hierarchies.
•
Create each hierarchy’s organizational SETs (optional) and Machines.
•
Add measurement POINTs to their appropriate machine, configuring
each POINT as it is created.
The general steps required to create a new hierarchical structure are listed below.
Refer to the indicated dialogs and topics for more information on specific steps.
•
3-2
Use the File menu’s New option to create a new hierarchy. A hierarchy window
displays with a Hierarchy root node.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Displaying Existing SKF @ptitude Analyst for Hierarchies in the Hierarchy Window
•
With the Hierarchy window active, use the Insert menu to insert new Groups in the
hierarchy window. Specify the new Group's Type as either Machine group, a SET
group, or one of your custom groups (if available).

•
Refer to Group Properties for more information.
After inserting your Machine hierarchy items, click to highlight a specific Machine
and insert New POINTs for the Machine. Specify the new POINT's DAD and POINT
Properties.

Refer to POINT Properties for more information.
IMPORTANT:
* Machines must have unique names.
* POINTs must branch from a machine.
* POINTs branching from the same machine must have unique names.
Displaying Existing SKF @ptitude Analyst for Hierarchies in the Hierarchy
Window
To display hierarchies in the Hierarchy window:
•
Use the File menu's Open/Close command to display the Open/Close dialog. All
available hierarchies display in the Open/Close dialog.

•
Only the hierarchies to which the user has access display. For
details on setting Hierarchy access, refer to the Customizing Your
@ptitude Analyst Software section in Chapter 2 – Getting Around
in SKF @ptitude Analyst of your SKF @ptitude Analyst
Introduction and Global Features user manual.
In the Open/Close dialog, enable the checkbox next to the hierarchy name(s) you
wish to display in the Hierarchy window and click OK.
The selected hierarchies display in the Hierarchy window.
To remove a hierarchy from the Hierarchy window:
•
Use the File menu’s Open/Close command to display the Open/Close dialog.
•
In the Open/Close dialog, disable the checkbox next to the hierarchy name(s) you
wish to no longer display in the hierarchy and click OK. The disabled hierarchies no
longer display in the Hierarchy window.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3-3
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Creating a New SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Creating a New SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
@ptitude Analyst’s installation program installs a “demo” Hierarchy (unless you selected
to install an empty Hierarchy only). You should create a new Hierarchy to store your
machinery vibration measurements.
To create a new @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy:
•
Select the File menu’s New command. The New dialog opens.
•
Enter a unique name for the new Hierarchy and click OK.
A blank Hierarchy window displays. The Hierarchy name appears in the window’s title
bar.

Access to the new Hierarchy is assigned only to its creator. To
give other users access to the new Hierarchy, refer to the
Managing Users section in the SKF @ptitude Analyst
Introduction and Global Features User Manual.
Setting Your Primary Hierarchy
@ptitude Analyst’s Hierarchy window displays multiple hierarchies at one time in the
same window. One hierarchy must be designated as the primary hierarchy.
The primary hierarchy is the default hierarchy and owns any newly created ROUTEs and
Workspaces. When working in areas of the application that require hierarchy selection
(e.g., Reports, Filters, Workspaces, etc.), this hierarchy will be offered by default. When
in areas of the application where hierarchy selection is not offered (for example,
Transfer), the primary hierarchy will automatically be used.
To set the primary hierarchy:
•
In the File menu’s Open/Close dialog, you may click the Set Primary button to set
the highlighted hierarchy as the primary hierarchy. The primary hierarchy name
appears in bold with the [primary] displayed next to the hierarchy name.
OR
•
3-4
In the Hierarchy window, right click the hierarchy’s root node, and select the Set
Primary option. The primary hierarchy name displays in bold.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Inserting @ptitude Analyst Groups
Inserting @ptitude Analyst Groups

The DMx system hierarchy is created automatically, based on
DMx modules communicating with @ptitude Analyst Monitor.
(Refer to Chapter 7 for details.) Although there is no need to
manually insert the Group, this section contains information on
configurable Group properties that may be useful to DMx users.
When building your hierarchy, you insert hierarchy Groups which you identify as either a
Machine hierarchy item, an organizational SET hierarchy item, or a custom Group Type
previously created.
To insert a new Group:
•
Select the Insert menu’s New Groups option. The Group Properties screen
displays.

The keyboard’s Insert key may also be used to insert a new group
when in a Hierarchy, ROUTE, or Workspace window.
Group Properties Screen
General Tab
Group Properties / General fields are organized into three areas; Settings, Segment
and asset tracking, and Miscellaneous.
Settings fields include:
Name – Enter a unique name to identify the new group.
Description – (optional) Enter a description to further identify the new group.
Type – Select Machine or SET from the drop down list.

Custom group types may also be available for selection. Creation
of custom group types is discussed later in this chapter.

Once a Group’s Type is specified, it cannot be changed.
Enable data collection checkbox – Click the checkbox to enable POINT transfer to a
DAD.

By default, data collection is enabled. To temporarily disable data
collection, clear the checkbox.
Segment and asset tracking fields include:
Segment name – Enter text that defines the Group’s physical location. For example,
enter “Level 2” or “Press Section.”
Asset name – Enter text that defines the physical machinery currently occupying the
Segment entered above. For example, enter a machine’s serial or part number.

Segments remain fixed while Assets may be moved from one
location (segment) to another.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3-5
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Group Properties Screen

Segment name and Asset name fields are unavailable when
working with a template item's group properties.
Miscellaneous fields include:
Priority – Priority assignments may be used in filtering and reporting. A machine is
typically given a Priority rating when a problem is found and you wish to prioritize the
problems to be addressed. Specify a machine's priority from the drop down list.

The Priority field is only available if you are working with a
Machine-type Group.

Assign a color for each machine priority to allow easy
identification of all machines with priority assignments. Enable to
display a machine priority color in the hierarchy for all machines
with assigned priority levels on the Customize / Preferences /
General tab. Default is disabled.
Available priority assignments are:
<No Priority>
1 – Critical
2 – High
3 – Medium
4 – Low
5 – Lowest
Figure 3 - 1.
Example of Machine Priority Color Displayed in Hierarchy.
3-6
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Group Properties Screen
Filter Keys Tab
@ptitude Analyst allows you to create Filter Keys which can be associated with POINTs
and Machines for automated filtering purposes. For example, if you activated a “Pump”
filter key for a Group and later filter a hierarchy list using the Filter Key / Pump, then
all Groups with active Pump filter keys display in the filtered Workspace.

Filter key creation is discussed later in this chapter.
Filter key searches list all POINTs or Machines sharing a specified filter key (or multiple
filter keys). The Filter Key tab lists all created filter keys and indicates whether or not
they are currently assigned.
•
Click a specific filter key’s checkbox to associate it to the current POINT.

•
The checkbox appears gray if the filter key is enabled for a parent
hierarchy item.
Click the Filter Key tab’s OK button to save your filter key assignments.
Messages Tab
The Messages tab allows you to apply previously defined “shared” messages, and to
create new, private messages to assign to the selected group.
Figure 3 - 2.
The Group Properties Screen’s Messages Tab.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3-7
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Group Properties Screen
@ptitude Analyst's Group Properties / Messages feature allows you to create and
assign one message for general machine instruction purposes. The Messages context
area displays the type of message available for assignment and any existing messages
already applied. You can assign a previously created public message to the current
group, or create and apply a new private message.
The Name drop down list displays all previously created messages and a <Private>
option. Use this drop down list to specify whether you wish to set up a unique
<Private> message for the current group only, or specify a previously defined “shared”
message (selected by name). If you specify a shared message, its format, summary,
and content automatically display in subsequent fields. If you specify a Private message,
proceed to configure the message settings as described below.

For more information on creating and managing public messages,
refer to the Customize / Database Operations section later in
this chapter.
Format – This drop down list allows you to specify your message's format.
Free form – Allows you to manually type in the summary and content for your
message.
Summary – Type in text summarizing your message for easy recognition. For example,
if you have a message that details specifics about a group of machinery, your summary
may read, "FD Fan Data Collection Information."
Content – Enter your complete message in the content text area. Using the above
example, your alarm message content would include detailed data collection
information, specific to the current group. For example, your message may read
"Ensure sensor is properly mounted before collecting data, etc."
To assign a shared message to the current group:
•
Select the shared message from the drop down list and click the OK button.
Shared messages may be applied to an unlimited number of groups.
Shared Message
Alarm messages initially created as private messages may be converted into shared
(public) messages. To share a newly created Private message, select the new Private
message and click the tab’s Share As button.
The Enter Name dialog specifies the message as a shared (public) message. When the
Enter Name dialog displays, you will be prompted to give the shared message a unique
name for easy identification.
3-8
•
Enter a name for the shared message and click the OK button.
•
The new shared message now appears as an available selection in the dialog's drop
down list. Shared messages are easily assigned to other groups to simplify setup
and maintenance.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Group Properties Screen
Notes Tab
The Group Properties / Notes tab allows you to attach a text note to the Group along
with a date / time stamp. This feature conveniently stores and records relevant Group
information such as maintenance history.

Coded notes uploaded from the on-line device for the current
Machine display in the Notes tab.
•
Click the Notes tab’s Add button to add a new note and date / time stamp.
•
Click the Save button to save edits made to a note.
•
Click the Undo button to cancel edits made to a note.
•
Click the Remove button to remove the selected note from the display.
Group Properties / Notes fields include:
Date – Select the current date from the drop down list.
Time – Select the current time.
The selected date and time appear in the tab’s left Notes field.
Text – Type in desired note text in the text field.
•
Click the tab’s OK button to save all entries.
Images Tab
Scanned photographs or digital images can be added to a particular Group, stored in the
Hierarchy, and viewed from the Images tab. Images help identify SETs / machines,
organize similar equipment, and document known defects.
Group Properties / Images fields include:
Image – All attached images display in the drop down list.
Description – Enter text to identify the image. Click the Save button to save your
description entry. If saved, the new description replaces the filename in the Images list.
•
Click OK to save your new description entry.
To add a new image:
•
Click the Add button to add a new image. The Windows’ Open dialog displays.
Select desired image and click Open to add or Cancel to undo.

Added images use the filename as the default description.
To replace / update the current image:
•
Click the Browse button.
•
Select a replacement image. The new image displays on the tab.
•
Click Save to confirm the image replacement.
•
Click Cancel to undo the image replacement.

The image name and description of the old image are retained for
the replacement image.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3-9
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Group Properties Screen
To export an image to a specific location:
•
Select the image to export.
•
Click the Export button.
•
When prompted, enter the desired export location and click OK.
The image is copied and saved to the specified location, but still remains attached to the
assigned Group.
Details Tab
Figure 3 - 3.
The Group Properties Screen’s Details Tab.

The Details tab is available only for custom Group Types.
Additional Group information can be entered in the Details tab and stored in the
Hierarchy. The five fields that appear in the Details tab are defined in the Customize /
Database / Group Types screen when you define a custom Group Type.
Enter appropriate information in the text box following the customized fields. Helpful
Details information may include serial number, RPM, address, etc. These fields may be
customized to support any type of information applicable to your specific application.
3 - 10
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Inserting New POINTs
The Details tab is unavailable if detail options have not been previously defined in the
Database / Group Type screen.
Inserting New POINTs

The DMx system hierarchy is created automatically, based on
DMx modules communicating with @ptitude Analyst Monitor.
(Refer to Chapter 7 for details.) Although there is no need to
manually insert POINTs, this section contains information on
configurable POINT properties that may be useful to DMx users.
Use the Insert menu to insert new measurement POINTs to your hierarchy machines.
To insert new POINTs:
•
In the Hierarchy window, select the machine from you wish the new POINT to
branch.
•
Select the Insert menu’s New POINT option. The DAD / POINT Type Selection
dialog displays.

The keyboard’s Insert key may also be used to insert a new POINT.
Figure 3 - 4.
The DAD / POINT Type Selection Dialog.
From the DAD / POINT Type Selection dialog, your DAD Type, Application, Sensor,
and Units selections determine the POINT type. For example, Vibration /
Accelerometer / mm / sec settings denote an acceleration to velocity type
measurement, whereas Vibration / Accelerometer / gE settings denote an enveloped
acceleration measurement.
Fields in this dialog include:
DAD Type – Select WMx / IMx from the drop down list of available DADs.
Application – Only applications consistent with your DAD type selection display in the
Application drop down list. Select the appropriate application.
Sensor – Only sensors consistent with your selected application display in the Sensor
drop down list. Select the appropriate sensor.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 11
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
Units – Only units consistent with your selected sensor type display in the Units drop
down list. Select the appropriate units.
•
Click OK to save your settings.
•
Click Cancel to terminate POINT insertion.

Once the POINT is saved with DAD / POINT Type information,
this information cannot be modified.
After DAD / POINT Type Selection settings are saved, the POINT Properties screen
automatically displays.
POINT Properties
The POINT Properties screen allows you to enter all POINT information and settings.
On each tab:
•
Click OK to save settings.
•
Click Cancel to undo settings.
General Tab
The POINT Properties screen’s General tab allows you to enter the POINT name and
description and displays the DAD / POINT Type information you previously entered.
3 - 12
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
Figure 3 - 5.
The POINT Properties Screen’s General Tab.
POINT Properties / General fields include:
Name – Enter a unique name to identify the POINT.
Description – Enter a description to further identify the POINT.
Enable data collection – When POINTs are downloaded to the collection instrument,
the Enable data collection setting determines whether the POINT is downloaded or
ignored. Click the checkbox to enable.
DAD Type – Displays the DAD type previously assigned when the POINT was created.
Application – Displays the application type assigned when the POINT was created.
Sensor – Displays the sensor type assigned when the POINT was created.
Units – Displays the appropriate measurement unit assigned when the POINT was
created.

The DAD Type, Application, Sensor, and Units fields of the
General tab cannot be edited once they have been assigned.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 13
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties

When a POINT is disabled from downloading, its existing alarm
conditions do NOT affect the system.
Location – Enter the data collection POINT on the machine. Options include:
Normal – Alphabetic identifiers A-J.
Displacement – Numeric identifiers 1-10.
Other – Six specific identifiers:
Drive End
Non-Drive End
Outboard
Inboard
Coupled End
Non-Coupled End
Orientation – Select from drop down list options (Axial, Horizontal, None, Radial,
Triax, Vertical, X, Y).
Exclude from reports if last measurement is a Non-collection event. – Select
(check) to have any reports that would include this POINT exclude it if its last
measurement was a non-collection event (for example, the machine was marked as
non-operating or certain measurement conditions were not met).
Clear Alarms for Non-collection last measurements. – Select (check) to have the
system clear any previous measurement alarms for this POINT if its last measurement
was a non-collection event (for example, the machine was marked as non-operating or
certain measurement conditions were not met).
3 - 14
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
Sensor Setup Tab
Figure 3 - 6.
The POINT Properties Screen’s Sensor Setup Tab.

RPM POINTs and Logic POINTs do not support sensor setup, so
the Sensor Setup tab does not appear in the POINT Properties
screen if the selected POINT is configured as an RPM, or Logic
POINT.
The Sensor Setup tab allows you to re-apply previously defined “shared” sensors,
eliminating the need to define sensor settings individually, saving time and database
space.
Use the Sensor Setup tab to set a POINT’s sensor settings. Settings can be configured
in a variety of ways using the tab’s fields.
The current sensor name appears in the Sensor names field. The current sensor’s
properties display below in the screen’s Properties and BOV Settings areas.
The Sensor names drop down list displays all previously created sensors and a
<Custom Sensor> option. Use this drop down list to specify whether you wish to set up
a unique <Custom Sensor> for the current POINT only, or specify a previously defined
sensor (selected by name). If you specify a shared sensor, its settings automatically
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 15
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
display in subsequent fields. If you specify a custom sensor, proceed to configure the
tab’s alarm settings as described below.
The Properties area provides options relating to Sensor Power, Settling Time, and
Sensor Notes.
Sensor Power – Select the appropriate sensor power setting. Options include
Charge Converter, External Power, and Internal ICP (4.4 mA).
Settling Time – Type in the appropriate settling time in seconds.
Sensor Notes – Type in any additional information you would like to store with
the selected sensor settings.
The BOV Settings area provides options relating to BOV gating.
Check Sensor OK Status – Click to enable this option. When enabled,
@ptitude Analyst software will check the sensor status, and will display the
sensor status in Device status and Online Data View dialogs.
Upper Limit – Type in the BOV upper limit value.
Lower Limit – Type in the BOV lower limit value.
To assign a shared sensor to the current POINT:
•
Select the shared sensor from the drop down list and click the OK button. Shared
sensors may be applied to an unlimited number of POINTs.
Shared Sensors
Sensors initially created as custom sensors may be converted into shared sensors. To
share a newly created custom sensor, select the new custom sensor and click the tab’s
Share As button.
The Share As dialog specifies the sensor as a shared sensor. When the Share As
dialog displays, you will be prompted to give the shared sensor a unique name for easy
identification.
•
Enter a name for the shared sensor and click the OK button.
The new shared sensor now appears as an available selection in the drop down list.
Shared sensors are easily assigned to other POINTs to simplify POINT setup and
maintenance.
3 - 16
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
Setup Tab – WMx POINTs
Figure 3 - 7.
The POINT Properties / Setup Tab.
Enter on-line device POINT setup information in this tab.

The POINT Properties / Setup tab displays differently, depending
on the POINT and DAD type. The following Setup fields apply to
WMx POINTs.
If Setup units allow editing, the values display in an edit field.

The POINT Setup Validation screen launches when you enter
incompatible or erroneous information on the Setup tab.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 17
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
Setup fields include:
Device – Select the appropriate on-line device name from the drop down list. The list
contains all available device names.

Devices may be added or removed in the View menu’s WMx
Device dialog.
Channel Name – Select the channel name from the drop down list to assign the POINT
to a channel. Available channels are limited to channels assigned with the POINT’s
selected sensor type. Click the browse (…) button to display the Channel Selection
dialog.

Reference Chapter 2, Setting Up Your WMx Device for details
on configuring WMx channels.
The Channel Selection dialog allows you to select a channel name and view the
selected channel’s properties. The fields are read only. Use the drop down list to select
a different channel and view its properties. Click OK to save the selected channel and
return to the Setup tab. Click Cancel to if you do not wish to keep the selected channel.
Gain - (1 or 10). For small signals, select a multiplier to apply to the input sample to
improve resolution. The default value is 1; select 10 to improve amplitude resolution.

Gain is not applicable for DC, Diagnostic, Speed, or integrated
POINTs.

Although you apply this multiplier to the input sample to improve
resolution, it does not affect the final signal.
Detection - Click on the list box to view the choices (Peak, Peak to Peak, and RMS).
Select the method of dynamic signal detection from the drop down list.
Input filter range - Specify the amplitude range scaling for envelope acceleration
POINTs.
3K to 60K CPM
30K to 600K CPM
300K to 2.4M CPM
Freq. Type - (read-only) (Fixed Span).
Fixed Span – Specifies frequency as the unit of measurement for the
horizontal axis of the FFT spectrum.
Full Scale - Enter a number to define the anticipated maximum amplitude to be
measured for this POINT.
Save Data – Determines whether the DAD collects FFT data, Time Record data, or
both.
Start / End Freq. – The Start frequency is always set to zero. Select the upper, full
scale frequency range of the FFT between 1.5 kCPM and 2400 kCPM from the drop
down list. Unless you are making a very unusual measurement, the upper full scale
frequency should always be greater than running speed.
Low Freq. Cutoff – Enter a low frequency cutoff filter value for dynamic
measurements. Although values are allowed from 0.0 CPM to 2,400 kCPM, the range
for normal measurements is from approximately 200 CPM to 600 CPM, or the
equivalent in Hz.
3 - 18
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
Pulses / Rev - Used to determine machine running speed. If a tachometer is
connected, enter the number of tach. pulses that occur for each shaft revolution.
Lines – The spectrum’s FFT resolution. Click the drop down list box to view available
choices.

The higher the resolution, the longer the data collection.
100
200
400
800
1600
3200
6400
12,800
Window – Select the type of window used in the FFT processing. Click the drop down
list box to view the choices (Hanning or Flat Top). A window function must be applied
to any periodic time record prior to performing an FFT. The Hanning and Flat Top
window functions attenuate to zero both the leading and trailing edges of the sample in
order to prevent leakage error caused by discontinuities in the time record.
Hanning – A dynamic signal analyzer window function that provides better
frequency resolution than Flat Top, but with reduced amplitude accuracy.
Useful for machine vibration measurements, general purpose measurement,
and measurements containing random noise.
Flat Top – A dynamic signal analyzer window function which provides the best
amplitude accuracy for measuring discrete frequency components. Useful for
calibration of machine vibration measurements using displacement probes in
fluid-film bearings.
Speed – Enter the nominal shaft speed in RPM.
Averages – Select the number of FFT averages to be collected (1 to 20). The higher the
number of averages, the longer the data collection.
Averaging – (Average or Synchronous Time) If averaging has been selected for the
POINT, determines the type of averaging performed, (either normal averaging, no
averaging, peak hold averaging, or synchronous time averaging). Synchronous Time
requires a tachometer assignment.
Enable tacho - Click to enable tachometer.
Trigger Timeout - Enter the number of seconds the WMx waits for the trigger pulse
before it will abort the measurement.
Linear Factor – Enter a numerical value for the desired multiple of machine speed to
calculate the linear production speed.
Linear Speed Units – Type in the linear speed unit.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 19
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
WMx POINTs’ End Frequency and Lines Validation
8 MB and 16 MB WMx and Non-enveloped POINTs
End Frequency
Valid Lines
Max Time (seconds)
25
100 or 200
8
50
100, 200 or 400
8
100
100, 200, 400 or 800
8
200
100, 200, 400, 800 or 1600
8
500
100, 200, 400, 800, 1600 or 3200
6.4
1K
100, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200 or 6400
6.4
2K
100, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200, 6400 or 12800
6.4
5K
100, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200, 6400 or 12800
2.56
10K
100, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200, 6400 or 12800
1.28
20K
100, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200, 6400 or 12800
0.64
40K
100, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200, 6400 or 12800
0.32
WVT and Non-enveloped POINTs
End Frequency
Valid Lines
50
100, 200 or 400
100
100, 200, 400 or 800
200
100, 200, 400, 800 or 1600
500
100, 200, 400, 800, 1600 or 3200
1K
100, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200 or 6400
2K
100, 200, 400, 800 or 1600
5K
100, 200, 400, 800, 1600 or 3200
10K
100, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200 or 6400
WVT devices and enveloped POINTs
Input Filter Range
End Frequency in Hz
Valid Lines
500 to 10K Hz
100
100
200
100 or 200
500
100, 200 or 400
1K
100, 200, 400 or 800
2K
100, 200, 400, 800 or 1600
5K
100, 200, 400, 800, 1600 or 3200
10K
100, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200 or 6400
3 - 20
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
8 MB WMx devices and enveloped POINTs
Input Filter Range
End Frequency in Hz
Valid Lines
50 to 1K Hz
25
100 or 200
50
100, 200 or 400
100
100, 200, 400 or 800
200
100, 200, 400, 800 or 1600
500
100, 200, 400, 800, 1600 or 3200
1K
100, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200 or 6400
100
100
200
100 or 200
500
100, 200 or 400
1K
100, 200, 400 or 800
2K
100, 200, 400, 800 or 1600
5K
100, 200, 400, 800, 1600 or 3200
10K
100, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200 or 6400
200
100
500
100 or 200
1K
100, 200 or 400
2K
100, 200, 400 or 800
5K
100, 200, 400, 800 or 1600
10K
100, 200, 400, 800, 1600 or 3200
20K
100, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200 or 6400
40K
100, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200, 6400 or 12800
500 to 10K Hz
5K to 40K Hz
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 21
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
16 MB WMx devices and enveloped POINTs
Input Filter Range
End Frequency in Hz
Valid Lines
50 to 1K Hz
25
100, 200, 400, 800 or 1600
50
100, 200, 400, 800, 1600 or 3200
100
100, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200 or 6400
200
100, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200, 6400 or
12800
500
100, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200, 6400 or
12800
1K
100, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200, 6400 or
12800
25
100 or 200
50
100, 200 or 400
100
100, 200, 400 or 800
200
100, 200, 400, 800 or 1600
500
100, 200, 400, 800, 1600 or 3200
1K
100, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200 or 6400
2K
100, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200, 6400 or
12800
5K
100, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200, 6400 or
12800
10K
100, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200, 6400 or
12800
25
100
50
100 or 200
100
100, 200 or 400
200
100, 200, 400 or 800
500
100, 200, 400, 800 or 1600
1K
100, 200, 400, 800, 1600 or 3200
2K
100, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200 or 6400
5K
100, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200, 6400 or
12800
10K
100, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200, 6400 or
12800
20K
100, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200, 6400 or
12800
40K
100, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200, 6400 or
12800
500 to 10K Hz
5K to 40K Hz
3 - 22
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
Setup Tab – IMx POINTs
Figure 3 - 8.
The POINT Properties / Setup Tab.
Enter on-line device POINT setup information in this tab.

The POINT Properties / Setup tab displays differently, depending
on the POINT type. The following Setup fields apply to IMx
POINTs.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 23
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
If Setup units allow editing, the values display in an edit field.

The POINT Setup Validation screen launches when you enter
incompatible or erroneous information on the Setup tab.
Setup fields include:
Device – Select the appropriate on-line device name from the drop down list. The list
contains all available device names.

Devices may be added or removed in the Customize menu’s
Online Settings dialog.
Channel Name – Select the channel name from the drop down list to assign the POINT
to a channel. Available channels are limited to channels assigned with the POINT’s
selected sensor type. Click the browse (…) button to display the Channel Selection
dialog.

Reference the Customize / Online Settings section for
information on configuring IMx channels.
The Channel Selection dialog allows you to select a channel name and view the
selected channel’s properties. The fields are read only. Use the drop down list to select
a different channel and view its properties. Click OK to save the selected channel and
return to the Setup tab. Click Cancel to if you do not wish to keep the selected channel.
Full Scale - Enter a number to define the anticipated maximum amplitude to be
measured for this POINT.
Detection - Click on the list box to view the choices (Peak, Peak to Peak, RMS, True
Peak, and True peak to peak). Select the method of dynamic signal detection from
the drop down list.
Freq. Type - Click the drop down list box to view the choices (Fixed Span or Order
Track).
Fixed Span – Specifies frequency as the unit of measurement for the
horizontal axis of the FFT spectrum.
Order Track – Specifies orders of running speed as the unit of measure for the
horizontal axis of the FFT spectrum, requires a phase reference input to collect
the measurement.

During the download to the IMx, if you are using firmware version
2.0 or greater, enveloped acceleration POINTs will download with
order tracking.
For acceleration envelope order track POINTs, the minimum and
maximum tracking speeds are determined by the envelope band and
the minimum and maximum Fmax value, based on the formulas
below:
3 - 24
•
Minimum tracking speed ≥ (minimum final Fmax) x
(revolutions / lines)
•
Maximum tracking speed ≤ (maximum final Fmax) x
(revolutions / number of lines)
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
Pre-processing
Min
Fmax
Max
Fmax
Minimum tracking
speed
ENV1
5
200
1 CPM
ENV2
5
2000
1 CPM
ENV3
5
10000
1 CPM
ENV4
5
40000
1 CPM
If the formula results in a minimum speed between 0.75 and 1 CPM,
the system will use 1 CPM as the minimum speed.
For example, using Envelope 3 with 2 revolutions and 800 lines, the
minimum speed, as per the formula above, must be greater than:
•
5 x 2 / 800 = 0.0125 Hz or 0.75 CPM
Using the same parameters, the maximum speed must be less than:
•
10000 x 2 / 800 = 25 Hz or 1500 CPM
Save Data – Determines whether the DAD collects FFT data, Time Record data, or
both. An additional FFT and Phase option is available for Order Tracking POINTs.
Start / End Freq. – The Start frequency is always set to zero. Enter the upper, full
scale frequency range of the FFT between 0.3 kCPM and 2400 kCPM . Unless you are
making a very unusual measurement, the upper full scale frequency should always be
greater than running speed.
If the End Freq. value is outside the allowable range, an error message will
display.
If dividing the End Freq. value into 2400 kCPM does not result in an integer, a
warning message will display. For better perofmrance, it is recommended to
only use frequencies that divide 2400 kCPM into an integer.
When downloading the POINT information to the IMx, the end frequency value
sent depends on the firmware version in use. If using firmware version 2.0 or
greater, the end frequency value entered will be sent. If using firmware prior
to version 2.0, the end frequency entered will scale to the closest value (10, 20,
50, 100, 200, 500, 1000, 2000, 5000, 10000, 20000, or 40000 Hz). In this
case, a message will display informing you that the frequency has been scaled
down.

If Freq. Type is set to Order Track, select upper frequency from
the End Order drop down list. End Order list options are
determined by the Lines of resolution setting.

If Freq. Type is set to Order Track, the Start Freq. field changes
to a Revolutions field that indicates the number of shaft
revolutions necessary to perform the measurement, as
determined by the Lines of resolution and End Order settings.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 25
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
Low Freq. Cutoff – Enter a low frequency cutoff filter value for dynamic
measurements. Although values are allowed from 0.0 CPM to 2,400 kCPM, the range
for normal measurements is from approximately 200 CPM to 600 CPM, or the
equivalent in Hz.

If Freq. Type is set to Order Track, the Low Freq. Cutoff field is
set in Orders of running speed.
Lines – The spectrum’s FFT resolution. Click the drop down list box to view available
choices.

The higher the resolution, the slower the data collection.
100
200
400
1600
3200
6400
800
Window – Select the type of window used in the FFT processing. Click the drop down
list box to view the choices (Uniform or Hanning). A window function must be applied
to any periodic time record prior to performing an FFT. The Hanning window function
attenuates to zero both the leading and trailing edges of the sample in order to prevent
leakage error caused by discontinuities in the time record.
Uniform – A dynamic signal analyzer window function with uniform weighting
across time. Useful for measuring transients or mechanical response
measurements.
Hanning – A dynamic signal analyzer window function that provides better
frequency resolution than Flat Top, but with reduced amplitude accuracy.
Useful for machine vibration measurements, general purpose measurement,
and measurements containing random noise.
Speed – Enter the nominal shaft speed in RPM.
Averages – Select the number of FFT averages to be collected (1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, or
128). The higher the number of averages, the slower the data collection.

Averaging is not normally recommended when collecting
enveloped acceleration (gE) POINTs.
Averaging – (Average, or Synchronous Time) If averaging has been selected for the
POINT, determines the type of averaging performed, (either normal averaging, no
averaging, peak hold averaging, or synchronous time averaging). Synchronous Time
requires a tachometer assignment.
Linear Factor – Enter a numerical value for the desired multiple of machine speed to
calculate the linear production speed.
Linear Speed Units – Type in the linear speed unit.
3 - 26
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
Control POINT Setup
To select a control POINT for the POINT being configured:
•
Click the POINT Properties / Setup tab’s Select POINT button. The Control Point
dialog displays.

The control POINT and its dependent POINT must be in the same
Hierarchy.
•
Click the Select control POINT button.
•
In the list, click to select the new POINT's control POINT.
•
Click OK.
To clear the control POINT for the POINT being configured.
•
Click the Clear button.
•
Click OK.
Setup Tab – IMx Logic POINTs
Enter Logic POINT Setup information in this tab.
Figure 3 - 9.
The POINT Properties / Setup Tab.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 27
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties

The POINT Properties / Setup tab displays differently depending
on the POINT type. The following Setup fields apply to IMx Logic
POINTs.
A logic POINT monitors the logic state (high or low) of one of 8 digital channels of IMxS, IMx-T, IMx-P, and IMx-M, and one of 8 protection digital channels of the IMx-M.
These channels accept TTL or 12-24V signals from Programmable Logic Controllers
(PLCs) or any other source. Logic POINTs are often used as gating POINTs.
Setup fields include:
Device – Select the device from the drop down list.
Channel name - Select the channel name from the drop down list to assign the POINT
to a channel. Available channels are limited to channels assigned with the POINT’s
selected sensor type. Click the browse (…) button to display the Channel Selection
dialog.

Reference the Customize / Online Settings section for
information on configuring IMx channels.
The Channel Selection dialog allows you to select a channel name and view the
selected channel’s properties. The fields are read only. Use the drop down list to select
a different channel and view its properties. Click OK to save the selected channel and
return to the Setup tab. Click Cancel to if you do not wish to keep the selected channel.
Active State – Click to select High or Low. The active state specifies whether the logic
condition is true when the signal is high or low.
In addition to data being saved to the “Scheduled” database on the regular time
schedule, additional “Scheduled” data is saved for a logic POINT each time its state
changes (from high to low, or low to high).
3 - 28
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
Orbit/SCL Tab
Enter orbit and shaft centerline information on this tab.
Figure 3 - 10.
The POINT Properties Screen’s Orbit/SCL Tab.
POINT Properties / Orbit/SCL fields may include:
Channel X and Y Settings
X-Input mv/EU – Enter a number to define the sensitivity of the pickup to be used in
taking measurements for channel X.
X-Sensor angle - Specify the angle that defines the X sensors’ physical location.
Y-Input mv/EU - Enter a number to define the sensitivity of the pickup to be used in
taking measurements for channel Y.
Y-Sensor angle - Specify the angle that defines the Y sensors’ physical location.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 29
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties

The orbit axis may use Scientific or Standard mode for the 0
degree reference point, depending on your Angular axis view
preference setting. This setting should be taken into account
when entering your sensor angles.
Figure 3 - 11.
Diagram Showing Scientific vs. Standard.
Orbit Settings
Top dead center – Specify the label to display at the top of the Orbit/SCL plot.
Display tacho angle – Enable to allow the tacho angle to display on the Orbit/SCL plot.
Shaft rotation – Specify the shaft rotation direction as either Bidirectional, Clockwise,
or Counter clockwise for reference on the Orbit/SCL plot.
Tacho angle – Specify the angle that defines the tachometer’s physical location (0 to
359 degrees).
Shaft Centerline Settings

This section is only available if the POINT uses a displacement
probe.
X-Cold gap – Specify the X probe’s cold gap value. Together the X and Y probe cold gap
values define the distance between the displacement probe and the shaft’s position in
the bearing when the machine is at rest.
Y-Cold gap – Specify the Y probe’s cold gap value.
Cold gap position – Define the cold gap position in the bearing clearance circle when
viewing the shaft centerline plot. Choices are Bottom, Center, Left, Right, and Top.
Bearing clearance – Specify the bearing’s clearance value (typically supplied by the
manufacturer). The clearance value assumes the shaft is centered in the bearing and
defines the physical distance between the shaft and the bearing, multiplied by 2.
3 - 30
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
Setup Tab (Manual POINTs)

The POINT Properties / Setup tab displays differently, depending
on the POINT type. The following Setup fields apply to POINTs
defined with a manual sensor.
Enter Manual POINT Setup information in this tab.
Figure 3 - 12.
The POINT Properties Screen’s Manual Setup Tab.
POINT Properties / Setup fields may include:

The POINT Setup Validation Screen launches when you enter
incompatible or erroneous information on the Setup tab.
Reference the POINT Setup Validation section later in this
manual for more information.
Full Scale – Enter a number to define the spectrum’s maximum amplitude value.
The Units selected on the DAD/POINT Type Selection dialog display next to the Full
Scale field. If Any Units was selected, the units may be edited. Adjust the units if
necessary.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 31
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
Setup Tab (DC POINTs)
If the sensor type is DC, enter POINT setup information on this tab.
Figure 3 - 13.
The POINT Properties Screen’s DC Setup Tab.
Device – Select the appropriate on-line device name from the drop down list. The list
contains all available device names.

Devices may be added or removed in the Customize menu’s
Online Settings dialog.
Full Scale – Enter a number to define the measurement’s maximum value.
The Units selected on the DAD/POINT Type Selection dialog display next to the Full
Scale field. Adjust the units if necessary.
Input mV/EU - Enter a number to define the sensitivity of the pickup to be used in
taking measurements.
3 - 32
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
Channel # - Enter the terminal strip channel input (sensor input) number (1-3) at
which the POINT's sensor is connected.
Autorange - (On or Off). Determines whether the POINT's full scale value is
autoranging, or determined with the POINT's Full scale field setting.
Zero offset – Enter a value (-1000000000.000 to 1000000000.000) in milivolts to
offset the zero point of the measurement.
Process Label - Enter a label to use for the process value.
Control POINT – Displays the name of the current control POINT, if applicable.
•
Click the Select POINT button to select a control POINT.
Setup Tab (Derived POINTs)
A derived POINT outputs the result of a calculation based on data collected by online
systems.

Derived POINTs are not downloaded to the online data acquisition
device. They are calculated after data has been collected from the
device and results display in @ptitude Analyst only.
Prior to setting Setup tab options, use the DAD / POINT Type Selection dialog’s setup
fields to specify a derived POINT type.
To specify a derived POINT type:
•
Select the Insert menu’s New POINT option. The DAD / POINT Type Selection
dialog displays.
•
Select the DAD type field’s Derived POINT option.
•
Select the Sensor field’s Calculated option. The Calculated setting indicates that
POINT data used in a derived POINT calculation is first uploaded to @ptitude
Analyst and then automatically “calculated” for the derived POINT during upload
data processing.

For Derived POINTs, the DAD / POINT Type Selection dialog’s
Application field defaults to General, and the Units field defaults
to Any Units.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 33
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
Setup Tab Options
Enter Derived POINT Setup information in this tab. A Derived POINT consists of an
operator created formula (expression) using measurement POINT data (variables), fixed
numbers (constants; i.e., Pi) and mathematical functions (i.e., sin).
Figure 3 - 14.
The POINT Properties Screen’s Setup Tab for Derived POINTs.
POINT Properties / Setup fields may include:
Full Scale – Enter a number to define the spectrum’s maximum amplitude value.
Evaluation time – Ensures relevant variable data. Defines the maximum time range
during which all variables (POINTs) must collect measurement data for the derived
POINT to calculate. All variables in the expression formula must have data collected
within this specified time range, or the derived POINT does not calculate. For example,
if the Evaluation time is set to 15 minutes, all variables (POINTs) must be collected
within 15 minutes of each other.
3 - 34
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
Canary Labs Setup Tab
For Canary Labs customers, enter the data historian information on this tab.
Figure 3 - 15.
The POINT Properties Screen’s Canary Labs Setup Tab.
POINT Properties / Canary Labs Setup fields include:
Full Scale - Enter a number to define the measurement’s maximum value. If a Logic
sensor type was selected, the Full Scale option will not be available.
Data Set - Select the applicable data set that is defined in the data historian.
Historian Tag - Enter a name for the data historian tag.
Threshold Type - Select the type of threshold to use, Percent or Absolute, or choose
to disable thresholds. If a Logic sensor type was selected, the Threshold Type will be
automatically disabled.
Threshold Value - Enter a value to determine the threshold of the full scale value.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 35
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
Expressions Tab (Derived POINTs)

The POINT Properties / Expressions tab displays when the
Derived POINT type is selected. Use this tab to create or edit the
derived POINT’s Expression formula (the derived POINT’s
calculation).
Figure 3 - 16.
The POINT Properties Screen’s Expressions Tab for Derived POINTs.
The Expressions drop down list displays all previously created “shared” expression
formulas (calculations) and a <Private Expression> option. Use this drop down list to
specify whether you wish to set up a unique <Private Expression> for the current
derived POINT only, or specify a previously defined “shared” expression formula
(selected by name). If you specify a shared expression, its settings display in subsequent
fields.
•
Specify either a shared or Private Expression and proceed to configure the tab’s
expression settings as described below.
Assigning Variables
POINTs used in the derived POINT’s calculation are identified as “variables.” Assigned
variables list in the Available Variables area.
3 - 36
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
To assign variables for a derived POINT:
•
Click the Variables button. The Variables screen displays.
Figure 3 - 17.
The Variables Screen.
•
In the Variables screen, click the Add button. The Variables area displays the New
Variable with an “unassigned POINT.” The Properties area also displays the
NewVariable.
•
Click the Select POINT assignment option button to activate the hierarchy,
allowing you to select the POINT to assign to the new variable.

Click the Clear POINT assignment option to clear the point
assigned to the selected variable. Once cleared, <Unassigned>
displays in the Assigned POINT column in the Variables list.
•
In the hierarchy, select the POINT to assign to the variable.
•
In the Properties area, type in a name for the new variable. Tip - you may use the
same name as the POINT ID.
•
Click the Save button to save the new variable. Its information displays in the
Variables area. Repeat the process to Add all necessary variables.

You may click the Remove button to remove a variable from the
Variables list for the current derived POINT.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 37
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
•
When finished adding variables, click the Close button to return to the POINT
Properties / Expressions tab. The new variables display in the Available
Variables area.
Once variables have been created for the derived POINT, you can create the POINT’s
expression formula (calculation). Enter the calculation in the Expression formula entry
box. An expression formula must contain at least one variable, and may also contain
constants and functions. Insert mathematical operators (e.g., +, -, /, *) as necessary.
To insert a variable to the expression formula:
•
In the Expression Formula area, position the cursor where you wish to insert the
variable.
•
Select a variable from the Variables list and click the Insert button. The selected
variable appears at the cursor position.
To add a constant to the expression formula:
•
In the Expression formula field, position the cursor where you would like to insert
the constant.
•
Click the Constants button to display the Constant dialog.
•
Select a constant, or create a new constant by clicking the Add button.
Figure 3 - 18.
The Add Constant Dialog.
•
Click OK. The selected constant appears at the cursor position.
To add a function to the expression formula:
•
3 - 38
Place the cursor in the Expression formula section where you wish to insert the
function and click the Functions button. The Functions dialog displays.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
Figure 3 - 19.
The Functions Dialog.
•
Select a function from the dialog and click OK. The selected function is entered at
the cursor position in the Expression formula section along with the type of input
data that is used for the function, shown in parentheses; for example:
AVERAGE(<Variable>, <Length>).
•
Highlight the input data placeholder (e.g., <Variable>) and enter the applicable
data, or select a constant to enter by using the Constants button. You can also
enter a variable by selecting it from the Variables section and clicking Insert.

To calculate more complex formulas, you can enter multiple
functions within a single expression formula.
Depending on the function, the type of input data can either be scalar data or dynamic
data.
Scalar data can be derived from:
•
Overall trend data from a Microlog Analyzer, Microlog Inspector/MARLIN,
WMx/WVT, DMx, IMx, LMU/CMU/TMU
•
Inspection results (the calculated formula for inspection results will produce a result
of either 0 (not valid) or 1 (valid) based on the inspection result that is entered)
•
Manual entry
•
Data from XML import (from sources such as the SKF Wireless Machine Condition
Sensor, third party developments, etc.)
•
OPC from other systems (Digital Control Systems (DCS), Canary Labs and other
data historians, etc.)
•
Oil Analysis / Trend Oil
•
MCD (Enveloped Acceleration, Velocity, or Temperature)
•
WMCD
•
Derived POINTS themselves
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 39
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
Dynamic data includes:
•
Time waveform data
•
FFT data
The table below contains a list of the different functions that you can use for an
expression formula, along with a description of the function and whether the function is
based on scalar or dynamic data.
Function
Description
Type of data
ABS(<Variable>)
Calculates the absolute value of the <Variable> entered.
Scalar
ALARMSTATUS
(<Variable>)
Determines and stores the current alarm status for the <Variable>
(POINT) entered. Notice that this function does not re-evaluate past
alarm conditions and therefore must be operated immediately when
new alarm conditions are set for the <Variable>.
Scalar
Dynamic
ARCCOS(<Radians>)
ARCSIN(<Radians>)
ARCTAN(<Radians>)
AVERAGE(<Variable>,
<Length>)
AVERAGE(<Dynamic
Variable>,<Channel
Number>)
CEIL(<Param>)
CONTRIBUTION2
(<Dynamic Variable>,
<Speed Multiple>)
CONTRIBUTION3
(<Dynamic Variable>,
<Speed Multiple>,
<Ref Speed>)
COS(<Radians>)
3 - 40
Returned values are:
-1 No alarm level (when the <Variable> has no values, no set alarm)
0
Safe
1
Alert
2
Danger
Calculates the arc cosine of the <Radians> value entered. The value
returned is in degrees.
Calculates the arc sine of the <Radians> value entered. The value
returned is in degrees.
Calculates the arc tangent of the <Radians> value entered. The value
returned is in degrees.
Calculates the average of the <Variable> entered using a sliding window
of <Length> values entered.
Calculates the average of the <Dynamic Variable> entered for the
specified <Channel Number>. For non-multi-channel measurements,
<Channel Number> should be set to 1.
Calculates the smallest (closest to negative infinity) integer that is not
smaller than the <Param> value.
Calculates the contribution (in percentage) of the energy periodical to
the <Speed Multiple> entered. The <Dynamic Variable> entered is the
time waveform. The <Speed Multiple> is specified in multiples of
running speed including fractional values.
Calculates the contribution (in percentage) of the energy periodical to
the <Speed Multiple> entered. The <Dynamic Variable> entered is the
time waveform. The <Speed Multiple> is specified in multiples of
running speed including fractional values. The <Ref Speed> entered is
the machine speed value to use. The <Ref Speed> may be a fixed value,
an overall value from a trend, or a speed value extracted with Speed()
from a time waveform or spectrum.
Calculates the cosine of the <Radians> value entered.
Scalar
Scalar
Scalar
Scalar
Dynamic
Scalar
Dynamic (best
for time
waveform data)
Dynamic (best
for time
waveform data)
Scalar
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
Function
Description
Type of data
COUNT_SPIKES
(<Dynamic Variable>,
<Channel Number>,
<Threshold>, <DC>)
Counts the number of spikes in the waveform indicated by the
<Dynamic Variable> entered for the specified <Channel Number>
entered. A spike is defined as a signal level equal or higher than the
<Threshold> value entered. The <DC> bias value entered is subtracted
from the signal prior to evaluation against the threshold value.
Dynamic (best
for time
waveform data)
Use the Average function to de-trend signals with strong DC bias i.e.:
COUNT_SPIKES(<Dynamic Variable>, <Channel Number>, <Threshold>,
AVERAGE(<Dynamic Variable>, <Channel Number>) )
CRESTFACTOR
(<Dynamic Variable>)
CTA_PK_PK(<Dynamic
Variable>, <Speed
Multiple>)
CTA_RMS(<Dynamic
Variable>, <Speed
Multiple>)
CUSUM(<Variable>,
<Variable>)
DEGTORAD(<Degrees>)
DELTATIME(<Variable>)
DELTAVALUE(<Variable>)
ENERGY_VALUE
(<Dynamic Variable>,
<Band Number>)
FLOOR(<Param>)
FORECAST_EXP
(<Variable>, <Length>,
<Length>)
FORECAST_LIN
(<Variable>, <Length>,
<Length>)
HAL(<Dynamic Variable>,
<Speed Multiple>)
For non-multi-channel measurements, <Channel Number> should be
set to 1.
Calculates the crest factor. The crest factor is defined as the time
waveform’s Peak value divided by its RMS value. The <Dynamic
Variable> entered is the time waveform. The resulting value is
dimensionless.
Calculates the Cyclic Time Average of a time waveform using the
<Speed Multiple> averaging period. The <Dynamic Variable> entered
is the time waveform. The <Speed Multiple> entered must be in
seconds. The returned value is in the same engineering units as the
<Dynamic Variable> and Peak to Peak detection type.
Calculates the Cyclic Time Average of a time waveform using the
<Speed Multiple> averaging period. The <Dynamic Variable> entered
is the time waveform. The <Speed Multiple> entered must be in
seconds. The returned value is in the same engineering units as the
<Dynamic Variable> and RMS detection type.
Calculates the cumulative difference of the first <Variable> entered
against the second <Variable> entered.
Converts the angle <Degrees> value entered to radians.
Dynamic (best
for time
waveform data)
Dynamic (best
for time
waveform data)
Dynamic (best
for time
waveform data)
Scalar
Scalar
Calculates the difference in seconds between two adjacent
measurements.
Calculates the difference in value between two adjacent measurements.
Scalar
Dynamic
Scalar
Calculates the overall energy found in the specified <Band Number>
frequency band. <Band Number> starts at 1. Returns zero when no
frequency band exists for the specified <Band Number>. Returns a
band overall energy value with the same units and detection type as the
<Dynamic Variable> entered.
Calculates the largest (closest to positive infinity) integer that is not
greater than the <Param> value.
Calculates a forecasted alarm, in days, of the <Variable> entered using
a sliding window of specified <Length> values. Uses an exponential
fitting function.
Calculates a forecasted alarm, in days, of the <Variable> entered using
a sliding window of specified <Length> values. Uses a linear fitting
function.
Calculates the Harmonic Activity Index for the frequency specified by the
<Speed Multiple> entered in the <Dynamic Variable> entered. The
<Speed Multiple> must be in orders. The returned value is a
dimensionless indicator of the likelihood that a harmonic pattern at the
<Speed Multiple> exists.
Dynamic (best
for FFT data)
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Scalar
Scalar
Scalar
Dynamic (best
for FFT data)
3 - 41
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
Function
Description
Type of data
KURTOSIS(<Variable>,
<Length>)
Scalar
KURTOSIS(<Dynamic
Variable>, <Channel
Number>)
LN(<Param>)
Calculates the Kurtosis of excess for the <Variable> entered using a
sliding window of specified <Length> values. There should be at least
three measurements in the POINT referenced by the <Variable>.
Calculates the standard deviation of a dynamic signal (FFT or waveform)
for the specified <Channel Number> entered. For non-multi-channel
measurements, <Channel Number> should be set to 1.
Calculates the natural logarithm of the <Param> value entered.
LOG(<Param>)
Calculates the logarithm of the <Param> value entered.
Scalar
MAX(<Variable>,
<Variable>)
MIN(<Variable>,
<Variable>)
MOD(<Param>,
<Param>)
Calculates the maximum value between each <Variable> entered.
Returns the appropriate <Variable>.
Calculates the minimum value between each <Variable> entered.
Returns the appropriate <Variable>.
Calculates the remainder after the division of the first <Param> value
entered by the second <Param> value entered; for example:
MOD(7, 3) = 1.
This function is available only by selecting “Operating Time” for
Application Type when creating the POINT. It computes the amount of
time an asset has been operative in the time unit specified in the create
POINT dialog.
Calculates the peak value found in the specified <Band Number>
frequency band. <Band Number> starts at 1. Returns zero when no
frequency band exists for the specified <Band Number>. Returns a
peak value with the same units and detection type as the <Dynamic
Variable> entered.
Calculates the percentage change between two adjacent measurements.
What is computed is: (Value – PreviousValue ) / PreviousValue.
Raises the <Base> entered to the power of the <Exponent> entered.
Scalar
Calculates the rate of change (in days) between two adjacent
measurements.
Calculates the integer closest to the <Param> value.
Scalar
SIN(<Radians>)
Calculates the sine of the <Radians> value entered.
Scalar
SKEW(<Variable>,
<Length>)
Calculates the skew for the <Variable> entered using a sliding window
of specified <Length> values. There should be at least four
measurements in the POINT referenced by the <Variable>.
Calculates the skew of a dynamic signal (FFT or waveform) for the
specified <Channel Number>. For non-multi-channel measurements,
<Channel Number> should be set to 1.
Calculates the maximum vector magnitude of an Orbit. The <Dynamic
Variable>value entered must refer to a 2 channel time waveform value.
Scalar
Operating Time
PEAK_VALUE(<Dynamic
Variable>, <Band
Number>)
PERCENTCHANGE
(<Variable>)
POWER(<Base>,
<Exponent>)
ROC(<Variable>, <Days
Multiple>)
ROUND(<Param>)
SKEW(<Dynamic
Variable>, <Channel
Number>)
SMAX(<Dynamic
Variable>)
SPEED(<Dynamic
Variable>)
SQRT(<Param>)
STDEV(<Variable>,
<Length>)
STDEV(<Dynamic
Variable>, <Channel
Number>)
3 - 42
Extracts the machine speed from the <Dynamic Variable> entered. The
<Dynamic Variable> must be either a time waveform or spectrum. The
returned value is in Hertz.
Calculates the square root of the <Param> value entered.
Calculates the standard deviation of the <Variable> entered using a
sliding window of specified <Length> values. There should be at least
two measurements in the POINT referenced by the <Variable>.
Calculates the standard deviation of a dynamic signal (FFT or waveform)
for the specified <Channel Number>. For non-multi-channel
measurements, <Channel Number> should be set to 1.
Dynamic
Scalar
Scalar
Scalar
Scalar
Dynamic (best
for FFT data)
Scalar
Scalar
Scalar
Dynamic
Dynamic (best
for time
waveform data)
Dynamic
Scalar
Scalar
Dynamic
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
Function
Description
Type of data
SUMDURATION
(<Variable>, <Duration>)
Enter any number of days (for example: 1, 7, 31, etc.) or partial days
(for example: 0.5, 3.5, 11.75, etc.) for <Duration>. This function sums
the <Variable>’s (POINT’s) last measurement with all of its previous
measurements found within the specified number of days (or partial
days) prior to the last measurement date/time.
Scalar
Sample cases:
Enter a <Duration> of 7 to sum the <Variable>’s (POINT’s) last
measurement with all of its previous measurements starting
exactly 7 days prior to the last measurement.
SUMPERIOD(<Variable>,
<Period>)
Enter a <Duration> of 3.5 to sum the <Variable>’s (POINT’s) last
measurement with all of its previous measurements starting
exactly 3 and one half days prior to the last measurement.
Enter a specific <Period> (defined in sample cases, below). This function
sums the <Variable>’s (POINT’s) last measurement with all of its
previous measurements found within the specified <Period> and
stamps the result with the period start date/time.
Scalar
SUMPERIOD differs from the other functions in that it always creates a
measurement at the start of a period as soon as it begins, even when
the source <Variable> (POINT) has not yet collected a measurement.
The initial value is 0, and will be updated as the source <Variable>
(POINT) collects measurements for that period.
Sample cases:
Enter a <Period> of Period_Hour to sum the Variable’s (POINT’s)
last measurement with all of its previous measurements within the
same hour, starting at the top of the hour (for example 08:00 AM).
Alternatively, you can enter the constant 1 as the <Period> value
to represent Period_Hour.
Enter a <Period> of Period_Day to sum the Variable’s (POINT’s)
last measurement with all of its previous measurements found
within the same day, starting at 12:00 AM. Alternatively, you can
enter the constant 2 as the <Period> value to represent
Period_Day.
Enter a <Period> of Period_Week_Sunday to sum the Variable’s
(POINT’s) last measurement with all of its previous measurements
found within the same week, starting Sunday at 12:00 AM.
Alternatively, you can enter the constant 3 as the <Period> value
to represent Period_Week_Sunday.
Enter a <Period> of Period_Week_Monday to sum the Variable’s
(POINT’s) last measurement with all of its previous measurements
found within the same week, starting Monday at 12:00 AM.
Alternatively, you can enter the constant 4 as the <Period> value
to represent Period_Week_Monday.
Enter a <Period> of Period_Month to sum the Variable’s (POINT’s)
last measurement with all of its previous measurements found
within the same month, starting the first day of the month at
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 43
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
Function
Description
Type of data
12:00 AM. Alternatively, you can enter the constant 5 as the
<Period> value to represent Period_Month.
Enter a <Period> of Period_Quarter to sum the Variable’s
(POINT’s) last measurement with all of its previous measurements
found within the same quarter, starting Jan 1, Apr 1, Jul 1, or Oct
1 at 12:00 AM. Alternatively, you can enter the constant 6 as the
<Period> value to represent Period_Quarter.
SUMSINCE(<Variable>,
<Start Date>)
Enter a <Period> of Period_Year to sum the Variable’s (POINT’s)
last measurement with all of its previous measurements found
within the same year, starting Jan 1 at 12:00 AM. Alternatively,
you can enter the constant 7 as the <Period> value to represent
Period_Year.
Enter any <Start Date> code (using the format yyyymmdd or,
optionally, yyyymmddhhmmss). This function sums all of the
<Variable>’s (POINT’s) measurements found on or after the specified
date/time.
Scalar
Sample cases:
Enter a <Start Date> of 20140101 to sum all of the Variable’s
(POINT’s) measurements found on or after Jan 1, 2014 at 12:00
AM.
TAN(<Radians>)
Total Operating Time
TRUNC(<Param>)
XMAG(<Dynamic
Variable>, <Channel
Number>, <Channel
Number>, <Speed
Multiple>)
XPHASE(<Dynamic
Variable>, <Channel
Number>, <Channel
Number>, <Speed
Multiple>)
Enter a <Start Date> of 20140101090000 to sum all of the
Variable’s (POINT’s) measurements found on or after Jan 1, 2014
at 09:00 AM.
Calculates the tangent of the <Radians> value entered.
Scalar
This function is available only by selecting “Operating Time” for
Application Type when creating the POINT. It computes the total
amount of time an asset has been operative in the time unit specified in
the create POINT dialog.
Removes any fractional part from the <Param> value entered.
Scalar
Dynamic
Computes the cross magnitude value (as opposed to cross phase)
between two time waveform signals. The waveform signals are
referenced by the <Dynamic Variable> entered and either of the
specified <Channel Number> values. The specific frequency the cross
magnitude value is computed for is determined by the speed value
associated with the measurement and the <Speed Multiple> value
entered: f = 1 / (s * Speed Multiple).
Dynamic (best
for time
waveform data)
This function operates on multi-channel measurements only.
Computes the cross phase value (as opposed to cross magnitude)
between two time waveform signals. The waveform signals are
referenced by the <Dynamic Variable> entered and either of the
specified <Channel Number> values. The specific frequency the cross
phase value is computed for is determined by the speed value
associated with the measurement and the <Speed Multiple> value
entered:
f = 1 / (s * Speed Multiple).
Scalar
Dynamic (best
for time
waveform data)
This function operates on multi-channel measurements only.
3 - 44
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties

The value entered for the SIN, COS, and TAN functions must be in
radians, not degrees. If the value entered is in degrees, the
@ptitude Analyst will assume it is in radians, and the calculation
will be wrong.
To convert degrees to radians, use the DEGTORAD function in the
formula. For example, if you have a value of 45 degrees, the
entered formula may look like this: SIN(DEGTORAD(45))
When the formula is calculated, 45 degrees is automatically
converted into radians.

Use the DeltaTime function to calculate the difference in seconds
between the two most recent measurements for that POINT.

Use the DeltaValue function to calculate the difference in value
between the two most recent measurements for that POINT.

Use the PercentChange function to calculate the percent change
between the two most recent measurements for that POINT. The
formula will look like this:
(LastValue – PreviousValue) / PreviousValue
Important – After initial setup of a derived POINT that references variables
(POINTs) with existing data records, you must manually calculate the derived
POINT to immediately acquire derived POINT data based upon the variable POINTs’
historical data records. Reference the Calculating Derived POINTs section later in
this chapter for details.
Share As
•
Click Share As to make the expression a shared expression. The Enter Name
dialog displays.
•
Enter a name for the shared expression and click OK.
The new shared expression now appears as an available selection in the dialog's drop
down list. Shared expressions are easily assigned to other POINTs to simplify setup and
maintenance.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 45
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
IMx Setup Tab
Assign alarm groups to your IMx POINT on this tab.
Figure 3 - 20.
The POINT Properties Screen’s IMx Setup Tab.

The POINT Properties / IMx Setup tab displays differently
depending on the POINT type. The following Setup fields apply to
POINTs configured with a General application type.
Alarm Group – Assign the POINT to an Alarm Group. Select an alarm group from the
drop down list. To view information about the selected alarm group, click the View
button. A read-only Alarm Group dialog displays.

Reference the Customize / Alarm settings section for
information on creating alarm groups.
Alarm Relay – Assign an alarm relay to the POINT. If collected data from this POINT
causes an alarm condition, the selected relay activates.
Danger Relay – Assign a danger relay to the POINT. If collected data from this POINT
causes a danger condition, the selected relay activates.
3 - 46
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
Threshold Tab
Assign reference POINTs to your IMx / WMx / DMx POINTs on this tab.

The POINT Properties / Threshold tab displays differently
depending on the DAD and POINT type.
Figure 3 - 21.
The POINT Properties Screen’s Threshold Tab.
Speed Collection – Enter speed collection information in the fields below:
Speed reference - To assign a POINT for speed tag reference, click the Select… button
to browse POINTs.
Speed Ratio – Enter a numerical value for the desired multiple in the Ratio field.
Enable active range – Click to enable data collection for specified range.
Min / Max - Enter the Min / Max range at which data collection occurs.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 47
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
Delta - Enter a value to specify the threshold for acceptable change during
data collection. If difference is greater than the Delta value, data collection
does not occur.
Unit - Enter the unit of measurement.
Process Collection – Enter process collection information in the fields below:
Process reference – To assign a POINT for process reference, click the Select… button
to browse POINTs.
Enable active range – Click to enable data collection for specified range.
Min / Max - Enter the Min / Max range at which data collection occurs.
Delta - Enter a value to specify the threshold for acceptable change during
data collection. If difference is greater than the Delta value, data collection
does not occur.
Units – Enter the units of measurement.
Self Collection – Enter self collection information in the fields below:

A self collection POINT references its own measurement collection
data, rather than another POINT’s measurement collection data.
Enable active range – Click to enable data collection for specified range.
Min / Max – Enter the Min / Max range at which data collection occurs.
Unit – (read-only) Displays the selected POINT’s unit of measurement.
Digital Collection – Enter digital collection information in the fields below:
Digital reference – To assign a POINT for digital reference, click the Select… button to
browse POINTs.
Enable active range – Click to enable data collection for specified active state.
Active State - Specify whether a High or Low (on / off) setting must be
present for data to be collected.
Protection Threshold Levels tab (IMx-M)
Use the Protection Threshold Levels tab to configure an IMx-M process POINT’s
protection threshold levels for the IMx-M’s protection I/O module. The threshold levels
can be configured in a variety of ways using the Protection Threshold Levels tab’s
fields.
3 - 48

These levels should match the levels set in the IMx-M Protection
Configurator utility for the protection I/O module. The levels set
on this tab are for @ptitude Analyst display purposes only and do
not affect the settings in the protection system, alarm status, or
reports.

To display an IMx-M’s POINT Properties screen for an IMx-M
Protection Analog POINT, you must select the General application
type, and DC sensor type on the DAD / POINT Type Selection
dialog.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
Figure 3 - 22.
The POINT Properties Screen’s Protection Threshold Levels Tab.
The Properties area options relate to Alert and Danger alarm detection values specified
in the Settings area. Select from:
None – No protection threshold is set for the POINT.
Level – Measurements exceeding the specified Settings display on the trend
plot when using the protection threshold limits overlay.
Out of Window – Measurements falling outside the specified Settings display
on the trend plot when using the protection threshold limits overlay.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 49
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
Gating Tab
Use the POINT Properties / Gating tab to specify Extended Logic POINTs.

The POINT Properties / Gating tab displays differently
depending on the DAD and POINT type.

Reference Appendix C, Data Collection Gating for more
information about gating.
Figure 3 - 23.
The POINT Properties Screen’s Gating Tab.
Logic Gating Definition – Displays all previously created “shared” gating definitions and
a <Private Logic Gating Definition> option. Use this drop down list to specify whether
you wish to set up a unique <Private Logic Gating Definition> for the current POINT
only, or specify a previously defined “shared” gating definition.
Gating type – Specify the gating type:

For WMx devices, only the Disabled (default) or Triggered gating
options are available.
Triggered – If the specified condition occurs during the specified timeout
period for that POINT, data is collected for that measurement POINT.
However, if the condition does not occur during the specified timeout period,
no data is collected.
3 - 50
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
Extended – After data collection, the device checks that the condition is the
same before saving collected data. For example, if the machine that data is
being collected for shuts down during data collection, the data would not be
saved because the condition has changed since the start of data collection.
Triggered Preemptive / Extended Preemptive – Preemptive POINTs take
precedence over all other POINTs. If a condition occurs for a preemptive
POINT during data collection for a non-preemptive POINT, that data will be
discarded, and the preemptive POINT will collect data instead.
Mode – Specify the mode to define the gating conditions that control when data is
collected.
Bit – Specifies that only one condition must be present for data to be collected.
Byte – Specifies that all conditions must be present for data to be collected.
Combi - (extended gating only) Specifies that a combination of conditions must
be present for data to be collected.
Allow Preemption – Enables a timeout to occur for a preemptive POINT.
Timeout value – Specify how many seconds a POINT will wait for the specified
condition to occur before moving on to the next POINT.
Dwell time – (preemptive POINTs only) Specify how many seconds the POINT must
wait to collect data in order to allow for another preemptive POINT to collect data if its
condition occurs. For example, POINT 1 and POINT 2 are both preemptive POINTs, and
POINT 1 has a dwell time setting of 5 seconds. If during that 5 seconds, a condition
occurs that POINT 2 must collect data for, data will be collected for POINT 2 instead of
POINT 1.
Channels – This section works with the State option buttons to configure whether a
high or low setting must be present on specified channel(s) for data to be collected.
(See State below for details.) The box lists all channels available on the device.
Selection of channels varies depending on your choice in the Mode field.
If Bit is selected in the Mode field, the list displays option buttons. Select the
single channel you would like to configure and set the state using the State
option buttons.
If Byte is selected in the Mode field, all channels are used in gating. Highlight
each channel in turn and set the state using the State option buttons, or
double click to toggle the state.
If Combination is selected in the Mode field, the list displays check boxes.
Select any combination of channels to use with gating and set the state using
the State option buttons.
•
State – Specify whether a High or Low (on / off) setting must be present for data
to be collected. Settings may be configured in the Online Settings / Device tab in
the Customize menu.
Shared Gating
Gates initially created as private gating may be converted into shared gating. To share
a newly created Private gate, select the new Private gate and click the tab’s Share As
button.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 51
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
The Enter Name dialog specifies the gate as a shared gate. When the Enter Name
dialog displays, you will be prompted to give the shared gate a unique name for easy
identification.
•
Enter a name for the shared gate and click the OK button.
The new shared gate now appears as an available selection in the drop down list.
Shared gates are easily assigned to other POINTs to simplify POINT setup and
maintenance.
Schedule Tab
Use the Schedule tab to enter data collection and archiving scheduling information.
@ptitude Analyst allows you to archive collected data using its Scheduler feature, its
Monitor application, or Manually. To archive with @ptitude Analyst’s Scheduler wizard
or with the Monitor application, you must set archive parameters in the POINT
Properties / Scheduler tab and in the Scheduler wizard or Monitor application
respectively.
Figure 3 - 24.
The POINT Properties Screen’s Schedule Tab.
3 - 52
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties

IMPORTANT - Keep current data for, Short term archive, and
Long term archive settings operate ONLY with the Scheduler’s
archive process or when using the Monitor application’s archive
feature. They do not apply to Manual archives.
Data collection specifies the POINT’s data collection schedule, and the overdue for
collection status.
Fields in the data collection portion of the Schedule tab include:
Take data every – Enter a numerical value to indicate how often data should
be collected and select the appropriate units from list box options (Second(s),
Minute(s), Hour(s), Day(s)).

For WMx POINTs, this field is based on the selected device’s
wake-up schedule, which is determined in the View menu’s WMx
Device’s / Device Properties screen. Reference Chapter 2,
Setting Up Your WMx Device for details.

In addition to setting the collection schedule, this option provides
feedback in case a device fails to collect data as scheduled. The
POINT is tagged as overdue for data collection if the time range
between the current date (today) and the last data collection date
is longer than the specified Take data every setting.
Keep current data for – Enter a value to indicate how long to keep (store) the
measurement record in the database’s “current data” bin and select the
appropriate units (Wk(s), Mo(s), Yr(s)). When the specified time from data
collection elapses, and a Scheduled or Monitor archive process is performed,
the measurement is typically moved from the “current data” bin into the “short
term archive” bin (or discarded) as specified in the Short term archive /
Archive data every field.

The Keep current data for field determines the length of time a
measurement is kept before it is archived.
Example - Using an IMx DAD, you may select to Take data every <30 days> and Keep
current data for <1 Yr>. If you use @ptitude Analyst’s Scheduler feature to schedule an
archiving process every month, no archiving will take place for the first year. After the
first year, on a monthly basis, all measurement records in the “current data” bin whose
date / timestamp is older than 1 year from the current date will either be placed in the
“short term archive” bin (if short term criteria are met) or discarded.
Short term archive (optional, but typically enabled)
Fields in the short term archive section include:
Archive data every – Determines whether data leaving the “current data” bin
is archived in the “short term archive” bin. Enter numerical value to indicate
how often data leaving the “current data” bin is stored in the “short term
archive” bin and select appropriate units (Wk(s), Mo(s), Yr(s)). As scheduled
archives occur, measurements leaving the “current data” bin are accepted into
the “short term archive” bin only if this Archive data every setting has expired
since the last measurement was stored in the “short term archive” bin.
Otherwise, they are discarded.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 53
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
Example - To continue with our example of a scheduled monthly archive. If we set this
Archive data every setting to three months, on the 13th month of data collection, the
measurement(s) leaving the “current data” bin are placed in the “short term archive” bin
as there is no data yet stored in the “short term archive” bin. On months 14 and 15,
measurement(s) that exceed the Keep for setting and leaving the “current data” bin are
discarded, as three months have not expired since the last “short term archive” data
was stored. On month 16, measurement(s) leaving the “current data” bin are three
months newer than the last measurement stored in the “short term archive” bin, and
are therefore stored in the “short term archive” bin. Thus, by configuring this setting to
three months, you are able to “thin” the data stored in the “short term archive” bin
(store short term archive data every three months instead of every month).
Keep archive for – Enter a value to indicate how long to keep (store) the
measurement record in the “short term archive” bin and select appropriate
units (Wk(s), Mo(s), Yr(s)). When the specified time of storage elapses, and a
scheduled archive process performed, the measurement is typically moved
from the “short term archive” bin into the “long term archive” bin (or discarded)
as specified in the Long term archive fields.
Fields in the long term archive section include:
Archive data every – Determines whether data leaving the “short term
archive” bin is archived in the “long term archive” bin. Enter numerical value to
indicate how often data leaving the “short term archive” bin is stored in the
“long term archive” bin and select appropriate units (Wk(s), Mo(s), Yr(s)). As
scheduled archives occur, measurements leaving the “short term archive” bin
are accepted into the “long term archive” bin if this Archive data every setting
has expired since the last measurement was stored in the “long term archive”
bin.
Keep archive for – Enter value to indicate how long to keep (store) the
measurement record in the “long term archive” bin and select appropriate
units (Wk(s), Mo(s), Yr(s)). When the specified time of storage elapses, and a
scheduled archive process is performed, the measurement is discarded.
Unscheduled data
The last section of the tab schedules alarm data. In on-line DAD systems, alarm data is
automatically placed in the “Unscheduled data” bin. This setting determines how long
alarm data is stored in the alarm data bin before it is discarded. Fields include:
Keep for – Specify value to indicate the desired length of time to store alarm
data and select appropriate units (Wk(s), Mo(s), Yr(s)). After the specified
storage time elapses, the alarm data is discarded.
3 - 54
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
Filter Keys Tab
Figure 3 - 25.
The POINT Properties Screen’s Filter Keys Tab.
@ptitude Analyst allows you to create Filter Keys which can be associated with POINTs
and Machines for automated filtering purposes. For example, if you activate a “Pump”
filter key for a Group and later filter a hierarchy list using the Filter Key / Pump, then
all Groups with active Pump filter keys display in the filtered Workspace.

Filter key creation is discussed later in this chapter.
Filter key searches list all POINTs or Machines sharing a specified filter key (or multiple
filter keys). The Filter Key tab lists all created filter keys and indicates whether or not
they are currently assigned.
•
Click a specific filter key’s checkbox to associate it to the current POINT.

•
The checkbox appears gray if the filter key is enabled for a parent
hierarchy item.
Click the Filter Key dialog’s OK button to save your filter key assignments.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 55
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
Overall Tab
Setting Alarms – Overview
By setting alarms on your vibration measurements, the hierarchy’s alarm status
indicators allow you to quickly know if any of your monitored components / machines
moved into an alarm condition. If you do not specify measurement alarm settings,
overall vibration level alarms are set to factory defaults.
@ptitude Analyst offers many ways to alarm on machinery vibration levels:
•
Overall vibration alarms
•
Spectral enveloping (narrow band) alarms
•
Spectral band alarms
•
Phase alarms
Of the above, overall vibration alarms are, by far, the most frequently used alarm type
for detection of machinery faults. Overall vibration is the total vibration energy
measured within a specific frequency range. Measured numerically, a higher than
normal overall value provides an indication that "something" is causing the machine or
component to vibrate more. Below we describe how to go about setting your initial
overall vibration alarm levels. However, the same logic may be used to set alarm levels
for other types of alarms.
If yours is a new system and no vibration measurement history exists for the monitored
machinery, the ISO 10816-1 Standard provides guidance for evaluating overall velocity
vibration measurement severity in machines operating in the 10 to 200 Hz (600 to
12,000 RPM) frequency range. Examples of these types of machines are small, direct
coupled, electric motors and pumps, production motors, medium motors, generators,
steam and gas turbines, turbo compressors, turbo pumps and fans.
It is possible for a machine to be in the early stages of wear or damage and still meet
the criteria in these ISO 10816-1 guidelines. While the Standard can provide a quick
indication of machines that are in serious trouble; long term overall vibration level
trending and experience with a machine’s history provide much more accurate
information on where to set your machinery vibration alarm levels.
Once you have collected enough measurement data (e.g., six data sets), SKF @ptitude
Analyst can display meaningful trends of each measurement’s data. Over time, when
you are convinced that the measurement’s trending vibration level indicates the
component’s known good condition, you may designate it as the measurement’s
“baseline” vibration level, upon which you set two overall vibration alarm levels for
detection of machinery faults, the “alert” level and the “danger” level. Where to set
these two overall alarm levels is the question.
3 - 56
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
Figure 3 - 26.
Example Trend Plot with Alert (Yellow) and Danger (Red) Alarm Levels.
In general, it is most desirable to specify alert alarm settings high enough to minimize
extraneous alarms, yet conservative enough to not miss a critical excursion in machine
condition. In addition, initially you should set “loose” alarm levels so as to avoid false
alarms. False alarms significantly degrade confidence in the condition monitoring
system’s accuracy. Over time, as you continue to better understand your machinery’s
vibration levels and gain confidence in the accuracy of your vibration measurements,
you may “tighten” the initial alarm levels to acquire earlier detection of machine faults.
A general rule of thumb is to initially set alert alarm levels at one and a half to twice the
baseline levels for measurements. This “alert” alarm level should indicate that a
problem has developed and more frequent monitoring and analysis should occur. Fault
analysis should be initiated and the severity and root cause of the problem should be
established. In addition, analysis results should determine whether necessary repair
parts are ordered, and the date for repair should be established based on minimum
production interruption.
The initial “danger” level alarm is typically set from two and a half to three times the
baseline vibration level. In general, if the danger alarm is reached on a critical machine,
it should be scheduled for repairs as soon as possible. Again, over time, after more
experience with said machine and your vibration measurements, the alarm level can be
adjusted to better fit the specific component / machine.
On bearing measurements, an accurate enveloped acceleration measurement alert
alarm indicates that a bearing is approaching the end of its usable lifetime. Upon such
an alarm, you should more closely monitor the bearing using spectrum analysis with
bearing fault frequency markers to verify the bearing fault and determine proactive
maintenance measures, or to plan the most efficient bearing replacement during a
scheduled machine outage.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 57
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
Once a good operating baseline is established and sufficient data and experience have
been acquired for you to set your initial alert and danger overall vibration alarm levels,
SKF @ptitude Analyst provides a Statistical Overall Alarms Wizard that guides you
through a process that automatically generates overall alarm settings based upon
historical measurement data (reference the Statistical Alarms Wizard section later in
this chapter for details).
The Overall tab allows you to re-apply previously defined “shared” overall alarms,
eliminating the need to define alarms individually, saving time and database space.
Use the Overall tab to set a process POINT’s overall alarm settings. The alarm can be
configured in a variety of ways using the Overall tab’s fields.
The current alarm appears in the Overall alarm field. The current alarm’s values
display below in the tab’s Properties and Settings areas.
Figure 3 - 27.
The POINT Properties Screen’s Overall Tab.
3 - 58
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
The Overall alarms drop down list displays all previously created overall alarms and a
<Private Alarm> option. Use this drop down list to specify whether you wish to set up
a unique <Private Alarm> for the current POINT only, or specify a previously defined
“shared” alarm (selected by name). If you specify a shared alarm, its alarm settings
automatically display in subsequent fields. If you specify a Private Alarm, proceed to
configure the tab’s alarm settings as described below.
The Properties area options relate to Alert and Danger alarm detection values specified
in the Settings area. Select from:
None – No overall alarm is set for the POINT.
Level – Measurements exceeding the specified Settings will result in an alarm
condition.
In Window – Measurements falling within the specified Settings will result in
an alarm condition.
Out of Window – Measurements falling outside the specified Settings will
result in an alarm condition.
To assign a shared alarm to the current POINT:
•
Select the shared alarm from the drop down list and click the OK button. Shared
alarms may be applied to an unlimited number of POINTs.
Shared Alarm
Alarms initially created as private alarms may be converted into shared alarms. To
share a newly created Private alarm, select the new Private alarm and click the tab’s
Share As button.
The Share As dialog specifies the alarm as a shared alarm. When the Share As dialog
displays, you will be prompted to give the shared alarm a unique name for easy
identification.
•
Enter a name for the shared alarm and click the OK button.
The new shared alarm now appears as an available selection in the drop down list.
Shared alarms are easily assigned to other POINTs to simplify POINT setup and
maintenance.
Variable Speed Alarms
As a machine’s speed increases, the overall vibration increases. In order to accurately
determine if measurements are in alarm, alarm levels should be adjusted based on the
machine’s speed levels. @ptitude Analyst’s variable speed alarms allow you to
customize overall and band alarm levels based on machine speed.
Variable speed alarms are available for IMx / WMx dynamic POINTs that reference a
speed POINT.
The POINT Properties / Speed Alarm tab allows you to specify the POINT’s alarm
adjustments for each speed region.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 59
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
Figure 3 - 28.
The POINT Properties’ Speed Alarm Tab.
Speed alarm fields include:
Speed Alarm – Specify a private or shared alarm from the drop down list.
Range – Select the speed regions for which the Properties settings will apply. You may
select the region from the Range drop down list, or by clicking on the specific region on
the speed alarm display. The values in the Properties fields update to reflect the
specified speed region.
•
Click Insert to add a new region to the speed alarm.
•
Click Clear to remove the selected speed region.
Start / End Range– Enter each region’s start and end RPMs (i.e., 0 to 1000, 1000 to
2000, 2000 to 3000, etc.).
Ratio – Enter the adjustment to overall and band alarm levels. The normal running
speed region's ratio will be 100. If the next higher speed range is expected to produce
vibration levels 10% higher than the nominal running speed, then the next speed range
ratio would be set to 110.
Linear – (always enabled for IMx / WMx POINTs) This option allows for either a flat,
rectangular definition of the adjustment (if disabled, the entire region will have the same
3 - 60
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
ratio), or a more linear definition of the ratio (if enabled, the ratio will start from the
level defined in the previous speed region and rise throughout the region until it reaches
the next speed region's level).
Deadband – When enabled, no alarm processing will occur for this region. This is
mainly to be used when the machine reaches its resonant speed, at which vibration will
be indeterminately high. When enabled, Ratio and Linear fields are disabled.
The variable speed alarm settings produce a table of speed ratios for the POINT. When
data is collected, the overall alarm value is multiplied by the speed ratio before it is
compared to the overall value returned from the sensor to determine whether the
POINT is in alarm. When viewing a trend display, the variable speed alarm overlay
adjusts based on the speed of the measurement.
Figure 3 - 29.
Trend Display with Variable Speed Alarm Overlay.
Figure 3 - 30.
Band Trend Display with Variable Speed Alarm Overlay.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 61
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
Shared Alarm
Variable speed alarm adjustments initially created as private definitions may be
converted into shared definitions. To share a newly created Private definition, select the
new Private definition and click the tab’s Share As button.
The Share As dialog specifies the definition as a shared definition. When the Share As
dialog displays, you will be prompted to give the shared definition a unique name for
easy identification. Enter a name for the shared definition and click the OK button.
The new shared definition now appears as an available selection in the drop down list.
Shared definitions are easily assigned to other POINTs to simplify POINT setup and
maintenance.
Messages
The Messages tab allows you to apply previously defined “shared” alarm messages, and
to create new alarm messages for various overall alarm levels.
Figure 3 - 31.
The POINT Properties Screen’s Messages Tab.
3 - 62
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
@ptitude Analyst's POINT Properties / Messages feature allows you to create and
assign four alarm messages corresponding to the four overall alarm levels; Overall
Alert High, Overall Alert Low, Overall Danger High, and Overall Danger Low. The
Messages context area displays the message context available for message assignment
and any existing alarm messages already applied. You can assign a created public
alarm message to one or more alarm levels, or create a new private alarm message
and apply it to the selected POINT.
The Name drop down list displays all previously created alarm messages and a
<Private> option. Use this drop down list to specify whether you wish to set up a
unique <Private> message for the current POINT only, or specify a previously defined
“shared” message (selected by name). If you specify a shared message, its format,
summary, and content automatically display in subsequent fields. If you specify a
Private message, proceed to configure the message settings as described below.

For more information on creating and managing public alarm
messages, refer to the Customize / Database Operations section
later in this chapter.
Format – This drop down list allows you to specify your alarm message's format.
Free form – Allows you to manually type in the summary and content for your
alarm message.
Summary – Type in text summarizing your alarm message for easy recognition. For
example, if you have an alarm message that details shut down instructions in the case
of an overall danger high alarm level, your summary may read, "Emergency Shut Down
Instructions."
Content – Enter your complete alarm message in the content text area. Using the
above example, your alarm message content would include detailed shut down
instructions, and any other pertinent information required in the case of the triggered
alarm type.
To assign a shared message to the current POINT:
•
Select the shared message from the drop down list and click the OK button.
Shared messages may be applied to an unlimited number of POINTs.
Shared Message
Alarm messages initially created as private messages may be converted into shared
(public) messages. To share a newly created Private message, select the new Private
message and click the tab’s Share As button.
The Enter Name dialog specifies the message as a shared (public) message. When the
Enter Name dialog displays, you will be prompted to give the shared message a unique
name for easy identification.
•
Enter a name for the shared message and click the OK button.
•
The new shared message now appears as an available selection in the dialog's drop
down list. Shared messages are easily assigned to other POINTs to simplify POINT
setup and maintenance.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 63
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
Frequencies Tab
The POINT Properties screen’s Frequencies tab allows you to re-apply previously
defined Frequency Sets, or configure a new fault Frequency Set to attach to the
current POINT.
Figure 3 - 32.
The POINT Properties Screen’s Frequencies Tab.
You can select a frequency shared with other POINTs or create a private frequency set
for use with the current POINT only.
To assign a shared frequency set to the current POINT:
•
Select the shared frequency set from the Frequency Set drop down list. The
corresponding included frequencies appear in the tab’s Included frequencies area.
•
Click OK to assign the selected set to the current POINT.
Use the Frequency tab to create a private set for use with the current POINT only.
3 - 64
•
Check the Private frequency set checkbox. <Private frequencies> displays in the
tab’s Frequency Set field.
•
Click the Edit Set button. The Frequency Sets Editor dialog opens automatically.
•
Complete edits and click OK.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
The Frequencies tab also allows you to create a private set based on an existing shared
set. This is convenient when your new frequency set is only slightly different from an
existing frequency set.

When a shared frequency set is made private, changes made to
the shared set will not be reflected in private sets.
To edit a shared set for private use:
•
Select the shared frequency set you wish to modify from the Frequency Set drop
down list.
•
Click the Private Frequency set box. The Frequency Sets Editor dialog opens.
•
Complete edits and click OK.

Refer to the Frequency Sets section in this chapter for more
information on Frequency Sets.
Notes Tab
The POINT Properties / Notes tab allows you to attach a text note to the POINT along
with a date / time stamp. This feature conveniently stores and records relevant POINT
information such as maintenance history.

Coded notes uploaded from the on-line device for the current
Machine display in the Notes tab.
•
Click the Notes tab’s Add button to add a new note and date / time stamp.
•
Click the Save button to save edits made to a note.
•
Click the Undo button to cancel edits made to a note.
•
Click the Remove button to remove the selected note from the display.
POINT Properties / Notes fields include:
Date – Select the current date from the drop down list.
Time – Select the current time.
The selected date and time appear in the tab’s left Notes field.
Text – Type in desired note text in the text field.
•
Click the tab’s OK button to save all entries.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 65
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
Images Tab
Scanned photographs or digital images can be added to a particular POINT, stored in
the Hierarchy, and viewed from the Images tab. Images help identify SETs / machines,
organize similar equipment, and document known defects.
POINT Properties / Images fields include:
Image – All attached images display in the drop down list.
Description – Enter text to identify the image. Click the Save button to save your
description entry. If saved, the new description replaces the filename in the Images list.
To add a new image:
•
Click the Add button to add a new image. The Windows’ Open dialog displays.
Select desired image and click Open to add or Cancel to undo.

Added images use the filename as the default description.
To replace the current image file with a newer image:
•
Click the Browse button.
•
Select a replacement image file. The new image displays on the tab.

The image name and description of the old image are retained for
the replacement image.
•
Click Save to confirm the image replacement.
•
Click Cancel to undo the image replacement.
To export an image to a specific location:
•
Select the image to export.
•
Click the Export button.
•
When prompted, enter the desired export location and filename and click OK.
The image is copied and saved to the specified location, but still remains attached to the
assigned POINT.
3 - 66
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
Baseline Tab
A Baseline is a measurement taken when the machine is in “known good” operating
condition. Baseline spectra are used for analysis comparison with future spectral
measurement results.

The POINT Properties / Baseline tab is available only when the
current POINT has stored spectral data. If there is no collected
FFT or overall data, the Baseline tab does not appear.
Figure 3 - 33.
The POINT Properties Screen’s Baseline Tab.
To specify a POINT’s baseline spectrum:
•
Select the POINT in the hierarchy list.
•
Right-click to display the POINT’s context menu and select the Properties option.
The POINT Properties screen displays.
•
Select the Baseline tab.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 67
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
Current Baseline
The Current baseline field lists measurement record timestamps for the POINT’s
stored measurements. Click to specify the measurement to use as the baseline
spectrum. The specified measurement’s spectrum displays graphically in the tab’s lower
area.

A No baseline option appears in the drop down list as the default,
and to clear the current baseline selection.

In the drop down list, the assigned baseline is tagged for easy
recognition.
All measurements with FFT or overall data for the current POINT appear with a
time/date stamp in the Current Baseline drop down list. The last assigned baseline is
tagged for easy recognition. The current baseline value is indicated by “ ___ date / ___
time” in the Current baseline field.
Phase Tab

This tab is available only if the POINT has stored phase data.
Figure 3 - 34.
The POINT Properties Screen’s Phase Tab.
3 - 68
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
Polar vector plots show vibration amplitude and phase. The phase angle is the angle
the shaft travels from the start of a triggering event to when the point at which the
sensor experiences maximum positive force. This relationship provides valuable
information on shaft orbit and shaft position and is used for analysis, balancing, and
shaft orbital analysis.
The POINT Properties / Phase tab set up area specifies polar vector alarm settings,
and provides a graphical display of the defined alert and danger acceptance regions.
Orders are multiples of running speed. Use the Order drop down list box to assign new
acceptance regions to a specific order of the phase measurement (1X, 2X, 3X, 4X).
Alert / Danger alarm fields
•
Click the Alert or Danger checkbox to enable set-up of an alert or danger
acceptance region.
•
Use text box operations to enter Min Mag., Max Mag., Min Phase, and Max Phase
polar vector settings.
A summary of Enabled alarms displays vertically in the tab’s lower left column. Alarm
settings may also be defined graphically with drag and drop operations.
To define graphically:
•
Move the mouse cursor over the line to be modified.
•
Depress and hold the left mouse button and drag the line to its new location before
releasing the mouse button.
•
Click the SET button to apply alarm settings.
Band Tab
Band Alarms provide alert and danger alarms on both peak and spectral values within a
defined frequency band. Use the Band tab to Add new band alarms for the POINT, or
Load existing “shared” and “private” band alarms for the POINT.

Loaded band alarms may not be edited from this tab. Use the
Customize menu’s Alarm Settings option to edit “shared” and
“private” alarm parameters.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 69
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
Figure 3 - 35.
The POINT Properties Screen’s Band Tab.
The current band alarm name appears in the Band alarms field. All available band
alarms are listed in the drop down list.
To Load “shared” and “private” alarms to the selected POINT:
•
Click the Band tab’s Load button, the Load Band Alarms dialog displays all
available “shared” and “private” band alarms by name. Enable all band alarms to
assign to the POINT and click OK. The names of the enabled band alarms appear in
the Band tab’s Band Alarms drop down list.
To add a new band alarm for the POINT:

•
You may mix added band alarms with loaded band alarms.
However, only added band alarms may be edited from this tab.
Click the Band tab’s Add button, the tab’s Band Information fields become
available.
Edit and view alarm values in the tab's Band information area. The band name
appears in the Label field.
3 - 70
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
The following fields are available for viewing set values or editing:
Label – Enter band name.
Low freq – View or edit the low frequency value or multiple of running speed.
High freq – View or edit the high frequency value or multiple of running speed.

In Low and High Frequency fields, you may specify a multiple of
running speed by adding x to the end of the number. For
example, enter “1.5x” for 1.5 times running speed.
Peak danger – View or edit the peak danger value or % Full Scale value.
Peak alert – View or edit the peak alert danger value or % Full Scale value.

In Peak and Overall alarm fields, you may specify the alarm
setpoint as a percentage of full scale by adding “%” to the end of
the entered number. For example, enter “10%” to set the alarm
at 10 percent of the full scale value.
Overall danger – View or edit the overall danger value or % Full Scale value.
Overall alert – View or edit the overall alert value or % Full Scale value.

The tab's spectrum graphic display automatically updates as edits
are made.
Download to IMx – Enable to download band alarm to the IMx. The IMx supports a
total of four band alarms per POINT. If more than four band alarms are defined for the
POINT, select the four band alarms you wish to download to the IMx. The remaining
band alarms are evaluated by @ptitude Analyst during post-processing. An asterisk (*)
displays next to each band alarm’s name if the band alarm is enabled to download to
the IMx.
Edits may be made on the tab's spectrum graphic display.
To edit the band graphically:
Spectrum source - If two or more POINTs are currently active, specify the POINT
whose spectrum you wish to graphically display.
Spectrum - using its time record, specify the spectrum measurement to display.
Once the proper spectrum is displayed, specify the band alarm to edit from the Band
Alarms drop down list. Notice the mouse pointer changes when positioned over a band
alarm parameter (line) on the graphic.
•
Click on the line of the band to edit and drag the line to its new position. The value
in the affected field automatically updates to reflect your setting.
•
Use the Save or Undo buttons to save or undo changes for the current band alarm
edit. After editing all necessary band alarms, use the tab’s OK or Cancel buttons to
save all edited band alarms with the POINT, or cancel all edited and new band
alarm efforts.
The total number of band alarms appears in the upper right corner of the tab’s Band
information area. Use the up and down arrow buttons to navigate between band
alarms.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 71
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
•
Click the Show all bands checkbox to display all available band alarms on the
spectrum display. The checkbox is not available when editing a band.
•
Click Share As to make the current band alarm a shared alarm. The Enter Name
dialog displays. Enter a name and click OK.
•
Click Add to create a new band alarm.
•
Click Remove to remove the current band alarm. A confirmation dialog displays.
•
Confirm action. The band alarm is deleted.

A band alarm may not be removed if it is currently assigned.
Load Band Alarms
Use the Load Band Alarms dialog to select “shared” and “private” band alarm(s) for the
active POINT. All available “shared” and “private” band alarms display.
•
Click the checkbox to select alarm(s) to be included / assigned to the active POINT.

•
“Private” alarms appear within square brackets.
Click OK to select, Cancel to close dialog without saving selections.

You may sort the available “shared” and “private” alarms by band
alarm name, inclusion status (included or excluded), or frequency
range.
Envelope Tab
Use the POINT Properties' Envelope tab to specify a "total spectrum" envelope alarm for
the POINT. You can select from a list of previously created envelope alarms or edit a
private (unique) alarm for the current POINT.

3 - 72
Only IMx firmware version 9.7 and newer supports enveloped
alarms for filters 1, 2, and 3 only. @ptitude Analyst evaluates any
defined alarms during post-processing.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
Figure 3 - 36.
The POINT Properties Screen’s Envelope Tab.
All available envelope alarms display in the Envelope alarm drop down list, or you may
generate a new envelope alarm.
Shared envelope alarms may not be edited from this tab (use the Customize menu’s
Alarm Database option to edit "shared" alarm parameters).
•
First, select the FFT spectrum to which the envelope alarm will conform, using:
Spectrum source – specifies from which POINT to graphically display the spectrum if
two or more POINTs are currently active.
Spectrum – displays all available time record measurements for the active POINT
(typically the baseline measurement) in a drop down list. The current spectrum displays
graphically below.
To assign a "shared" envelope alarm to the POINT:
•
On the Envelope tab, select the desired shared envelope alarm’s name from the
Envelope Alarms drop down list, the tab fields display the specified alarm’s settings
and the specified envelope appears on the displayed spectrum.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 73
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Properties
To generate a new envelope alarm for the POINT:
•
Select the Envelope Alarms drop down list’s <Custom envelope> option.
•
Click the Generate button. The Generate Envelope Alarm dialog displays.
Use the Generate Envelope Alarm Dialog to create an envelope alarm based on your
entered values.
% Overdrive – Enter the percent of the POINT’s full scale value to determine the height
of the envelope alarm above the spectral peak. The smaller the number specified, the
tighter the comparison envelope conforms to the designated spectrum.
Spreading % – Enter percent of full scale (or center frequency) to increase the width of
the envelope alarm around spectral peaks. The smaller the number specified, the
tighter the envelope conforms to the sides of the peaks in the specified spectrum.
Spreading Type – (either Center Frequency or Full Scale). If Center Freq. is selected,
the bandwidth about each center frequency increases with higher frequencies. If Full
Scale is selected, the bandwidth about each center frequency is constant, based on a
percent of the full scale frequency.
Threshold – Enter % of the POINT’s full scale value, or an absolute value. The threshold
value provides an opportunity to eliminate false alarms due to vibration "noise." It also
establishes the envelope alarm’s low amplitude "threshold" on the displayed spectrum.
The envelope alarm conforms around all peaks whose amplitudes are higher than the
established threshold as per the Overdrive %, Spreading %, and Spreading Type
settings. All peaks below the established threshold are ignored by the envelope alarm.
The Threshold % default value is set using the Customize menu’s Preferences / Plot
tab.
•
Click OK to generate an envelope alarm based on your entries. Click Cancel to
close the dialog without creating an envelope alarm.
Editing the Envelope Alarm
After you have generated an envelope alarm, you can edit it graphically using your
mouse, or enter numeric envelope parameters using the Set Frequency Range dialog.
To graphically edit the envelope alarm:
•
Click anywhere inside the Envelope dialog’s spectrum window. The cursor appears
as an up arrow.
•
Click the mouse on the portion of the envelope alarm line to be edited. A square
icon identifies where the line will be drawn.
•
Drag the mouse to draw the line to create the new envelope alarm.
•
Click the dialog’s OK button to save your changes.
Tip - You can use your keyboard’s Insert key to begin drawing the envelope alarm line.
Then, use the arrow keys to move the line, and the Insert key again to stop drawing the
line.
3 - 74
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Setup Log
To edit the envelope alarm using numeric frequency ranges:
•
Click the Set Range button. The Set Frequency Range dialog displays.
•
Use the Set Frequency Range dialog to enter low frequency, high frequency, and
level values to edit an existing envelope alarm.
To numerically edit an envelope alarm:
•
Enter the desired low frequency, high frequency, and level value.
•
Click OK. The displayed envelope alarm automatically conforms to your entries.
Share As
•
Click Share As to make the envelope alarm a shared alarm. The Enter Name
dialog displays.
•
After completing the POINT’s envelope alarm setup, click the OK button to save the
envelope alarm with the POINT.
Setup Log
The POINT Properties’ Setup Log tab records changes made to the POINT’s
configuration.
POINT Properties / Setup Log fields include:
Date/Time – Displays the date/time stamp when the change occurred.
User – Displays the user’s name that made the change.
Category – Displays the POINT properties tab to which changes were made.
Previous Value – Displays the previous value before the current change occurred.
Reason – Displays the user entered reason for making a change to the POINT’s
configuration. If no reason is required or entered, this column is empty.

When you make a change to a POINT’s properties, you are
requested to enter a reason for the change. Reference Chapter 2
- Setting Your @ptitude Analyst Preferences in the SKF
@ptitude Analyst Introduction and Global Features user
manual for details.
Save As – Click to save a copy of the log file to your computer’s hard drive.
Print – Click to print a copy of the log file.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 75
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Setting Up a Control POINT
Setting Up a Control POINT
To choose a control POINT for the POINT being configured:
Click the Control POINT Select button on the POINT Properties screen’s Setup tab to
bring up the Control POINT Selection dialog.

The control POINT and its dependent POINT do not need to be in
the same online device, but must be in the same Hierarchy.
In the list, click to select the POINT's control POINT (or select None, for no control
POINT).
Gating - POINT Configuration Rules
There are three rules for setting up control and dependent POINTs.
Rule 1. There is no limit to how many dependent POINTs a control POINT can
have, as all evaluation is done in the WMx / IMx Service and not downloaded to
the device.
Rule 2. A dependent POINT can have only one control POINT.
In the figure below, data is collected for control POINT A prior to collecting data on each
dependent POINT. Data will be collected for a dependent POINT only if control POINT
A's alarm criteria are met.
Dependent POINT 1
Control POINT A
Dependent POINT 2
Dependent POINT n
Figure 3 - 37.
Gating Rules 1 and 2.
Rule 3. A control POINT can also be a dependent POINT, that is, it can also be
controlled.

3 - 76
The calculation of a derived POINT cannot be a dependent of a
POINT that is in alarm.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Setting Up a Control POINT
Control POINT A
Control POINT B
Control POINT Y
Dependent POINT z
Figure 3 - 38.
Gating Rule 3.
In the figure above, data is collected for control POINT A prior to collecting data on its
dependents (control POINTs B through Z). If control POINT A's alarm criteria are met,
data will be collected on control POINT B. If control POINT B's alarm criteria are met,
data will be taken on its dependent POINT and so on down to dependent POINT Z. This
implies that all of the conditions of control POINTs A through Y must be met to collect
data on dependent POINT Z.
The figure below is an example of a combination of the three rules for setting up control
and dependent POINTs.
Control POINT A
Control POINT B
Dependent POINT C
Dependent POINT 2
Figure 3 - 39.
A Combination of Gating Rules 1, 2, and 3.
If control POINT A's alarm criteria are met, data will be collected on control POINT B
and dependent POINT 2. If control POINT B's alarm criteria are met, data will be
collected on dependent POINT C. The possible combinations are endless.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 77
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Setup Validation Dialog
POINT Setup Validation Dialog
The POINT Setup Validation Dialog launches when you enter incompatible or erroneous
information on the Setup or Expressions tabs.
The POINT Setup Validation dialog displays both errors and recommendations. For
recommendations, a message box displays prior to the POINT Setup Validation dialog,
which allows you to ignore or view the POINT Setup Validation dialog.
Figure 3 - 40.
The POINT Setup Validation Recommendation Message Box.
•
If you do not wish to see the POINT Setup Validation Message Box for
recommendations or warnings, uncheck and disable the Show this message box
again checkbox.

•
Press Yes to view the POINT Setup Validation dialog.

3 - 78
You may also modify this preference from the Customize menu's
Preferences screen.
Press No if you wish to close the message box without viewing the
recommendation details.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
POINT Setup Validation Dialog
Figure 3 - 41.
The POINT Setup Validation Dialog for the Setup Tab.
Figure 3 - 42.
The POINT Setup Validation Dialog for the Expressions Tab.

The POINT Setup Validation dialog displays automatically for
settings in error, and after the message box for settings that are
recommendations or warnings.
You may edit POINT setup information while the POINT Setup Validation dialog is
displayed. Simply move the dialog out of the way, and make any changes to your
POINT Properties / Setup or Expressions tab while referencing the errors or
recommendations.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 79
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Multiple POINT Properties
•
Press the Refresh button if you have made corrective changes to your POINT
Properties / Setup or Expressions tab in the background. If you have eliminated
the error or recommendation, they will no longer display in the POINT Setup
Validation dialog.
•
Press the Close button to close the POINT Setup Validation dialog and return to
the POINT Properties Setup or Expressions tab.
Multiple POINT Properties
The Multiple POINT Properties screen is available when more than one POINT is
selected. This screen provides a set of tabs to view and modify set-up parameters
common among the set of selected POINTs. The type of POINTs selected determine
which tabs display in the Multiple POINT Properties screen.

Configured parameters overwrite each selected POINT’s previous
settings.
Schedule Tab
The Schedule tab allows you to set a common schedule for all the currently selected
POINTs.
Fields in the data collection portion of the Schedule tab include:
Take data every – Enter a numerical value to indicate how often data should
be collected and select the appropriate units from list box options (Second(s),
Minute(s), Hour(s), Day(s)). The POINT is tagged as overdue for data
collection if the time range between the current date (today) and the last data
collection date is longer than the specified Take data every setting.

The Take data every field is used to determine if a POINT is
overdue for data collection.
Keep current data for – Enter a value to indicate how long to keep (store) the
measurement record in the database’s “current data” bin and select the
appropriate units (Wk(s), Mo(s), Yr(s)). When the specified time from data
collection elapses, and a Scheduled or Monitor archive process is performed,
the measurement is typically moved from the “current data” bin into the “short
term archive” bin (or discarded) as specified in the Short term archive /
Archive data every field.

The Keep current data for field determines the length of time a
measurement is kept before it is archived.
Short term archive (optional, but typically enabled)
Fields in the short term archive section include:
Archive data every – Determines whether data leaving the “current data” bin
is archived in the “short term archive” bin. Enter numerical value to indicate
how often data leaving the “current data” bin is stored in the “short term
archive” bin and select appropriate units (Wk(s), Mo(s), Yr(s)). As scheduled
archives occur, measurements leaving the “current data” bin are accepted into
3 - 80
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Multiple POINT Properties
the “short term archive” bin only if this Archive data every setting has expired
since the last measurement was stored in the “short term archive” bin.
Otherwise, they are discarded.
Keep archive for – Enter a value to indicate how long to keep (store) the
measurement record in the “short term archive” bin and select appropriate
units (Wk(s), Mo(s), Yr(s)). When the specified time of storage elapses, and a
scheduled archive process performed, the measurement is typically moved
from the “short term archive” bin into the “long term archive” bin (or discarded)
as specified in the Long term archive fields.
Fields in the long term archive section include:
Archive data every – Determines whether data leaving the “short term
archive” bin is archived in the “long term archive” bin. Enter numerical value to
indicate how often data leaving the “short term archive” bin is stored in the
“long term archive” bin and select appropriate units (Wk(s), Mo(s), Yr(s)). As
scheduled archives occur, measurements leaving the “short term archive” bin
are accepted into the “long term archive” bin if this Archive data every setting
has expired since the last measurement was stored in the “long term archive”
bin.
Keep archive for – Enter value to indicate how long to keep (store) the
measurement record in the “long term archive” bin and select appropriate
units (Wk(s), Mo(s), Yr(s)). When the specified time of storage elapses, and a
scheduled archive process is performed, the measurement is discarded.
Unscheduled data
The last section of the tab schedules alarm data. In on-line DAD systems, alarm data is
automatically placed in the “Unscheduled data” bin. This setting determines how long
alarm data is stored in the alarm data bin before it is discarded. Fields include:
Keep for – Specify value to indicate the desired length of time to store alarm
data and select appropriate units (Wk(s), Mo(s), Yr(s)). After the specified
storage time elapses, the alarm data is discarded.
Filter Keys Tab
@ptitude Analyst allows you to create Filter Keys which can be associated with POINTs
and Machines for automated filtering purposes. For example, if you activated a “Pump”
filter key for a Group and later filtered by Filter Key / Pump, the group would display.

Filter key creation is discussed later in this chapter.
Filter key searches list all POINTs or Machines sharing a specified filter key (or multiple
filter keys). The Filter Key tab displays all created filter keys and indicates whether or
not they are currently assigned.
•
Click a specific Filter Key’s checkbox to associate it with the current Group.
•
Click the Filter Key tab’s OK button to save your filter key assignments.

The checkbox appears gray if the filter key is assigned to the
current group only because it was assigned to the group’s parent.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 81
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Multiple POINT Properties

Click the Filter Key tab’s OK button to save your filter key
assignments.
Overall Tab
The Overall tab allows you to re-apply previously defined “shared” overall alarms,
eliminating the need to define alarms individually, saving time and database space.
Figure 3 - 43.
The Multiple POINT Properties Screen's Overall Tab.
Use the Overall tab to set POINTs’ overall alarms. The alarm can be configured in a
variety of ways using the Overall tab’s fields.
The current alarm appears in the Overall alarm field. The current alarm’s values
display below in the tab’s Properties and Settings areas.
The Overall alarms drop down list displays all previously created overall alarms and a
<Private Alarm> option. Use this drop down list to specify whether you wish to set up
a unique <Private Alarm> for the current POINTs only, or specify a previously defined
“shared” alarm (selected by name). If you specify a shared alarm, it’s alarm settings
automatically display in subsequent fields. If you specify a <Private Alarm>, proceed to
configure the tab’s alarm settings as described below.
3 - 82
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Multiple POINT Properties
The Properties area displays alarm detection options. Select from:
None – No overall alarm is set for the POINTs.
Level – Measurements exceeding the set levels will result in an alarm
condition.
In Window – Measurements falling within the set levels will result in an alarm
condition.
Out of Window – Measurements falling outside the set levels will result in an
alarm condition.
To assign a shared alarm to the current POINTs:
•
Select the shared alarm from the drop down list and click the OK button. Shared
alarms may be applied to an unlimited number of POINTs.
Shared Alarm
Alarms initially created as private alarms may be converted into shared alarms. To
share a newly created Private alarm, select the new Private alarm and click the tab’s
Share As button.
The Share As dialog specifies the alarm as a shared alarm. When the Share As dialog
displays, you will be prompted to give the shared alarm a unique name for easy
identification.
•
Enter a name for the shared alarm and click the OK button.
The new shared alarm now appears as an available selection in the drop down list.
Shared alarms are easily assigned to other POINTs to simplify POINT setup and
maintenance.
Frequencies Tab
The Multiple POINT Properties screen’s Frequencies tab allows you to reapply
previously defined Frequency Sets, or configure a new fault Frequency Set to attach to
the current POINT.
The <Private Alarm> is used to set the same alarm values for all currently selected
POINTs, yet making the alarm definition private for each POINT. This option may be
used when you know all the selected POINTs will have unique alarm values, but the
initial settings will be the same.
To assign a shared frequency set to the current POINTs:
•
Select the shared frequency set from the drop down list. The corresponding
included frequencies appear in the Included frequencies portion of the tab.

•
Two additional options are available, <No selection made> and
<No frequencies>. Use the <No selection made> option when
no changes to the current frequency setting for the POINTs are
needed. Use the <No frequencies> option to clear all frequency
settings for all selected POINTs.
Click OK to assign the selected set to the current POINT.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 83
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Multiple POINT Properties
Band Tab
Band Alarms provide alert and danger alarms on both peak and spectral values within a
defined frequency band. Use the Band tab to Add new band alarms for the active
POINTs, or Load existing “shared” band alarms for the POINTs.

Loaded band alarms may not be edited from this tab. Use the
Customize menu’s Alarm Database option to edit “shared”
alarm parameters.
The current band alarm name appears in the Band alarms field. All available band
alarms are listed in the drop down list.
To Load “shared” alarms to the selected POINTs:
•
Click the Band tab’s Load button, the Load Band Alarms dialog displays all
available “shared” band alarms by name. Enable all band alarms to assign to the
POINT and click OK. The names of the enabled band alarms appear in the Band
tab’s Band Alarms drop down list.
To Add a new band alarm for the POINTs.

•
You may mix added band alarms with loaded band alarms.
However, only added band alarms may be edited from this tab.
Click the Band tab’s Add button, the tab’s Band Information fields become available.
Edit and view alarm values in the tab's Band information area. The band name
appears in the Label field.
The following fields are available for viewing set values or editing:
Label – Enter band name.
Low freq – View or edit the low frequency value or multiple of running speed.
High freq – View or edit the high frequency value or multiple of running speed.

In Low and High Frequency fields, you may specify a multiple of
running speed by adding x to the end of the number. For
example, enter “1.5x” for 1.5 times running speed.
Peak danger – View or edit the peak danger value or % Full Scale value.
Peak alert – View or edit the peak alert danger value or % Full Scale value.
Overall danger – View or edit the overall danger value or % Full Scale value.
Overall alert – View or edit the overall alert value or % Full Scale value.

In Peak and Overall alarm fields, you may specify the alarm
setpoint as a percentage of full scale by adding “%” to the end of
the entered number. For example, enter “10%” to set the alarm
at 10 percent of the full scale value.

The tab's spectrum graphic display automatically updates as edits
are made.
Edits may also be made on the tab's spectrum graphic display.
3 - 84
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Multiple POINT Properties
To edit the band graphically:
Spectrum source - If two or more POINTs are currently active, specify the POINT
whose spectrum you wish to graphically display.
Spectrum - using its time record, specify the spectrum measurement to display.
Once the proper spectrum is displayed, specify the band alarm to edit from the Band
Alarms drop down list. Notice the mouse pointer changes when positioned over a band
alarm parameter (line) on the graphic.
•
Click on the line of the band to edit and drag the line to its new position. The value
in the affected field automatically updates to reflect your setting.
•
Use the Save or Undo buttons to save or undo changes for the current band alarm
edit. After editing all necessary band alarms, use the tab’s OK or Cancel buttons to
save all edited band alarms with the POINT, or cancel all edited and new band
alarm efforts.
The total number of band alarms appears in the upper right corner of the tab’s Band
information area. Use the up and down arrow buttons to navigate between band
alarms.
•
Click the Show all bands checkbox to display all available band alarms on the
spectrum display. The checkbox is not available when editing a band.
•
Click Share As to make the current band alarm a shared alarm. You will be
prompted to assign the band alarm a unique name. Enter a name and click OK.
•
Click Add to create a new band alarm.
•
Click Remove to remove the current band alarm. A confirmation dialog displays.
•
Confirm action. The band alarm is deleted.

A band alarm may not be removed if it is currently assigned.
Load Band Alarms
Use the Load Band Alarms dialog to select “shared” band alarm(s) for the active
POINTs. All available “shared” band alarms display.
•
Click the checkbox to select alarm(s) to be included / assigned to the active POINTs.
•
Click OK to select, or Cancel to close dialog without saving selections.

You may sort the available “shared” alarms by band alarm name,
inclusion status (included or excluded), or frequency range.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 85
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Multiple POINT Properties
Envelope Tab
Use the POINT Properties' Envelope tab to specify a "total spectrum" envelope alarm for
the POINT. You can select from a list of previously created envelope alarms or edit a
private (unique) alarm for the current POINT.
All available envelope alarms display in the Envelope alarm drop down list, or you may
generate a new envelope alarm.
Shared envelope alarms may not be edited from this tab (use the Customize menu’s
Alarm Database option to edit "shared" alarm parameters).
•
First, select the FFT spectrum to which the envelope alarm will conform, using:
Spectrum source – specifies from which POINT to graphically display the spectrum if
two or more POINTs are currently active.
Spectrum – displays all available time record measurements for the active POINT
(typically the baseline measurement) in a drop down list. The current spectrum displays
graphically below.
To assign a "shared" envelope alarm to the POINT:
•
On the Envelope tab, select the desired shared envelope alarm’s name from the
Envelope Alarms drop down list, the tab fields display the specified alarm’s settings
and the specified envelope appears on the displayed spectrum.
To generate a new envelope alarm for the POINT:
•
Select the Envelope Alarms drop down list’s <Custom envelope> option.
•
Click the Generate button. The Generate Envelope Alarm dialog displays.
Use the Generate Envelope Alarm Dialog to create an envelope alarm based on your
entered values.
% Overdrive – Enter the percent of the POINT’s full scale value to determine the height
of the envelope alarm above the spectral peak. The smaller the number specified, the
tighter the comparison envelope conforms to the designated spectrum.
Spreading % – Enter percent of full scale (or center frequency) to increase the width of
the envelope alarm around spectral peaks. The smaller the number specified, the
tighter the envelope conforms to the sides of the peaks in the specified spectrum.
Spreading Type – (either Center Frequency or Full Scale). If Center Freq. is selected,
the bandwidth about each center frequency increases with higher frequencies. If Full
Scale is selected, the bandwidth about each center frequency is constant, based on a
percent of the full scale frequency.
Threshold – Enter % of the POINT’s full scale value, or an absolute value. The threshold
value provides an opportunity to eliminate false alarms due to vibration "noise." It also
establishes the envelope alarm’s low amplitude "threshold" on the displayed spectrum.
The envelope alarm conforms around all peaks whose amplitudes are higher than the
established threshold as per the Overdrive %, Spreading %, and Spreading Type
settings. All peaks below the established threshold are ignored by the envelope alarm.
The Threshold % default value is set using the Customize menu’s Preferences / Plot
tab.
3 - 86
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Multiple POINT Properties
•
Click OK to generate an envelope alarm based on your entries. Click Cancel to
close the dialog without creating an envelope alarm.
Editing the Envelope Alarm
After you have generated an envelope alarm, you can edit it graphically using your
mouse, or enter numeric envelope parameters using the Set Frequency Range dialog.
To graphically edit the envelope alarm:
•
Click anywhere inside the Envelope tab’s spectrum window. The cursor appears as
an up arrow.
•
Click the mouse on the portion of the envelope alarm line to be edited. A square
icon identifies where the line will be drawn.
•
Drag the mouse to draw the line to create the new envelope alarm.
•
Click the tab’s OK button to save your changes.
Tip - You can use your keyboard’s Insert key to begin drawing the envelope alarm line.
Then, use the arrow keys to move the line, and the Insert key again to stop drawing the
line.
To edit the envelope alarm using numeric frequency ranges:
•
Click the Set Range button. The Set Frequency Range dialog displays.
•
Use the Set Frequency Range dialog to enter low frequency, high frequency, and
level values to edit an existing envelope alarm.
To numerically edit an envelope alarm:
•
Enter the desired low frequency, high frequency, and level value.
•
Click OK. The displayed envelope alarm automatically conforms to your entries.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 87
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Modify by Attribute
Modify by Attribute
@ptitude Analyst’s Modify by Attribute feature allows you to make similar changes for
one or more machines or POINTs by allowing you to change specific attributes (for
example, alarm values, collection schedules, etc.) all at once.

POINT setup changes made in Modify by Attribute are not
incorporated into POINT Properties.

If you use Modify by Attribute to make changes to DMx POINTs,
you must either select the Refresh Monitor option on the DMx
Monitor status indicator, or stop and restart @ptitude Analyst
Monitor for the changes to be recognized.
Figure 3 - 44.
The Modify by Attribute Screen.
To Modify Settings:
•
Select the hierarchy group (SET / Machine) that contains POINTs whose attributes
you wish to modify.

•
3 - 88
All Groups and POINTs branching from the specified Group display
in the Modify by Attribute screen.
Select the Edit menu’s Attributes option. The Modify by Attribute screen
displays.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Modify by Attribute
The Modify by Attribute screen is split into two panels:
Right panel - displays the selected hierarchy items and their value for the
currently selected attribute in the left panel.
•
Click to highlight the POINT for which you wish to modify the selected
attribute. Its current setting / value displays in an area beneath the
panels.
Left panel - displays the attributes available for modification organized into
nine categories: Alarm Settings, Channel Settings, Derived Settings, FFT
Settings, General Settings, IMx Settings, Messages Settings, Misc. Settings,
Online Settings, Orbit/SCL Settings, and Threshold settings.
•
Open the appropriate category’s folder to view its attributes, then click to specify
the attribute you wish to modify. The right panel updates to show the selected
attribute’s current setting for each item.
•
Edit the setting.
•
Click the Set button to update the attribute setting for the selected POINT only, or
click the Set All button to update the attribute setting for all POINTs in the right
panel.

•
Use the Set All feature to quickly modify an attribute value for
multiple items simultaneously. For example, if you want to set all
Averages to an identical value, select Averages from the
Attributes list. Attribute values display for all items in the tab's
Attribute values area. Select an individual item, enter the
desired value, and click the Set All button. All items will now have
the specified number of averages.
After completing attribute modifications for all POINTs, click the OK button to save
the settings in the database.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 89
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Measurement Properties
Measurement Properties
General Tab
The Measurement Properties screen displays properties for individual measurement
data records.
To view / edit a measurement’s properties:
•
Select the measurement record.
•
Select the Edit menu’s Properties option, or use the Properties toolbar button.
The Measurement Properties screen displays.
The current measurement’s time and date appears in the Date and Time fields of the
Measurement Properties / General tab.
Measurement Properties fields include:
Date - View or edit the measurement record’s data collection date. Select a new date
from the drop down list.
Time - View or edit the measurement record’s data collection time. Use the arrows to
adjust the time.

This feature should only be used to edit an incorrect date or time.
Overall / Channel # - View or edit the measurement record’s overall value. Values are
displayed for Channel 1 and/or Channel 2 as applicable.
Figure 3 - 45.
The Measurement Properties Screen’s General Tab's Overall Area.

This feature should only be used to edit an incorrect overall value.

If necessary, the measurement’s alarm status will automatically
update for the new measurement value.
Exclude measurement - Enables / disables the measurement record for inclusion in
statistical calculations.
Readings - Displays which readings correspond to the current measurement on the
indicated date / time.
Alarm status will be automatically updated for the new current measurement, if
necessary.
3 - 90
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Set Baseline
The overall value for the current Process measurement's indicated date / time appears
in the tab’s Overall area. Values are displayed for Channel 1 and/or Channel 2 as
applicable. These values may be edited in the General tab. Enter a new value in the
appropriate channel’s text box.

This feature should only be used to edit an incorrect overall value.
The tab’s Readings area displays which readings correspond to the current
measurement on the indicated date / time.
•
Click the Exclude measurement checkbox to exclude the current measurement
from being included in statistical calculations.
•
After editing all necessary properties, click the OK button to save changes.
•
Click Cancel to close the screen without saving changes.
Set Baseline
Use the Edit menu's Set Baseline screen to specify the selected POINT's (or multiple
POINTs') baseline. This feature allows you to quickly reset baselines within a database
after a change is made to the machinery.
•
In the hierarchy list, select one or more POINTs (or a hierarchy branch) whose
baseline you wish to set as the oldest measurement record or the newest
measurement record, or to clear the baseline altogether..
•
Select the Edit menu’s Set Baseline option.
•
Using the screen's option buttons, specify whether to use the Oldest measurement
or Newest measurement record as the baseline for the selected POINT(s), or
select Clear baseline to remove the current baseline for the selected POINT(s).

A baseline spectrum is a vibration spectrum taken when a
machine is in good operating condition. It is used as a reference
for monitoring and analysis.
•
Click OK to save setting.
•
Click Cancel to undo.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 91
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Set Speed (Multiple)
Set Speed (Multiple)
Use the Set Speed (Multiple) feature to set the same measurement speed for multiple
FFT measurements:
•
Starting from a hierarchy, ROUTE, or workspace, expand the appropriate machine.
Beneath the machine in the hierarchy, right-click on the measurement POINT you
wish to use as a reference and select Set Speed (Multiple) from the resulting
context menu.
OR
•
Starting from a hierarchy, ROUTE, or workspace, expand the appropriate machine.
Beneath the machine in the hierarchy, click on the appropriate measurement
POINT to display its measurements in the right panel. Then, right-click on the
single measurement you wish to use as a reference and select Set Speed
(Multiple) from the resulting context menu.
OR
•
Starting from an FFT measurement plot, right-click on the single cursor and select
Set Speed (Multiple) from the resulting context menu.
Figure 3 - 46.
Selecting Set Speed (Multiple) from a POINT Versus from a Measurement within a Hierarchy.
3 - 92
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Set Speed (Multiple)
Figure 3 - 47.
Selecting Set Speed (Multiple) from an FFT Measurement Plot.
The Set Speed (Multiple) window appears.
Figure 3 - 48.
Set Speed (Multiple) Window.
•
Expand the machine in the Set Speed (Multiple) window’s hierarchy view and
deselect (remove checks from) any POINTs for which you do NOT intend to set a
measurement speed value. By default, all POINTs are selected (checked) for
adjustment.
•
Specify the range of measurements for which you intend to set a measurement
speed value:
Last measurement – Select to work only with the last measurement collected
for each selected POINT.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 93
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Set Speed (Multiple)
Measurements + / - … minutes – Select, then specify x number of minutes to
work only with measurements collected within the range starting x minutes
prior to and ending x minutes following the basis date and time.

If you selected a POINT as the reference (launched this window
from a POINT), the basis date and time are equal to the date/time
stamp of the POINT’s last measurement. If you selected a single
measurement as the reference (launched this window from a
single measurement or from an FFT plot), the basis date and time
are equal to the date/time stamp of that measurement.

The system will remember the specified number of minutes when
you launch this dialog again.
Measurements… From… To… - Select, then specify starting and ending dates
and times to work only with measurements collected within that range.

By default, this range starts x minutes prior to and ends x
minutes following the basis date and time, based on the current
Measurements + / - … minutes setting.
•
Select, then enter an MPA Tag value to work only with measurements that contain
that value in their Description (Point Properties > General tab).
•
Click Next>>. The Set Speed (Multiple) Measurement List window appears,
displaying a list of all measurements for the applicable POINTs that meet the
criteria established.
The Set Speed (Multiple) Measurement List window displays a list of all
measurements for the applicable POINTs that meet the criteria established in the Set
Speed (Multiple) window.
Figure 3 - 49.
Set Speed (Multiple) Measurement List Window.
3 - 94
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Set Speed (Multiple)
•
•
From the measurement list, select (check) each measurement to which you intend
to apply the reference POINT’s measurement speed.

Select (check) the checkbox in the list header to select all
measurements.

To change the criteria established in the previous window that
determine the measurements in this list, click <<Back.

Click on any column header to sort the list according to that
column.
Verify and/or enter Set Speed values.
Current Frequency – The speed value from the reference POINT
measurement.

If you initially selected a POINT as the reference, this speed value
comes from the POINT’s last measurement. If you initially
selected a single measurement as the reference, this speed value
comes from that measurement. If you launched this function from
an FFT plot, this speed value is the frequency value of the single
cursor on that FFT plot.
Equivalent to order – If the speed value entered is at a known harmonic, then
you can use this value to factor the Calculated running speed to its 1x
component.
Calculated running speed – Enter the speed value you wish to apply to all
selected (checked) measurements.
•
Click Finish. The system applies the Calculated running speed and Equivalent to
order values to all measurements selected (checked) in this list.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 95
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Calculate Derived POINTs
Calculate Derived POINTs
You must manually calculate derived POINTs upon the initial creation of a derived
POINT, or after editing a derived POINT’s expression settings. Once the initial
calculation has been performed manually, @ptitude Analyst automatically calculates the
derived POINT during data upload processing.

Upon the initial creation of a derived POINT, if the assigned
variables do not have existing measurement data, it is not
necessary to manually calculate the derived POINT. It is
necessary to manually calculate a derived POINT only when the
assigned variables already have measurement data.
To manually calculate a derived POINT:
•
Select the newly created or recently edited derived POINT from the Hierarchy.
•
Select the Edit menu's Calculate Derived POINTs option to quickly calculate
measurement values for the derived POINT.
•
The Calculate Derived POINTs message dialog displays. Select Yes to calculate
the selected derived POINT.

If calculating a newly created derived POINT, new measurement
data displays in the Hierarchy’s right panel. Existing
measurement data for the assigned variables is used in the
calculation to create measurement data records for the derived
POINT.

If calculating a recently edited derived POINT, all existing derived
POINT measurement values previously calculated for the selected
derived POINT(s) are deleted and replaced with new derived
POINT measurements.
Figure 3 - 50.
The Edit menu’s Calculate Derived POINTs Message Dialog.
After manual calculation of a derived POINT, @ptitude Analyst automatically calculates
any newly uploaded data for the derived POINT during data upload processing. The
newly calculated data displays along with the existing derived POINT data measurement
records in the right panel.

3 - 96
For a multi-user environment, @ptitude Analyst Monitor
calculates the new data for derived POINTs. If @ptitude Analyst
Monitor is not running, then the derived POINTs will not be
calculated.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Manual Archive
Manual Archive
@ptitude Analyst’s Manual Archive feature adds flexibility as it allows you to specify
POINTs to archive, and allows you to archive the newest data in addition to the oldest
data.
The Manual Archive process differs from a Scheduled or Monitor archive process in
several ways.
Manual Archive:
•
Takes place immediately.
•
Archives only POINTs branching from the selected hierarchy item (or specified
measurement records).
•
Only archives measurements from the “current data” bin (unless a specific
measurement record from another bin is specified).
•
Allows you to specify whether to archive each selected POINT’s Oldest or Newest
measurement record from the current data bin.
•
Allows you to specify the archive bin in which to place the archived measurements.
Use Manual Archive to change the archive status for any or all hierarchy items.
Manual Archive is useful to manually set a measurement’s archive status, bypassing
automatic archive schedule (if applicable).
To use manual archive:
•
In the hierarchy list, select a hierarchy item(s) whose measurements you wish to
manually archive. All POINTs branching from the selected item are archived.
•
Select the File menu’s Manual Archive option. The Manual Archive screen
displays.
The screen’s top area displays a warning if the selected data is tagged as baseline.
Baseline data cannot be modified.
Change archive status in the screen’s Store measurements as area. Select from:
Current data bin (available only when archiving a measurement record from
other bins)
Unscheduled data bin
Short term archive data bin
Long term archive data bin
The screen’s bottom area displays Archive measurements. If working from a POINT or
above on the hierarchy branch, select from:
Oldest Measurement – Each selected POINT’s oldest measurement in the
current data bin.
Newest Measurement – Each selected POINT’s newest measurement in the
current data bin.

Manual Archive does not utilize “scheduled” archive settings
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 97
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
@ptitude Analyst Scheduler
@ptitude Analyst Scheduler
Current Scheduled Events
The Scheduler feature allows you to configure the software to perform scheduled
functions based on specific conditions. A scheduled event consists of a system event
and an action to be executed whenever that event occurs. For example, you can use
Scheduler to configure the software to display a message when a specific operation
completes (action) when a DAD has completed processing (system event).
•
Select the Customize menu’s Scheduler option. The Scheduler screen displays.
The Scheduler screen displays all current scheduled events and the action assigned to
each event. Use the Scheduler screen to add new events and maintain existing events.
To add an event:
•
Click the Add button to define an event. The Event Scheduler Wizard launches
automatically.
You can also add an event by copying an existing event, then modifying the copy as
necessary.
To copy an event:
•
Highlight the event you would like to copy and click Copy. The Event Scheduler
Wizard launches. As you navigate the wizard, options default to the settings from
the copied event. You may modify the settings as necessary.
To edit an event:
•
Highlight the event you would like to modify and click Edit. The Event Scheduler
Wizard launches with the settings from the event you are editing.
•
Navigate the wizard to the settings you wish to modify and edit the event as
necessary.
To remove an event:
•
Click the Remove button to delete a scheduler entry.

Scheduled entries remain in effect until they are removed.
Event Scheduler Wizard
A scheduled event consists of a system event and an action to be executed whenever
that event occurs.
The Event Scheduler Wizard guides you through the process of scheduling events.
3 - 98
•
Click the Next button to continue.
•
Select the event you want the system to monitor and that will cause the scheduled
action to be performed. All available events appear in the Select an event window.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
@ptitude Analyst Scheduler
Figure 3 - 51.
The Event Scheduler Wizard’s First Screen.
Some events require specific settings that further define the event. When settings are
required, the Settings button is enabled. You must specify the required Settings
before the Next button is enabled.
•
Complete all Settings entries, if required.
•
Click the Next button.

Individual events are detailed later in this section.
All available actions display in the Select an action area.
•
Select the action you wish the system to perform when the indicated event occurs
Some actions require specific settings that further define the action. When settings are
required, the Settings button is enabled. You must specify the required Settings
before the Next button is enabled.
•
Complete all Settings entries, if required.
•
Click the Next button.

Individual actions are detailed later in this section.
By default, scheduled events only execute if the user who created the event performs
the triggering action. (For example, a report set to run on @ptitude Analyst startup only
runs when the user who created the event logs in.)
If the user creating the scheduled event is an administrator, an additional dialog displays
providing the option of assigning the event to another user, or delegating it to the
Transaction Server.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 99
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
@ptitude Analyst Scheduler
The Select Users list shows all @ptitude Analyst users.
•
Select the user who should trigger this event.

Events scheduled to trigger at a specified time only occur if the
user with whom the event is associated is logged into @ptitude
Analyst. This applies to both users who are assigned an event by
an administrator and non-administrator users who create an
event for themselves. For example, if the event is scheduled for
three a.m., the specified action will not be performed if the
designated user is shut down at three a.m., and it will not be
automatically performed when the program is restarted.
Alternatively, if you have selected to generate a report at a specified time with this
scheduled event, Delegate to Transaction Server enables. The transaction server is a
process that stays running in the background at all times. If your triggering event is a
specified time, the report runs at that time, regardless of whether the associated user is
logged in.

The report is generated to a file in the path specified in the
Report Location field on the Report Generator’s Assign tab. If
the Delegate to Transaction Server option is selected and the
report location path references a local hard drive, the report is
written to the Transaction Server host computer. It is
recommended that you set the report location to a network drive
and make sure the Transaction Server has read / write access to
that location.
•
Enable Delegate to Transaction Server to have the transaction server generate
the report, rather than a specified user.
•
Click the Next button.
The Event Scheduler Wizard displays a summary of the new scheduled event settings.
3 - 100
•
Click the Finish button to save the scheduled event.
•
Click the Back button to modify the scheduled event.
•
Click the Cancel button to cancel.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
@ptitude Analyst Scheduler
Scheduler Events
Alarm condition
This event is used to schedule an action to be performed when specific alarms occur.
•
Click the Settings button to specify the data source, alarm condition, and alarm
type for which this event should occur. The Alarm Condition Settings dialog
displays.
Data source –Select the Hierarchies, SETs, Machines, POINTs, ROUTEs, and / or
Workspaces to monitor for alarm conditions.
Alarm Conditions –Select the alarm condition (In alert, In danger, or Both) to monitor.
Alarm Type – Select one or more alarm types to monitor.
•
Click OK to save settings.
•
Click Cancel to discard settings.
Analyst startup
This event is the application’s start up. Performs an action as soon as the application
completes its start up process.
At specified time
Schedules a task to be performed at a specific time.
•
Click the Settings button to specify the time that this event should occur. The
Time Event Settings dialog appears.
Start Date - Select the date on which the scheduled event should run for the first time.
Start Time – Select the time at which the scheduled event should run for the first time.
Specify the interval for the event. Options are:
Hourly – Select to run the event Every X hour(s). Enter the hourly time
increment in the field (e.g., every 8 hours).
Daily - Select to run the event Every X day(s). Enter the number of days in
the field (e.g., every 3 days).
Weekly – Select to run the event Every X week(s). Enter the number of weeks
in the field, and enable the check box(es) for the day(s) of the week on which
the event should run. (e.g., Every 2 weeks on Monday and Wednesday)
Monthly – Select to run the event on a monthly basis. Select the day of the
month (1-31) and the frequency of the event in month(s) (e.g., Day 15 of every
st
nd
rd
th
2 month(s)); or select a day of the week and the 1 , 2 , 3 , 4 , or last week
nd
of the month, and the frequency of the event in month(s). (e.g., The 2 Friday
of every 1 month(s))
Yearly – Select to run the event on a yearly basis. Select the month / day and
st
the frequency of the event in year(s). (e.g., January 1 of every 1 year(s)); or
st
nd
rd
th
select a day of the week, the 1 , 2 , 3 , 4 , or last week of the month, the
nd
month, and the frequency of the event in year(s). (e.g., The 2 Friday of
January every 2 year(s))
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 101
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
@ptitude Analyst Scheduler
•
Click OK to save settings.
•
Click Cancel to discard settings.

The Scheduler feature is user specific and may only be applied to
data uploaded by the current user.
Scheduler Actions
Display a message
Select the “display message” action to display your specified message text when the
associated event occurs.
•
Click the Settings button to enter your message text.
•
The Display Message Action Settings dialog appears.
•
Type in the desired text.
•
Click the OK button to save.
•
Click the Cancel button to discard changes.
Generate Report
Select the Generate Report action to generate a specified report type when the
associated event occurs.
To select report type:
•
Select Generate Report from the dialog’s Select an action area.
•
Click the Settings button. The Generate Report dialog appears.
Generate Report Settings
Description – Enter descriptive text to identify this report in the Scheduler.
Report – Select the desired report type from the drop down list.
Data Source – Select the data source for the report. This section varies, depending on
whether the Report can specify data sources from multiple hierarchies option was
enabled on the Report Editor’s General tab for the selected report.
If Report can specify data sources from multiple hierarchies was enabled, all of your
@ptitude Analyst hierarchies display. Select multiple hierarchies, groups, and POINTs to
include in your report.
If Report can specify data sources from multiple hierarchies was not enabled,
available options include:
Primary Hierarchy – Use the POINTs from the currently selected primary
hierarchy as the report’s source.
Last Upload – Use the POINTs last uploaded from the data collector as the
report’s source.
ROUTEs (all available) – Enable the check box next to each ROUTE you would
like to include.
3 - 102
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
@ptitude Analyst Scheduler
Workspaces (all available) – Enable the check box next to each Workspace you
would like to include.

If the Data Source is a Filtered Workspace, the Workspace will not
be filtered again before report generation. The report is based on
the Workspace in its current state.
Destination – Select the desired report destination from the drop down list. Available
options include:
Email – Automatically sends an email of the report in HTML and PDF format to
selected email recipients. Click the Select button to display the Recipient
Selection dialog and select one or more contacts or groups of contacts.
HTML – Save to the subdirectory as an HTML file.
Open Window – Window opens automatically, displaying the report.
Printer / Landscape – Automatically prints in landscape mode.
Printer / Portrait – Automatically prints in portrait mode.

•
The Destination selection is not used if the report is delegated to
the Transaction Server, unless the Email option is selected as the
destination. Otherwise, the report is always generated to HTML.
Click OK to save report settings.

Refer to the SKF @ptitude Analyst Introduction and Global
Features User Manual, Chapter 2, Getting Around in @ptitude
Analyst / Contact Information section for details on how to set
up contacts and groups.
Measurement Management / Archive
Select the Measurement Management / Archive action to schedule the Monitor
application to perform measurement management and archiving. This action checks
the measurements in the current database, and either archives old data to the short
term or long term status, or deletes old data from the database. This action is
performed on measurements in the current database only. Refer to the SKF @ptitude
Analyst Monitor Application section in the SKF @ptitude Analyst Introduction and
Global Features User Manual for more information on the Monitor’s functions,
including archiving data.
Send Message
Select the Send message action to send an email or text message to selected recipients
when the associated event occurs.
•
Click the Settings button to configure your message settings.
The Send Message Settings dialog appears.
•
In the Subject text box, type the subject of the event’s email message.
•
In the Message text area, type the event’s message to be sent as email and/or text
messages.

Text messages are often limited to a maximum number of
characters. Check with the recipient’s service provider to
understand text message limitations.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 103
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Customize / Database Operations
•
Click the Select button to display the Recipient Selection dialog and select one or
more recipients from the list of available contacts and groups.

•
If you wish to include an HTML file with your email message, use the Browse
button next to the HTML content text box and select an HTML file to include.

•
Refer to the SKF @ptitude Analyst Introduction and Global
Features User Manual, Chapter 2, Getting Around in @ptitude
Analyst / Contact Information section for details on how to set
up contacts and groups.
HTML content is not supported by text messaging.
If you wish to include any other type of attachment with your email message, select
the Browse button next to the Attachments text box to select the file you wish to
include.

Attachments are not supported by text messaging.
•
Enable the Allow content from triggering event check box to allow the default
alarm message to override the Message text message when a triggering event
occurs.
•
Enable the Send email check box to send the message to the selected recipients as
an email.
•
Enable the Send text to phone check box to send the message to the selected
recipients as a text message.

Texting limitations depend on the recipient’s service provider.
•
Click the OK button to save the message settings.
•
Click the Cancel button to discard changes.
Customize / Database Operations
The Database screen allows you to create custom group types and to define filter keys,
coded notes, and operator names.
Creating Custom Group Types
Use the powerful Customize / Database screen’s Group Types tab to create custom
Group Types to conveniently organize your machines, SETs, and POINTs to fit your
application.
To create a custom Group Type:
3 - 104
•
Select the Customize menu’s Database option. The Database screen displays.
•
Select the Group Types tab.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Customize / Database Operations
Figure 3 - 52.
The Database Screen’s Group Types Tab.
•
Click the Group Types tab’s Add button. The tab enters edit mode.
•
Specify appropriate information into the following fields:
Group Type – This field is unavailable if you are adding a new Group Type. In the
Group type properties area, the following fields are available:
Name – Specify a name to define your custom group type. For example, you may want
to create a custom Group type named “pumps,” for easy organization of all pump
machinery.
Base on – Select a type to base the new group type on (SET or Machine).

Once a Group Type has been “based on” a SET or Machine, the
setting cannot be edited.
Once defined, the new Group Type will be available as a selection in the Group
Properties screen’s Type list.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 105
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Customize / Database Operations
Optional data - Provides up to five fields to enter titles for additional data. Text
entered in these fields appears as prompts for data entry when new Groups are
created. This feature allows you to store detailed information with your Groups.
•
Specify prompt titles that will appear in the Group Properties / Details tab.

Examples are “serial number,” “manufacturer,” “operator name,”
etc.
•
Click the Save button to save the new Group Type and add it to the available types.
•
Click the Undo button to undo changes.
•
Click Remove to remove the current Group Type.

Group types currently in use cannot be removed.
Creating Filter Keys
Custom filter keys can be assigned to POINTs and/or Machines or SETs.
To add a new filter key:
3 - 106
•
Select the Customize menu’s Database option. The Database screen displays.
•
Select the Filter Keys tab.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Customize / Database Operations
Figure 3 - 53.
The Database Screen’s Filter Key Tab.
•
Click the screen’s Add button. The screen enters edit mode.
Fields include:
Filter keys – Displays all previously defined filter keys.
Name – Specify filter key text.
•
Click the Save button. The new filter key is now available for assignment.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 107
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Frequency Sets
Frequency Sets
Frequency Sets allow you to quickly assign fault frequency markers to a POINT. When
the POINT’s FFT measurements display in a spectral plot, you may overlay its assigned
fault frequency markers to easily determine if spectral peaks appear at anticipated fault
frequencies.
Select the Customize / POINT Attributes menu’s Frequency Sets option to display the
Frequency Sets screen.
All shared frequency sets appear in the Frequency sets area.
Available options include:
Add – Click to add a new frequency set. The Frequency Sets Editor dialog launches
automatically.
Copy – Click to make a copy of an existing shared frequency set. This option is useful
when you are creating a new frequency set that is a slight modification of an existing
frequency set. The Frequency Sets Editor dialog launches automatically.
Edit – Click to edit an existing frequency set. The Frequency Sets Editor dialog
launches automatically.
Remove – Remove the selected frequency set.
Frequency Sets Editor
The Frequency Sets Editor screen contains three tabs; General, Bearings, and Other.
Each tab is detailed below.
Figure 3 - 54.
The Frequency Sets Editor Screen’s General Tab.
3 - 108
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Frequency Sets
General Tab
Displays the current frequency set’s name and description. Included frequencies appear
with their Name, Type, Multiples, Bandwidth%, and Details.
Name - Displays current frequency set name.
Description - Displays current frequency set description.
Included frequencies - Displays all frequencies included in the current frequency set,
with their:
Name – Displays the frequency name.
Type – Displays the type of frequency.
Multiples – Displays the multiple of frequency markers to display on the plot.
Bandwidth % - Displays the frequency range boundaries used by the
frequency marker to locate a peak.
Details – Displays fault frequency settings for the bearing’s components.
•
Click on a frequency to select it.
Display Adjustments – Allows you to edit the Multiples and Bandwidth% settings for
the selected frequency.
•
Click OK to save changes.
•
Click Cancel to close screen without saving changes.
Bearings Tab
Figure 3 - 55.
The Frequency Sets Editor Screen’s Bearings Tab.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 109
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Frequency Sets
The Frequency Sets Editor / Bearings tab allows selection and/or de-selection of
bearings included in the current set.
Select manufacturer - Use the drop down list to select the desired bearing
manufacturer.
Find bearing - Specify the bearing name and click the Find button. @ptitude Analyst
locates bearings matching your entry, and displays them in the Available bearings
(Model #) window.
Bearings included in set - Displays bearings currently included in the frequency set.
Available bearings (Model #) - Displays bearings from the selected manufacturer that
match the entered criteria.
•
Use the << Include button to include the selected bearing(s) in the frequency set
(move selected bearing(s) from the Available bearings (Model)# column to the
Bearings included in set column).
•
Use the Exclude >> button to exclude the selected bearing(s) from the frequency
set (move selected bearing(s) from the Bearings included in set column to the
Available bearings (Model #) column).
Fundamentals of – Displays the fault frequency settings for the selected bearing’s
components.
•
Click Add to add bearings to the database, or Edit to modify an existing bearing.
The Bearing Editor window displays in both cases.
•
Click Remove to remove a bearing from the bearing database.
Bearing Editor

3 - 110
The Bearing Editor window displays in either “edit” or “add”
mode, depending on your previous selection in the Frequency
Sets Editor.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Frequency Sets
Figure 3 - 56.
The Bearing Editor Window.
The Bearing model # and Manufacturer fields in the window’s Identity area cannot
be modified when in “edit” mode.
Bearing Editor fields include:
Identity area - Enter the identification characteristics in the following fields:
Bearing model #: - Displays the model number. Cannot be modified in “edit”
mode.
Manufacturer: - Displays the bearing’s manufacturer. Cannot be modified in
“edit” mode.
Description - Specify up to 32 characters that identify the new bearing.
Dimensions - Specify the appropriate values in the following fields:
Number of balls
Ball diameter
Pitch diameter
Contact angle
•
Click the Calculate button. @ptitude Analyst automatically calculates and enters
the Fundamentals values.
Fundamentals – Manually specify appropriate values in the available fields:
BPFO: (Ball Pass Freq. Outer race)
BPFI: (Ball Pass Freq. Inner race)
BSF: (Ball Spin Freq.)
FTF: (Fundamental Train Freq. / Cage Freq.)
•
Click OK to save changes.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 111
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Frequency Sets
•
Click Cancel to close the window without saving changes.
Other Tab
Figure 3 - 57.
The Frequency Sets Editor Screen’s Other Tab.
Use the Frequency Sets Editor / Other tab to select a generic frequency to include in
the current Frequency Set, or to add, edit, or remove a generic frequency.
The Other tab displays all included generic frequencies.
To include a frequency in the current frequency set:
•
Click the frequency's checkbox in the Included generic frequencies area. The
checkbox toggles the Included status between Yes and No.
To add a new frequency:
•
Click the Add button. A new frequency displays with default settings that may be
edited.
To remove a frequency:
•
Select the desired frequency from the Included generic frequencies windows so
that the frequency information is visible in the Properties area
•
Click the Remove button.

3 - 112
You cannot remove a frequency that is currently used within any
frequency set. You must remove all associations with frequency
sets before you can remove a frequency.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Frequency Sets
Properties- Displays the selected frequencies attributes. You may edit these attributes:
Name: - The selected frequency's name.
Frequency type: - The selected frequency’s frequency type.
Frequency formula: - Specific fields based on the frequency type.
To edit frequency properties:
•
Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 characters).
•
Select the desired frequency type option from the drop down list.
Frequency type options include:
Constant - Constant frequency value. (Example: 10 Hz)
Offset - Multiple of running speed and offset (+) by constant frequency value.
(Example: 4.00 x RPM + 10 Hz)
RPM - Multiple of running speed. (Example: 4.00 x RPM)
Sideband - Multiple of running speed and offset (+ and -) by constant
frequency value. (Example: 4.00 x RPM + / - 10 Hz)
•
Edit the applicable Frequency formula fields.

Specific Frequency formula edit options are available according
to the current frequency type selection. If enabled, the first field
is a running speed, or RPM value. The second field is a fixed
frequency in Hz or CPM.
For example, with an RPM multiple frequency type, entering a 4 in the
first field indicates that the frequency would show up at 4 times the
running speed.
•
Click the tab's Save button to save changes.
•
Click Undo to undo changes.
•
Click the OK button to close the tab. You will be prompted to save any unsaved
changes.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 113
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Online Settings
Online Settings
@ptitude Analyst’ Online Settings screen allows you to add or remove devices and
sensors, and configure Gating options.
Devices
•
Select the Customize menu’s Online Settings option. The Online Settings screen
displays the Devices tab.
Figure 3 - 58.
The Online Settings Screen’s Devices Tab.
All available devices display in the Available hardware devices drop down list. When a
device from this list is selected, its entered Properties and Settings display in the tab’s
other fields.

3 - 114
When you select a WMx / WVT from the Available hardware
devices drop down list, the Properties area displays the Device
Name and DAD type in read-only format. To manage WMx
devices, use the View menu’s WMx Device screen. Reference
Chapter 2, Setting Up Your WMx Device for details.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Online Settings
To add a new device:
•
Click the tab’s Add button. By default, the name “New Device.#” displays.
Fields include:
Device Name - Assign the new device a unique name by typing it in the Device name
field.
Host – Identifies the computer that controls the device. Select the appropriate host
from the drop down list. If the appropriate host is not available in the drop down list,
click the Hosts button to display the Hosts dialog. Use this dialog to add, edit, or
remove host computers.
Dad Type – Select the appropriate DAD type. Different fields display depending on the
device type selected.
IMX Service – Select the appropriate name of the IMx Service connected to the IMx.

Set up IMx Service using the SKF Multilog IMx Configurator.
Reference the SKF Multilog IMx Configurator User Manual for
details.
Config – Click the Config button to configure the digital output and input labels, to
configure the analog and digital channel properties, and assign channels to the IMx.

For more information on configuring your device, reference the
Configuring the Device section below.
Communication Type – Select the appropriate communication type.
IMx – Ethernet (TCP / IP)
DAD # - Select the appropriate DAD number (1 – 255 for IMx). DAD #s are unique for
Host / Communication type combination.
Communication timeout – The IMx initiates communication with @ptitude Analyst.
Enter the number of minutes to determine how long @ptitude Analyst waits for
communication from the IMx before indicating it is overdue.
Always connected – Determines the IMx’s connection status. Click the Always
Connected checkbox to enable connection to the IMx. When the IMx is connected, the
IMx continuously sends data to @ptitude Analyst. When the IMx is not connected, the
IMx wakes up periodically to send data to @ptitude Analyst.
Connection Interval – Specify how often the IMx wakes up to send data to @ptitude
Analyst when the IMx is not connected.
Reference time – Set the time to offset the data upload cycle on the IMx System. This
allows a system with multiple IMxs to stagger data upload by the specified reference
time so IMxs do not attempt to upload simultaneously.
Time zone – Select the current time zone of the IMx device. Data is always collected in
local time.
Once you have made changes, the Save and Undo buttons appear. Click Save to save
your new device settings. Click Undo to clear the entered settings.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 115
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Online Settings
To remove a device:
•
Select the device you wish to remove from the Available Hardware Devices drop
down list.

Only devices without assigned POINTs can be removed.
•
Click the Remove button.
•
When prompted, confirm you wish to remove the selected device by clicking Yes.
Configuring the Device
To configure your device, click the Config button. The configuration screen displays
differently depending on the type of DAD selected.
Configure IMx Channel
Analog
The IMx has 16 analog channels. Configure each channel on the Channel Properties /
Analog tab.
Figure 3 - 59.
The Channel Properties Screen’s Analog Tab.
3 - 116
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Online Settings
Analog channels – Lists all analog channels. Highlight a channel to edit the channel’s
properties.
Properties area – When a channel is selected in the Analog channels list, the channel
properties display for editing purposes. Edit the following fields to make changes to a
channel’s settings:
Channel name – Assign the channel a unique name.
Channel Enabled – Click the Channel Enabled checkbox to enable a channel
on the IMx. If the channel is disabled, the IMx skips the POINTs assigned to
that channel during data collection.
Sensor type – Specify the type of sensor used by the selected channel.
Sensitivity - Enter a value for the sensitivity of the sensor to be used in
making the measurement.
Current shunt – (IMx-P / IMx-M only) If a resistor of 220 ohms is added to a
channel input, select Enable to display the correct input unit for this particular
channel.
Check sensor OK status - Click to enable this option. When enabled, @ptitude
Analyst will check the sensor status, and will display the sensor status in
Device status and Online Data View dialogs. If data is outside specified range,
the IMx does not collect the data.
Upper Limit – Type in the BOV upper limit value.
Lower Limit – Type in the BOV lower limit value.
Sensor notes – Type in any additional information you would like to store with
the selected sensor settings.
To edit channel properties:
•
Select the channel you wish to edit from the Analog channels list.
•
In the Properties area, edit channel name, enable / disable the channel, and edit
the sensor information.

When you start to edit a field in the Properties area, the Analog
channels list turns gray, allowing you to only make changes to
the selected channel. Also, the Save and Undo buttons become
available.
•
To cancel changes to the selected channel, click Undo.
•
When you have finished editing the channel properties, click Save to save your
changes.
•
Use the Copy / Paste function to copy the selected channel’s properties and paste
to another channel. To copy channel properties to multiple channels, use
Shift+Click and Ctrl+click keyboard functions to select multiple items, then click
Paste.

•
Channel name and sensor notes are not copied to other channels.
Click OK to apply any changes and return to the Online Settings / Devices screen.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 117
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Online Settings
Digital
The IMx has eight digital channels. Configure each channel on the Channel
Properties / Digital tab.
Figure 3 - 60.
The Channel Properties Screen’s Protection Analog Tab.
Digital channels – Lists all digital channels. Highlight a channel to edit the channel’s
properties.
Properties area– When a channel is selected in the Digital channels list, the channel
properties display for editing purposes. Edit the following fields to make changes to a
channel’s settings:
Channel name – Assign the channel a unique name.
Channel Enabled – Click the Channel Enabled checkbox to enable a channel
on the IMx. If the channel is disabled, the IMx skips the POINTs assigned to
that channel during data collection.
Pulse per revolution – Enter the number of pulses the IMx unit receives per
shaft revolution.
3 - 118
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Online Settings
To edit channel properties:
•
Select the channel you wish to edit from the Digital channels list.
•
In the Properties area, edit channel name, enable / disable the channel, and edit
the sensor information.

When you start to edit a field in the Properties area, the Digital
channels list turns gray, allowing you to only make changes to
the selected channel. Also, the Save and Undo buttons become
available.
•
To cancel changes to the selected channel, click Undo.
•
When you have finished editing the channel properties, click Save to save your
changes.
•
Use the Copy / Paste function to copy the selected channel’s properties and paste
to another channel. To copy channel properties to multiple channels, use
Shift+Click and Ctrl+click keyboard functions to select multiple items, then click
Paste.

•
Channel name and sensor notes are not copied to other channels.
Click OK to apply any changes and return to the Online Settings / Devices screen.
Protection Channels (IMx-M only)
The IMx-M’s protection channels get data from the analog, BOV, and digital channels on
the IMx-M’s protection I/O module through internal IMx-M communication. Changes
made to the Protection Analog, Protection BOV, and Protection Digital tabs do not
affect the physical protection I/O module’s settings. These channels help detect critical
issues that the IMx-M’s CPU module’s analog and digital channels do not detect.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 119
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Online Settings
Protection Analog
The IMx-M has 16 protection analog channels. Configure each channel on the Channel
Properties / Protection Analog tab.
Figure 3 - 61.
The Channel Properties Screen’s Protection Analog Tab.
Protection Analog channels – Lists all protection analog channels. Highlight a channel
to edit the channel’s properties.
Properties area – When a channel is selected in the Protection Analog channels list,
the channel properties display for editing purposes. Edit the following fields to make
changes to a channel’s settings:
Channel name – Assign the channel a unique name.
Channel Enabled – Click the Channel Enabled checkbox to enable a channel
on the IMx. If the channel is disabled, the IMx skips the POINTs assigned to
that channel during data collection.
Min / Max Scale - Enter the minimum and maximum magnitude scale values
in the designated text boxes. Set this value to the same scale value that is
configured for the protection I/O module in the IMx-M Protection Configurator.
3 - 120
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Online Settings

These values should not be confused with the channel sensitivity
values that are configured in the IMx-M Configurator.
Zero offset - Enter a value to offset the zero point of the measurement.
Sensor notes – Type in any additional information you would like to store with
the selected sensor settings.
To edit channel properties:
•
Select the channel you wish to edit from the Protection Analog channels list.
•
In the Properties area, edit channel name, enable / disable the channel, and edit
the sensor information.

When you start to edit a field in the Properties area, the
Protection Analog channels list turns gray, allowing you to only
make changes to the selected channel. Also, the Save and Undo
buttons become available.
•
To cancel changes to the selected channel, click Undo.
•
When you have finished editing the channel properties, click Save to save your
changes.
•
Use the Copy / Paste function to copy the selected channel’s properties and paste
to another channel. To copy channel properties to multiple channels, use
Shift+Click and Ctrl+click keyboard functions to select multiple items, then click
Paste.

•
Channel name and sensor notes are not copied to other channels.
Click OK to apply any changes and return to the Online Settings / Devices screen.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 121
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Online Settings
Protection BOV
The IMx-M has 16 protection BOV channels. Configure each channel on the Channel
Properties / Protection BOV tab.
Figure 3 - 62.
The Channel Properties Screen’s Protection BOV Tab.
Protection BOV channels – Lists all protection BOV channels. Highlight a channel to
edit the channel’s properties.
Properties area – When a channel is selected in the Protection BOV channels list, the
channel properties display for editing purposes. Edit the following fields to make
changes to a channel’s settings:
Channel name – Assign the channel a unique name.
Channel Enabled – Click the Channel Enabled checkbox to enable a channel
on the IMx. If the channel is disabled, the IMx skips the POINTs assigned to
that channel during data collection.
3 - 122
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Online Settings
Sensor notes – Type in any additional information you would like to store with
the selected sensor settings.
To edit channel properties:
•
Select the channel you wish to edit from the Protection BOV channels list.
•
In the Properties area, edit channel name, enable / disable the channel, and edit
the sensor information.

When you start to edit a field in the Properties area, the
Protection BOV channels list turns gray, allowing you to only
make changes to the selected channel. Also, the Save and Undo
buttons become available.
•
To cancel changes to the selected channel, click Undo.
•
When you have finished editing the channel properties, click Save to save your
changes.
•
Use the Copy / Paste function to copy the selected channel’s properties and paste
to another channel. To copy channel properties to multiple channels, use
Shift+Click and Ctrl+click keyboard functions to select multiple items, then click
Paste.

•
Channel name is not copied to other channels.
Click OK to apply any changes and return to the Online Settings / Devices screen.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 123
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Online Settings
Protection Digital
The IMx has eight protection digitial channels. Configure each channel on the Channel
Properties / Protection Digital tab.
Figure 3 - 63.
The Channel Properties Screen’s Protection Digital Tab.
Protection Digital channels – Lists all protection digital channels. Highlight a channel
to edit the channel’s properties.
Properties area– When a channel is selected in the Protection Digital channels list,
the channel properties display for editing purposes. Edit the following fields to make
changes to a channel’s settings:
Channel name – Assign the channel a unique name.
Channel Enabled – Click the Channel Enabled checkbox to enable a channel
on the IMx. If the channel is disabled, the IMx skips the POINTs assigned to
that channel during data collection.
Scale factor – Enter a scale factor to adjust the monitored reading to a scaled
value, when necessary. For example, if the machine’s running speed is 3,000
RPM, but the sensor’s location is capturing a running speed of 1,500 RPM, a
3 - 124
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Online Settings
scale factor of two will capture the actual running speed of the machine for the
sensor’s location.
To edit channel properties:
•
Select the channel you wish to edit from the Protection Digital channels list.
•
In the Properties area, edit channel name, enable / disable the channel, and edit
the sensor information.

When you start to edit a field in the Properties area, the
Protection Digital channels list turns gray, allowing you to only
make changes to the selected channel. Also, the Save and Undo
buttons become available.
•
To cancel changes to the selected channel, click Undo.
•
When you have finished editing the channel properties, click Save to save your
changes.
•
Use the Copy / Paste function to copy the selected channel’s properties and paste
to another channel. To copy channel properties to multiple channels, use
Shift+Click and Ctrl+click keyboard functions to select multiple items, then click
Paste.

•
Channel name and sensor notes are not copied to other channels.
Click OK to apply any changes and return to the Online Settings / Devices screen.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 125
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Online Settings
Communication
The Communication tab allows you to activate the communication between the IMxM’s protection I/O module and CPU module, or communication between the IMx-S or
IMx-T and CPU module using a Modbus communication protocol.
Figure 3 - 64.
The Channel Properties Screen’s Communication Tab.
To activate communication between the IMx-M’s protection I/O module and CPU
module:
•
Select Protection to enable external communication with the protection I/O
module. By default, the Protection option is enabled.
•
Select None if you wish to disable communication (i.e., for maintenance purposes,
or to replace cards on the CPU module).

3 - 126
If None is selected, no data is stored from the device for these
protection channels.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Online Settings
To activate communication for IMx-S or IMx-T via a Modbus protocol with the IMx
configured as a Modbus master:

When you set this IMx as a Modbus master, you can configure
and enable virtual channels (via the Modbus Master tab) to
support the following Modbus data transfers:
-
An external Modbus master writing data to this IMx
(configured as a Modbus slave).
-
This IMx (configured as a Modbus master) reading data
from an external Modbus slave.
-
This IMx (configured as a Modbus master) reading data
from another IMx configured as a Modbus slave.
•
Select Modbus to enable communication using the Modbus protocol.
•
Select “Master” as the Mode for Modbus communication.
•
Enter the Slave Address number of the Modbus Slave with which this Modbus
Master will connect and communicate.

The exact Slave Address number is to be entered when creating
the Modbus Master to identify the Modbus Master-Slave pair.
•
Check that the other parameters – Bps (Bits per second, or Baud rate), Parity,
Stop Bits – are set appropriately or modify as needed.
•
Click OK to save the configuration. The Channel Properties window will close.
To activate communication for IMx-S or IMx-T via a Modbus protocol with the IMx
configured as a Modbus slave:

When you set this IMx as a Modbus slave, you can configure and
enable virtual channels (via the Modbus Slave tab) to support the
following Modbus data transfers:
-
An external Modbus master reading data from this IMx
(configured as a Modbus slave).
-
Another IMx configured as a Modbus master reading
data from this IMx (configured as a Modbus slave).
•
Select Modbus to enable communication using the Modbus protocol.
•
Select “Slave” as the Mode for Modbus communication.
•
Enter the Slave Address matching the setup on your physical IMx that connects to
the Modbus source. Slave Address becomes the Modbus address of this Slave. This
Slave address number is the address with which the Modbus Master will connect
and communicate.

This exact Slave Address number is to be entered when creating
a Modbus Master if the Master will be communicating with this
Slave and become a Modbus Master-Slave pair.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 127
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Online Settings
•
Check that the other parameters – Bps (Bits per second, or Baud rate), Parity,
Stop Bits – are set appropriately or modify as needed.
Bps defines the speed of Modbus, transfer rate in bps.
Parity can be set to None, Even or Odd.
Stop Bits defines the number of stop bits in use. It can be 1 or 2.
•
Click OK to save the configuration. The Channel Properties window will close.
With Modbus communication enabled and the Slave and Master pair configured, the
next step is to set up the Modbus import and/or export properties for IMx-S and IMx-T
units.
Modbus Import
On the Modbus Master tab, you can configure and enable virtual channels to support
the following Modbus data transfers:
3 - 128
•
An external Modbus master writing data to this IMx (configured as a Modbus slave).
•
This IMx (configured as a Modbus master) reading data from an external Modbus
slave.
•
This IMx (configured as a Modbus master) reading data from another IMx
configured as a Modbus slave.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Online Settings
Figure 3 - 65.
Modbus Master Tab with Channel Enabled.
The summary table at the top displays existing Modbus channels and their properties.
•
Select the channel you wish to edit from the Modbus channels list.
•
Enter a unique Channel name.
•
Click the Channel enabled checkbox to enable a channel on the IMx. If the channel
is enabled, enter the following values.

In order to know which Lower limit, Upper limit and Zero offset
values to configure, refer to the configuration of the Modbus
device that will interface with the IMx, that is, the Programmable
Logic Controller (PLC), Digital Control System (DCS) or sensors.

If the channel is disabled, the IMx skips the channel and points
assigned to that channel during data collection.
•
Enter the Lower limit value.
•
Enter the Upper limit value.
•
In Zero offset, enter a value to offset the zero point of the measurement.
•
In Sensor notes, type in any additional information you would like to store with the
selected sensor settings.

When you start to edit a field in the Properties area, the Save
and Undo buttons become available.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 129
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Online Settings
•
When you have finished editing the channel properties, click Save to save your
changes.

•
Use the Copy / Paste function to copy the selected channel’s properties and paste
them to another channel. Select a single channel and click the Copy button. The
Paste button then becomes active. You can select a single channel as the target for
the pasted channel properties, or use Shift+Click and Ctrl+click keyboard functions
to select multiple items. Click Paste.

•
To cancel changes to the selected channel, click Undo.
Channel name and sensor notes are not copied to other channels.
Click OK to apply any changes and return to the Online Settings window.
Modbus Export
The Modbus export feature in SKF @ptitude Analyst applies to IMx-S and IMx-T only. It
is supported by IMx firmware version 5.0 or later. If you are using an earlier IMx
firmware version, some Modbus export features, such as the Filter Criteria and Assign
All, will be unavailable in SKF @ptitude Analyst.
On the Modbus Slave tab, you can configure and enable virtual channels to support the
following Modbus data transfers:
•
An external Modbus master reading data from this IMx (configured as a Modbus
slave).
•
Another IMx configured as a Modbus master reading data from this IMx (configured
as a Modbus slave).
The tab enables you to map @Analyst points to specific Modbus registers and save the
desired configuration into the @Analyst database.
3 - 130
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Online Settings
Figure 3 - 66.
Modbus Slave Tab.
The summary table at the top displays existing Modbus export configuration settings
from the @Analyst database along with all known register assignments. If there are no
existing Modbus register assignments, the Point column displays <Unassigned>. Each
line shows information from a single record in the database table that associates a
Modbus register with a specific point in @Analyst.
The critical action to take is to assign an Exported point to the selected Register
number. You can use one of two methods to assign a point to the register number:
•
The Exported point drop-down list with optional filter criteria
•
The Assign All automated function
Both methods are presented below in detail. First, the button controls located in the
lower right of the tab are described.
Buttons
Save – Saves any modified configuration information from the lower edit fields
to the summary table.

It is the OK button rather than the Save button that
saves the configuration data to the @ptitude Analyst
database.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 131
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Online Settings
Undo – Discards any modifications made to configuration information in the
lower edit fields and returns values to what they were before the modifications
were made.

When Modbus Slave first opens, the Save and Undo
buttons are unavailable and appear dimmed. When you
have made entries or edits in the fields, these buttons
will activate.
At any time during the configuration process, you have the option to use the
following buttons:
Unassign all – Clears all existing assignments from the summary table and
sets all entries to <Unassigned>.
OK – Saves the Modbus export register configuration information shown in the
summary table to the @ptitude Analyst database and closes the Modbus Slave
tab.
Cancel – Discards any recent edits and closes the Modbus Slave tab.
Help – Opens help window providing guidance on how to use the Modbus
Slave tab.
Method 1 – Assign an Exported Point with optional Filter Criteria
Follow the steps below to assign an export point. The filter criteria features are
optional.
3 - 132
•
Highlight a register in the summary table. The number selected for
configuration is reflected in the Register number field in the Attributes
section below.
•
Use the Exported point drop-down arrow and select a point from the
drop-down list.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Online Settings
Figure 3 - 67.
Register Number and Exported Point.
All of the available points associated with the current IMx device in the
Analyst database are displayed in the Exported point list unless you use
the Filter Criteria to reduce the points displayed, as described below.
Figure 3 - 68.
Filter Critera.
•
To limit the exported point options to a specific channel number, click the
Channel drop-down arrow and select the desired channel. Only points
related to that channel will display in the Exported point options.
•
To limit the point options to a specific type of point, click the Point Type
drop-down arrow and select the type. Only points of the selected type will
display in the Exported point options.

More than one filter criterion may be used to further
reduce the number of available points listed in the
Exported point options.
The Attributes section in the lower part of the page displays information about
the selected Exported point.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 133
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Online Settings
Full scale range (-/+) enables you to enter a value for the full scale range of
measurement values for the selected point. This range will be from the
negative of the value entered to the value.
•
Click Save to save your changes from the lower edit fields to the summary
table.
•
When you are satisfied with the resulting summary table, click OK to save
the Modbus export register configuration information shown in the
summary table to the @ptitude Analyst database and close the Channel
Properties window.
Method 2 – Assign points by using the Assign All and optional CSV
functions
Instead of selecting an exported point, you can use Assign All, an automatic
assignment function. Export CSV and Import CSV are additional functions that
work with Assign All. We’ll describe how this works below.
Figure 3 - 69.
Assign All, Export CSV, and Import CSV.
•
If you click Assign All, an informational dialog warns you that continuing
with automatic Modbus register assignment will clear all existing
configuration information from the summary table.
•
If you agree to Continue, the summary table is populated with Modbus
register assignments with all supported IMx points found to be associated
with the current IMx device configuration.

The Exported points drop-down list will no longer
display any points available for assignment.
You will probably want to establish the order of the register assignments
and/or the assigned points. You can export the data into a CSV (comma
separated values) format file. Then, open the file and reorder the assigned
register numbers in another application, such as Microsoft Excel, that can
facilitate this process.
3 - 134
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Online Settings
•
To export the summary table, click Export CSV. In the Windows dialog,
specify the folder location and file name.
•
Click OK. The Windows dialog closes and a CSV formatted file that contains
the current Modbus register assignments is generated.
•
After using the file to establish the register number/measurement POINT
pairings you want, save the revised data in CSV format to import it.
•
Click Import CSV. In the Windows dialog, browse to the updated CSV file
and select it for import into SKF @ptitude Analyst.
•
Click OK. The Windows dialog closes and the summary table is then
updated with the imported Modbus export register configuration
information.
Sensor Settings
•
Select the Customize menu’s Online Settings option.
•
Select the Sensor Settings tab.
Figure 3 - 70.
The Online Settings Screen’s Sensor Setup Tab.
All available sensors display in the Sensor Names drop down list. When a sensor from
this list is selected, its entered Properties and Settings display in the tab’s other fields.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 135
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Online Settings
To add a new sensor:
•
Click the tab’s Add button. By default, the name “New Sensor Settings.#” displays.
Fields include:
Name - Assign the new sensor a unique name by typing it in the Name field.
Sensor Power – Select the appropriate sensor power setting. Options include Charge
Converter, External Power, and Internal ICP (4.4 mA).
Settling Time – Type in the appropriate settling time in seconds.
Sensor Notes – Type in any additional information you would like to store with the
selected sensor settings.
The Channel status settings area provides options relating to BOV gating.
Check Sensor OK Status – Click to enable this option. When enabled,
@ptitude Analyst software will check the sensor status, and will display sensor
status in Device status and Online Data View dialogs.
Lower Limit – Type in the BOV lower limit value.
Upper Limit – Type in the BOV upper limit value.
To remove a sensor:
•
Select the sensor you wish to remove from the Sensor Names drop down list.

Only sensors without assigned POINTs can be removed.
•
Click the Remove button.
•
When prompted, confirm you wish to remove the selected device by clicking Yes.
Gating
3 - 136
•
Select the Customize menu’s Online Settings option.
•
Select the Gating tab.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Online Settings
Figure 3 - 71.
The Online Settings Screen’s Gating Tab.
Use this tab to configure shared gating definitions that can be assigned to POINTs on
the POINT Properties screen’s Gating tab.

Reference the Appendix C, Data Collection Gating for more
information about gating.
To add a new gating definition:
•
Click the tab’s Add button. By default, the name “New Logic Gating” displays.
Fields include:
Name - Assign the new sensor a unique name by typing it in the Name field.
Device – Select the device to apply the gating definition to.
Gating Type – Specify the gating type.

Gating type is always Triggered for WMx devices.
Mode – Specify the mode to define the gating conditions that control when data is
collected.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 137
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Alarm Settings
Dwell Time – (preemptive POINTs only) Specify how many seconds the POINT must
wait to collect data in order to allow for another preemptive POINT to collect data if its
condition occurs.
Allow preemption – Enables a timeout to occur for a preemptive POINT.
Timeout value – Specify how many seconds a POINT will wait for the specified
condition to occur before moving on to the next POINT.
Channels – This section works with the State option buttons to configure whether a
high or low setting must be present on specified channel(s) for data to be collected.
(See State below for details.) The box lists all channels available on the device.
Selection of channels varies depending on your choice in the Mode field.
If Bit is selected in the Mode field, the list displays option buttons. Select the
single channel you would like to configure and set the state using the State
option buttons.
If Byte is selected in the Mode field, all channels are used in gating. Highlight
each channel in turn and set the state using the State option buttons, or
double click to toggle the state.
If Combination is selected in the Mode field, the list displays check boxes.
Select any combination of channels to use with gating and set the state using
the State option buttons.
State – Specify whether a High or Low (on/off) setting must be present for data to be
collected.
To remove a device:
•
Select the gating definition you wish to remove from the Logic Gating drop down
list.

Only gating definitions without assigned POINTs can be removed.
•
Click the Remove button.
•
When prompted, confirm you wish to remove the selected device by clicking Yes.
Alarm Settings
Use the Alarm Settings to create alarms that can be assigned to one or more POINTs.
Created alarms can be re-assigned and edited.
Setting Alarms – Overview
By setting alarms on your vibration measurements, the hierarchy’s alarm status
indicators allow you to quickly know if any of your monitored components / machines
moved into an alarm condition. If you do not specify measurement alarm settings,
overall vibration level alarms are set to factory defaults.
@ptitude Analyst offers many ways to alarm on machinery vibration levels:
3 - 138
•
Overall vibration alarms
•
Spectral enveloping (narrow band) alarms
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Alarm Settings
•
Spectral band alarms
•
Phase alarms
Of the above, overall vibration alarms are, by far, the most frequently used alarm type
for detection of machinery faults. Overall vibration is the total vibration energy
measured within a specific frequency range. Measured numerically, a higher than
normal overall value provides an indication that "something" is causing the machine or
component to vibrate more. Below we describe how to go about setting your initial
overall vibration alarm levels. However, the same logic may be used to set alarm levels
for other types of alarms.
If yours is a new system and no vibration measurement history exists for the monitored
machinery, the ISO 10816-1 Standard provides guidance for evaluating overall velocity
vibration measurement severity in machines operating in the 10 to 200 Hz (600 to
12,000 RPM) frequency range. Examples of these types of machines are small, direct
coupled, electric motors and pumps, production motors, medium motors, generators,
steam and gas turbines, turbo compressors, turbo pumps and fans.
It is possible for a machine to be in the early stages of wear or damage and still meet
the criteria in these ISO 10816-1 guidelines. While the Standard can provide a quick
indication of machines that are in serious trouble; long term overall vibration level
trending and experience with a machine’s history provide much more accurate
information on where to set your machinery vibration alarm levels.
Once you have collected enough measurement data (e.g., six data sets), SKF @ptitude
Analyst can display meaningful trends of each measurement’s data. Over time, when
you are convinced that the measurement’s trending vibration level indicates the
component’s known good condition, you may designate it as the measurement’s
“baseline” vibration level, upon which you set two overall vibration alarm levels for
detection of machinery faults, the “alert” level and the “danger” level. Where to set
these two overall alarm levels is the question.
Figure 3 - 72.
Example Trend Plot with Alert (Yellow) and Danger (Red) Alarm Levels.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 139
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Alarm Settings
In general, it is most desirable to specify alert alarm settings high enough to minimize
extraneous alarms, yet conservative enough to not miss a critical excursion in machine
condition. In addition, initially you should set “loose” alarm levels so as to avoid false
alarms. False alarms significantly degrade confidence in the condition monitoring
system’s accuracy. Over time, as you continue to better understand your machinery’s
vibration levels and gain confidence in the accuracy of your vibration measurements,
you may “tighten” the initial alarm levels to acquire earlier detection of machine faults.
A general rule of thumb is to initially set alert alarm levels at one and a half to twice the
baseline levels for measurements. This “alert” alarm level should indicate that a
problem has developed and more frequent monitoring and analysis should occur. Fault
analysis should be initiated and the severity and root cause of the problem should be
established. In addition, analysis results should determine whether necessary repair
parts are ordered, and the date for repair should be established based on minimum
production interruption.
The initial “danger” level alarm is typically set from two and a half to three times the
baseline vibration level. In general, if the danger alarm is reached on a critical machine,
it should be scheduled for repairs as soon as possible. Again, over time, after more
experience with said machine and your vibration measurements, the alarm level can be
adjusted to better fit the specific component / machine.
On bearing measurements, an accurate enveloped acceleration measurement alert
alarm indicates that a bearing is approaching the end of its usable lifetime. Upon such
an alarm, you should more closely monitor the bearing using spectrum analysis with
bearing fault frequency markers to verify the bearing fault and determine proactive
maintenance measures, or to plan the most efficient bearing replacement during a
scheduled machine outage.
3 - 140
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Alarm Settings
Once a good operating baseline is established and sufficient data and experience have
been acquired for you to set your initial alert and danger overall vibration alarm levels,
SKF @ptitude Analyst provides a Statistical Overall Alarms Wizard that guides you
through a process that automatically generates overall alarm settings based upon
historical measurement data (reference the Statistical Alarms Wizard section earlier in
this chapter for details).
To access the Alarm Settings screen:
•
Select the Customize menu’s Alarm Settings option. The Alarm Settings screen
displays.
Figure 3 - 73.
The Alarm Settings Screen’s Overall Tab.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 141
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Alarm Settings
Alarm Settings - Overall
Existing alarms may be edited or removed from the database. The Overall tab allows
you to create, edit, or remove shared Overall alarms.
To create a new alarm:
•
Click the tab's Add button. The Overall alarms field displays “New Overall Alarm”
to indicate that you have created a new alarm.
•
In the Name field, assign the new alarm a unique name.

•
Once the editing process begins, the Overall alarms field is no
longer accessible. You must complete and Save your edits or
cancel them by clicking the Undo button.
Click Save. The Overall alarms field now displays the new alarm name you
specified.
You can also adjust the alarm’s Properties and Settings in this tab. The current
settings graphically display in the tab’s Settings area.
To edit or create Overall Alarm Properties and Settings:
Properties – Select the type of Overall Alarm by clicking the desired option button.
Choose from:
Level - Measurements exceeding the specified alert and danger Settings will
result in an alarm condition.
In Window - Measurements falling within the specified alert low, danger, and
alert high Settings will result in an alarm condition.
Out Of Window - Measurements falling outside the specified danger low, alert
low, alert high, and danger high Settings will result in an alarm condition.
Settings – Select the levels you wish to include by clicking each checkbox.

The availability of the levels, their checkboxes, and their text fields
is based on the type of Overall Alarm selected in the Properties
area.
•
Enter the desired values for each available alarm level.
•
Click the Save button to save your alarm settings.
To remove an existing alarm from the database:
•
Select the desired alarm from the drop down list.
•
Click the Remove button. A confirmation dialog displays.
•
Confirm removal. The selected alarm is permanently removed from the database.

3 - 142
An alarm cannot be removed if it is currently assigned to one or
more POINT. A warning dialog displays if you attempt to remove a
currently assigned alarm.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Alarm Settings
Alarm Settings – Band
Band Alarms provide alert and danger alarms on both peak and spectral values within a
defined frequency band. Use the Band tab to edit and/or specify POINTs’ bands and to
manage shared band alarms.
Figure 3 - 74.
The Alarm Settings Screen’s Band Tab.
Band alarms – Displays the current band alarm. All available band alarms list in the
drop down list.
Band information – Edit and view alarm values.
The following fields are available for viewing set values or editing:
Label – Displays the band name.
Low freq – View or edit the low frequency value or multiple of running speed.
High freq – View or edit the high frequency value or multiple of running speed.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 143
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Alarm Settings

To make the value a multiple of running speed, add an "x" to the
end of the entered number. For example, enter "1.5x" for 1.5
times running speed.
Peak danger – View or edit the peak danger value or % Full Scale value.
Peak alert – View or edit the peak alert danger value or % Full Scale value.
Overall danger – View or edit the overall danger value or % Full Scale value.
Overall alert – View or edit the overall alert value or % Full Scale value.

To make the value a percentage of the full scale, add a "%" to the
end of the entered number. For example, enter "10%" for 10
percent of the full scale value at the time the band is used.

The tab's spectrum graphic display automatically updates as edits
are made.
The Spectrum source field displays the source of the spectrum if two or more POINTs
are currently active.
The Spectrum field displays all available spectra for the active POINT in a drop down
list. The current spectrum displays graphically below.

The tab's spectrum graphic display automatically updates as edits
are made
Browse – Click to select a POINT to use as the source of the spectrum readings viewed
while editing the band alarm. The POINT Selection dialog displays. Select a POINT to
use to define a shared alarm. The hierarchy displays. Select the desired POINT and
click OK.

Bands defined in the Alarm Database are not assigned to the
POINTs used to create them.
Edits may be made on the tab's spectrum graphic display.
To edit the band graphically:
•
Click on the portions of the graphic band to edit. Notice the mouse cursor changes
when over a portion of the band.
•
Drag the band piece to a new position. The value in the edit field updates.

•
Click Add to create a new band alarm.
•
Click Remove to remove the current band alarm. A confirmation dialog displays.
•
Confirm action. The band alarm is deleted.

3 - 144
When editing, you may Save or Undo changes for the current
alarm.
A band alarm may not be removed if it is currently assigned.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Alarm Settings
Alarm Settings – Speed Alarm
Speed alarms allow you to customize overall and band alarm levels based on machine
speed. Use the Speed Alarm tab to edit and/or specify the POINTs’ alarm adjustments
for each speed region.
Figure 3 - 75.
The Alarm Settings / Speed Alarm Tab.
Speed alarm – Displays the current speed alarm. All available speed alarms list in the
drop down list.
Name – Displays the speed alarm name.
Interpret as IMx – Select to display a preview of the speed alarm as it is interpreted for
an IMx POINT.

Interpretation is for display purposes only. Point Properties /
Setup not affected by this setting.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 145
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Alarm Settings
Range – Select the speed regions for which the Properties settings will apply. You may
select the region from the Range drop down list, or by clicking on the specific region on
the speed alarm display. The values in the Properties fields update to reflect the
specified speed region.
•
Click Insert to add a new region to the speed alarm.
•
Click Clear to remove the selected speed region.
Properties - Edit and view alarm values.
The following fields are available for viewing set values or editing:
Start / End Range - Enter each region’s starting and stopping RPMs (i.e., 0 to 1000,
1000 to 2000, 2000 to 3000, etc.).
Ratio - Enter the adjustment to overall and band alarm levels. The normal running
speed region's ratio will be 100. If the next higher speed range is expected to produce
vibration levels 10% higher than the nominal running speed, then the next speed range
ratio would be set to 110.
Linear - This option allows for either a flat, rectangular definition of the adjustment (if
disabled, the entire region will have the same ratio), or a more linear definition of the
ratio (if enabled, the ratio will start from the level defined in the previous speed region
and rise throughout the region until it reaches the next speed region's level).

IMx POINTs always use linear region.
Deadband – When enabled, no alarm processing will occur for this region. This is
mainly to be used when the machine reaches its resonant speed, at which vibration will
be indeterminately high. When enabled, Ratio and Linear fields are disabled.

The tab's spectrum graphic display automatically updates as edits
are made.

IMx does not support deadband; however, @ptitude Analyst
supports deadband for IMx POINTs in post-processing.
•
Click Add to create a new speed alarm.
•
Click Remove to remove the current speed alarm. A confirmation dialog displays.
•
Confirm action. The speed alarm is deleted.

3 - 146
A speed alarm may not be removed if it is currently assigned.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Alarm Settings
Alarm Settings – Envelope
Use the Envelope tab to manage and edit shared envelope alarms. All available
envelope alarms display in the Envelope alarms drop down list.
Figure 3 - 76.
The Alarm Settings Screen’s Envelope Tab.
All available envelope alarms display in the Envelope alarm drop down list, or you may
generate a new envelope alarm.
Shared envelope alarms may not be edited from this tab (use the Customize menu’s
Alarm Database option to edit "shared" alarm parameters).
•
First, select the FFT spectrum to which the envelope alarm will conform, using:
Spectrum source – specifies from which POINT to graphically display the spectrum if
two or more POINTs are currently active.
Spectrum – displays all available time record measurements for the active POINT
(typically the baseline measurement) in a drop down list. The current spectrum displays
graphically below.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 147
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Alarm Settings
To assign a "shared" envelope alarm to the POINT:
•
On the Envelope tab, select the desired shared envelope alarm’s name from the
Envelope Alarms drop down list, the tab fields display the specified alarm’s settings
and the specified envelope appears on the displayed spectrum.
To generate a new envelope alarm for the POINT:
•
Select the Envelope Alarms drop down list’s <Custom envelope> option.
•
Click the Generate button. The Generate Envelope Alarm dialog displays.
Use the Generate Envelope Alarm Dialog to create an envelope alarm based on your
entered values.
% Overdrive – Enter the percent of the POINT’s full scale value to determine the height
of the envelope alarm above the spectral peak. The smaller the number specified, the
tighter the comparison envelope conforms to the designated spectrum.
Spreading % – Enter percent of full scale (or center frequency) to increase the width of
the envelope alarm around spectral peaks. The smaller the number specified, the
tighter the envelope conforms to the sides of the peaks in the specified spectrum.
Spreading Type – (either Center Frequency or Full Scale). If Center Freq. is selected,
the bandwidth about each center frequency increases with higher frequencies. If Full
Scale is selected, the bandwidth about each center frequency is constant, based on a
percent of the full scale frequency.
Threshold – Enter % of the POINT’s full scale value, or an absolute value. The threshold
value provides an opportunity to eliminate false alarms due to vibration "noise." It also
establishes the envelope alarm’s low amplitude "threshold" on the displayed spectrum.
The envelope alarm conforms around all peaks whose amplitudes are higher than the
established threshold as per the Overdrive %, Spreading %, and Spreading Type
settings. All peaks below the established threshold are ignored by the envelope alarm.
The Threshold % default value is set using the Customize menu’s Preferences / Plot
tab.
•
Click OK to generate an envelope alarm based on your entries. Click Cancel to
close the dialog without creating an envelope alarm.
Editing the Envelope Alarm
After you have generated an envelope alarm, you can edit it graphically using your
mouse, or enter numeric envelope parameters using the Set Frequency Range dialog.
To graphically edit the envelope alarm:
3 - 148
•
Click anywhere inside the Envelope tab’s spectrum window. The cursor appears as
an up arrow.
•
Click the mouse on the portion of the envelope alarm line to be edited. A square
icon identifies where the line will be drawn.
•
Drag the mouse to draw the line to create the new envelope alarm.
•
Click the tab’s OK button to save your changes.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Alarm Settings
Tip - You can use your keyboard’s Insert key to begin drawing the envelope alarm line.
Then, use the arrow keys to move the line, and the Insert key again to stop drawing the
line. Refer to Appendix B, SKF @ptitude Analyst Keyboard Support of the
accompanying Introduction manual for more information on using your keyboard to edit
your envelope alarm.
To edit the envelope alarm using numeric frequency ranges:
•
Click the Set Range button. The Set Frequency Range dialog displays.
•
Use the Set Frequency Range dialog to enter low frequency, high frequency, and
level values to edit an existing envelope alarm.
To numerically edit an envelope alarm:
•
Enter the desired low frequency, high frequency, and level value.
•
Click OK. The displayed envelope alarm automatically conforms to your entries.
Alarm Settings – Alarm Group
Alarm groups allow you to group POINTs together. Use the Alarm Group tab to create
new alarm groups.

POINTs are added to an alarm group from the Point Properties /
IMx Setup tab.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 149
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Alarm Settings
Figure 3 - 77.
The Alarm Settings Screen’s Alarm Group Tab.
To create a new alarm group:
•
Select an IMx device from the drop-down list.
•
Click the Add button and enter a name for the alarm group in the Name text entry
box.
For existing alarm groups, you may view the POINTs that have been added to the alarm
group in the Included POINTs area. This is a read-only field. To add or remove
POINTs from the alarm group, you must edit the POINT’s properties on the POINT
Properties / IMx Setup tab.
3 - 150
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Alarm Settings
To remove an alarm group:
•
Select the alarm group you wish to remove from the Alarm Groups drop-down list.

•
If POINTs are included in this alarm group you must first remove
them by editing the POINT’s properties on the POINT Properties
/ IMx Setup tab.
Click the Remove button.
Messages
Use the Customize / Alarm Settings screen’s Messages tab to create shared (public)
alarm messages to assign to machines and POINTs to automatically display important
alarm information.
All previously defined alarm messages appear in the Alarm messages drop down list.
To create a public Message:
•
Select the Customize menu’s Alarm Settings option. The Alarm Settings screen
displays.
•
Select the Messages tab.
•
Click the Messages tab’s Add button. The tab enters edit mode.
•
Specify appropriate information into the following fields:
Name – Specify a name to define your custom message.
Format – Select the message format from the drop down list. Available options
include:
Free form – Allows you to manually type in the summary and content for your
message.
Summary – Type in text summarizing your alarm message for easy recognition. For
example, if you have an alarm message that details shut down instructions in the case
of an overall danger high alarm level, your summary may read, "Emergency Shut Down
Instructions."
Content – Enter your complete alarm message in the content text area. Using the
above example, your alarm message content would include detailed shut down
instructions, and any other pertinent information required in the case of the triggered
alarm type.
•
Click the Save button to save the new message and add it to the available public
messages.
•
Click the Undo button to undo changes.
•
Click Remove to remove the current message.

Messages currently in use cannot be removed.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 151
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Statistical Overall Alarms Wizard
Statistical Overall Alarms Wizard
Overview
For POINTs in a Workspace window, the Statistical Overall Alarms Wizard guides you
through a process that automatically generates overall alarm settings based upon
historical measurement data.

The Statistical Overall Alarms Wizard only operates on an active
Workspace window.
To initiate the wizard:
•
Open the desired Workspace window.
•
Select the Customize menu’s Alarm Attributes / Statistical Overall… option. The
wizard’s Introduction screen displays.
Introduction
The Introduction screen is the first screen in the Statistical Overall Alarms Wizard.
The measurement data used to generate the alarm values is generated from the
POINTs included in the selected Workspace (identified in the Workspace field).
•
From the Workspace drop down list, select the Workspace containing POINTs for
which you would like to generate the alarm values.
•
From the Full scale units drop down list, select a measurement unit. The Full
scale units drop down list displays a list of the full scale units for POINTs in the
selected workspace. Only POINTs with the selected measurement unit are used to
generate alarm values.
•
Click the Save processing details to “Statistical Overall Alarms.log” check box to
create and save a log file.
•
Click Next to continue.
Alarm Assignment
Select the calculation method to use to determine alarm values.
Individual POINTs – Select to use each POINT's readings to generate a unique set of
alarm values for the POINT. The resulting values are assigned to each POINT as a
private alarm.

This operation generates and assigns a private alarm for each
POINT.
Across all POINTs – Select to use the readings for all the POINTs to generate one set
of alarm values that is assigned to each POINT included in the calculation. The resulting
values are saved as a shared alarm.

•
3 - 152
If Across all POINTs is selected, a Review window displays before
alarms are applied, allowing verification and confirmation.
Click Next to continue.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Statistical Overall Alarms Wizard
•
Click Back to return to the previous screen.
•
Click Cancel to exit the wizard.
Measurement Selection
Determine the method for selecting the measurement data to generate overall alarm
values.
All measurements – Select to use all measurement data to generate the overall alarm
values.
Measurements in this date range – Select and enter a date range to use all
measurements in the indicated date range to generate the overall alarm values.
Last fixed number of measurements – Select and enter number of measurements to
use the specified number of measurements to generate overall alarm values.
Limits – Allow you to filter abnormal measurements from the calculation:
Max. Amplitude- Enter the maximum amplitude of the overall value to include
in calculation.
Min. Amplitude – Enter the minimum amplitude of the overall value to include
in calculation.
Min Measurements – Enter the minimum number of the POINT's
measurements to be included in calculation.

Only POINTs that have the number of indicated minimum
measurements (or more) are included in the calculation.

Min. Measurements field is not available if measurement selection
is "Last fixed number of measurements."
Channel – Enter the channel number of multi-channel POINTs to include in
the calculation.
Enable outlier removal – An “outlier” refers to data that is not typical, or is
outside a specified data measurement range. When the Enable outlier
removal check box is enabled, measurement values that fall outside the outlier
range are excluded from the calculation.

Outlier detection only occurs if the number of measurements is
greater than or equal to the Min Measurements specification.
Outlier threshold factor – Enter a threshold factor (1.0 to 5.0) to calculate the
lower and upper limits of the outlier range (outlier threshold). The threshold
factor is multiplied by the standard deviation to calculate the outlier threshold.
The default threshold factor is 3.0.
•
Click Next to continue.
•
Click Back to return to the previous screen.
•
Click Cancel to exit the wizard.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 153
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Statistical Overall Alarms Wizard
Alarm Type
Select the type of overall alarm to generate:
Level – Provides two alarm levels (Alert High and Danger High). An appropriate alarm
registers if the measured value is greater than either of the alarm levels.
Out of Window – Provides four alarm levels (Danger High, Alert High, Alert Low,
Danger Low). An appropriate alarm registers if the measured value progresses out of
the alarm window (does not fall between the alert high and alert low alarm settings).
Generation Parameters
Figure 3 - 78.
The Statistical Overall Alarms Wizard’s Generation Parameters Screen.
Note that you need not perform the standard deviation math. The wizard’s default
values have been selected to produce overall alarms that work well for most situations.
However, if you wish to conform the overall alarms closer, enter smaller numbers. To
conform the overall alarms further away, enter higher numbers. After completing the
wizard, view your trend plots and make adjustments as necessary.
•
3 - 154
If necessary, edit the standard deviation information to be used in the overall alarm
calculations.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Statistical Overall Alarms Wizard
Standard deviation factors
Danger High – Value to be multiplied by the standard deviation to establish the danger
high level.
Alert High - Value to be multiplied by the standard deviation to establish the alert high
level.
Alert Low – Value to be multiplied by the standard deviation to establish the alert low
level.
Danger Low – Value to be multiplied by the standard deviation to establish the danger
low level.
•
Click Next to continue.
•
Click Back to return to the previous screen.
•
Click Cancel to exit the wizard.
Minimum Alarm Values
Set the minimum alarm values to be used in the calculation. If the standard deviation is
small, the minimum alarm values allow you to set a wider range, minimizing the chance
for bad alarms to occur.
Enter the minimum values for Danger High, Alert High, Alert Low, and Danger Low.
•
Click Next to continue.
•
Click Back to return to the previous screen.
•
Click Cancel to exit the wizard.
Process
Click the Next button to begin the overall alarm calculations. Process progress displays
along with the number of POINTs processed.
•
Click Next to continue.
•
Click Back to return to the previous screen.
•
Click Cancel to exit the wizard.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 155
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Statistical Overall Alarms Wizard
Review

This screen only displays if Across all POINTs was selected on
the wizard's Alarm Assignment screen.
Figure 3 - 79.
The Statistical Overall Alarms Wizard’s Review Screen.
The statistically derived overall alarm results display on this screen. These numbers
may be edited, if necessary.
Fields include:
Alarm set name – Specify a unique name for the alarm.
Calculated alarm values – Edit values as needed.

Calculated alarm values fields are available based on overall
alarm type selection.
POINTs processed for input criteria – Number of POINTs selected as candidates for
processing.
POINTs included – Number of included POINTs.
POINTs excluded – Number of excluded POINTs.

3 - 156
Alarms are still applied to the POINTs excluded from calculation
functions.
•
Click Next to continue.
•
Click Back to return to the previous screen.
•
Click Cancel to exit the wizard.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Statistical Band Alarms Wizard
Finish
•
Click the Finish button to assign the statistically derived overall alarm to all POINTs
in the specified workspace. Process progress displays on the screen.
•
Click Back to return to the previous screen.
•
Click Cancel to stop the operation without changing the POINTs.
Statistical Band Alarms Wizard
Overview
For POINTs in a Workspace window, the Statistical Band Alarms Wizard guides you
through a process that automatically generates band alarm settings based upon
historical measurement data.

The Statistical Band Alarms Wizard only operates on an active
Workspace window—not on a Route.
To initiate the wizard:
•
Select the Customize menu’s Alarm Attributes / Statistical Band option. The
wizard’s first screen displays.
To complete the wizard:
•
On each screen, enter values and select options as appropriate.
•
Click Next to proceed to the next screen.

Alternatively, you can click Back to return to the previous screen
or Cancel to exit the wizard.
Choose a Workspace
Choose a Workspace is the first screen you encounter in the Statistical Band Alarms
Wizard. On this screen, you select the Workspace for which you intend to create band
alarms. The measurement data used to generate the alarm values come from the
applicable POINTs within the Workspace you select.

The POINTs must have an existing band alarm setup that
specifies the spectra frequency range for the new alarm levels. If
no band alarm exists, the wizard will have nothing to calculate.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 157
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Statistical Band Alarms Wizard
Figure 3 - 80.
The Statistical Band Alarms Wizard’s Choose a Workspace Screen.
3 - 158
•
From the Workspace drop down list, select the Workspace containing POINTs for
which you would like to generate the alarm values.
•
From the Full scale units drop down list, select a measurement unit. The Full
scale units drop down list displays a list of the full scale units for POINTs in the
selected workspace. Only POINTs with the measurement unit you select are used
to generate alarm values.
•
Click the Save processing details to “Statistical Band Alarms.log” check box to
create and save a log file.
•
Click Next to continue to the Choose Calculation Method screen.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Statistical Band Alarms Wizard
Choose Calculation Method
The wizard calculates statistical band alarms based on POINTs measurements only. On
this screen, you select the calculation method to use to determine how alarm values will
be generated and applied to those POINTs.
Figure 3 - 81.
The Statistical Band Alarms Wizard’s Choose Calculation Method Screen.
•
Select a calculation method:
Individual POINTs – Select to use each POINT's readings to generate a unique set
of alarm values for the POINT. The resulting values are assigned to each POINT as
a private alarm.

This operation generates and assigns a private alarm for each
POINT. It replaces POINTs' existing private alarms with new,
statistically derived private alarms on the same frequency band.
Any shared alarm assignments remain the same.
Across all POINTs – Select to use all readings from all POINTs to generate one set
of alarm values that is assigned to each POINT included in the calculation. The
resulting values are saved as a shared alarm.

If Across all POINTs is selected, the Disable assignments of
existing private alarms checkbox becomes editable. Select this
checkbox to ignore (disable) existing private alarm assignments.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 159
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Statistical Band Alarms Wizard

•
This operation replaces existing shared alarms with new,
statistically derived shared alarms on the same frequency band,
which is calculated only on the measurements of the POINTs to
which an alarm is assigned. Any private alarm assignments
remain the same.
Click Next to continue to the Specify Input Criteria screen.
Specify Input Criteria
On this screen, you specify the historical measurements to use for the statistical data
set, the minimum measurement count for a POINT, the peak and overall ranges
(measurements outside of which are to be excluded), and the outliers (the sigma
distance from the mean value).
Figure 3 - 82.
The Statistical Band Alarms Wizard’s Specify Input Criteria Screen.
•
Select the historical measurements to use:
All measurements – Select to use all measurement data to generate the band
alarm values.
Measurements from/to – Select, then enter a date range to use all measurements
in the indicated date range to generate the band alarm values.
3 - 160
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Statistical Band Alarms Wizard
Last ___ measurements – Select, then enter a number of measurements to use
the specified number of measurements to generate band alarm values.
•
Use the remaining fields to filter abnormal measurements from the calculation:
Min measurements – Enter the minimum number of the POINT's measurements
to be included in calculation.

Only POINTs that have the number of indicated minimum
measurements (or more) are included in the calculation.

The Min. Measurements value cannot be greater than the Last
___ measurements value, if one has been entered.
Channel – Select the channel number of multi-channel POINTs to include in the
calculation.
Max peak – Enter the maximum peak of the band value to include in calculation.
Min peak – Enter the minimum peak of the band value to include in calculation.
Max overall – Enter the maximum overall band value to include in calculation.
Min overall – Enter the minimum overall band value to include in calculation.
Enable outlier removal – An “outlier” refers to data that is not typical, or is outside
a specified data measurement range. When the Enable outlier removal check box
is enabled, measurement values that fall outside the outlier range are excluded
from the calculation.
There are two passes of outlier removal. The first is a simple exclusion of
measurements whose peaks and overall values are outside of the range specified
by the min/max peak and min/max overall input. The second is the removal of
measurements by calculating the normal distribution of both peak and overall
values and excluding measurements whose values are beyond the specified factor
of standard deviation of the data. You can turn off the second pass if it is not
desired.

Outlier detection only occurs if the number of measurements is
greater than or equal to the Min measurements specification.
Outlier threshold factor – Enter a threshold factor (1.0 to 5.0) to calculate the
lower and upper limits of the outlier range (outlier threshold). The threshold factor
is multiplied by the standard deviation to calculate the outlier threshold. The
default threshold factor is 3.0.
•
Click Next to continue to the Set Alarm Level Factors screen.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 161
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Statistical Band Alarms Wizard
Set Alarm Level Factors
On this screen, you specify the standard deviation factors to be used in calculating alarm
levels. Alarm levels are calculated using the equation Value = Mean + (n * Standard
Deviation), where n represents the factor for the level to be calculated.
Figure 3 - 83.
The Statistical Band Alarms Wizard’s Set Alarm Level Factors Screen.
•
To use a standard deviation factor in an alarm level’s calculation, select that alarm
level’s checkbox and enter the appropriate n value:
Peak danger – Value to be multiplied by the standard deviation to establish the
peak danger level. An appropriate alarm registers if the measured peak value is
greater than mean + (the number entered * standard deviation).
Peak alert – Value to be multiplied by the standard deviation to establish the peak
alert level. An appropriate alarm registers if the measured peak value is greater
than mean + (the number entered * standard deviation).
Overall danger – Value to be multiplied by the standard deviation to establish the
overall danger level. An appropriate alarm registers if the measured overall value is
greater than mean + (the number entered * standard deviation).
Overall alert – Value to be multiplied by the standard deviation to establish the
overall alert level. An appropriate alarm registers if the measured overall value is
greater than mean + (the number entered * standard deviation).
3 - 162
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Statistical Band Alarms Wizard
•
Click Next to continue to the Set Alarm Level Limits screen.

To continue, you must set at least one alarm level’s standard
deviation factor.
Set Alarm Level Limits
On this screen, you set minimum and maximum alarm level ranges to guard against
unacceptably narrow statistically derived alarm levels. You can enter each alarm range
as an absolute value (e.g. “5”), as an offset relative to the calculated mean (e.g. “5+”), or
as a percentage factor to be multiplied by the mean (e.g. “100%”).
Figure 3 - 84.
The Statistical Band Alarms Wizard’s Set Alarm Level Limits Screen.
•
To set a level, select its checkbox and enter the appropriate absolute value, offset,
or percentage factor:
Minimum Levels – Set the minimum alarm values to be used in the calculation. If
the standard deviation is small, the minimum alarm values allow you to set a wider
range, minimizing the chance for bad alarms to occur.
Peak danger – Value to be applied to establish the peak danger low level.
Peak alert – Value to be applied to establish the peak alert low level.
Overall danger – Value to be applied to establish the overall danger low level.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 163
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Statistical Band Alarms Wizard
Overall alert – Value to be applied to establish the overall alert low level.
Maximum Levels – Set the maximum alarm values to be used in the calculation. If
the standard deviation is large, the maximum alarm values allow you to set a wider
range, minimizing the chance for bad alarms to occur.
Peak danger – Value to be applied to establish the peak danger high level.
Peak alert – Value to be applied to establish the peak alert high level.
Overall danger – Value to be applied to establish the overall danger high level.
Overall alert – Value to be applied to establish the overall alert high level.
•
Click Next to continue to the Start Calculation Process screen.
Start Calculation Process
On this screen, you begin the band alarm calculation process.
Figure 3 - 85.
The Statistical Band Alarms Wizard’s Start Calculation Process Screen.
•
Click Next to begin the band alarm calculations. The screen displays information
about the process progress, the number of POINTs processed, etc.

•
3 - 164
This information will appear in the log file.
Click Next to continue to the Apply New Alarms screen.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Statistical Band Alarms Wizard
Apply New Alarms
On this screen, you apply alarm assignments.
Figure 3 - 86.
The Statistical Band Alarms Wizard’s Apply New Alarms Screen.
•
Click Next to assign the statistically derived band alarms to the POINTs in the
specified workspace. The screen displays information about the process progress.
•
Click Finish to close the screen.
Once the alarm assignments have been applied, you can go to any of the POINTs’
POINT Properties / Band tab to view the new statistical band and statistical alarm
values (see figure on following page).

To revert back to a previous alarm band, click Load from the
Band tab and select a different alarm band.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 165
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Templates
Figure 3 - 87.
The POINT Properties Screen’s Band Tab.
Templates
Templates save time, contribute to consistent organization, and allow you to make bulk
entries. For example, you can quickly set the machine speed for all POINTs beneath a
machine with a template. Templates allow you to define custom organizational
structures for repeated use when building or defining your hierarchy.

3 - 166
The same template may be used across many different
hierarchies.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Templates
Managing Templates
To add a new template:
•
Select the Customize menu’s Template option. The Template dialog displays.
Figure 3 - 88.
The Template Dialog.
•
Click the dialog’s Add button. The Template Properties dialog displays.
•
Enter the new template’s Name and Description.
•
Select the template’s Type from the drop down list. Select a previously created
template or <Custom>.

•
If you need a new template that is only slightly different from a
previously created template, you can select a previous template
as your Type and then edit only the necessary items.
Click the dialog’s OK button. The new template window displays.
In the template window, insert new Groups and POINTs to build the new template’s
hierarchy structure.
•
Using the Insert menu, insert desired structure elements (groups and POINTs) in
the desired configuration into the template window.

You may also use Copy, Paste, and Paste Multiple to build your
template’s structure.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 167
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Templates
Figure 3 - 89.
Template Window with Custom Structure.
When building your template structure, you may also set up custom names using
“special” characters in the name fields.
When applying a template, the template wizard assists with naming hierarchy items
whose template name includes “special” characters
Custom Names
Templates hierarchy items may be inserted in your database:
•
With the name specified in the template, or
•
With the Template wizard prompting you to enter a name for items inserted in your
database, or
•
With custom names created by the Template wizard that are based upon your
existing database.
The last two options are accomplished by special characters within your template
hierarchy names.
•
When a new item is inserted into the Template, its Properties dialog displays.

You may also access the Properties dialog by right-clicking to
access the context menu, or using the Properties toolbar button.
You can configure the custom naming feature to prompt you to input a unique name for
the specified item as the template is applied. You can also set up your template to
automatically name structure items based on your entered parameters.
To set up name prompt:
•
3 - 168
In the Properties dialog’s Name field, enter a “^” as the first character. During the
application of the template, the template wizard will prompt you to either accept
the item’s name as it appears after the “^”, or enter a new name for the hierarchy
item as the template is being processed.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Templates
Use of special characters enables automatic naming during template application. Based
on your entries, the new items take their name from the portions of the parent item’s
name.
To set up automatic naming:
•
In the Properties dialog’s Name field, use a “$” to cause the inserted template item
(child) to use a portion of the target hierarchy parent’s name. Each “$” in the
template item’s name is replaced by a sequential word from the target hierarchy
parent’s name. Use as many “$”s as necessary. For example, if the parent item’s
name is “Dryer Section,” you might apply a template item named “$ $ Felts.” This
will insert the template item (child) and name it “Dryer Section Felts.”
•
Also, square brackets (“[ ]”) may be used to strip items from the final name. This
allows you to use “[ ]”s and “$”s together to use some portions of the parent’s name
while skipping others. For example, if the parent’s name is “FD Fan”, and you wish
to remove the “FD” prefix, place “[ ]”s around the dollar sign representing the “FD”
( [$]$ ). The inserted item will be named “Fan.” You can also use “[ ]”s to include
comments that are visible when viewing the template and as the template is
applied. The comment text does not appear in the final name. To do so, enter your
auto-naming characters followed by your comment text enclosed in brackets. For
example, using the earlier “FD Fan” example, the entry “[$]$[left env] would result
in the item being named “Fan.” The comment text, “left env” is visible to you when
you view the template, and as the template is applied, but is deleted from the item’s
name in the hierarchy list.
To open an existing template:
•
In the Template window, select the template to open.
•
Click the window’s Open button. The selected template window displays.
To remove an existing template:
•
In the Template window, select the template to remove.
•
Click the window’s Remove button. When prompted, confirm action.
The selected template is removed.
To add a Template Type:
•
In the Template window, click Add, or select an existing template and click Edit.
The Template Properties dialog displays.
•
In the General tab’s Type field, place your cursor in the drop down list and enter
the new type name.
•
Click OK to save the new template type and apply it to the current template.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 169
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Templates
Applying Templates
To apply a template:
•
In your target Hierarchy, select the item under which you wish the template items
to branch.
•
Select the Insert menu’s Apply Template option. The Apply Template screen
displays.
The Apply Template screen lists all available templates.
•
Select desired template and click Apply to launch the Apply Template Wizard.
Introduction Screen
Figure 3 - 90.
The Apply Template Wizard Screen.
The Apply Template Wizard guides you through the required steps to create new
entries under the selected hierarchy item, using the selected template.
The introduction screen displays the following information about the selected template:
Name – Displays the name of the template being applied.
Description – Displays the description provided for the template.
Destination – Displays the location in the hierarchy to which the template will
be applied.
Before continuing, ensure the template name is correct, and ensure the destination is
accurate.
•
3 - 170
Click Next to continue.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Templates
Configuration Screen
The template application process begins on the Configuration screen. This screen
walks through the template, gathering information as needed:
Name - If necessary, you will be prompted to specify the name of the item being
processed.
Running speed - Specify the machine speeds for the highlighted machine. This speed
will be used to set the speed of each POINT beneath the machine.
The processing stops to allow you to enter necessary information.

Custom Naming
You will be prompted to enter a name if you set your template up
using the special name-prompt character “^.” Your structure
elements will be automatically named if you set up your template
using auto-name characters.

•
Click Next to continue.
When the template processing is complete, click Next to continue to the build screen.

View the template’s progress in the screen’s progress bar.

Click Back to return to the wizard’s last stopping point.
Build Screen
Figure 3 - 91.
The Apply Template Wizard Screen.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 171
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Working with Filters
This screen uses the template to build the template hierarchy items within the specified
target hierarchy item.

The wizard is capable of generating multiple copies of the
template.
•
Specify the number of copies required.
•
Click Next to build the hierarchy.
•
Click Finish to close the wizard.
Working with Filters
Filters allow you to setup and apply filter criteria that determine which POINTs display
in a new filtered Workspace window. Filtered workspaces group together POINTs and
Groups (based on your filter input) in one window for easy comparison and analysis.
Managing Filters
Use the Customize menu’s Filters option to manage (add, copy, edit, and remove)
filters. This allows you to define reusable filters.
To add a new filter:
•
Select the Customize menu’s Filters option. The Filters screen displays.
•
Click the Add button. The Filter Editor screen displays.
Figure 3 - 92.
The Filter Editor Screen.
3 - 172
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Working with Filters
Name - Specify the new filter’s name.

It is helpful to give the filter a name based on its criteria for easy
recognition. For example, if you need to sort Groups based on
their priority setting, you may want to create and name a filter
specifically for Priority.
Keep hierarchy – Click the checkbox to determine whether the hierarchy Groups appear
with their filtered POINTs in the filtered workspace, or whether only the filtered POINTs
appear in the filtered workspace. If disabled, filtered POINTs appear beneath the
filtered machine without the original hierarchical format. The filtered workspace lists all
filtered POINTs under a “Filtered Machine” hierarchy item.
Filter on attributes – Define which attributes to filter on. Attributes are categorized by
machine, measurement, POINT, data type, and/or attribute type. Select an attribute
group to modify its individual settings.
Settings – Displays current individual attribute settings for the specified attribute
category. Use the edit fields to view and/or edit attributes as necessary.

•
When one or more attribute within an attribute category is
included in the current filter, a checkmark displays next to the
attribute category folder.
Use the All and Clear buttons to quickly include all or none of the displayed
attributes (rather than selecting / de-selecting one by one) for the selected attribute
category in your current filter.
Include – Specify whether to filter for POINTs that match every attribute setting, or
filter for POINTs that match at least one attribute setting.
Any Selected – Select to filter for POINTs matching any individual attribute of
the total included in the filter. Only these POINTs display in the Filtered
Workspace
All Selected - Select to filter for POINTs matching all attributes included in the
filter. Only these POINTs display in the Filtered Workspace.

The number of attributes selected and the total number of
available attributes displays in the screen’s lower left corner.
•
Click the OK button to create a new workspace based on the defined criteria of the
current filter. A progress bar displays, indicating filter process status.
•
Click Cancel to close screen without performing filter and without saving filter
entries.
To create a new filter based on a copy of an existing filter:
If you need a new filter that is only slightly different from a previously created filter, you
can select the previous filter and then edit only the necessary items.
•
In the Filters screen, select the existing filter you wish to copy and use as a
template.
•
Click the screen’s Copy button. The Filters Editor screen displays.
•
Enter the new filter’s name.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 173
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Working with Filters

By default, the new filter is given the same name as the copied
filter on which it is based, with a numerical suffix.
Filter on attributes - Select additional individual attributes, or edit the existing
attributes. When an existing filter is selected, its existing selected attributes display.
•
Click OK to apply the new filter.
To edit an existing filter:
•
In the Filters screen, select the existing filter you wish to edit.
•
Click the screen’s Edit button. The Filters Editor screen displays.
Filter on attributes – Displays the selected existing filter’s selected attributes.
•
Perform your edits and click the screen’s OK button to save the edited filter.
To remove an existing filter:
•
In the Filters screen, select the existing filter you wish to remove.
•
Click the screen’s Remove button. Confirm removal when prompted. The filter is
removed.
Applying Filters
You can create and apply private and shared filters using the Insert menu’s Apply
Filters screen. When a filter is applied, the resulting items display in a new Workspace
window.
To apply a filter:
•
Select the Insert menu’s Apply Filter option. The Apply Filter screen displays.
Figure 3 - 93.
The Apply Filter Screen.
3 - 174
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Working with Filters
Filter – Select an existing filter or <Private Filter>. This determines what to base your
filter on (either a copy of an existing shared filter or to create a new private filter).
Filter on attributes – Displays the selected existing filter’s selected attributes.
Keep hierarchy - Click the checkbox to determine whether the hierarchy Groups appear
with their filtered POINTs in the filtered workspace, or whether only the filtered POINTs
appear in the filtered workspace. If disabled, filtered POINTs appear beneath the
filtered machine without the original hierarchical format. The filtered workspace lists all
filtered POINTs under a “Filtered Machine” hierarchy item.
•
In the screen’s Filter from area, select Root node – Hierarchy to search the entire
hierarchy for matching POINTs. Select Selected node to search from your selected
node and below only.
•
In the screen’s Filter on attributes area, define which attributes to filter on.
Attributes specific to machine, measurement, POINT, data type, and/or attribute
type are grouped together. Select an attribute type to include in the filter.
•
Attribute settings for the selected attribute group display in the screen’s Settings
area. View and/or edit attributes as necessary in the displayed input fields.

Individual attributes are described in detail in the next section.

When one or more attribute within an attribute group is included
in the current filter, a checkmark displays next to the attribute
group folder.
Include – Specify whether to filter for POINTs that match every attribute setting, or
filter for POINTs that match at least one attribute setting.
Any Selected – Select to filter for POINTs matching any individual attribute of
the total included in the filter. Only these POINTs display in the Filtered
Workspace.
All Selected - Select to filter for POINTs matching all attributes included in the
filter. Only these POINTs display in the Filtered Workspace.
•

The Include option may or may not appear, depending on the
Filter on attribute option that is currently selected.

The number of attributes selected and the total number of
available attributes displays in the screen’s lower left corner.
Click the screen’s OK button to apply the filter as a private filter

When a filter is applied, the resulting items display in a new
Workspace window.
To make the filter a shared filter:
•
Click Share As to assign the current filter a unique name and make it available as a
shared filter. The Enter Filter Name dialog displays.
•
Enter a unique filter name and click OK.
•
Click the Apply Filter screen’s OK button to create a workspace based on the
defined criteria of the current filter. A progress bar displays, indicating filter
process status.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 175
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Working with Filters
•
Click Cancel to close screen without performing filter and without saving filter
entries.
Individual Filter Attributes
All individual filter attributes are described below.
Asset
This attribute is located under General / Machine.
Filters for all POINTs under the selected machine with the indicated asset (the
physical machinery occupying the segment).
Edit – Enter the asset in the text field.

Standard wildcard operations are supported.
Machine Description
This attribute is located under General / Machine.
Filters for all POINTs under the selected machine with the indicated
description.
Edit – Enter the machine description in text field.

Standard wildcard operations are supported.
Machine Name
This attribute is located under General / Machine.
Filters for all POINTs under the selected machine with the indicated name.
Edit – Enter the machine name in the text field.

Standard wildcard operations are supported.
Priority
This attribute is located under General / Machine.
Filters for all POINTs under the selected machine with the indicated priority
assignment.
Edit – Select one or more priority assignment(s).
Segment
This attribute is located under General / Machine.
Filters for all POINTs under the selected machine with the indicated segment
(physical location of a Group).
Edit – Enter the segment in the text field.

3 - 176
Standard wildcard operations are supported.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Working with Filters
Alarms
This attribute is located under Measurement.
Filters for all POINTs with a last measurement in the indicated alarm.
Edit – Select one or more alarms from the settings list. Use the All button to
select all alarms in the settings list. Use the Clear button to clear all selections
from the alarms in the settings list. Select Include All Selected to include
POINTs matching all alarm selections. Select Include Any Selected to include
POINTs matching at least one alarm selection.
Last Measurement Date
This attribute is located under Measurement.
Filters for all POINTs with a last measurement taken between (and including)
the specified dates.
Edit – Enter the dates using standard date selection operation.
Last Measurement Value
This attribute is located under Measurement.
Filters for all POINTs with an overall value (Channel 1) between and including
specified values.
Edit – Enter values in the edit fields.
Overdue
This attribute is located under Measurement.
Filters for all POINTs’ schedule condition (Overdue or Not Overdue).
Edit – Select Overdue or Not Overdue.
Number of Days – Enter the number of days (from now). Filters for POINTs
matching the selected status (Overdue or Not Overdue) within the entered
date range.
Band Alarm
This attribute is located under POINT / Alarm.
Filters for all POINTs with the selected shared band alarm.
Edit – Select one or more shared band alarm from the settings list. Use the All
button to select all shared band alarms in the settings list. Use the Clear
button to clear all selections from the shared band alarms in the settings list.
Envelope Alarm
This attribute is located under POINT / Alarm.
Filters for all POINTs with the selected shared envelope alarm.
Edit – Select one or more shared envelope alarm from the settings list. Use
the All button to select all shared envelope alarms in the settings list. Use the
Clear button to clear all selections from the shared envelope alarms in the
settings list.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 177
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Working with Filters
Overall Alarm
This attribute is located under POINT / Alarm.
Filters for all POINTs with the selected shared overall alarm.
Edit – Select one or more shared overall alarm from the settings list. Use the
All button to select all shared overall alarms in the settings list. Use the Clear
button to clear all selections from the shared overall alarms in the settings list.
Speed Alarm
This attribute is located under POINT / Alarm.
Filters for all POINTs with the selected shared speed alarm.
Edit – Select one or more shared speed alarm from the settings list. Use the
All button to select all shared speed alarms in the settings list. Use the Clear
button to clear all selections from the shared speed alarms in the settings list.
Application Type
This attribute is located under POINT / General.
Filters for all POINTs configured to collect the indicated application data.
Edit – Select one or more application type from the settings list. Use the All
button to select all application types in the settings list. Use the Clear button to
clear all selections from the application types in the settings list.
DAD Type
This attribute is located under POINT / General.
Filters for all POINTs with the indicated DAD type.
Edit - Select one or more DAD type from the settings list. Use the All button
to select all DAD types in the settings list. Use the Clear button to clear all
selections from the DAD types in the settings list.
Enable / Disable
This attribute is located under POINT / General.
Filters for all POINTs enabled or disabled for download.
Edit – Select Enable or Disable.
Filter Keys
This attribute is located under POINT / General.
Filters for all POINTs with the indicated filter key(s).
Edit - Select one or more filter key from the settings list. Use the All button to
select all filter keys in the settings list. Use the Clear button to clear all
selections from the filter keys in the settings list. Select Include All Selected
to include POINTs matching all filter key selections. Select Include Any
Selected to include POINTs matching at least one filter key selection.
3 - 178
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Working with Filters
Frequency Sets
This attribute is located under POINT / General.
Filters for all POINTs with the selected shared frequency set.
Edit – Select one or more shared frequency set from the settings list. Use the
All button to select all shared frequency sets in the settings list. Use the Clear
button to clear all selections from the shared frequency sets in the settings list.
POINT Description
This attribute is located under POINT / General.
Filters for all POINTs with the indicated description.
Edit – Enter POINT description in POINT Description field.
POINT Name
This attribute is located under POINT / General.
Filters for all POINTs with the indicated name.
Edit – Enter POINT name in POINT Name field.

Wildcard characters are available for use.
Sensor Type
This attribute is located under POINT / General.
Filters for all POINTs with the indicated sensor type.
Edit - Select one or more sensor type from the settings list.
Evaluation Time
This attribute is located under POINT / Derived.
Filters for all derived POINTs with the indicated evaluation time.
Edit – Enter the evaluation Units, and Minimum and Maximum values in the
appropriate fields.
Expression
This attribute is located under POINTs / Derived.
Filters for all POINTs with the selected shared expression.
Edit – Select one or more expressions from the settings list. Use the All
button to select all expressions in the settings list. Use the Clear button to
clear all selections from the settings list.
Active State
This attribute is located under POINT / Online.
Filters for all POINTs matching the indicated Active State setting (High or
Low) (as configured in POINT Properties / Setup for Logic POINTs).
Edit – Select the Active State setting, High or Low.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 179
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Working with Filters
Autorange
This attribute is located under POINT / Online.
Filters for all POINTs matching the indicated Autorange setting (On or Off) (as
configured in POINT Properties / Setup).
Edit – Select the Autorange setting: On or Off.
Channel Number
This attribute is located under POINT / Online.
Filters for all POINTs matching the indicated minimum and maximum Channel
Number entries.
Edit – Enter the Minimum and Maximum channel number values.
Control POINT
This attribute is located under POINT / Online.
Filters for all POINTs matching the indicated Control POINT selection.
Edit – Select the appropriate Control POINT from the displayed hierarchy.
Device
This attribute is located under POINT / Online.
Filters for all POINTs matching the indicated Device type (as configured in
POINT Properties / Setup).
Edit – Select one or more device type from settings list. Use the All button to
select all device types units in the settings list. Use the Clear button to clear all
selections from the device types in the settings list.
Downloaded POINTs
This attribute is located under POINT / Online.
Filters for all POINTs that have been downloaded to the selected device.
Edit – Select one or more devices from settings list. Use the All button to
select all devices in the settings list. Use the Clear button to clear all selections
from the devices in the settings list.
Gain
This attribute is located under POINT / Online.
Filters for all POINTs matching the indicated Gain value (as configured in
POINT Properties / Setup).
Edit – Select the Gain value: 1 or 10.
3 - 180
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Working with Filters
Sensor Settings
This attribute is located under POINT / Online.
Filters for all POINTs matching the indicated Sensor Settings (as configured in
Customize / Online Settings / Sensor Setup).
Edit – Select one or more sensor setting definitions from settings list. Use the
All button to select all sensor setting definitions in the settings list. Use the
Clear button to clear all selections from the sensor setting definitions in the
settings list.
Tacho Number
This attribute is located under POINT / Online.
Filters for all POINTs matching the indicated Tacho number (as configured in
POINT Properties / Setup).
Edit – Select one or more tacho number from settings list. Use the All button
to select all tacho numbers in the settings list. Use the Clear button to clear all
selections from the tacho numbers in the settings list.
Tacho Enable
This attribute is located under POINT / Online.
Filters for all POINTs matching the indicated Tacho enable setting (Enable or
Disable) as configured in POINT Properties / Setup).
Edit – Select the Enable Tacho setting; Enable or Disable.
DAD Schedule
This attribute is located under POINT / Schedule.
Filters for all POINTs with the indicated Take data every setting (as configured
in POINT Properties / Schedule).
Edit – Select units from the drop down list. Enter minimum and maximum
number of selected units.

Units are automatically evaluated for compatibility. For example,
an entry of 24 hours will include a POINT with a DAD schedule set
to 1 day.
Keep Current Data
This attribute is located under POINT / Schedule.
Filters for all POINTs matching the indicated Keep Current Data units (as
configured in POINT Properties / Schedule).
Edit - Select units from the drop down list. Enter minimum and maximum
number of selected units.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 181
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Working with Filters
Keep Unscheduled Data
This attribute is located under POINT / Schedule.
Filters for all POINTs matching indicated Keep Unscheduled Data units (as
configured in POINT Properties / Schedule).
Edit – Select units from the drop down list. Enter minimum and maximum
number of selected units.
Long Term Archive Keep Data
This attribute is located under POINT / Schedule.
Filters for all POINTs matching the indicated Long Term Archive Keep Data
units (as configured in POINT Properties / Schedule).
Edit – Select units from the drop down list. Enter minimum and maximum
number of selected units.
Long Term Archive Take Data
This attribute is located under POINT / Schedule.
Filters for all POINTs matching the indicated Long Term Archive Take Data
units (as configured in POINT Properties / Schedule).
Edit – Select units from the drop down list. Enter minimum and maximum
number of selected units.
Short Term Archive Keep Data
This attribute is located under POINT / Schedule.
Filters for all POINTs matching the indicated Short Term Archive Keep Data
units (as configured in POINT Properties / Schedule).
Edit – Select units from the drop down list. Enter minimum and maximum
number of selected units.
Short Term Archive Take Data
This attribute is located under POINT / Schedule.
Filters for all POINTs matching the indicated Short Term Archive Take Data
units (as configured in POINT Properties / Schedule).
Edit – Select units from the drop down list. Enter minimum and maximum
number of selected units.
Autocapture
This attribute is located under POINT / Setup.
Filters for POINTs matching the indicated autocapture setting.
Edit – Select the autocapture setting from the settings list. Use the All button
to select all autocapture settings in the settings list. Use the Clear button to
clear all selections from the autocapture setting in the settings list.
3 - 182
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Working with Filters
Averages
This attribute is located under POINT / Setup.
Filters for all POINTs with the specified number of averages (as configured in
POINT Properties).
Edit – Enter minimum and maximum number of averages in edit fields.
Averaging
This attribute is located under POINT / Setup.
Filters for all POINTs matching the indicated Averaging Type (Average, Off,
Peak Hold, or Synchronous Time)
Edit – Select one or more average types from the settings list. Use the All
button to select all average types in the settings list. Use the Clear button to
clear all selections from the average types list.
Detection
This attribute is located under POINT / Setup.
Filters for all POINTs with the specified detection setting.
Edit - Select detection setting from the settings list. Use the All button to
select all detection settings in the settings list. Use the Clear button to clear all
selections from the detection setting in the settings list.
FFT Frequency
This attribute is located under POINT / Setup.
Filters for all POINTs with the indicated frequency settings.
Edit – Specify Fixed span or Order track. Enter the minimum / maximum
start (freq or orders) and the minimum / maximum end (freq or orders).

Enter Minimum and maximum values in frequency or orders, as
indicated in Freq. Type selection.
Full Scale
This attribute is located under POINT / Setup.
Filters for all POINTs whose Full Scale setting falls within the indicated full
scale value range.
Edit – Select unit types from the settings list. Use the All button to select all
unit types in the settings list. Use the Clear button to clear all selections from
the settings list.
Full Scale Units
This attribute is located under POINT / Setup.
Filters for all POINTs matching the indicated Full Scale Units type.
Edit – Select full scale unit types from the settings list. Use the All button to
select all full scale unit types in the settings list. Use the Clear button to clear
all selections from the full scale units settings list.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 183
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Working with Filters
Input Filter Range
This attribute is located under POINT / Setup.
Filters for all POINTs with the indicated input filer range settings.
Edit – Select input filter range(s) from the settings list. Use the All button to
select all input filter ranges in the settings list. Use the Clear button to clear all
selections from the settings list.
Input mV / EU
This attribute is located under POINT / Setup.
Filters for all POINTs with the indicated mV / EU settings.
Edit – Enter minimum and maximum mV / EU values in edit fields.
Lines
This attribute is located under POINT / Setup.
Filters for all POINTs with the indicated lines setting.
Edit – Select line(s) from the settings list. Use the All button to select all lines
in the settings list. Use the Clear button to clear all selections from the
settings list.
Linear Factor
This attribute is located under POINT / Setup.
Filters for all POINTs with the indicated linear factor value (as indicated in
POINT Properties / Setup).
Edit – Enter the minimum and maximum linear factor values.
Linear Speed Units
This attribute is located under POINT / Setup.
Filters for all POINTs with the indicated linear speed units (as configured in
POINT Properties / Setup).
Edit – Select one or more linear speed units type from the settings list. Use
the All button to select all liner speed units in the settings list. Use the Clear
button to clear all selections from the linear speed units settings list.
Location
This attribute is located under POINT / Setup.
Filters for all POINTs with the indicated location setting.
Edit – Select location(s) from the settings list. Use the All button to select all
locations in the settings list. Use the Clear button to clear all selections from
the settings list.
3 - 184
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Working with Filters
Low Frequency Cutoff
This attribute is located under POINT / Setup.
Filters for all POINTs with the indicated low frequency cutoff.
Edit – Enter minimum and maximum frequency values in edit fields.

Units display in either CPM or Hz, based on frequency units
preference setting (Preferences / General).
Orientation
This attribute is located under POINT / Setup.
Filters for all POINTs with the indicated orientation.
Edit – Select orientation(s) from the settings list. Use the All button to select
all orientations in the settings list. Use the Clear button to clear all selections
from the settings list.
Pulses / Rev
This attribute is located under POINT / Setup.
Filters for all POINTs with the indicated minimum and maximum pulses / rev
setting (as configured in POINT Properties / Setup).
Edit – Enter Minimum and Maximum pulses / rev values.
Save Data
This attribute is located under POINT / Setup.
Filters for all POINTs with the indicated save data setting.
Edit - Select save data setting from the settings list. Use the All button to
select all save data settings in the settings list. Use the Clear button to clear all
selections from the settings list.
Speed
This attribute is located under POINT / Setup.
Filters for all POINTs with the indicated speed settings.
Edit – Enter minimum and maximum speed values in edit fields.
Speed Ratio
This attribute is located under POINT / Setup.
Filters for all POINTs with the indicated speed ratio.
Edit – Enter minimum and maximum speed ratio values in edit fields.
Window
This attribute is located under POINT / Setup.
Filters for all POINTs with the indicated window setting.
Edit - Select window setting(s) from the settings list. Use the All button to
select all window settings in the settings list. Use the Clear button to clear all
selections from the settings list.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 185
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Customize / Derived POINTs
Zero Offset
This attribute is located under POINT / Setup.
Filters for all POINTs with the indicated zero offset.
Edit – Enter the minimum and maximum zero offset values in edit fields.
Clear Alarm Non Collection
This attribute is located under POINT / General.
Filters for all POINTs with Clear Alarms for Non-collection last
measurements enabled or disabled.
Edit – Select Enable or Disable.
Exclude Non-Collection From Report
This attribute is located under POINT / General.
Filters for all POINTs with Exclude from reports if last measurement is a
Non-collection event enabled or disabled.
Edit – Select Enable or Disable.
Customize / Derived POINTs
The Derived POINTs screen allows you to customize shared expressions, create new
expressions, and to edit variables, constants, and the expression formula.
3 - 186
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Customize / Derived POINTs
Figure 3 - 94.
The Customize Menu’s Derived POINTs Screen’s Expressions Tab.
To customize a shared expression:
•
Select the expression you wish to edit from the Expressions drop down list.
Important - Any changes made to a shared expression affect all other POINTs
sharing that expression, and overwrites the currently selected expression
•
You may rename the shared expression in the Name entry box.
•
Click the Variables button to edit, add, or remove variables.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 187
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Customize / Derived POINTs

You cannot assign POINTs to the variables from the Customize /
Derived POINTs screen. Refer to the POINT Properties /
Expressions tab section earlier in this chapter for details on
assigning POINTs to variables.
Figure 3 - 95.
The Variables Dialog.
•
Edit the expression formula by inserting variables, constants, or formulas.

To add a new expression, click the Add button, and enter settings
as previously described in this chapter’s POINT Properties /
Expression Tab section.
To edit constants:
There are two ways to edit shared constants. You can edit constants using the
Expressions tab's Constants button, or by using the Constants tab. Both methods are
described below.
•
From the Expressions tab, click the Constants button to add a new constant to the
Constants list. In the Constants dialog, click the Add button.
Or
3 - 188
•
Click the Constants tab to add or remove a constant, or to edit pre-existing
constants.
•
Click the Add button to create a new constant, or select a constant from the
Constants list and edit the Name and Value in the Constant properties area.
•
Click the Remove button to remove the selected constant from the Constants list.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Customize / Derived POINTs
Figure 3 - 96.
The Customize menu’s Derived POINTs Constants Tab.
Important – After editing a derived POINT, you must manually calculate the derived
POINT to update the POINT’s existing data records. Reference the Calculating
Derived POINTs section earlier in this chapter for details.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
3 - 189
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy
Canary Lab Settings
Canary Lab Settings
For Canary Lab customers, use the Canary Lab Settings to define historian data sets to
be available when setting up Canary Labs POINT properties.

The IPMS data set comes preloaded; if you do not recognize this
data set, you can safely remove it.
To add a new Canary Lab data set:
•
Select the Customize menu’s Canary Lab Settings option. The Data Set Settings
dialog displays.
Figure 3 - 97.
The Data Set Settings Dialog.
•
Enter the name of the data set in the Data Set field and click Add. The new data
set will display in the Data Sets section, along with any other available data sets.
•
When finished adding the data sets, click Close.
To remove a data set:
3 - 190
•
From the Data Set Settings dialog, click the data set to remove from the Data
Sets section and click Remove. The selected data set will no longer be available.
•
When finished removing the data sets, click Close.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
4
Data Collection ROUTEs and Other Data Transfer
Operations
Overview
After establishing your hierarchy's POINTs, you are ready to create your collection
ROUTEs.

It is not imperative that you create @ptitude Analyst ROUTEs to
download POINTs to the data acquisition device. Downloading
directly from a plant hierarchy list is discussed later in this
chapter.
A ROUTE is a measurement POINT collection sequence. ROUTEs are downloaded to a
DAD to provide orderly collection of measurement data on a timely basis.
ROUTEs are first created on paper. You simply walk through your facility and list (in a
logical, efficient collection sequence) the equipment and pre-defined POINTs you plan to
collect at a given time. For example, list the measurements you plan to perform weekly
(e.g., every Tuesday) as “Tuesday's ROUTE”, and/or list the measurements you plan to
perform monthly as the “monthly ROUTE.”
Take time to organize your collection ROUTE paper copy thoroughly. A complete and
organized paper copy collection ROUTE makes building @ptitude Analyst ROUTEs much
easier.
After establishing your paper copy ROUTE(s), your next task is to use your paper copy
ROUTE to create a @ptitude Analyst ROUTE.
How to Build ROUTEs

This section is not applicable to DMx systems.
@ptitude Analyst's method for creating ROUTEs is simple.
Using your paper copy ROUTE, open the Hierarchy, ROUTE, or Workspace window for
those measurement POINTs you wish to have in the ROUTE, and copy selected items
(machines with their POINTs, SETs with their machines and POINTs, Custom Groups
with their machines and POINTs, or the entire hierarchy) from the open Hierarchy
window to the new ROUTE window, creating the new ROUTE's hierarchy list.
You may also insert (Insert menu) Groups directly into a ROUTE window, then select
POINTs from a Hierarchy, ROUTE, or Workspace window, and copy them to your new
ROUTE, organized beneath your newly inserted Groups.
If necessary, move hierarchy items in the ROUTE window to match the most efficient
collection sequence (detailed on your paper copy ROUTE).
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
4-1
Data Collection ROUTEs and Other Data Transfer Operations
How to Build ROUTEs

IMPORTANT - In a ROUTE window, changes to a POINT’s
placement in the list, and POINT deletions do not affect the
Hierarchy window. However, changes to individual POINT setup
settings (POINT Properties) do apply to the hierarchy and reflect
in Hierarchy window.
Changes to Group item Properties do not affect the Hierarchy
window.
To open an existing ROUTE:
•
Select the View menu’s ROUTE command. The ROUTE screen displays.
•
Select an existing ROUTE and click the Open button. The selected ROUTE window
opens.
To add a new ROUTE:
•
Click the ROUTE screen’s Add button. The ROUTE Properties screen displays.
ROUTE Properties / General
Figure 4 - 1.
The ROUTE Properties Screen’s General Tab.
ROUTE Properties screen’s General tab’s fields include:
Name – Enter a new ROUTE name.
Description – Enter a new description.
4-2
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Data Collection ROUTEs and Other Data Transfer Operations
How to Build ROUTEs
The ROUTE Statistics area allows you to make your ROUTE a structured ROUTE, and
determine the type of historical information to keep. If historical record settings are
entered, then ROUTE statistics, such as collection time duration, start and stop times,
and operator ID, are recorded with the ROUTE. If the ROUTE is designated as a
structured ROUTE, then data must be collected in the order in which the POINTs are
listed in the ROUTE.
To create a structured ROUTE:
•
Click the Structured ROUTE checkbox to designate the selected ROUTE as a
structured ROUTE.
To enter ROUTE statistic settings:
•
Click an option button to specify the amount of historical records to keep. Included
in each historical record are the ROUTE’s collection time duration, start and stop
times, and Operator ID. Options include:
Keep all historical records – Saves all historical ROUTE collection statistics for
the selected ROUTE.
Keep fixed number of historical records – Enter the number of historical
records to save for the selected ROUTE.
Keep records for – Enter a time duration value for storing historical records.
For example, enter 6 in the text box and select weeks from the drop down list
to save historical records for 6 weeks.
The number of POINTs included in the selected ROUTE display at the bottom of the
screen.

The ROUTE Properties Schedule tab is not applicable to ROUTEs
for online data.
ROUTE Properties / Notes
ROUTE Properties / Notes fields include:
ROUTE instruction notes – Allows you to create, edit, and store instructions /
notes relating to the ROUTE. ROUTE instructions are downloaded to the data
acquisition device along with the ROUTE, and may be viewed on the DAD’s LCD
panel.
•
Enter appropriate ROUTE properties and click OK. The new ROUTE’s window
displays.
•
Use drag and drop or copy and paste operations to copy selected Groups and
POINTs, from the Hierarchy or Workspace windows into the new ROUTE's window
to create the new ROUTE's hierarchy list.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
4-3
Data Collection ROUTEs and Other Data Transfer Operations
Downloading ROUTEs to the On-line Device
Figure 4 - 2.
The ROUTE Window With Copied Items.
To remove an unnecessary ROUTE:
•
In the ROUTE window, select the ROUTE name.
•
Click the Remove button. Confirm action when prompted. The selected ROUTE is
removed.
To set the same measurement speed for multiple FFT measurements:
•
Starting from a ROUTE, expand the appropriate machine. Beneath the machine in
the hierarchy, right-click on the measurement POINT you wish to use as a
reference and select Set Speed (Multiple) from the resulting context menu.
OR
•
Starting from a ROUTE, expand the appropriate machine. Beneath the machine in
the hierarchy, click on the appropriate measurement POINT to display its
measurements in the right panel. Then, right-click on the single measurement you
wish to use as a reference and select Set Speed (Multiple) from the resulting
context menu.
The Set Speed (Multiple) window appears.
Downloading ROUTEs to the On-line Device

WMx devices automatically transfer data for WMx devices /
channels with assigned POINTs when the WMx Service is running.
On-line System Transfer Overview
The On-line transfer function allows you to download measurement POINT setups to
the IMx, check the IMx status, and configure, clear, or reset the IMx.
4-4
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Data Collection ROUTEs and Other Data Transfer Operations
Downloading ROUTEs to the On-line Device
After configuring your IMx POINTs, and configuring your system's preferences, use
“Download” options in the Transfer menu’s On-line dialog to download the new
POINTs to your On-line network.

•
A maximum of 80 IMx POINTs can be downloaded.
In @ptitude Analyst, select Online from the Transfer menu. The Online Transfer
screen displays.
On-line Transfer Download Tab

The Online Transfer screen’s Download tab allows you to
download an individual hierarchy item, or an entire ROUTE or
workspace.
Figure 4 - 3.
The Download Tab.
•
Click to select a single hierarchy item or a ROUTE or workspace for download from
the appropriate Hierarchy, ROUTE, or Workspace list.
ROUTEs are organized into three categories; By Name, By Due Date, and By
Downloaded Date. ROUTEs that are overdue appear in bold type.

A ROUTE is downloaded only once, even if it is selected in more
than one organizational category.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
4-5
Data Collection ROUTEs and Other Data Transfer Operations
Downloading ROUTEs to the On-line Device

Only complete ROUTEs and Workspaces may be downloaded. To
download individual POINTs, select them from the Hierarchy list.
Clear all devices – Click to enable. When enabled, all devices will be cleared when the
download is initiated.
Collect data as soon as download completes and then as scheduled – Click to
enable.
Check Size – Click to check the download size of the selected item(s). The Check
Download Size window displays. Download size details include the selected device’s
available memory, total memory used, and status. The POINT details area displays the
memory used by each POINT in the selected ROUTE or Workspace. Click Save As to
save the displayed information to a comma separated text file.
Figure 4 - 4.
The Check Download Size window.
Download – Click to download the selected item(s) to the selected device. A dialog
appears indicating whether or not the download request was successfully sent.

4-6
Download progress can be viewed through the Status progress
bar.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Data Collection ROUTEs and Other Data Transfer Operations
Downloading ROUTEs to the On-line Device
Status
The Online Transfer’s Status tab allows you to view a selected device’s status
information.
Figure 4 - 5.
The Status Tab.
To determine the device status:
•
Select the appropriate device from the Device drop down list.
•
Click the Get Status button. The selected device’s status appears in the Channel
status and Device status information areas.
•
Click the Prev. device or Next device buttons to navigate the Device drop down list
and to get status.
The Channel status area displays up to 32 numbered boxes, each representing a
channel on the IMx. A blue indicator through the channel number represents a sensor
problem for the indicated channel. Green indicates there are no problems.

Channel status is applicable only for channels set up for BOV
Gating.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
4-7
Data Collection ROUTEs and Other Data Transfer Operations
Downloading ROUTEs to the On-line Device
The Device status information area displays the following information:
Collection status – Indicates whether collection for the IMx is enabled or disabled.
DAD status - Indicates the channel number and tachometer being used.
DAD address - The physical DAD number as per the switches on the box itself.
ROUTE/Workspace / Hierarchy source - Name of the ROUTE or Workspace that was
downloaded to the DAD.

Items deleted from the ROUTE or Workspace are not deleted
from the DAD.
Data Source - Name of the current database.
IMx Version – The hardware version number. If the selected device is an IMx, this
option appears as “IMx Version.”
Firmware Version – The on-line device’s firmware version number. Useful for
servicing and product update information.
Time - The on-line device’s clock's date and time settings.
Number of POINTs - Displays the number of POINTs downloaded to the on-line device.
Temperature - The on-line device’s temperature, recorded in both degrees Fahrenheit
and centigrade.
Free RAM - The amount of free RAM in the on-line device.
Selection Mode - Either On-line or Local. “Local” displays when the DAD is being
accessed with a data collection device from its front panel BNC connectors. While in the
Local mode, no on-line data collection occurs.
Power Up - Displays a numeric code indicating power up status.
DAD State – Displays the on-line device’s activity status.
Digital Error - Displays the on-line device’s RAM status. “No” indicates no RAM
problems. “Yes” indicates RAM problems.
Force Connection to IMx
If an IMx’s Always Connected option has been disabled on the Customize menu’s
Online Settings screen, you can force a connection to the device if necessary.
To force a connection to an IMx:
4-8
•
Select the IMx device to which you wish to connect from the Device drop-down list.
•
Make sure the IMx Status value is “connected” in the Device status information
area.
•
Click the Connect button. The Force Connection dialog displays.
•
Enter the amount of time to stay connected to the IMx and click OK.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Data Collection ROUTEs and Other Data Transfer Operations
Downloading ROUTEs to the On-line Device
On-line Transfer Settings
The Transfer menu’s Online Tranfer screen allows you to configure your processing
delay settings.
•
Select Transfer / Online and then the Settings tab.
Figure 4 - 6.
The Settings Tab.
•
Select the appropriate host orserver from the Configure Host drop down list.
•
Use the arrows to adjust the processing delay time for the following operations:
Device synchronization
Unscheduled data
Scheduled data
Live data
•
Click the Activity button to view an activity log of the interaction between the
@ptitude Analyst and the on-line device network.
The Device Activity dialog displays activity between the current hardware device and
@ptitude Analyst.
Save As – Click to save Device Activity window contents to a specified location.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
4-9
Data Collection ROUTEs and Other Data Transfer Operations
Automatic Data Retrieval
Clear – Click to clear the Device Activity window contents.
Stop – Click to stop the Device Activity window from displaying the interaction between
the @ptitude Analyst and the WMx / IMx network.
Close – Click to close the Device Activity window.
Automatic Data Retrieval
Once the @ptitude Analyst hierarchy has been transferred to online devices, @ptitude
Imx Services automatically begins data collection for IMx POINTs and @ptitude Analyst
Monitor automatically begins data collection on all other POINTs according to the
schedule specified in POINT Properties. (Refer to the SKF @ptitude Analyst
Introduction and Global Features manual’s SKF @ptitude Analyst Monitor
Application section for more information on Monitor.) The status bar at the bottom of
the @ptitude Analyst screen provides color-coded status information.
Figure 4 - 7.
Data Collection Status.
name of the PC running Monitor
alarm status
DMx ID
IMx Service ID

4 - 10
If you are collecting data for the DMx, two Monitor status
indicators appear, one for the DMx, and one for all other devices.
Refer to Chapter 7, Multilog DMx Machine Monitoring Module
for details on the DMx Monitor status indicator.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Data Collection ROUTEs and Other Data Transfer Operations
Automatic Data Retrieval

If you are collecting data for the IMx, a Service status indicator
appears. Refer to Chapter 1, Introduction to SKF @ptitude
Analyst for SKF Multilog On-line Systems for details on IMx
Service.
The status indicator has three informational areas:
ID – Displays the machine name of the Monitor program or IMx Service that is in use. If
one of the POINTs being monitored has an alert level alarm, this flashes yellow. If a
POINT has a danger level alarm, this flashes red. If there is a system error, for
example, a device not communicating, this flashes blue. The alarm flashes until it is
reset.

If multiple conditions exist, a system error takes precedence,
followed by a danger alarm. This only flashes yellow if there are
no other issues.
System status – The diamond on the status line provides information concerning
communication with the devices. If there is an issue with any device, this changes color
to blue. Green indicates all devices are communicating properly.
Alarm status – The circle on the status line provides information concerning the
danger and alert alarm levels of the POINTs being monitored. If any POINTs are in
alert, the circle appears yellow. If any POINTs are in danger, the circle appears red. If
there are no alarms on any POINTs, the circle appears green.

If there are both danger and alert level alarms active, the circle
appears red.
A right click menu on the status provides access to additional functionality.
Options may include:
Reset – opens a sub- menu that provides options to clear status alerts.
Alarm Indicator – Clears danger and alert alarm status.
Digital Outputs – When an alarm condition is met, digital output conditions
trigger. This includes enabling a light on the online device, as well as
triggering any additional signals (e.g., ringing a bell) that have been connected
to the device’s output channels. This option turns off the lights and any other
output signals.
System Indicator – If an issue with any devices communicating with Monitor is
detected, the status line flashes blue. This option clears the alert.
All – Clears all alerts.
Digital Output – Opens the Digital Output dialog. (The settings on this dialog are also
available in POINT Properties and the Online Transfer screen, documented earlier in
this manual. Refer to the appropriate sections above for details.)
Hardware Activity – Opens the Hardware Activity dialog, which provides an activity log
of the interaction between the @ptitude Analyst and the on-line device network. (This
dialog is also available from the Online Transfer screen’s Settings tab. Refer to Online
Transfer Settings earlier in this chapter for details.)
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
4 - 11
Data Collection ROUTEs and Other Data Transfer Operations
Manual Data Entry
Settings – Opens the Settings dialog, which allows you to configure your processing
delay settings. (These settings are also available on the Online Transfer screen’s
Settings tab. Refer to Online Transfer Settings earlier in this chapter for details.)
Status – Opens the Status dialog, which allows you to view a selected device’s status
information. (These settings are also available on the Online Transfer screen’s Status
tab. Refer to the Status section earlier in this chapter for details.)
System Information – Opens the System Information dialog, which provides access to
the Event Log and the Online Data log. (Refer to the SKF @ptitude Analyst
Introduction and Global Features manual for details.)
Manual Data Entry
Use the Insert menu's Manual Entry option to manually enter overall measurement
values into your @ptitude Analyst hierarchy. This feature allows you to store, trend,
and analyze measurements made with the SKF Pens (VibPen Plus, SEE Pen, and
ThermoPen). Also, other machinery operating conditions such as flow, speed, and
pressure can be manually entered and trended. The Manual Entry window allows you
to manually type in one overall value per POINT.
Figure 4 - 8.
The Manual Entry Window.
4 - 12
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Data Collection ROUTEs and Other Data Transfer Operations
Manual Data Entry
To manually enter data:
•
Select a POINT from the Items area.
•
Type in the value in the Measurement data field(s).

•
The Measurement data section varies depending on the type of
POINT that is selected.
Click the Set button.

By default, the current date / time is applied to the entered POINT
value. Select desired date and time from the drop down menus
to edit these fields as needed.

To quickly enter multiple values that all use the default Date /
Time, simply click the Measurement data field, type the value
and press Enter. The value is stored and the pointer moves to
the next item’s Measurement data field.
To clear entered data:
•
Select a measurement with a set value and click the Clear button.
•
Click OK to store the specified values and automatically re-process alarms, or
Cancel to undo settings.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
4 - 13
5
Displaying Graphic Plots
Overview
@ptitude Analyst allows you to display your collected measurements in various plot
formats for machinery analysis purposes.
Graphic On-line Systems plot formats include:
•
Trend Plot
•
Spectrum Plot
•
Trend / Spectrum Plot
•
Time Plot
•
Trend / Time Plot
•
Trend / Spectrum / Time Plot
•
Waterfall Plot
•
Polar Vector Plot
•
Mag / Phase Trend Plot
•
Band Trend Plot
•
Extracted Trend Plot
•
Extracted Band Plot
•
Variable Speed Plot
•
Orbit Plot
•
Shaft Centerline Plot
•
Nyquist Plot
•
Bode Plot
•
Cascade Plot
•
Topology Plot

Orbit and Shaft Centerline plots are available for the DMx, IMx,
and WMx.

Nyquist, Bode, Cascade, and Topology plots primarily apply to
transient data. They are documented Chapter 8, Transient Data
Analysis.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
5-1
Displaying Graphic Plots
How To Display Graphic Plots
How To Display Graphic Plots
@ptitude Analyst offers multiple methods for displaying measurement data in plot
format. Each method has its advantages. However, regardless of the selected method,
the first step in displaying plots is to open any view that contains POINTs (Hierarchy,
ROUTE, Workspace, Plot, and Alarms view). The second step is to select the
measurement POINT(s) whose data you wish to display in plot form.
Then use one of the following methods for displaying measurement data in graphic plot
format.

The File menu's Print option may be used at any time to print the
contents of the “active” window (including graphic display
windows).
Displaying Plots Using Toolbar Buttons
@ptitude Analyst has toolbar buttons for commonly used plots.
Figure 5 - 1.
Plot Toolbar Buttons.
5-2

To select multiple POINTs for display in a single plot, you must
first select the machine in which the POINTs list in the hierarchy’s
left panel, then select the desired multiple POINTs in the
hierarchy’s right panel.

To select POINTs from multiple machines, you must first copy the
desired POINTs to a Workspace window.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Displaying Graphic Plots
How To Display Graphic Plots
To display graphic plots using the toolbar:
•
Select (highlight) the POINT(s) you wish to display in the Hierarchy, ROUTE,
Workspace, or Alarms windows.
•
Click one of the toolbar's graphic display buttons to display the selected POINTs or
measurement(s) in a specific type of plot.
Click the All Plots toolbar button to display the All Plots dialog. From this dialog, you
may select the plot type to display from all available plots, rather than only the
commonly used plot types represented with toolbar buttons.

Band Trend, Extracted Band, Extracted Trend, Trend / Spectrum,
Trend / Spectrum / Time, and Trend / Time plot display toolbar
buttons may be manually added using the Customize menu’s
Toolbars option. Custom toolbars are detailed in Appendix B,
SKF @ptitude Analyst Keyboard Support of the accompanying
Introduction manual.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
5-3
Displaying Graphic Plots
How To Display Graphic Plots
Displaying Plots Using the View Menu
View menu graphic display operations are similar to toolbar button graphic display
operations. The View menu allows you to display every graphic plot type that applies to
the selected POINT(s).
Figure 5 - 2.
The View Menu’s Plots Option.
To display graphic plots using the View menu:
5-4
•
Highlight the POINT(s) you wish to display in the Hierarchy, ROUTE, Workspace, or
Alarms windows.
•
Select the View menu’s Plot option. Select one of the visible plot types, or select
All Plots for more selections. All plot types display in the dialog.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Displaying Graphic Plots
How To Display Graphic Plots
Displaying Plots Using the POINT’s Context Menu
You can also display a plot directly from selected single or multiple POINTs using the
context menu.
To display a plot using the context menu:
•
Select POINT(s) from a Hierarchy, ROUTE, Workspace, or Alarm window.
•
Using your mouse, right click to activate the context menu.
Figure 5 - 3.
Hierarchy Context Menu’s Plot Option.
•
Select the desired Plot type. The selected plot type displays in a plot window for
the selected POINT(s).

You can also use the right-click context menu to display a plot
directly from a selected single measurement data record or
multiple measurement data records.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
5-5
Displaying Graphic Plots
Plot Window
Plot Window
Plot window displays collected measurements in various graphic plot formats for
machinery analysis purposes.
Figure 5 - 4.
Plot Window.
cursor feedback
mouse feedback
inactive plot line
active plot line
various overlay tabs
active overlay
inactive overlays
right-click context menu
Plot Window Overview
The Plot window’s title bar displays the plot type displayed for the current POINT. The
Machine name (from the hierarchy) corresponding to the POINT displays in front of the
POINT name (for a single POINT). The Machine and POINT name display in the plot
window’s top center area for all plots. The date / time stamp and overall value display
for spectrum and time plots. Multiple POINTs are not individually identified.
5-6
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Displaying Graphic Plots
Plot Window
There are two areas in the Plot window. The top area is the plot area. The lower part
is the information area.

You may re-size the entire Plot window, and/or either of the
window's areas, for customized viewing. You may also hide the
information area automatically (using Preferences) or manually
(using the toolbar or context menu).

The status of the information area affects plot print-out. If a plot
is printed when the Info tab is displayed, the Info tab’s
information prints along with the plot. If a plot is printed when
the Info tab is hidden, the Info tab’s information does not print
with the plot.
Plot Window Information Area
Figure 5 - 5.
The information area’s tabs display various plot information for the active plot.

Use the “I” key to toggle the information area on and off.
Info tab – Displays general information for the active plot.
Summary tab – Displays measurement summary information for all POINTs displayed
on the plot.
Plot type tab (Trend, Spectrum, etc.) – Displays information for each single cursor on
the active plot.
Other tabs appear in the information area depending on the type(s) of overlay(s) used
on the current plot, and display information specific to each overlay type.
Plot Feedback Areas
feedback areas
Figure 5 - 6.
Plot Feedback Areas.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
5-7
Displaying Graphic Plots
Plot Window
The first line displays information corresponding to the active cursor overlay’s current
position.
The second line displays information corresponding to the mouse pointer’s current
position (when positioned over a plot item).
Plot Window Operations
Mouse Operations
There are several ways to work within the Plot window. The mouse can be used to
display specific plot information. The mouse’s pointer changes to an up arrow () when
placed over a plot item. Typical plot items include overlay, plot line (trace), anchor, any
object with feedback information, and context menus.
Overlays
Plot “overlays” superimpose cursors, alarms, text annotations, and frequency markers
on displayed plots. Each overlay displays an “anchor” which you use to manipulate the
overlay.
Anchors
Anchors indicate overlays and plot lines on the active plot. Anchors also identify the
active status of an overlay and plot line (trace).
Inactive plot line and overlay anchors are indicated using circle icons.
The Active plot line anchor is indicated using a triangle icon. Plot line anchors
display on the plot’s left.
The Active overlay anchor is indicated using a square icon. Active overlay
anchors indicate which plot’s data is displayed using the plot’s color in the
overlay’s square icon.
•
Double-click an overlay’s anchor to switch it to another plot.
Some overlay anchors appear at the top of the plot, others appear to the plot’s right.
Band cursor, harmonic cursor, sideband cursor, and single cursor anchors display
across the top of the plot, directly above their respective overlays. Band alarm,
envelope alarm, frequencies, curve fit, overall alarm, and peak cursor anchors display
on the plot’s right. The running speed anchor displays beneath the plot.
Many anchors indicate overlay position in respect to the plot’s X and/or Y axis. Anchors
provide easy access to the plot item’s right-click context menu. For example, to access
the settings dialog for your frequencies overlay, right-click on the frequency overlay
anchor to launch the frequencies Settings dialog.
If two or more traces are displaying on a plot and an overlay is added to the plot, it
automatically attaches itself to the active plot line (trace).
Text annotations (temporary textual annotations) may be placed anywhere on the plot.
5-8
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Displaying Graphic Plots
Plot Window
Figure 5 - 7.
Plot Window.
text annotation

Text annotations do not have anchors.
Plot Line (Trace) Right-Click Context Menu
Position the cursor over the plot line and using your mouse, right-click to access the
plot line context menu. Menu options include:
Lock Trace – Enable this option to “lock” the selected plot line data so it will
remain visible when auto linking is used. This allows you to compare the
“locked” plot line data to the new data that is added or removed when
autolinking is used.
Remove – Removes trace from plot.
Properties – Displays POINT Properties screen for the plot’s active POINT.
Go to Hierarchy – Displays the Hierarchy window with the selected hierarchy
item highlighted for easy identification.
Priority – Assign a priority level to the Machine the POINT is under.
Plot Right-Click Context Menu
Position the cursor over the plot background and using your mouse, right-click to
access the plot context menu. Menu options include:
Plot Specific Options – Plot options display in the menu’s top area (if
available), allowing you to configure the plot’s content. Which options appear
(if any) depends upon the current plot type.
For example, you can convert the units in an acceleration, velocity, or
displacement spectrum plot. Unit types display in the menu’s top area and are
available for selection.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
5-9
Displaying Graphic Plots
Plot Window
Settings – Launches the Settings dialog for the current plot type. This dialog
allows you to change the way the plot displays. For example, use the Settings
dialog to change axis ranges.
Reset Settings – Resets to default plot settings. Use Reset Settings to clear
all settings you made and reset the plot window based on its current content.
Copy – Copies the plot image to the clipboard.
Info Area – Show / Hide the current plot’s information area.

Square icons on a trend plot line indicate the measurement is
included in calculations for mean and standard deviation (as in the
Info tab) and statistical alarm generation. Use the single cursor's
context menu or Measurement Properties to change the
“include” status.
Overlay Anchor Right-Click Context Menu
The Overlay anchor right-click context menu provides quick access to the overlay’s
options (e.g. Remove the overlay, or if more than one trace is displayed, move the
overlay to the Next Trace, etc.)
Drag and Drop Operation
Drag and drop operation allows you to easily display plots for different measurements.
These measurements can belong to the same POINT, or to different POINTs. By
default, when the POINT is selected, the plot is displayed for the POINT’s last
measurement. The drag and drop feature allows you to override this default setting
and display specific measurements on the plot.
You can also drag and drop to view multiple POINTs on the same plot. Simply drag the
desired POINT(s) and/or measurement(s) into the open plot window.

Some plots combine multiple plot types in one window for sideby-side comparison. In most cases, you may only drag and drop
into the primary plot (i.e., the top plot area).
Multiple Measurements and Channels in Plots
You may have multiple measurements from one or more POINTs represented in a plot,
either by selecting them when opening the plot, or by dragging and dropping additional
measurements onto an open plot.
It is also possible to have multiple channels represented on a plot for multi-channel
POINTs. When you access a plot from a multi-channel POINT, the Plot Preferences
Channel Number setting specifies whether all channels open automatically, only
channel X opens, or the Select Channel Number dialog displays where you may select
a single channel or All Channels.

5 - 10
If Auto Link is turned on, this setting is overridden and all
channels display.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Displaying Graphic Plots
Plot Window
Figure 5 - 8.
The Select Channel Number Dialog.
If all channels open, each channel is treated as a separate measurement on the plot.
Depending on your plot type, multiple measurements may overlay each other (e.g.,
spectrum and time plots) or may be represented as individual data points on the plot
(e.g., waterfall and trend plots).
A plot anchor is located on the left of the plot for each measurement. Depending on the
plot type, the anchors are color-coded to match the data.
Inactive plot line and overlay anchors are indicated using circle icons.
The Active plot line anchor is indicated using a triangle icon.
In the case of plots that are designed to display multiple measurements (e.g., waterfall
and trend plots), all measurements under the same POINT are included in one plot
anchor. Separate plot anchors only appear if you have multiple POINTs or channels
represented in the plot.
For combination plots (e.g., Trend / Spectrum), the channel anchors only toggle the
channel on the top plot. To toggle the channels on additional plots, click the single
cursor overlay anchor.
The active measurement determines the cursor feedback and information window's
content and overlay settings. You may toggle between the measurements by clicking on
the appropriate anchor.
Zoom Operation
The zoom operation allows you to easily zoom in and out on the plots for a closer look.
You may zoom in and out one of two ways:
•
Using the zoom buttons on the toolbar
•
Using the mouse scroll wheel
To zoom in / out on a plot using the zoom buttons:
Figure 5 - 9.
Zoom Buttons.
activates zoom
zooms out
•
Activate the zoom by clicking the left magnifying glass.
•
Click and drag across the area of the plot to which you would like to zoom.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
5 - 11
Displaying Graphic Plots
Plot Types
•
Click the right magnifying glass to zoom out.
To zoom in / out using the mouse scroll wheel:
•
Position your cursor over the area of the plot to which you would like to zoom.
•
While holding the Ctrl key, roll the mouse scroll wheel up or down. Rolling up
causes the plot to zoom in, while rolling down causes the plot to zoom out.
Plot Navigation
While viewing a plot, use the arrow keys on your keyboard to navigate to the next /
previous measurement on the plot or to the next / previous POINT’s plot.
To navigate to the next / previous measurement on the plot:
•
While holding the Ctrl key, press the left arrow to display the previous
measurement, or press the right arrow to display the next measurement.
To navigate to the next / previous POINT’s plot:
•
While holding the Ctrl key, press the up arrow to display the plot for the previous
POINT, or press the down arrow to display the plot for the next POINT.
Set Speed (Multiple)
Use the Set Speed (Multiple) feature to set the same measurement speed for multiple
FFT measurements.
•
Starting from an FFT measurement plot, right-click on the single cursor and select
Set Speed (Multiple) from the resulting context menu.
The Set Speed (Multiple) window appears.
Plot Types
Machinery measurements can be displayed in a variety of graphic display formats that
aid machinery analysis. Each graphic display type is detailed below.

This section does not document Orbit, Shaft Centerline, Nyquist,
Bode, Cascade, or Topology plots. Orbit and Shaft Centerline
plots are only available for the DMx On-line System. They are
documented in Chapter 7, Multilog DMx Machine Monitoring
Module. Nyquist, Bode, Cascade, and Topology plots primarily
apply to transient data. They are documented Chapter 8,
Transient Data Analysis.
For each type of graphic display, @ptitude Analyst provides settings to manipulate the
plot display and to gain valuable analysis information. These settings dialogs are
available from the @ptitude Analyst View menu and from the toolbar (which changes
according to the active plot display type). Each plot’s settings dialogs are also detailed
below.
5 - 12
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Displaying Graphic Plots
Plot Types
Trend Plot
Figure 5 - 10.
Example of a Trend Plot.
Trend plots allow you to easily compare a POINT’s most recent reading against its
previous readings and its alarm set up, allowing you to see how the POINT is “trending”
over time. Trend plots are an easy and accurate method of detecting gradual changes
in process conditions and changes that might otherwise be overlooked.
In addition to displaying trend plots for individual POINTs, you can display multiple
POINTs' trends (from the same machine or from different machines) in one graphic
display window. This allows easy comparison between various POINTs' trends.
In a trend plot, the X axis (horizontal axis) represents time and the Y axis (vertical axis)
represents magnitude.

Square icons on a trend plot indicate the measurement is
included in calculations. Use the single cursor’s context menu or
the Measurement Properties dialog to change the “include”
status.
Trend Settings
To access the Trend Settings Dialog:
With a trend plot displayed, select the View menu’s Plot / Settings option, use the
settings toolbar button, or right-click to display the plot’s context menu and select the
Settings option.
Magnitude scale fields include:
Autoscale - Enabling Autoscale automatically scales the initial amplitude axis so it is
approximately 120% of the largest amplitude. Disabling Autoscale displays the
spectrum on the same full scale vertical axis used when it was recorded.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
5 - 13
Displaying Graphic Plots
Plot Types
% Full Scale - When enabled, the amplitude axis displays as a % value of the POINT’s
full scale value. Use % Full Scale to compare measurements that do not have the same
units or the same Full Scale value.

If you do not select Autoscale or % Full Scale, you must enter
values to determine the plot’s magnitude scale (Y-axis scaling).
Magnitude Scale - Enter the minimum and maximum magnitude scale values in the
designated text boxes.
Magnitude Lin / Log - Select Linear scaling to space out data equally. Select
Logarithmic scaling to emphasize lower values.
Date / Time scale fields include:
Date / Time Scale - Enter minimum and maximum date and time.

With a plot displayed, to reset all settings back to their defaults,
click the right-click context menu’s “Reset Settings” option.
Adjust date/time range to include latest notes – When enabled, all notes created
after the date / time of the last collected measurement display on the plot. Default is
enabled.
BOV or Gap Trend Plot
Figure 5 - 11.
Example of a Trend Plot.
For IMx POINTs that have channels with the Check sensor ok status option enabled,
the BOV or Gap Trend plot option allows you to trend a sensor’s Bios Output Voltage
value. The BOV limit overlay (blue horizontal lines) indicate the specified BOV limits. If
5 - 14
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Displaying Graphic Plots
Plot Types
a sensor’s BOV value exceeds its limits, it indicates a bad sensor, and a zero overall
value is stored for its vibration measurements.
BOV or Gap Trend Settings
With a trend plot displayed, select the View menu’s Plot / Settings option, use the
settings toolbar button, or right-click to display the plot’s context menu and select the
Settings option.
Fields include;
BOV scale fields include:
Autoscale - Enabling Autoscale automatically scales the initial amplitude axis so it is
approximately 120% of the largest amplitude.
BOV min / BOV max - Enter the minimum and maximum magnitude scale values in
the designated text boxes.
Date / Time scale fields include:
Date / Time Scale - Enter minimum and maximum date and time.
Spectrum Plot
Figure 5 - 12.
Example of a Spectrum Plot.
As different types of machinery problems often occur at different frequencies, it is very
useful to analyze measured vibration signals with respect to frequency.
FFT spectrum plots (pl. spectra) display vibration amplitudes at various component
frequencies.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
5 - 15
Displaying Graphic Plots
Plot Types

FFT is the abbreviation for Fast Fourier Transform (the
mathematical formula that transforms the vibration signal into its
component frequencies).
In an FFT spectrum, the X axis (horizontal axis) represents vibration frequency in Hz or
CPM (or orders of running speed). The Y axis (vertical axis) represents vibration
amplitude.
FFT spectrum plots are extremely useful machinery analysis tools. FFT spectra provide
information that helps determine the location of a problem, the cause of the problem,
and with trending, how long until the problem becomes critical.
In addition to single display, you can display multiple POINTs’ or measurements’ FFT
spectra (POINTs may be from the same machine or from different machines). This
allows easy comparison between various POINTs' FFT spectra.
Spectrum Settings
To access the Spectrum Settings dialog:
With a spectrum plot displayed, select the View menu’s Plot / Settings option, or use
the settings toolbar button.

The Settings dialog is also available from the spectrum plot’s
context menu.
View Type fields include:
Combined / Stacked - Determine the plot orientation for multi-channel data. Stacked
displays each channel as a separate plot. Combined shows a single plot overlaid with all
channels.
Link - If View Type is set to Stacked, determine whether cursors and overlays are
linked across all plots, or operate independently. If Link is enabled, cursors and
overlays appear in the same position across all plots. If Link is disabled, you may add
and move cursors and overlays in each plot independently.
Magnitude scale fields include:
Autoscale - Enable to automatically scale the initial amplitude axis so it is approximately
120% of the largest amplitude. Disable to display the spectrum on the same full scale
vertical axis used when it was recorded.
% Full Scale - Enable to display the amplitude axis as a % value of the full scale. Use %
Full Scale to compare measurements that do not have the same units or the same Full
Scale value.

If you do not select Autoscale or % Full Scale, you must enter
values to determine the plot’s magnitude scale (Y-axis scaling).
Magnitude Scale - Enter the minimum and maximum magnitude scale values in the
designated text boxes.
Magnitude Lin / Log - Select Linear scaling to space out data equally. Select
Logarithmic scaling to emphasize lower values.
You must enter values to determine the plot’s frequency scale (X-axis scaling).
5 - 16
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Displaying Graphic Plots
Plot Types
Frequency scale fields include:
Frequency Scale - Enter the minimum and maximum frequency scale values in the
designated text boxes.
Frequency Lin / Log - Select Linear scaling to space out data equally. Select
Logarithmic scaling to emphasize lower values.

With a plot displayed, to reset all settings back to their defaults,
click the right-click context menu’s Reset Settings option.
Spectrum Plot – Multi Channel
For two channel and Triax POINTs, you have the option to display spectrum plots in
either a Stacked or Combined view, based on preferences.
•
To view multi-channel spectrums in Stacked view, set the Layout Orientation /
Spectrum Plot Preference to Stacked.
Figure 5 - 13.
Example of a Stacked Spectrum Plot with Unlinked Cursors / Overlays.
In Stacked mode, each channel displays in a separate panel. Depending on your Stack
Mode plot preference, cursors and overlays on the plot may either be linked or unlinked.
If Link is selected, cursors and overlays appear in the same position across all plots.
Where applicable, overlay tabs in the information area provide a separate column for
each channel (for example, Amp X, Amp Y, and Amp Z).
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
5 - 17
Displaying Graphic Plots
Plot Types
If Unlink is selected, you may add and move cursors and overlays in each plot
independently. Where applicable, overlay tabs in the information area list overlay
details for each channel on a separate line.
•
To view multi-channel spectrums in Combined view, set the Layout Orientation /
Spectrum Plot Preference to Combined.
Figure 5 - 14.
Example of a Combined Spectrum Plot.
Inactive channels
Active channel
Combined spectrum plots overlap the data from each channel. The channel indicators
on the side of the plot are color-coded to match the spectrum data. The active
spectrum is shown as a triangle. Toggle between the channels by clicking on the
appropriate indicator. The active channel determines the cursor feedback and
information window's content and overlay settings.
5 - 18
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Displaying Graphic Plots
Plot Types
Trend / Spectrum Plot
Figure 5 - 15.
Example of a Trend / Spectrum Plot.
Trend / Spectrum Plots display both a trend plot and a spectrum plot for a trend record
indicated by the single cursor position.
Each single cursor on the trend plot has a corresponding spectrum data line, if FFT data
is available. Removing the cursor from the trend also removes the associated spectrum
data line.
The active plot (trend or spectrum) determines the information window’s content and
overlay settings.
All other trend and spectrum operations behave as described previously in the trend
and spectrum plot descriptions.

Right-click on either plot to access the appropriate context menu.

See Trend Settings and Spectrum Settings for display parameters
that can be modified to change the plot display.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
5 - 19
Displaying Graphic Plots
Plot Types
Time Plot
Figure 5 - 16.
Example of a Time Plot.
Time Plots display a short time sample of a raw vibration signal with vibration
amplitude plotted over the time scale. Current time plots are compared to past time
plots to analyze changes in vibration amplitude or frequency.
Each plot line represents a time waveform measurement for a single POINT. You may
configure the X-axis to display time in seconds or milliseconds.
Time Plot Settings
To access the Time Plot Settings dialog:
•
With a time plot displayed, select the View menu’s Plot / Settings option, or use
the settings toolbar button.

The Settings dialog is also available from the time plot’s rightclick context menu.
Magnitude Scale fields include:
Autoscale - Enabling autoscale automatically scales the initial amplitude axis so it is
approximately 120% of the largest amplitude. Disabling autoscale displays the
spectrum on the same full scale vertical axis used when it was recorded.
% Full Scale - When enabled, the amplitude axis displays as a % value of the full scale.
Use % Full Scale to compare measurements that do not have the same units or the
same Full Scale value.
5 - 20
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Displaying Graphic Plots
Plot Types

If you do not select Autoscale or % Full Scale, you must enter
values to determine the plot’s magnitude scale (Y-axis scaling).
Magnitude Scale - Enter the minimum and maximum magnitude scale values in the
designated text boxes.
Magnitude Lin / Log - Select Linear scaling to space out data equally. Select
Logarithmic scaling to emphasize lower values.
You must enter values to determine the plot’s time scale (X-axis scaling)
Time Scale - Enter the minimum and maximum time scale values in the designated
text boxes. Select Seconds or Milliseconds.
Sound Byte
@ptitude Analyst's Sound Byte utility allows you to listen to sound data waveform
through your computer's speakers or connected earphones.
To utilize Sound Byte:
•
Select a POINT with saved time data and display its time plot.
•
Click the Sound Byte toolbar button, or select the Plot menu's Play Sound Byte
option. The Sound Byte utility launches, providing various playback options.
Sound Byte Controls
Play Time – Controls the play back period length. To change the setting, highlight the
displayed play back length value and type in a new value, or use the arrows to increase
or decrease play back length. The maximum play time is 10 seconds.
RPM Multiplier – Controls the play back speed. The range is 0.5 – 2, which is
equivalent to playing the data back at half the running speed, or double the running
speed.
Cursor Update Speed – Controls the cursor update rate so the sound and cursor
position are synchronized. Use a lower cursor update speed setting if the cursor is
slower than the sound. To change the setting, click the drop down list and select the
new cursor update speed.
Volume – Controls the play back sound volume. Click the slider bar and move up or
down to increase or decrease the volume.
•
Click the Play button to generate sound from the vibration data, and listen to the
waveform.
•
Click the Save button to save the sound data into a Windows ".wav" file.
•
Click the Exit button to exit the Sound Byte utility.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
5 - 21
Displaying Graphic Plots
Plot Types
Trend / Time Plot
Figure 5 - 17.
Example of a Trend / Time Plot.
Trend / Time Plots display both a trend plot and a time waveform plot for a trend
record indicated by the single cursor (if available).
The active plot (trend or time) determines the information window’s content and overlay
settings. Use a single cursor to view dynamic data for the measurement’s date and
time. Use multiple cursors to overlay dynamic data to visually display different data
values.
All other trend and time plot operations behave as described previously in the single
trend and time plot descriptions.
5 - 22

Right-click on either plot to access the appropriate context menu.

See Trend Settings and Time Plot Settings for display
parameters that can be modified to change plot display.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Displaying Graphic Plots
Plot Types
Trend / Spectrum / Time Plot
Figure 5 - 18.
Example of a Trend / Spectrum / Time Plot.
Trend / Spectrum / Time plots display a point’s trend plot, spectrum plot, and time
waveform plot. The three plots display in three different panels. The trend panel is the
primary panel of the display.
Use a single cursor to view dynamic data for the measurement’s date and time. Use
multiple cursors to overlay dynamic data to visually display different data values.
All trend, spectrum, and time plot operations behave as described previously in plot
descriptions.

Right-click on each plot to access its context menu

See Trend Settings, Spectrum Settings, and Time Plot
Settings for display parameters that can be modified to change
plot display.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
5 - 23
Displaying Graphic Plots
Plot Types
Waterfall Plot
Figure 5 - 19.
Example of a Waterfall Plot.
Three-dimensional Waterfall Plots display POINT’s historical spectra collected over time.
Historical spectra may be displayed as either a waterfall plot or a palogram plot as
configured in Plot Settings or Plot Preferences.
In a waterfall plot:
X axis = frequency (Hz / CPM, or orders of running speed)
Z axis = date
In a palogram plot:
X axis = date
Z axis = frequency (Hz / CPM, or orders of running speed)

5 - 24
The slant angle for palogram and waterfall mode may be modified
in Plot Preferences, allowing further customization of the
waterfall plot, including even spacing between spectra regardless
of time interval between readings.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Displaying Graphic Plots
Plot Types
Waterfall Settings
To access the Waterfall Plot Settings dialog:
•
With a waterfall plot displayed, select the View menu’s Plot / Settings option, or
use the settings toolbar button.

The Settings dialog is also available from the waterfall plot’s
right-click context menu.
Waterfall Plot Settings fields include:
View type - Select display configuration, Waterfall or Palogram.
Waterfall - Three dimensional plot displaying a single POINT’s historical spectral data
collected over time (frequency axis along bottom).
Palogram - Shows a rotated historical spectrum displaying in a three dimensional
format, allowing easy observation of trends at each frequency (date / time axis along
bottom).
Even Spacing - Enable to retain the date order, but space evenly for simple viewing.
Date / Time Scale - Enter the minimum and maximum date / time scale values in the
designated text boxes.
Magnitude Scale - Enter the minimum and maximum magnitude scale values in the
designated text boxes.
Magnitude Lin / Log - Select Linear scaling to space out data equally. Select
Logarithmic scaling to emphasize lower values.
Frequency Scale - Enter the minimum and maximum frequency scale values in the
designated text boxes.
Frequency Lin / Log - Select Linear scaling to space out data equally. Select
Logarithmic scaling to emphasize lower values.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
5 - 25
Displaying Graphic Plots
Plot Types
Polar Vector Plot
Figure 5 - 20.
Example of a Polar Vector Plot.
Polar Vector plots show vibration amplitude and phase. Phase is the angular difference
between a known mark on a rotating shaft and the shaft’s vibration signal. This
relationship provides valuable information on shaft orbit and shaft position and is used
for analysis, balancing, and shaft orbital analysis.
The newest measurement for the current data line is indicated by an asterisk ( * ).
•
Access the right-click context menu anywhere on the polar vector plot to change
order view, copy, reset settings, and turn amplitude labels on or off.
Polar Vector Settings
To access the Polar Vector Settings dialog:
•
With a polar vector plot displayed, select the View menu’s Plot / Settings option, or
use the settings toolbar button.

The Settings dialog is also available from the polar vector plot’s
context menu
Polar Vector Settings fields include:
Full Scale - Enter full scale amplitude
Order - Select order from drop down menu (1-4).
5 - 26
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Displaying Graphic Plots
Plot Types
Mag / Phase Trend
Figure 5 - 21.
Example of a Mag / Phase Trend Plot.
Mag / Phase trends plot the amplitude (top) and phase / angle (bottom) aligned by the
measurement date. Mag / Phase trends may be used to determine if a machine’s
mechanics are changing by analyzing the shifting in phase.
Mag / Phase Settings
To access the Mag / Phase Plot Settings dialog:
•
With a mag / phase plot displayed, select the View menu’s Plot / Settings option,
or use the settings toolbar button.

The Settings dialog is also available from the mag / phase plot’s
right-click context menu.
Mag / Phase Plot Settings fields include:
Date / Time Scale- Enter the minimum and maximum date / time scale values in the
designated text boxes.
Magnitude Scale - Enter the minimum and maximum magnitude scale values in the
designated text boxes.
Magnitude Lin / Log - Select Linear scaling to space out data equally. Select
Logarithmic scaling to emphasize lower values.
Phase Scale - Enter the minimum and maximum phase angles in the designated text
boxes.
Order - Determines which frequency order of running speed to display (1X, 2X, 3X, 4X).
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
5 - 27
Displaying Graphic Plots
Plot Types
Mag / Speed Trend
Figure 5 - 22.
Example of a Mag / Speed Trend Plot.
Mag / Speed trends plot the speed (top) and amplitude (bottom) aligned by the
measurement date. Mag / Speed trends may be used to determine if a machine’s
mechanics are changing by analyzing the relationship between vibration amplitude and
speed.

The speed value comes from the dynamic measurement. If only
the overall value is stored for a particular date / time, then there
will not be a corresponding Mag / Speed trend value.
Mag / Speed Settings
To access the Mag / Speed Plot Settings dialog:
With a mag / speed plot displayed, select the View menu’s Plot/Settings option, or use
the settings toolbar button.

The Settings dialog is also available from the mag / speed plot’s
right-click context menu.
Mag / Speed Plot Settings fields include:
Date / Time Scale – Enter the minimum and maximum date / time scale values in the
designated text boxes.
Speed Scale - Enter the minimum and maximum speed scale values in the designated
text boxes.
5 - 28
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Displaying Graphic Plots
Plot Types
Magnitude Scale – Enter the minimum and maximum magnitude scale values in the
designated text boxes.
Magnitude Lin / Log – Select Linear scaling to space out data equally. Select
Logarithmic scaling to emphasize lower values.
Mag / Speed / Spectrum Trend
Figure 5 - 23.
Example of a Mag / Speed / Spectrum Trend Plot.
Mag / Speed / Spectrum trends display a POINT’s mag / speed plot and spectrum plot.
The two plots display in two different panels. The mag / speed panel is the primary
panel of the display.
All mag / speed and spectrum plot operations behave as described previously in plot
descriptions.

Right-click on each plot to access its context menu
See Mag / Speed Settings and Spectrum Settings for display parameters that can be
modified to change plot display.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
5 - 29
Displaying Graphic Plots
Plot Types
Mag / Speed / Spectrum / Time Trend
Figure 5 - 24.
Example of a Mag / Speed / Spectrum / Time Trend Plot.
Mag / Speed / Spectrum / Time trends display a POINT’s mag / speed plot, spectrum
plot, and time plot. The three plots display in three different panels. The mag / speed
panel is the primary panel of the display.
All mag / speed, spectrum, and time plot operations behave as described previously in
plot descriptions.

Right-click on each plot to access its context menu
See Mag / Speed Settings, Spectrum Settings, and Time Settings for display
parameters that can be modified to change plot display.
5 - 30
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Displaying Graphic Plots
Plot Types
Mag / Speed / Time Trend
Figure 5 - 25.
Example of a Mag/Speed/Time Trend Plot.
Mag / Speed / Time trends display a POINT’s mag / speed plot and time plot. The two
plots display in two different panels. The mag / speed panel is the primary panel of the
display.
All mag / speed and time plot operations behave as described previously in plot
descriptions.

Right-click on each plot to access its context menu
See Mag / Speed Settings and Time Settings for display parameters that can be
modified to change plot display.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
5 - 31
Displaying Graphic Plots
Plot Types
Band Trend
Figure 5 - 26.
Example of a Band Trend.
Band trends combine the spectrum and available band trends for the selected POINT.
Band Trends are used to analyze the energy within the band to closely monitor that
particular frequency range.
To view a spectral band trend plot:
•
Select the POINT whose band trends you wish to display.
•
Select the View menu’s Plot / All Plots option. The All Plots dialog displays.
•
Select the Band Trend option.
Initially, all bands for the specified POINT display in the Band Trend display’s plots.
To view specific bands / band trends:
•
5 - 32
On the display’s spectrum plot, right-click on the overlay “anchor” in the plot’s
upper right corner and select the Settings option. The Band Alarm Settings dialog
displays.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Displaying Graphic Plots
Plot Types
Figure 5 - 27.
Band Alarm Settings Dialog.
POINT – Displays the selected POINT name.
Available band alarms
•
Use checkboxes to enable and disable bands for display.
In the plot window’s lower band trend plot, specified bands display along with band
alarm overlays for one of the band trends. Right-click on the trend’s overlay anchor to
display the Next Trace’s band alarms.
•
On the band trend plot, position the cursor and mouse pointer and use feedback
areas to analyze the plot.

Right-click on either plot to access the appropriate context menu.
See Trend Settings and Spectrum Settings for display parameters that can be
modified to change plot display.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
5 - 33
Displaying Graphic Plots
Plot Types
Extracted Trend
Figure 5 - 28.
Example of an Extracted Trend Plot.
Extracted trend plots display a trend plot of spectrum amplitudes at a frequency. A
waterfall plot shows which spectra are to be used. The single cursor in the waterfall
controls which frequency to plot in the trend. In addition, the single cursor in the
waterfall plots selects which spectrum is displayed in the spectrum plot. The waterfall
plot is the primary plot.

Right-click on each plot to access its context menu.
See Trend Settings, Spectrum Settings and Waterfall Settings for display
parameters that can be modified to change plot display.
5 - 34
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Displaying Graphic Plots
Plot Types
Extracted Band
Figure 5 - 29.
Example of an Extracted Band Plot.
Extracted band plots display a waterfall and extracted band plot. The energy of the
frequency within the band across the spectrum displays. You may create and move the
band while viewing, allowing you to analyze a particular component’s energy.

Right-click on either plot to access the appropriate context menu.
See Trend Settings and Waterfall Settings for display parameters that can be
modified to change plot display.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
5 - 35
Displaying Graphic Plots
Working with Overlays
Working with Overlays
Plot “overlays” superimpose cursors, alarms, and frequency markers on displayed plots.
Each overlay displays an “anchor” which you use to manipulate the overlay.
Displaying Overlays Using Toolbar Buttons
@ptitude Analyst has toolbar buttons for commonly used overlays.
Figure 5 - 30.
Overlay Toolbar Buttons.
Toolbar buttons are available for each overlay. The buttons on the toolbar can be
configured using the Customize menu’s Toolbar option. For more information on
customizing toolbars, refer to Appendix A, SKF @ptitude Analyst Toolbars.
Each button is enabled / disabled based on whether the overlay can appear on the
active plot. Individual toolbar buttons are identified later in this section.
Displaying Overlays Using the View Menu
The View menu’s Plot Overlays option contains a list of commonly used overlays.
Individual items on this list are enabled or disabled based on whether the overlay is
available for the plot window displayed when the item is selected.
5 - 36
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Displaying Graphic Plots
Working with Overlays
Figure 5 - 31.
The View Menu’s Plot Overlays Option.
Using the View menu’s Overlay option:
Select the View menu’s Plot Overlay option. A group of commonly used overlay types
displays on the menu.
•
Select one of the visible overlay types, or select All Overlays for more selections.
You may also use the All Overlays toolbar button to display the All Overlays dialog.
All Overlays
•
Select the View menu’s All Overlays option. The All Overlays dialog displays.
All overlays applicable to the open plot display in the dialog.
•
Select an overlay to display and click OK. The selected overlay displays in the plot
window.

•
You may add as many instances of overlays as needed (excluding
the peak cursor).
Click Cancel to undo your selection.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
5 - 37
Displaying Graphic Plots
Overlay Types
Overlay Settings
To access the Settings dialog for the selected overlay, either click the toolbar’s overlay
settings button, or use the View menu’s Plot Overlays / Settings option.
Overlay Types
Individual Overlay types and settings are listed below:
Text Annotation
Use text annotation overlays to create temporary textual notations and display on a
plot.

Text annotations are for temporary use. They are not attached to
the measurement or stored in the database. They remain on a
plot until the plot is closed.
To create a text annotation:
•
With a plot displayed, click the toolbar’s text annotation button, or select the View
menu’s Plot Overlays / Text Annotation option. The “Text Annotation” displays on
the plot.
To edit the text annotation:
•
Double-click the text annotation. The Text Annotation Settings dialog displays.
Figure 5 - 32.
The Text Annotation Settings Dialog.
Annotation text - Enter text to display on the plot. The entered text displays in the
dialog’s Preview area, allowing you to view the entered text before displaying it on the
plot.
5 - 38
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Displaying Graphic Plots
Overlay Types
Text attributes options include:
Left justified, Centered, or Right justified - Determine how the text displays in its text
box.
Transparent - Enable to make the annotation’s background area transparent, allowing
you to see the plot beneath the text.
Background Color - Click to select the annotation’s background area color.
Font - Click to select the font for the annotation text.
•
Click the OK button. The entered text annotation displays on the active plot.
Context Menu - Right-click on the displayed text annotation to reveal its context menu.
Available operations are:
Remove – Removes the annotation from the plot.
Settings – Launches Text Annotation Settings dialog.
Keyboard Support – Press Delete to remove the annotation from the plot. Use up /
down / left / right arrow keys to re-position. Use Shift and the left or right arrow key to
enlarge in the direction of the selected arrow. Use Ctrl and the up / down / left / right
arrow keys to shrink the box from the direction of the selected arrow.
Feedback Area – Displays the annotation text.
Information Area – None.
Available Preferences
None.

Text annotation may also be moved with the mouse (drag and
drop). Click on an anchor area and drag to re-size.
Linear Speed Overlay Settings
Use a Linear Speed Settings dialog to set the text attributes for your linear speed
overlay.
Figure 5 - 33.
The Linear Speed Settings Dialog.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
5 - 39
Displaying Graphic Plots
Overlay Types
In the Text attribute section:
•
Click the Transparent checkbox to display a transparent text annotation over the
active plot.
•
Click the Background Color button to select the color of textbox background.
•
Click the Font button to select the desired font.

•
Observe linear speed edits in the Preview window before applying
your linear speed overlay.
Click OK to close the dialog and save your edits.
Trend / Notes
Use the notes overlay to create and display notes at a specific date / time on the trend
plot.
To create a note:
•
With a trend plot displayed, position your cursor over the plot area and right click to
display the right-click context menu.
•
Select Add Notes. The Add Notes dialog displays. A new note displays in the
Notes list with the date and time of the location you right-clicked on the plot.
Figure 5 - 34.
The Add Notes Dialog.
5 - 40
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Displaying Graphic Plots
Overlay Types
•
If you need to change the date / time of the note, use the Date and Time fields to
adjust the date / time as necessary. The Add / Remove buttons will change to
Save / Undo buttons. Click Save and the note’s date / time adjusts accordingly in
the Notes list.
•
Type your note in the Text area and click Save.
•
Click OK. The created note displays on the plot at its specified date / time location.
To create additional notes:
•
Click the Add button. A new note is added to the Notes list with the current date /
time stamp.
•
Adjust the date / time using the Date and Time fields as necessary.
•
Type your note in the Text area and click Save.
•
Click OK. The created note displays on the plot at its specified date / time location.
To remove a note:
•
Select the note you wish to remove in the Notes list.
•
Click the Remove button. You will be asked to confirm that you wish to remove the
note.
•
Click Yes, or if you do not wish to remove the note, click No.
How Notes Overlays Display on the Plot
Feedback Area - Displays note and date / time information.
Information Area – Specific information displays on the Notes tab. Tab information
includes the POINT on which the cursor is currently positioned, note, and date / time.
Context Menu - Right-click on the displayed note to reveal its context menu. Available
operations are:
Remove – Removes overlay from the plot.

This does not delete existing notes. To display the notes overlay
again, select View / Plot Overlays / Notes.
Next Trace – Toggles between traces when the plot is displaying more than
one trace.
Display Note – Displays the note on the plot.
Remove All Display Notes – Hides all notes displayed on the plot.
Filter Notes – Allows you to select one ore more note categories to display on
the plot.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
5 - 41
Displaying Graphic Plots
Overlay Types
Figure 5 - 35.
The Filter Notes Dialog.
•
From the list of note categories, enable the check box next to one or more note
categories.
•
In the Include from group area, select the check boxes to include notes from SETs,
Machines, and / or POINTs.
•
Click OK. Only notes from the selected note categories display on the plot.
Available Preferences
The following preferences are found on the Preferences dialog’s Plot tab.
Notes – Configure the default display status (on or off).
Notes Indicator Location – Configure the display notes indicator (at top or
bottom of plot).
Notes Indicator Tooltip – Configure whether to display the tooltip (on or off)
when hovering over the notes indicator.
Notes Line Style – Configure how the notes cursor line displays (dashed, solid,
etc.).
5 - 42
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Displaying Graphic Plots
Overlay Types
Trend / Single Cursor
Use a single cursor to view individual measurement data on the trend plot by moving
the cursor to various measurement records.
To display a single cursor:
•
With a trend plot displayed, select the View menu’s Plot / Plot Overlays / Single
Cursor option, or use the single cursor overlay toolbar button.
•
Drag the cursor to position it on the plot.
•
If multiple traces appear in a plot, double-click the cursor overlay’s anchor to
position it on another trace. The anchor’s color indicates the current trace.
Feedback Area - Displays amplitude and date / time information.
Information Area – Specific information displays on the Trend tab. Tab information
includes the POINT on which the cursor is currently positioned, cursor color, amplitude,
and date / time.
Right-Click Context Menu - Right-click on the single cursor overlay anchor to reveal its
context menu.
Available options include:
Next trace – Toggles between traces when the plot is displaying more than
one trace.
Remove – Removes overlay from plot.
Exclude Reading – Toggles selected measurement's Exclude status on and off.
When Exclude is selected, the measurement is excluded from all calculations.
This setting is stored with the measurement and is in effect until the setting is
changed.
Keyboard Support – Move the cursor with the left and right arrow keys. Press Enter
to toggle to next trace. Press Delete to remove the cursor.
Available Preferences
Color - Cursor is the color of the next available cursor (as configured in
Cursor / Color Preferences in the Preferences dialog).
Display Status – Display status (on or off) is configured in the Trend Single
Cursor / Plot Preferences in the Preferences dialog.

The default status is on.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
5 - 43
Displaying Graphic Plots
Overlay Types
Trend / Overall Alarm
Use an overall alarm overlay to display your overall alarms graphically (as configured in
POINT Properties) on the active trend plot.
To display an overall alarm overlay:
•
With a trend plot displayed, select the View menu’s Plot / Plot Overlays / All
Overlays option. The All Overlays dialog displays.
•
Select Overall Alarm and click OK.
Feedback Area - Identifies the POINT, displays private alarm or alarm name (if shared),
and the alarm levels set.
Information Area - Specific information displays on the Overall Alarm tab. Tab
information includes POINT name, type, alarm level values and alarm message
summaries.
Overall Alarm tab - Information includes name, type, and alarm level values.
Right-Click Context Menu - Right-click on the overall alarm overlay anchor to reveal
its context menu.
Available options include:
Next trace – Toggles between traces when the plot is displaying more than
one trace.
Remove – Removes overlay from plot.
Keyboard Support – Press Enter to toggle to next trace. Press Delete to remove.
Available Preferences
Color – Alert and Danger colors appear as configured in Cursor / Color
Preferences in the Preferences dialog.
Display Status – Display status (on or off) is configured in the Trend Overall
Alarm / Plot Preferences in the Preferences dialog.

The default status is on.
Trend / Linear Speed
Use a linear speed overlay to graphically display the value of the linear factor multiplied
by the running speed.
To display linear speed overlay:
•
With a trend plot displayed, select the View menu’s Plot / Plot Overlays / All
Overlays option. The All Overlays dialog displays.
•
Select Linear Speed and click OK.
Feedback Area – Displays amplitude, frequency, orders, and linear speed.
Information Area – No tabs display for this overlay.
Right-Click Context Menu – Right-click on the linear speed overlay anchor to reveal its
context menu.
5 - 44
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Displaying Graphic Plots
Overlay Types
Available options include:
Next trace – Toggles between traces when the plot is displaying more than
one trace.
Remove – Removes overlay from plot.
Keyboard Support – Press Enter to toggle to next trace. Press Delete to remove.
Available Preferences
Display Status – Display status (on or off) is configured in the Trend / Linear
Speed / Plot Preferences in the Preferences dialog.

The default status is off.
Linear Speed Settings
Figure 5 - 36.
The Linear Speed Settings Dialog.
Use the Linear Speed Settings dialog to set the text attributes for your linear speed
overlay.
In the Text attribute section:
•
Click the Transparent checkbox to display a transparent text annotation over the
active plot.
•
Click the Background Color button to select the color of the textbox background.
•
Click the Font button to select the desired font.

•
Observe linear speed edits in the Preview window before applying
your linear speed overlay.
Click OK to close the dialog and save your edits.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
5 - 45
Displaying Graphic Plots
Overlay Types
Trend / Curve Fit
Use a curve fit overlay to graphically display the projected linear direction a trend is
heading based on current data
To display a curve fit overlay:
•
With a trend plot displayed, select the View menu’s Plot / Plot Overlays / Curve
Fit option, or use the curve fit toolbar button.
Feedback Area - Identifies the curve fit and associated POINT.
Information Area - Specific information displays on the Curve Fit tab. Tab information
includes:
Date, time, and amplitude for 2 years from last plotted measurement.
Date, time, and amplitude when alert exceeded (or projected to be reached).
Date, time, and amplitude when danger exceeded (or projected to be reached).
Information is sorted by the POINT name or color of the current trace.
Right-Click Context Menu - Right-click on the curve fit overlay anchor to reveal its
context menu.
Available options include:
Next trace – Toggles between traces when the plot is displaying more than
one trace.
Remove – Removes overlay from the plot.
Keyboard Support – Press Enter to toggle to next trace. Press Delete to remove.
Available Preferences
Color – Color appears as configured in Curve Fit / Color Preferences in the
Preferences dialog.
Display Status – Display status (on or off) is configured in the Trend Curve
Fit / Plot Preferences in the Preferences dialog.

The default status is off.
Trend / Protection Threshold Limits
Use a protection threshold limits cursor on a trend plot to graphically display the
protection levels for IMx-M protection POINTs. The protection threshold limits display
as red (danger) and/or yellow (alert) dashed lines for the Alert High, Alert Low, Danger
High, and Danger Low settings defined on the POINT Properties / Protection
Threshold Levels tab.
To display a protection threshold limits overlay:
•
With a trend plot displayed, select the View menu’s Plot / Plot Overlays /
Protection Threshold Limits option, or use the Protection Threshold Limits
toolbar button.
Feedback Area - Identifies the protection threshold limits and associated POINT.
5 - 46
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Displaying Graphic Plots
Overlay Types
Information Area - Specific information displays on the Protection Threshold tab.
Tab information includes the IMx-M protection POINT’s danger and alert protection
threshold levels.
Information is sorted by the POINT name of the current trace.
Right-Click Context Menu - Right-click the protection threshold limit overlay anchor to
reveal its context menu.
Available options include:
Next trace – Toggles between traces when the plot is displaying more than
one trace.
Remove – Removes overlay from the plot.
Keyboard Support – Press Enter to toggle to next trace. Press Delete to remove.
Available Preferences
Display Status – Display status (on or off) is configured on the Plot
Preferences / Protection Threshold Limits in the Preferences dialog.

The default status is off.
Spectrum / Single Cursor
Use a single cursor on a spectrum plot to display the amplitude for the frequency of the
cursor’s current placement
To display a single cursor overlay:
•
With a spectrum plot displayed, select the View menu’s Plot / Plot Overlays /
Single Cursor option, or use the single cursor toolbar button.
Feedback Area – Displays amplitude, frequency, number of orders, and phase angle (if
available).
Information Area – Specific information displays on the Spectrum tab. Tab
information includes POINT name, cursor color, frequency, amplitude of each channel,
number of orders, and phase angle (if available).
Right-Click Context Menu – Right-click on the single cursor overlay anchor to reveal its
context menu. Available options include:
Next trace – Toggles between traces when the plot is displaying more than
one trace.
Remove – Removes overlay from the plot.
Set Speed – Launches the Set Running Speed dialog.
Keyboard Support – Press Enter to toggle to next trace. Press Delete to remove. Left
and right arrow keys move one line at a time. Shift and the left or right arrow moves
15 lines at a time.
Available Preferences
Color - Cursor is the color of the next available cursor (as configured in
Cursor / Color Preferences in the Preferences dialog).
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
5 - 47
Displaying Graphic Plots
Overlay Types
Display Status – Display status (on or off) is configured in the Spectrum
Single Cursor / Plot Preferences in the Preferences dialog.

The default status is on.
Set Running Speed
The calculated or custom running speed appears on the active plot if the running speed
overlay is displayed.
To specify the running speed:
•
Right click on the single cursor overlay and select Set Speed from the pop-up
menu.
Figure 5 - 37.
The Set Speed Dialog.
Use the Set Running Speed dialog to edit the running speed for the measurement.
Current frequency – Displays the frequency of the current cursor position on the open
plot.
To set a custom running speed:
•
Enter the desired frequency in the Calculated running speed field and click OK.
To automatically calculate running speed by current frequency and number of
orders:
•
Enter the desired value in the Equivalent to order# field.
•
Click OK.
Spectrum / Running Speed
Use a Running Speed overlay to visually indicate the running speed frequency
(Machine’s running speed at time of measurement).
To display a running speed overlay:
•
With a spectrum plot displayed, select the View menu’s Plot / Plot Overlays / All
Overlays option to display the All Overlays dialog.
•
Select Running Speed and click OK.

Use the Customize menu’s Toolbar option to activate the running
speed overlay toolbar button.
Feedback Area - Displays amplitude, frequency, orders, and running speed.
5 - 48
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Displaying Graphic Plots
Overlay Types
Information Area – None.
Right-Click Context Menu – Right-click on the running speed overlay anchor to reveal
its context menu.
Available options include:
Next Trace – Toggles between traces when the plot is displaying more than
one trace.
Remove – Removes overlay from plot.
Keyboard Support – Press Enter to toggle to next trace. Press Delete to remove.

An anchor symbol appears on the bottom of the plot. Click the
anchor to toggle between multiple spectra.
Available Preferences
Color – Running speed color is configured in Running Speed / Colors in the
Preferences dialog).

The default color is black.
Display Status – Display status (on or off) is configured in the Running
Speed - Spectrum / Plot Preferences in the Preferences dialog.

The default status is on.
Spectrum / Band Cursor
Use a band cursor to display the frequency / time and amplitude difference (delta)
between two cursor positions.
To display a band cursor overlay:
•
With a spectrum plot displayed, select the View menu’s Plot / Plot Overlays /
Band Cursor option, or use the band cursor toolbar button.
Feedback Area - Displays left amplitude and frequency, right amplitude and frequency,
orders, and delta (distance between cursor positions in frequency units).
Information Area – Specific information displays on the Spectrum Band tab. Tab
information includes left frequency and amplitude for each channel, right frequency and
amplitude for each channel, orders, delta, and overall for each channel.
Right-Click Context Menu - Right-click on the band cursor overlay anchor to reveal its
context menu. Available options include:
Next trace – Toggles between traces when the plot is displaying more than
one trace.
Remove – Removes the overlay from the plot.
Keyboard Support – Press Enter to toggle to next trace. Press Delete to remove.
The band cursor is made up of three parts. The fundamental left line, fundamental
right line, and the band width. The active line is indicated by the cursor line focus icon.
This icon displays as a triangle on the active part of the cursor. Use left and right arrow
keys to move band width or an individual line (depending on which is active) left or right.
The Page Up and Page Down keys toggle between left line, right line, and band width.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
5 - 49
Displaying Graphic Plots
Overlay Types

The individual fundamental lines and the band width move in
small increments (one line at a time). Use the Shift and the left
or right arrow key to move part or the entire band in larger
increments (15 lines at a time).
Available Preferences
Color – Cursor is the color of the next available cursor (as configured in Color
Preferences in the Preferences dialog). Cursor line focus icon color appears
as configured in Cursor Line Focus in Color Preferences in the Preferences
dialog.
Display Status – Display status (on or off) is configured in the Spectrum Band
Cursor / Plot Preferences in the Preferences dialog.

The default status is off.
Spectrum / Harmonic Cursor
Use a harmonic cursor to display multiples of the current frequency.
To display a harmonic cursor overlay:
•
With a spectrum plot displayed, select the View menu’s Plot / Plot Overlays /
Harmonic Cursor option, or use the harmonic cursor toolbar button.
Feedback Area – Displays the value for fundamental and harmonic amplitude,
frequency, and orders. When the mouse pointer is positioned over a harmonic marker,
that marker’s amplitude, frequency, and orders display on the feedback area’s second
line.
Information Area – Specific information displays on the Harmonic Cursor tab. Tab
information includes POINT name, cursor color, frequency, amplitude of each channel,
number of orders, and percentage of each channel’s fundamental frequency for each
harmonic.
Figure 5 - 38.
The Harmonic Cursor Tab.
The Harmonic Cursor tab provides details on potential harmonics using SKF’s
Harmonic Activity Index (HAI). All impact defects create spectra with a fundamental and
a series of harmonics (i.e., a harmonic pattern). The amplitudes of these harmonics are
affected by the defect itself, as well as the filtering effect of the machine. HAI is a
calculation that quantifies the likelihood of harmonic patterns being present in a
spectrum, and therefore, the likelihood of a defect being present.
The result of the HAI calculation is displayed in the Activity Index column. The Activity
Index is a quick indicator to determine if there is a meaningful pattern under the
5 - 50
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Displaying Graphic Plots
Overlay Types
current cursor position (i.e., whether or not there is a defect associated with this
frequency). It can also act as a guide to determine the best cursor position for a
suspected a harmonic pattern.
An HAI value of 2.5 or greater indicates a likely defect pattern; HAI values of 3 or more
show clear patterns.

HAI values are the same across spectra from different sources
(i.e., the number of lines or unit types do not matter).

HAI values are calculated from spectral data only. In some
spectra, many different sources unrelated to each other may
create a seemingly harmonious pattern. The HAI value for this
pattern might be high enough to suggest a true pattern is shown.
To verify it is a true pattern, always check a few spectra taken
over time for similar HAI values.
Right-Click Context Menu - Right-click on the harmonic cursor overlay anchor to
reveal its context menu. Available options include:
Next trace – Toggles between traces when the plot is displaying more than
one trace.
Remove – Removes the overlay from the plot.
Set Running Speed
The calculated or custom running speed appears on the active plot if the running speed
overlay is displayed.
To specify the running speed:
•
Right click on the harmonic cursor overlay and select Set Speed from the pop-up
menu.
Figure 5 - 39.
The Set Speed Dialog.
Use the Set Running Speed dialog to edit the running speed for the measurement.
Current frequency – Displays the frequency of the current cursor position on the open
plot.
To set a custom running speed:
•
Enter the desired frequency in the Calculated running speed field and click OK.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
5 - 51
Displaying Graphic Plots
Overlay Types
To automatically calculate running speed by current frequency and number of
orders:
•
Enter the desired value in the Equivalent to order# field.
•
Click OK.
Keyboard Support – Press Enter to toggle to the next trace. Press Delete to remove.
Left and right arrow keys move the fundamental line in small increments (one line at a
time). Use the Shift and the left or right arrow key to move in larger increments (15
lines at a time).
Ctrl and the left or right arrow key moves the marker on the far right in small
increments.
Available Preferences –
Color - Cursor is the color of the next available cursor (as configured in Color
Preferences in the Preferences dialog).
Display Status – Display status (on or off) is configured in the Harmonic
Cursor / Plot Preferences in the Preferences dialog.

The default status is off.
Number of Harmonics – Maximum number of harmonic markers displayed
(1-100).

The default number is 50.
Spectrum / Sideband Cursor
Sideband markers consist of an array of five pairs of markers evenly spaced on both
sides of a sideband cursor reference position. Sideband markers are referenced as
located from left to right around the center cursor. Sideband markers to the left of the
center cursor are referenced with negative numbers; their associated markers to the
right of the cursor are referenced with positive numbers.
To display a sideband cursor overlay:
•
With a spectrum plot displayed, select the View menu’s Plot / Plot Overlays /
Sideband Cursor option, or use the sideband cursor toolbar button.
Feedback Area - Displays the center position's amplitude and frequency, orders, delta,
and each sideband marker's amplitude and frequency (arranged negative to positive).
When the mouse pointer is over a sideband marker, its amplitude and frequency display
on the feedback area’s second line.
Information Area – Specific information displays on the Sideband tab. Tab
information includes sideband position, frequency, orders, amplitude, and delta
(arranged negative to positive by sideband marker number).
Right-Click Context Menu - Right click on the sideband cursor overlay anchor to reveal
its context menu. Available options include:
Next Trace – Toggles between traces when the plot is displaying more than
one trace.
5 - 52
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Displaying Graphic Plots
Overlay Types
Remove – Removes overlay from plot.
Keyboard Support – Press Enter to toggle to next trace. Press Delete to remove.
Use the left and right arrow keys to move the center cursor in small increments (one
line at a time). Use Shift and the left and right arrow keys to move the center cursor in
larger increments (15 lines at a time). Use Ctrl and the left and right arrow keys to
move the markers in and out in small increments (left arrow to expand / right arrow to
contract). Use Ctrl and Shift and the left and right arrow keys to move markers in
larger increments (15 lines at a time).
You may drag every individual marker, effectively changing the delta value, and thus the
location of all other markers.
Available Preferences
Color - Cursor is the color of the next available cursor (as configured in Color
Preferences in the Preferences dialog).
Display Status – Display status (on or off) is configured in the Sideband
Cursor Spectrum / Plot Preferences in the Preferences dialog.

The default status is off.
Spectrum / Peak Cursor
Peak cursors label all peaks above a user determined amplitude.

The default amplitude is based on the Threshold % preference.
To display a peak cursor overlay:
•
With a spectrum plot displayed, select the View menu’s Plot / Plot Overlays / Peak
Cursor option, or use the peak cursor toolbar button.
Feedback Area - Displays the amplitude line value and the total number of peaks.
Displays each peak's position, amplitude, frequency, and orders.
Information Area – Specific information displays on the Peak tab. Tab information
includes peak position (index), amplitude, frequency, and orders.
Right-Click Context Menu - Right-click on the peak cursor overlay anchor to reveal its
context menu. Available options include:
Next Trace – Toggles between traces when the plot is displaying more than
one trace.
Remove – Removes overlay from plot.
Keyboard Support – Press Enter to toggle to next trace. Press Delete to remove.
Use the up and down arrow keys to increase or decrease the amplitude line 1% of the
current amplitude value. Use the Shift and up and down arrow keys to increase /
decrease the amplitude range in larger increments (10% at a time).
Available Preferences
Color - Cursor is the color of the next available cursor (as configured in Color
Preferences in the Preferences dialog).
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
5 - 53
Displaying Graphic Plots
Overlay Types
Display Status – Display status (on or off) is configured in the Peak Cursor Spectrum / Plot Preferences in the Preferences dialog.

The default status is off.
Threshold % - This value is used to determine the initial position of the cursor as a
percentage of the full scale value.

The default amplitude is based on the Threshold% preference
Spectrum / Band Alarm
Use a band alarm overlay to display all band alarms assigned to the active POINT.

If the band alarms display was previously modified for the active
POINT, then only those marked visible will display.
To display a band alarm overlay:
•
With a spectrum plot displayed, select the View menu’s Plot / Plot Overlays / All
Overlays option. The All Overlays dialog displays.
•
Select Band Alarm and click OK.

Use the Customize menu’s Toolbar option to activate the band
alarm overlay toolbar button.
In displayed band alarm overlays, solid lines represent peak values and dashed lines
represent overall values. Green lines represent the band’s peak and overall value for
the measurement, yellow lines show alert alarm values, red lines show danger alarm
values.
Feedback Area– When anchor is active, displays band alarm for specific POINT. When
band alarm is active, displays band name, alarm level, and value (Overall Danger and
Alert / Peak Danger and Alert).
Information Area – Specific information displays on the Band Alarm tab. Tab
information includes low and high frequency values, orders, peak, overall alert and
danger alarm values, data values, for example: peak value and status / overall value,
and status.
Right-Click Context Menu - Right-click on the band alarm overlay anchor to reveal its
context menu. Available options include:
Next Trace – Toggles between traces when the plot is displaying more than
one trace.
Remove – Removes the overlay from the plot.
Settings – Launches Band Alarm Settings dialog.
Keyboard Support – Press Enter to toggle to next trace. Press Delete to remove.
Available Preferences
Color – Color preferences set in following areas of the Preferences dialog:
Band Alarm / Colors – Configures frequency lines (left and right)
colors.
Clear / Colors – Configures data value line colors.
5 - 54
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Displaying Graphic Plots
Overlay Types
Alert / Colors – Configures alert color.
Danger / Colors – Configures danger color.
Display Status – Display status (on or off) is configured in the Band Alarm Spectrum / Plot Preferences in the Preferences dialog.

The default status is off.
Band Alarm Settings Dialog
Use the Band Alarm Settings dialog to show / hide available band alarms on the active
POINT's plot. Available Band Alarm names, visibility status, and frequency range display
on the tab.
Figure 5 - 40.
The Band Alarm Settings Dialog.
Band Alarm Settings fields include:
POINT - Displays POINT name.
Available band alarms - Displays individual band alarms and their visibility status,
frequency ranges, and channels.
To show / hide band alarms:
•
Click the band alarm’s checkbox to toggle the band alarm’s status from Show to
Hide.
•
Click OK to save changes, click Cancel to close the dialog without saving changes.

These display settings are stored with the POINT. Whenever the
POINT displays, the current settings are used.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
5 - 55
Displaying Graphic Plots
Overlay Types
Spectrum / Envelope Alarm
Use an envelope alarm overlay to display the envelope alarm assigned to the active
POINT(s).
To display an envelope alarm overlay:
•
With a spectrum plot displayed, select the View menu’s Plot / Plot Overlays / All
Overlays option. The All Overlays dialog displays.
•
Select Envelope Alarm and click OK.
The generated envelope alarm remains in * EDIT * mode until you Save or Undo your
settings using the plot’s context menu.
Editing the Envelope Alarm
After you have generated an envelope alarm, you can edit it graphically using your
mouse, or enter numeric envelope parameters using the Set Frequency dialog.
To graphically edit the envelope alarm:
•
While in edit mode, the plot window displays * EDIT * in each upper corner. Move
the mouse over the envelope alarm. The cursor changes to an up arrow.
•
Click the mouse on the portion of the envelope alarm line to be edited. A square
icon identifies where the line will be drawn.
•
Drag the mouse to draw the line to create the new envelope alarm.
Tip - You can use your keyboard’s Insert key to begin drawing the envelope alarm line.
Then, use the arrow keys to move the line, and the Insert key again to stop drawing the
line.
•
Right-click within the plot to display its context menu.
•
Select Save to save your envelope alarm settings and end * EDIT * mode, or select
Undo to undo your settings.
To edit the envelope alarm using numeric frequency ranges:
•
Click the Set Range button. The Set Frequency dialog displays.
•
Enter the desired low frequency, high frequency, and level value.
•
Click OK. The displayed envelope alarm automatically conforms to your entries.
Feedback Area – Identifies the envelope alarm and POINT.
Information Area – Specific information displays on the Envelope tab. Tab information
includes each frequency that pierced the envelope, FFT amplitude, and alarm amplitude.
Additional overlay information displays on the Envelope tab.
Right-Click Context Menu – Right-click on the envelope alarm overlay anchor to reveal
its context menu. Available options include:
Next Trace – Toggles between traces when the plot is displaying more than
one trace.
Remove – Removes overlay from the plot.
Keyboard Support – Press Enter to toggle to next trace. Press Delete to remove.
5 - 56
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Displaying Graphic Plots
Overlay Types
Available Preferences
Color – Alarm line color is configured in Danger / Colors in the Preferences
dialog.
Display Status – Display status (on or off) is configured in the Envelope
Alarm - Spectrum / Plot Preferences in the Preferences dialog.

The default status is off.
Spectrum / Linear Speed
Use a linear speed overlay to graphically display the value of the linear factor multiplied
by the running speed.
To display linear speed overlay:
•
With a spectrum plot displayed, select the View menu’s Plot / Plot Overlays / All
Overlays option. The All Overlays dialog displays.
•
Select Linear Speed and click OK.
Feedback Area – Displays amplitude, frequency, orders, and linear speed.
Information Area - No tabs display for this overlay.
Right-Click Context Menu - Right-click on the linear speed overlay anchor to reveal its
context menu.
Available options include:
Next trace – Toggles between traces when the plot is displaying more than
one trace.
Remove – Removes overlay from plot.
Settings – Launches the Linear Speed Settings dialog.
Keyboard Support – Press Enter to toggle to next trace. Press Delete to remove.
Available Preferences
Display Status – Display status (on or off) is configured in the Spectrum /
Linear Speed / Plot Preferences in the Preferences dialog.

The default status is off.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
5 - 57
Displaying Graphic Plots
Overlay Types
Spectrum / Frequency
Use a frequency overlay to label POINTs’ assigned frequency set(s) for identification and
analysis of bearing defects, etc.

The current POINT must have an assigned frequency set.
To display a frequency overlay:
•
With a spectrum plot displayed, select the View menu’s Plot / Plot Overlays /
Frequency option, or use the frequency toolbar button.
Feedback Area – Displays the number of fundamental frequencies available for the
POINT. Displays individual frequency label, orders, each multiple’s amplitude and
frequency.
When the mouse pointer is over a frequency label, that label’s amplitude and frequency
values display feedback area’s second line.

The number of fundamental frequencies is not limited to the
number of displayed frequencies.
Information Area – Specific information displays on the FAM tab. Tab information
includes all displayed frequencies for active overlay, harmonic, frequency, orders, and
amplitude values.
Also included on the FAM tab is an Activity Index column. The Activity Index displays
the result of an HAI (Harmonic Activity Index) calculation, which quantifies the likelihood
of defects at the FAM frequencies for the BPFO, BPFI, BSF, and FTF harmonics in the
spectrum.
A HAI value in the Activity Index column of 2.5 or greater indicates a likely defect
pattern; HAI values of 3 or more show clear patterns.
Right-Click Context Menu - Right-click on the frequency overlay anchor to reveal its
context menu. Available options include:
Next trace – Toggles between traces when the plot is displaying more than
one trace.
Next Frequency – Advance to next frequency set.
Previous Frequency - Return to previous frequency set.
Remove – Removes the overlay from the plot.
Settings – Launches Frequency Settings dialog.
Keyboard Support – Press Enter to toggle to next trace. Press Delete to remove the
overlay. Use the plus (+) and minus ( -) keys to cycle through the frequency sets for an
individual POINT and return to original selection.
Available Preferences
Color – Frequency color is configured in Frequency / Color Preferences in
the Preferences dialog).
Display Status – Display status (on or off) is configured in Frequency –
Spectrum / Plot Preferences in the Preferences dialog.

5 - 58
The default status is off.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Displaying Graphic Plots
Overlay Types
Frequency Settings Dialog
Use the Frequency Settings dialog to enable / disable any or all frequencies for display
on the current POINT’s plot.
Figure 5 - 41.
The Frequency Settings Dialog.
To enable / disable frequencies:
•
Click the checkbox next to the frequency set to enable it for display. Clear the
checkbox to disable the frequency set.
Display parameters fields include:
Multiples - Enter number of multiples for each label.
Bandwidth % - Enter bandwidth % for each label.

Settings are permanently saved with the POINT.
•
Click Show All to enable all frequencies for display, click Hide All to disable all
frequencies for display.
•
Click OK to save changes, click Cancel to close dialog without saving changes.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
5 - 59
Displaying Graphic Plots
Overlay Types
Spectrum / Diagnostic Cursor
Use a diagnostic cursor to let @ptitude Analyst compute and display all relevant
harmonic series of the current spectrum, and rank all series found according to
probability.

This option is only available with @ptitude Analyst CMSW 7400.
To display a diagnostic cursor overlay:
•
With a spectrum plot displayed, select the View menu’s Plot Overlays / Diagnostic
Cursor option, use the diagnostic cursor toolbar button, or press X on your
keyboard.
@ptitude Analyst uses a patented algorithm to distinguish between very probable and
less probable harmonic series, and ranks all series found according to probability.
The result is shown on the Diagnostics tab in the info area below the spectrum plot.
The probability is expressed as an activity index, whereby values of 1.5 and higher
indicate an increasing probability of a significant harmonic pattern.
In addition, the algorithm compares the fundamental frequency of each series to any
frequency associated with the POINT (e.g., bearing defect frequencies). If a match is
found, it displays the name of this frequency next to the related harmonic pattern.
Figure 5 - 42.
The Diagnostics Tab.
list of patterns ranked by probability
Activity Index (2.5 or greater indicates a likely defect pattern; 3 or more show
clear patterns)
pattern matches BPFO
Feedback Area – Displays the values for the currently shown harmonic series by activity
index, fundamental frequency, and orders.
Information Area – Specific information displays on the Diagnostics tab. Tab
information includes harmonic frequency, orders, and activity index for all relevant
harmonic series, sorted by activity index. Use the mouse or cursor keys to scroll
through the list and display the highlighted series on the spectrum plot.
5 - 60
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Displaying Graphic Plots
Overlay Types
Right-Click Context Menu - Right-click on the diagnostic cursor overlay anchor to
reveal its context menu. Available options include:
Next trace – Toggles between traces when the plot is displaying more than
one trace.
Remove – Removes the overlay from the plot.
Keyboard Support – Press Enter to toggle to the next trace. Press Delete to remove.
Available Preferences
Color - Cursor is the color of the next available cursor (as configured in Color
Preferences in the Preferences dialog).
Diagnostics Percentage – Configured in Diagnostic Percentage –
Spectrum/Plot Preferences in the Preferences dialog. Filters the list of
harmonic patterns displayed, based on a percentage of the highest Activity
Index detected in the spectrum. (For example, if the highest Activity Index is
3.5, a Diagnostics Percentage of 50% would filter out any harmonic patterns
with an Activity Index below 1.75.)

The default percentage is 30%.
Diagnostic Cursor – Configured in Diagnostic Cursor – Spectrum / Plot
Preferences in the Preferences dialog. Determines whether the diagnostic
cursor is on by default when a spectrum plot is displayed.

The default status is off.
Waterfall / Single Cursor
Use a single cursor to select a particular frequency across one or more spectra and
toggle between open spectra.
To display a single cursor overlay:
•
With a waterfall plot displayed, select the View menu’s Plot / Plot Overlays / Single
Cursor option, or use the single cursor toolbar button.
Feedback Area – Displays the amplitude and frequency for the selected spectrum line
with a marker. Displays the spectrum's name and date / time.
Information Area – Specific information displays on the Waterfall tab. Tab
information includes selected spectrum line's amplitude and frequency, measurement
date / time, and selected measurement details.
Right-Click Context Menu - Right-click on the single cursor overlay anchor to reveal its
context menu. Available options include:
Next POINT - Toggles between open POINTs (with two or more POINTs
active).
Next / Previous Spectrum – Moves to next or previous spectrum for active
POINT.
Remove – Removes overlay from plot.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
5 - 61
Displaying Graphic Plots
Overlay Types
Keyboard Support – Press Enter to toggle to the next POINT. Press Delete to remove.
Use the left and right arrow keys to move to next / previous frequency in small
increments (one line at a time). Use the up and down arrow keys to move to next /
previous spectrum for the POINT.

Use Shift and left and right arrow keys to move to next or
previous frequency in larger increments (10 lines at a time).

In Palogram mode, the keys are reversed. Use left and right
arrow keys to move to next / previous spectrum, and up and
down arrow keys to move to next / previous frequency.
Available Preferences
Color – Cursor is the color of the next available cursor (as configured in
Cursor / Color Preferences in the Preferences dialog.
Display Status – Display status (on or off) is configured in the Single Cursor Waterfall / Plot Preferences in the Preferences dialog.

The default status is on.
Waterfall / Band Cursor
Use a band cursor to calculate and display the delta between two frequencies.
To display a band cursor overlay:
•
With a waterfall plot displayed, select the View menu’s Plot / Plot Overlays / Band
Cursor option, or use the band cursor toolbar button.
Feedback Area – Displays the minimum and maximum frequency and delta for the
active POINT.
Information Area – Specific information displays on the Waterfall Band tab. Tab
information includes minimum and maximum frequency and delta for the active POINT.
Right-Click Context Menu - Right-click on the band cursor overlay anchor to reveal its
context menu. Available options include:
Next POINT - Toggles between open POINTs (with two or more POINTs
active).
Remove – Removes overlay from plot.
Keyboard Support – Press Enter to toggle to the next POINT. Press Delete to remove.
The band cursor is made up of three parts, the fundamental left line, fundamental right
line, and the entire band. The active line is indicated by the cursor line focus icon. This
icon displays as a triangle on the active part of the cursor. Use left and right arrow keys
to move the entire band or an individual line (depending on which is active) left or right.
The Page Up and Page Down keys toggle between left line, right line, and entire band.

5 - 62
The individual fundamental lines and the entire band move in
small increments (one line at a time). Use the Shift and the left
or right arrow key to move part or all of the band in larger
increments (15 lines at a time).
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Displaying Graphic Plots
Overlay Types
Available Preferences
Color – Cursor is the color of the next available cursor (as configured in
Cursor / Color Preferences in the Preferences dialog. Cursor line focus icon
color appears as configured in Cursor Line Focus in Color Preferences in the
Preferences dialog.
Display Status – Display status (on or off) is configured in the Band Cursor Waterfall / Plot Preferences in the Preferences dialog.

The default status is off.
Polar Vector / Single Cursor
Use a single cursor to display the magnitude and phase for FFT / phase data and to
navigate between individual readings for a selected order.
To display a single cursor overlay:
•
With a polar vector plot displayed, select the View menu’s Plot / Plot Overlays /
Single Cursor option, or use the single cursor toolbar button.
Feedback Area – Displays amplitude, phase angle, POINT name, and measurement
date / time for cursor location.
Information Area – Specific information displays on the Polar Vector tab. Tab
information includes POINT name, date / time stamp, amplitude, and phase angle.
Right-Click Context Menu - Right-click on the single cursor overlay anchor to reveal its
context menu. Available options include:
Next Trace - Toggles between traces when the plot is displaying more than
one trace.
Remove – Removes overlay from plot.
Keyboard Support – Press Enter to toggle to next POINT. Press Delete to remove.
Use the left and right arrow keys to move to next or previous reading (by date / time).
Available Preferences
Color – Cursor is the color of the next available cursor (as configured in
Cursor / Color Preferences in the Preferences dialog.
Display Status – Display status (on or off) is configured in the Single Cursor –
Polar Vector / Plot Preferences in the Preferences dialog.

The default status is on.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
5 - 63
Displaying Graphic Plots
Overlay Types
Polar Vector / Phase Alarm Cursor
Use a phase alarm overlay to graphically display alarm levels for phase data. Normal
levels display inside small enclosed areas. Alert levels are contained within a larger
enclosed area. Danger levels appear outside the enclosed area.
To display a phase alarm overlay:
•
With a polar vector plot displayed, select the View menu’s Plot / Plot Overlays / All
Overlays option. The All Overlays dialog displays.
•
Select Phase Alarm and click OK.

Use the Customize menu’s Toolbar option to activate the phase
alarm overlay toolbar button.
Feedback Area– Displays POINT name and phase alarm.
Information Area – Specific information displays on the Phase Alarm tab. Tab
information includes order number, start and end angle, and low and high amplitudes
for enabled alarms (alert, danger, or both).
Right-Click Context Menu - Right-click on the phase alarm overlay anchor to reveal its
context menu. Available options include:
Next Trace - Toggles between traces when the plot is displaying more than
one trace.
Remove – Removes overlay from the plot.
Keyboard Support – Press Enter to toggle to next POINT. Press Delete to remove.
Available Preferences
Color – Alarm colors configured in Danger and Alert / Colors in the
Preferences dialog.
Display Status – Display status (on or off) is configured in the Phase Alarm –
Polar Vector / Plot Preferences in the Preferences dialog.

The default status is on.
Mag / Phase / Single Cursor
Use a single cursor to display amplitude and phase data in linear form for trending
purposes. Navigate by date / time and simultaneously analyze magnitude and phase
data.
To display a single cursor overlay:
•
With a mag / phase plot displayed, select the View menu’s Plot / Plot Overlays /
Single Cursor option, or use the single cursor toolbar button.
Feedback Area – Displays POINT name, date / time, amplitude, and phase.
Information Area – Specific information displays on the Mag/Phase tab. Tab
information includes POINT name, date / time, amplitude, and phase.
5 - 64
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Displaying Graphic Plots
Overlay Types
Right-Click Context Menu - Right-click on the single cursor overlay anchor to reveal its
context menu. Available options include:
Next Trace - Toggles between traces when the plot is displaying more than
one trace.
Remove – Removes overlay from the plot.
Keyboard Support – Press Enter to toggle to next POINT. Press Delete to remove.
Available Preferences
Color – Cursor is the color of the next available cursor (as configured in
Cursors / Color Preferences in the Preferences dialog.
Display Status – Display status (on or off) is configured in the Single Cursor –
Mag-Phase Trend / Plot Preferences in the Preferences dialog.

The default status is on.
Time / Single Cursor
Use a single cursor to analyze a time waveform’s amplitude and time data.
To display a single cursor overlay:
•
With a time plot displayed, select the View menu’s Plot / Plot Overlays / Single
Cursor option, or use the single cursor toolbar button.
Feedback Area – Displays amplitude and time data for cursor’s location on the plot.
Information Area – Specific information displays on the Time tab. Tab information
includes POINT name, amplitude, and time.
Right-Click Context Menu - Right-click on the single cursor overlay anchor to reveal its
context menu. Available options include:
Next Trace - Toggles between traces when the plot is displaying more than
one trace.
Remove – Removes overlay from the plot.
Keyboard Support – Press Enter to toggle to next POINT. Press Delete to remove.
Available Preferences
Color – Cursor is the color of the next available cursor (as configured in
Cursors / Color Preferences in the Preferences dialog.
Display Status – Display status (on or off) is configured in the Single Cursor –
Time / Plot Preferences in the Preferences dialog.

The default status is on.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
5 - 65
Displaying Graphic Plots
Overlay Types
Time / Harmonic Cursor
Use a harmonic cursor to create and view a time interval’s harmonics.
To display a harmonic cursor overlay:
•
With a time plot displayed, select the View menu’s Plot / Plot Overlays / Harmonic
Cursor option, or use the harmonic cursor toolbar button.
Feedback Area – Displays amplitude and time of fundamental left line and right line of
cursor. Displays interval in time and interval as a frequency.
Information Area – Specific information displays on the Harmonic Cursor tab. Tab
information includes POINT name, left and right fundamental lines' amplitude and time,
interval, frequency, and all visible harmonic labels.
Right-Click Context Menu - Right- click on the harmonic cursor overlay anchor to
reveal its context menu. Available options include:
Next Trace - Toggles between traces when the plot is displaying more than
one trace.
Remove – Removes overlay from the plot.
Keyboard Support – Press Enter to toggle to next POINT. Press Delete to remove.
The cursor is made up of three parts. The fundamental left line, fundamental right line,
and the entire cursor. The active line is indicated by the cursor line focus icon. This
icon displays as a triangle on the active part of the cursor. Use the left and right arrow
keys to move the entire cursor or either individual line (depending on which is active)
left or right. The Page Up and Page Down keys toggle between selections of left line,
right line, and entire cursor.

The individual fundamental lines and the entire cursor move in
small increments (one line at a time). Use the Shift and left and
right arrow keys to move all or part of the cursor in larger
increments (15 lines at a time).
Available Preferences
Color – Cursor is the color of the next available cursor (as configured in
Cursors / Color Preferences in the Preferences dialog.
Display Status – Display status (on or off) is configured in the Harmonic
Cursor – Time / Plot Preferences in the Preferences dialog.
5 - 66

The default status is off.

The Time – Harmonic cursor's fill pattern lines slope downward
from left to right to distinguish it from a Band cursor. A Band
cursor’s fill pattern lines slope upward left to right.

The default number of harmonics is 50.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Displaying Graphic Plots
Overlay Types
Time / Band Cursor
Use a band cursor to identify the time interval and amplitude delta.
To display a band cursor overlay:
•
With a time plot displayed, select the View menu’s Plot / Plot Overlays / Band
Cursor option, or use the band cursor toolbar button.
Feedback Area – Displays amplitude and time of left and right fundamental lines and
the delta (in time).
Information Area – Specific information displays on the Time Band tab. Tab
information includes current position, amplitude, time, delta (frequency and time),
positive and negative peak, RMS and time domain statistics for the time data shown
within the band, including:
Standard Deviation – A basic measure of the spread of values within a set
around their average value.
Skew – A measure of the asymmetry of the time domain values when plotted
around their average. Whereas the Standard Deviation suggests that values
are homogeneously distributed left and right of their average, the Skew
indicates whether this assumption is true.
Kurtosis – A measure of the general extent of peaks. A high value means that
more of the variance is due to infrequent, extreme deviations as opposed to
frequent, modest deviations.
Crest Factor – A calculation of the highest absolute Peak / RMS value of the
signal. The Crest Factor is a measure of the general extent of peaks as
compared to a pure sinusoid. The crest factor for pure sinusoid is 1.41 (square
root of 2).
Right-Click Context Menu - Right-click on the band cursor overlay anchor to reveal its
context menu. Available options include:
Next Trace - Toggles between traces when the plot is displaying more than
one trace.
Remove – Removes overlay from the plot.
Keyboard Support – Press Enter to toggle to next POINT. Press Delete to remove.
The band cursor is made up of three parts. The fundamental left line, fundamental
right line, and the entire band. The active line is indicated by the cursor line focus icon.
This icon displays as a triangle on the active part of the cursor. Use left and right arrow
keys to move the entire band or an individual line (depending on which is active) left or
right. The Page Up and Page Down keys toggle between the left line, right line, and
entire band.

The individual fundamental lines and the entire band move in
small increments (one line at a time). Use the Shift and the left
or right arrow key to move part or all of the band in larger
increments (15 lines at a time).
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
5 - 67
Displaying Graphic Plots
Overlay Types
Available Preferences
Color – Cursor is the color of the next available cursor (as configured in
Cursors / Color Preferences in the Preferences dialog. Cursor line focus icon
color appears as configured in Cursor Line Focus in Color Preferences in the
Preferences dialog.
Display Status – Display status (on or off) is configured in the Band Cursor –
Time / Plot Preferences in the Preferences dialog.

The default status is off.
Cursor Cross Hashing – Cross-hashing (on or off) is configured in the Cursor
Cross-Hashing – Time / Plot Preferences in the Preferences dialog.
Determines whether the band is shaded with a single diagonal line or a crosshash.

The Time – Band cursor’s fill pattern lines slope upward from left
to right to distinguish it from a harmonic cursor. A harmonic
cursor’s fill pattern lines slope downward from left to right. Cross
hashing can be useful to help further distinguish a time band
cursor from a harmonic band cursor.
Time / Peak Cursor
Use a peak cursor overlay to label all peaks above a set amplitude value.
To display a peak cursor overlay:
•
With a time plot displayed, select the View menu’s Plot / Plot Overlays / Peak
Cursor option, or use the peak cursor toolbar button.
Feedback Area – Displays the line's current amplitude, total number of peaks displayed,
and the peak number, amplitude, and time for as many displayed peaks as space allows.
Information Area – Specific information displays on the Peak tab. Tab information
includes POINT name, line amplitude, and each peak number's time and amplitude.
Right-Click Context Menu - Right-click on the peak cursor overlay anchor to reveal its
context menu. Available options include:
Next Trace - Toggles between traces when the plot is displaying more than
one trace.
Remove – Removes overlay from the plot.
Keyboard Support – Press Enter to toggle to next POINT. Press Delete to remove.
Use the up and down arrow keys to increase / decrease the amplitude range in small
increments (1% at a time). Use the Shift and up and down arrow keys to increase /
decrease the amplitude range in larger increments (10% at a time).
Available Preferences
Color – Cursor is the color of the next available cursor (as configured in
Cursors / Color Preferences in the Preferences dialog.
5 - 68
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Displaying Graphic Plots
Overlay Types
Display Status – Display status (on or off) is configured in the Peak Cursor –
Time / Plot Preferences in the Preferences dialog.

The default status is off.
Time / Linear Speed
Use a linear speed overlay to graphically display the value of the linear factor multiplied
by the running speed.
To display linear speed overlay:
•
With a time plot displayed, select the View menu’s Plot / Plot Overlays / All
Overlays option. The All Overlays dialog displays.
•
Select Linear Speed and click OK.
Feedback Area – Displays amplitude, frequency, orders, and linear speed.
Information Area - No tabs display for this overlay.
Right-Click Context Menu - Right-click on the linear speed overlay anchor to reveal its
context menu.
Available options include:
Next trace – Toggles between traces when the plot is displaying more than
one trace.
Remove – Removes overlay from plot.
Keyboard Support – Press Enter to toggle to next trace. Press Delete to remove.
Available Preferences
Display Status – Display status (on or off) is configured in the Time / Linear
Speed / Plot Preferences in the Preferences dialog.
The default status is off.
Time / CTA
Use a CTA cursor to create and view a time interval’s average waveform.
To display a CTA cursor overlay:
•
With a time plot displayed, select the View menu’s Plot / Plot Overlays / CTA
Cursor option, or use the CTA cursor toolbar button.
Feedback Area – Displays amplitude and time of fundamental left line and right line of
cursor. Displays interval in time and interval as a frequency.
Information Area – Specific information displays on the CTA Cursor tab. Tab
information includes POINT name, left and right fundamental lines' amplitude and time,
interval, frequency, and all visible harmonic labels.
Right-Click Context Menu - Right- click on the CTA cursor overlay anchor to reveal its
context menu. Available options include:
Next Trace - Toggles between traces when the plot is displaying more than
one trace.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
5 - 69
Displaying Graphic Plots
Overlay Types
Remove – Removes overlay from the plot.
Keyboard Support – Press Enter to toggle to next POINT. Press Delete to remove.
Use the plus (+) and minus (-) keys to select the next or previous frequency.
The cursor is made up of three parts. The fundamental left line, fundamental right line,
and the entire cursor. The active line is indicated by the cursor line focus icon. This
icon displays as a triangle on the active part of the cursor. Use the left and right arrow
keys to move the entire cursor or either individual line (depending on which is active)
left or right. The Page Up and Page Down keys toggle between selections of left line,
right line, and entire cursor.

The individual fundamental lines and the entire cursor move in
small increments (one line at a time). Use the Shift and left and
right arrow keys to move all or part of the cursor in larger
increments (15 lines at a time).
Available Preferences
Color – Cursor is the color of the next available cursor (as configured in
Cursors / Color Preferences in the Preferences dialog.
Display Status – Display status (on or off) is configured in the Harmonic
Cursor – Time / Plot Preferences in the Preferences dialog.
5 - 70

The default status is off.

The Time – CTA cursor displays differently from the Time –
Harmonic cursor. Instead of a cross hatch between two markers,
the CTA cursor displays the averaged waveform (per CTA
calculation), allowing you to isoloate the various sources
contributing to the signal.

The default number of harmonics is 50.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Displaying Graphic Plots
Live Data Displays
Live Data Displays
@ptitude Analyst’s Live Data Displays allow you to view a POINT's live data in various
graphical formats. When Live Data mode is enabled, the active display updates as new
data is collected by its on-line device.

Live data display is only available when a single POINT is selected.
When live data mode is enabled, displayed measurements automatically update on a
continuous basis. Previous spectra and time waveform plots are overwritten by
updated spectra / time waveforms.
To display live data:
•
Select a POINT from the hierarchy list.
•
Display the desired plot type using the View menu's Plot options, or the plot type
toolbar buttons. The selected plot displays in its plot window.
•
Click the Live Data toolbar button to initiate live data mode, or select the View
menu’s Plot / Live Data option.
The plot window initially displays * WAITING LIVE * in the upper corners and displays
"Waiting for live data for the plot" in the center.
Once live data is available, the plot window displays
* LIVE * in its upper corners and the live data appears in the selected graphical format.
Figure 5 - 43.
A Spectrum Plot Window Displaying Live Data.
Spectrum and Time Waveform Plots
As the POINT's DAD collects new data, the new data overwrites the existing data on the
spectrum and time plots.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
5 - 71
Displaying Graphic Plots
Live Data Displays
Trend Plot
The trend plot in live data mode “grows” from the bottom of the overall trend plot with
each new DAD data collection. When the overall Trend plot fills the overall trend plot, a
First In First Out process begins, in which the oldest data moves off the display to make
room for the most recent data.
Spectrum Waterfall Plot
Instead of overwriting previous FFT spectra with each update, live data waterfall plots'
previous spectra scroll up the spectrum display window with each update, creating a
waterfall spectra display.
Polar Vector Plots
An on-line polar vector display can also go “live”. However, unlike non-live polar vector
displays, with live displays, only the POINT's current value is displayed and updated
every few seconds, no historical data appears.
Alarm criteria remains assigned to the displayed POINT. The line segment (vector) that
includes the hollow circle as its endpoint shows the selected harmonic's current
magnitude and phase. This vector’s magnitude and direction (phase) update every few
seconds.
Saving Live Data
Live data may be saved either to the POINT or to a live data set in your hierarchy.
To save live data:
•
Right-click in the live data plot window to display the plot’s context menu.
•
Select Save Live Data. The Save Live Data dialog displays.
The Save Live Data dialog allows you to specify which measurements to save and
where you'd like to save their live data.
Measurements
•
Click to select Save last measurement or Save all measurements.
Location
5 - 72
•
Save data to POINT – Select this option to save the live data to the POINT. Live
data is saved to the POINT itself and may be viewed when the POINT is selected in
the hierarchy.
•
Save data to live data location – Select this option to save the live data to a LIVE
DATA SET in the hierarchy. The first time this option is selected, a new SET named
LIVE DATA is created in the hierarchy. When this option is selected, the live data,
along with the machine name, date / time stamp, and a copy of the POINT are
stored in the LIVE DATA SET. The live data is not saved directly to the original
source POINT.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Displaying Graphic Plots
Live Bar Display
Live Bar Display
@ptitude Analyst’s Live Bar Display allows you to display live overall values in bar graph
format for DMx POINTs.
Live bar data is useful when checking or replacing a sensor. If a sensor is faulty, it
produces an out of range voltage value. By observing the live bar data, you can quickly
tell if a sensor is functioning properly.
To display live bars:
•
Select the Hierarchy, ROUTE, or Workspace containing POINTs that have been
downloaded to the online device.
•
Click the Live Bars toolbar button, or select the View menu’s Plot / Live Bars
option.
A Live Bars window displays with two panels. The left panel displays the current
Hierarchy, ROUTE, or Workspace, containing only POINTs that have been downloaded
to the online device(s).
•
Click a POINT’s checkbox to display its live bar data in the window’s right panel.
Figure 5 - 44.
The Live Bars Display.
Each selected POINT’s overall data displays in bar graph format. The Customize /
Preferences dialog’s Plot tab allows you to select the scaling for the graph using the
Live Bar Axis value. Available options include:
POINT Full Scale (default value)
Alarm Limit – Alert
Alarm Limit – Danger
Autoscale
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
5 - 73
Displaying Graphic Plots
Live Bar Display
For positive values, the graph is scaled from zero to the live bar axis value. For negative
values, the scaling varies, depending on the selected Live Bar Axis value:
If Autoscale is selected with a negative value, the scale will change to negative with the
zero setting on right-hand side.
If POINT Full Scale or an Alarm Limit is selected with a negative value, the scale
changes to bipolar with zero in the middle of the graph, and +/- the full scale value on
either side.

The graph remains bipolar, even if the value returns to positive.
The bar graphs display the POINTs’ overall alarm levels. By default, red icons
graphically indicate the POINT’s danger alarm value, and yellow indicates the alert
alarm value. Arrows within these icons indicate if the alert or danger area is to the right
or left. The arrow positions depend on the POINT’s overall alarm properties. If the
POINT’s overall alarm is a Level alarm, the live bar graph’s arrows point to the right
because the value is considered “clear” if is it to the left of the alert and danger alarm
values, as indicated by the yellow and red icons. If the POINT’s overall alarm is In
Window, the arrows point from the outside toward the inside. If the POINT’s alarm is
Out of Window, the live bar graph’s arrows point from the inside to the outside. The
actual bars on the graph also display according to alarm values. By default, the POINT’s
alarm value displays green when “clear”, yellow for “alert,” and red for “danger.”

The Preferences dialog’s Colors tab allows you to change colors
of items appearing in graphic display plots and in the colors of
alarm indicators (on hierarchy lists and in graphic displays).
Live Bar Messages
If no new data has been collected for a POINT for more than a specified number of
minutes, the displayed data is considered “aged data,” and the POINT’s name and
overall value display in light blue text within the POINT’s bar graph. By default, this
value is thirty minutes, and the text displays in light blue. You can customize the Data
Aged Time (Minutes) in the Preferences / Plot tab, and change the text color in the
Preferences / Colors tab.
An error message displays if no live data is available for the selected POINT(s).
An “(OV)” displays in a POINT’s bar graph if the device has an overloaded signal.
The word “(LATEST)” displays in the bar graph with the most recent data. In most
cases, data is collected in sequence, but if you have POINTs from multiple IMx / DMx
selected, data may be collected out of order.
5 - 74
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
6
Generating and Printing SKF @ptitude Analyst Reports
Overview

The File menu's Print option or the toolbar's Print button may be
used at any time to print the contents of the “active” @ptitude
Analyst window (including graphic display windows).

Microsoft Internet Explorer version 4.X or newer is required to
view reports.
@ptitude Analyst’s Reports feature provides options for controlling the generation and
printing of hard copy reports showing database and measurement information.
Exception - Produces a report of POINTs in violation of specified exception
criteria.
History - Produces a report of machine notes.
Last Measurement - Reports POINTs’ last measurement values.
Overdue - Produces a report of all POINTs that are overdue for measurement.
ROUTE Statistics - Produces a report of statistics for one or more ROUTEs.
Statistics include when due, last downloaded, total number of POINTs in the
ROUTE.
ROUTE History Report - Produces a report of ROUTE history for the selected
ROUTEs. ROUTE History reports include ROUTE collection time duration, and
start and stop times. The amount of reported ROUTE historical information is
determined using the ROUTE Properties / General tab.
SET Statistics - Produces a report of statistics for the selected data source.
The statistics include total number of POINTs, POINTs in alarm, POINTs
disabled, and POINTs overdue.
Transient – Produces a report of start-up or coast down data for the selected
transient events.
Upload Statistics – Produces a report of the statistics for information last
uploaded from the DAD.

Each of @ptitude Analyst’s report types may be customized.
Report setup is discussed later in this chapter.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
6-1
Generating and Printing SKF @ptitude Analyst Reports
Reports Window
Reports Window
•
Select the File menu’s Reports option. The Reports window displays.
The Reports window allows you to select, configure, manage, and generate reports.
Each report type is available for use and may also be used as a starting point to
customize reports to fit your particular application.

Reports may also be generated automatically using the Scheduler
feature. Refer to Chapter 3, Working With Your SKF @ptitude
Analyst Hierarchy for more information on scheduling automatic
reports.
Use the Reports window to work with existing reports and to create new report
templates. The top area provides options for new and current reports. The bottom
area provides options for preserved (archived) reports.
Figure 6 - 1.
The Reports Window.
Select report area - Displays all existing report definitions.
•
6-2
Click a report’s name to select it.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Generating and Printing SKF @ptitude Analyst Reports
Reports Window
Reports options include:
Generate – Generates a report to the computer display based on the selected report
definition.
View – Displays the latest generated version of the selected report.
Add – Defines a new report based on a pre-defined @ptitude Analyst template.
Copy – Defines a new report using the selected custom report as a template.
Edit – Launches the Report Editor window to edit the selected report.
Remove – Deletes the selected report definition. When you delete a report from the
window's top area, you are asked if you also want to delete all preserved historical
reports for the selected report definition.

When a report is removed, its corresponding subdirectory and all
included files are also removed from your computer’s hard drive.
If you wish to delete a report, but save previous copies, copy the
report’s files from its subdirectory to a new location on your hard
drive before removing the report.
History area – Displays all existing preserved reports for the selected report definition.

•
Refer to the Report Editor / General section later in this chapter
for more information on preserving historical reports.
Click a preserved report's name to select it.
View – Displays the preserved version of the selected report, identified by its date and
time.
Send – Launches the Recipient Selection dialog and allows you to send the report in
an email message to one or more selected contacts or groups of contacts. The report is
sent in HTML and PDF format to the selected email recipients.

Refer to the SKF @ptitude Analyst Introduction and Global
Features User Manual, Chapter 2, Getting Around in
@ptitude Analyst / Contact Information section for details on
how to set up contacts and groups.
Rename – Allows you to rename the selected preserved report. The Enter Name
dialog displays, prompting you to enter the new report name. Click OK to rename the
selected report.
Remove – Removes the selected preserved report.
Close – Closes the window.
To generate a @ptitude Analyst Report:
•
Open the Hierarchy window whose data you wish to report. If necessary, open or
select hierarchy items within the window to limit the report’s content.
•
Select the File menu’s Reports option. The Reports window displays.
•
Select a report from the Reports window’s Select report area.
•
Click the Generate button. The report is rendered and when complete, displays in
a report window for viewing or printing.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
6-3
Generating and Printing SKF @ptitude Analyst Reports
Reports Window

Report generation progress displays in the progress bar in the
screen’s lower right corner.

When setting up a report, there is an option to select the data
source at the time the report is generated. If this has been
selected, the Select Data Source dialog displays. Refer to the
Selecting the Data Source section, later in this chapter, for
details.

If your report is based on transient data and there is more than
one transient data set available, the Select Transient Data
Source dialog displays. Select the desired transient event from
the list.

The Plot Preferences Channel Number option determines how
you specify which channel(s) to include when viewing plots with
multi-channel data. This option also applies to plots in reports.
Be aware that if this preference is set to Ask and there are
multiple plots in your report, you will receive a channel prompt for
each plot, but the prompts do not indicate to which plots they
correspond. If you have a large number of plots in your reports,
consider selecting the All channels option for this preference to
avoid multiple prompts. If you do have this set to Ask, it is
recommended you make the same selection for all plots in the
report to avoid confusion.
•
Press your keyboard’s End key to go to the end of the report.
•
Press your keyboard’s Home key to go to the top of the report.
To print a generated report:
•
With the generated report on the computer’s display, use the Print toolbar button
or select the File menu’s Print option.
To view an existing report:
•
In the Reports window, select the desired report.
•
Click the View button. The report displays in a Report window and is available for
viewing and/or printing.
Use the Reports window to “add” a customized report type. Customized reports are
based on pre-defined report types, then modified to suit your particular application.
Once your new report type is defined, it is available for selection from the Reports
window, and may be generated as needed.
To add a new report:
•
Click the Report window’s Add button. The Select Report Template dialog
displays.
The Select Report Template dialog displays all pre-defined @ptitude Analyst report
templates. These templates may be used to generate reports without further
modification, or as a starting point for creating custom reports.
•
6-4
Select the template to use as a basis for your new report.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Generating and Printing SKF @ptitude Analyst Reports
Reports Window

•
If you wish to use the selected report “as is,” (no modifications are
required) assign the report a unique name, verify the path
settings, and click the OK button to accept all default settings.
Click OK. The Report Editor window displays.
Report Editor
The Report Editor window contains three tabs:
General – Defines the new report’s identity and processing parameters.
Definition – Defines the new report’s criteria, criteria settings, and content.
Assign – Allows you to configure default report configurations for both public and
hierarchy-specific reports.
Report Editor / General
Report Editor / General tab fields include:
Name – Using standard file naming conventions, assign the new report a unique name.
Do not use the pound sign (#) in your report name as it can cause errors when printing.
The assigned name identifies the most recently generated report and is used to name
the disk directory (folder) where the report and all its supporting files are stored. If you
maintain historical reports, a separate directory is created beneath the report's directory
identified by the historical report's name.
The assigned name identifies the report and is used to name the disk directory where
the report and all its supporting files are stored.
If you change a report’s name, all data for the previously generated report remains in
the subdirectory with the original report’s name. The original report subdirectory
cannot be deleted using @ptitude Analyst.
Title – Enter a descriptive title for the report. This text appears at the top of the
generated report.
Description – Enter descriptive text for the report. This text appears as the title at the
top of the generated report.
Header – Enter text to display in the printed report’s header area.
Footer – Enter text to display in the printed report’s footer area.
Preserve Reports – Click to enable report preservation. When enabled, newly
generated reports are archived, organized by report definition and date / time.
Report is Available for all users – Click to enable and define the report as a public
report, available to all @ptitude Analyst users. If you do not check this option, the
report is defined as a private report, available only to the report creator.
Report is Available for all hierarchies – Click to enable and make the report available
for use with all @ptitude Analyst hierarchies. If you do not check this option, the report
will only be available to the current hierarchy.
Report can specify data sources from multiple hierarchies – Click to enable and
make the report available for use with all @ptitude Analyst hierarchies, as well, as
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
6-5
Generating and Printing SKF @ptitude Analyst Reports
Reports Window
enable the ability to select multiple data sources from multiple hierarchies. If you do not
check this option, the report will only be available using a single hierarchy source.
Report Editor / Definition
The Report Editor / Definition tab is divided into two main areas, the Select report
criteria area in the tab's left panel and the criteria setup panel on the right. Click an
item to expand and view any sub-items available for configuration.
Figure 6 - 2.
The Report Editor / Definition Tab.
Select report criteria – Select attributes to appear in the report.
Criteria setup (contents change depending upon item selected in left panel) –
Allows you to configure the selected report criteria to determine report content.
To select an element to include in the report:
6-6
•
Highlight the item and click the item’s checkbox to include it in your report. Once
selected, the item's input fields (if any) display in the tab’s right panel. Available
report elements are detailed in the Report Criteria section later in this chapter.
•
Click the item's + icon to expand the item in the hierarchy list and view its additional
configuration options.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Generating and Printing SKF @ptitude Analyst Reports
Reports Window
•
Click an additional configuration item to select it. When selected, the additional
item's set up fields display in the Criteria Setup area, allowing you to further
customize the report. Available setup fields are detailed in the Criteria Setup
Fields section later in this chapter.
Report Criteria
The following items display in the Select report criteria area as top-level items.
Alarms - Select individual alarm conditions and types to include in the report.
Transient – Select to include transient data and specify the phase order (1 –
4).
Last Measurement - Select to include all POINTs in the report with a last
measurement.
Route History – Specify the amount of historical ROUTE information to include
in the report.

The Include records by comparing options under Route History
are only applicable to the date range settings. They further filter
the range based on start time, end time, or both.
Overdue – Specify the amount of overdue POINTs to include in the report.
Priority – Includes any Machine with a set priority matching your selection(s).
Upload Statistics – Select to include a summary of the last data upload from
the DAD.
SET Statistics – Select to include a summary of the hierarchy item and all its
children.
ROUTE Statistics – Select to include a summary of ROUTE data collection
status for each ROUTE included in the report.
History – Select to include all machine notes and images for any machine in
the selected data source.
Measurement Statistics – Select to include a summary of statistical
information for a selected measurement type (selected by the Full Scale Units
setting) and alarm threshold (selected by the Threshold Level setting). This
setting includes the average amplitude for last measurement data of the
specified measurement type, and indicates all POINTs with an amplitude above
the specified alarm threshold in the report.
Criteria setup (right panel setup fields, dependent upon item select in left panel)
Columns – Use the Columns input area to specify which columns appear in report
tables, to specify column order, and select column sort criteria.
Available columns – Displays all available columns for the selected report
element.
Included columns – Displays all included columns for the selected report
element.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
6-7
Generating and Printing SKF @ptitude Analyst Reports
Reports Window
To include / exclude columns:
•
Click the column type to select it.
•
Use the Include / Exclude buttons to move the selected column to the
Included columns area to include in the report, or move the selected
column to the Available columns area to exclude it from the report.
To specify column order:
•
Click the column type in the Included columns area.
•
Use the Up and Down buttons to place the column into the desired
position.
To specify sort criteria:
•
Select a column type from the Sort on drop down list box.
•
Click the desired sort method button, Ascending or Descending.
•
Click the Set All button to use the current column settings for all matching
column types in other report element setup fields. For example, the same
column settings are available for various report elements. The Set All
feature allows you to configure this information once and then use the
same settings for all applicable report elements.
•
Click OK to save changes, or Cancel to undo settings.
Date Range – Use the date range fields to specify a date interval. This date interval is
used to retrieve only POINTs with a last measurement that falls within the indicated
date interval.
Only include enabled POINTs – Select (check) to have the applicable report
criterion retrieve data from enabled POINTs only. This checkbox can be
selected or not selected (checked or not checked) by default and may or may
not be editable depending on the selected report criterion.

For Alarms and Overdue/Non-compliant criteria – This checkbox
is selected (checked) by default and is read-only. Thus, these
criteria will always retrieve data from enabled POINTs only for
reporting.

For Last Measurement, Inspection, and Measurement
Statistics criteria – This checkbox is not selected (not checked) by
default and is editable. Thus, by default these criteria will retrieve
data from all POINTs for reporting, but you can select (check) this
checkbox to have them retrieve data from enabled POINTs only.
No date range restriction – Select to remove date range restrictions.
Absolute date – Enter “absolute” (calendar) dates for date range restriction.
Relative date – Enter number of days (from / to) for date range restriction.
•
6-8
Click the Set All button to use the current date range settings for all date
range settings in other report element setup fields. The Set All feature
allows you to configure this information once and then use the same
settings for all applicable report elements.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Generating and Printing SKF @ptitude Analyst Reports
Reports Window
General – Use the General fields to configure general report element information.
Include image – Click to enable and include any images associated with the
selected report element.
Grouped by machine – Click to enable and display included report items
grouped by machine.
Plots – Use the Plots fields to specify which plot types are to be included with the
report table for the selected report item.
Figure 6 - 3.
The Report Editor Screen.
Include plot information tables – Click to enable and include plot content
details and overlay information in table format on the report.
Plots area - Displays all available plots. Click a plot type to include it in the
report.

Selected plots are created only if there is associated data.
Overlays area – Displays overlays associated with the selected plot type (if
applicable).
•
Click the Set All button to use the current plot and overlay settings for all
matching plot and overlay types in other report element setup fields. For
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
6-9
Generating and Printing SKF @ptitude Analyst Reports
Reports Window
example, the same plot settings are available for various report elements.
The Set All feature allows you to configure this information once and then
use the same settings for all applicable report elements.
Measurement History – Use the Measurement History fields to specify which
measurements to include in the report.
Last fixed number of measurements – Select this option and type in or use
the arrow buttons to specify the fixed number of measurements to include in
the report.
Measurements in this date range – Select this option to include all
measurements occurring between your entered date interval in the report.
Type in a start date in the From field and an end date in the To field, or use
the arrow buttons to display a pop-up calendar to select start and end dates.
Measurements from the last fixed number of days – Select this option to
include measurements occurring within a specific number of days in the report.
Type in or use the arrow buttons to specify the fixed number of days.
All measurements – Select this option to include all measurements in the
report.
Notes – Use the Notes fields to specify which notes to include in the report.
Note Categories – Click to enable and include one or more note categories for
the selected report item in the report. Note categories include ACK Alarm
Note, Coded Note, General Note, Non-Collection, Oil Analysis Note, and
Operating Time Reset.
Settings area – Use the settings area to define which notes to include in the
report.
Last fixed number of notes – Select this option and type in or use
the arrow buttons to specify the fixed number of notes to include in
the report.
Notes in this date range – Select this option to include all notes
occurring between your entered date interval in the report. Type in a
start date in the From field and an end date in the To field, or use the
arrow buttons to display a pop-up calendar to select start and end
dates.
Notes from the last fixed number of days – Select this option to
include notes occurring within a specific number of days in the report.
Type in or use the arrow buttons to specify the fixed number of days.
All notes – Select this option to include all notes in the report.
Routes – Use the ROUTEs fields to specify which ROUTEs to include in the report.
Routes – All available ROUTEs display in the ROUTEs area. Click to select one
or more ROUTE.
•
6 - 10
Click Check All to select all available ROUTEs. Click Clear All to clear your
selections.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Generating and Printing SKF @ptitude Analyst Reports
Reports Window
•
Click the Set All button to use the current ROUTE selections in other
report element setup fields. The Set All feature allows you to configure
this information once and then use the same settings for all applicable
report elements.
Overdue Forecast – Use the Overdue Forecast option to forecast which POINTs will be
overdue for collection if data for the POINTs does not come in by a specified date.
Absolute date in the future – Select this option to forecast based on a fixed
date. This is useful if the report will be run over the course of several days
leading up to a fixed deadline. Select the date from the pop-up calendar.
Number of days from today – Select this option to forecast based on a
specified number of days from the date the report is run. Enter a number in
the text field or use the up and down arrows to indicate the number of days
from now for use with the forecast.
Report Editor / Assign
Use the Report Editor window's Assign tab to configure default report settings, and to
override defaults when the report is generated from the current Hierarchy.
The Assign tab varies, depending on whether Report is available for all hierarchies or
Report can specify data sources from multiple hierarchies is enabled on this
window’s General tab.
Figure 6 - 4.
The Report Editor / Assign Tab with Report is available for all hierarchies Disabled.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
6 - 11
Generating and Printing SKF @ptitude Analyst Reports
Reports Window
Figure 6 - 5.
The Report Editor / Assign Tab with Report is available for all hierarchies Enabled.
6 - 12
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Generating and Printing SKF @ptitude Analyst Reports
Reports Window
Figure 6 - 6.
The Report Editor / Assign Tab with Report can specify data sources from multiple hierarchies
Enabled.
The tab provides fields to configure default report settings. Options include:
Report Location – Specify the path for the disk directory for report storage. The report
is stored in a subdirectory (using the report’s name) beneath this indicated directory.
For example, specify E:\SKF @ptitude Analyst\Reports to place all reports in their
unique directories branching from a “reports” directory.
•
Click the Browse button to specify a new path.

Reports are stored in HTML format and are available for copying,
moving, and sharing over intranet, world wide web, etc.
Data Source – Select the source of the data to include in the report. Use the plus and
minus icons to expand the hierarchy as needed to display sub-items. If Report can
specify data sources from multiple hierarchies is disabled, options include:
Selected Node – Select to include data from the node that is selected in the
hierarchy at the time the report is generated, including all sub items. For
example, if a SET is selected in the hierarchy when the report is generated, all
POINTs from all Machines under that SET are included.

Use this option when including Transient data in your report.
Current Hierarchy – Select to include all data from the hierarchy that is open
when the report is generated.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
6 - 13
Generating and Printing SKF @ptitude Analyst Reports
Reports Window
Primary Hierarchy - Select to us the currently selected primary hierarchy as
the report's data source.
Last Uploaded – Select to include the most recently uploaded data.
ROUTEs / Workspace – These options appear in the upper section’s Data
source list if the report is only available for this hierarchy (i.e., Report is
available for all hierarchies is disabled). Select a previously defined ROUTE
or Workspace to use with the report.

ROUTE based reports, such as ROUTE Statistics, ROUTE History,
Compliance, and Collection Status, use data from the ROUTEs
specified on the Definition tab, rather than the source data
specified on the Assign tab.
If Report can specify data sources from multiple hierarchies is enabled, options
include:
Selected Node – Select to include data from the node that is selected in the
hierarchy at the time the report is generated, including all sub items.

Use this option when including Transient data in your report.
Select Data Source - Select multiple hierarchies, groups, and POINTs to
include in your report.
Define title, data source, and/or history name at time of generation – Enable to
receive an option to override the Data source selection at the time the report is run. If
this is enabled, you must manually specify this report information each time the report
is generated. Before report generation occurs, the Select Data Source dialog displays,
prompting you to enter report information and select the report’s data source. (See
Selecting the Data Source below for details.)
If the Report is available for all hierarchies check box is enabled on the Report
Editor’s General tab, the tab's bottom area allows you to configure reports specifically
for use with the current Hierarchy only. If you do not use the bottom area's
configuration options, the default configuration from the tab's top section is used.

6 - 14
You must edit the report in each hierarchy where you wish to
override the default options.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Generating and Printing SKF @ptitude Analyst Reports
Reports Window
The top line of this section displays the current hierarchy name and indicates whether
the default settings are used, or if custom overrides have been established in the fields
below.
Figure 6 - 7.
The Report Editor / Assign Tab’s Default / Custom Line.
hierarchy name
default / custom
The remaining fields function as previously described. These settings will be used to
generate the selected report type for the current Hierarchy only.
•
Click the Use Defaults button to clear your custom configuration and return to all
default settings.
Selecting the Data Source
If Define title, data source, and/or history name at time of generation is enabled on
the Report Editor’s Assign tab, the Select Data Source dialog appears when the
report is generated.
The Select Data Source dialog varies, depending on whether Report can specify data
sources from multiple hierarchies is enabled on the Report Editor’s General tab.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
6 - 15
Generating and Printing SKF @ptitude Analyst Reports
Reports Window
Figure 6 - 8.
The Select Data Source Dialog.
Figure 6 - 9.
The Select Data Source Dialog when Report can specify data sources from multiple hierarchies is
Enabled on the Report Editor’s General Tab.
6 - 16
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Generating and Printing SKF @ptitude Analyst Reports
Reports Window
This dialog lets you configure the report title, specify whether to preserve a copy of the
generated report, and specify the data source for this instance of the report.

The data source defaults to the Data source setting on the
Report Editor’s Assign tab.
•
In the Report title field, enter the report title.
•
Click the Preserve report checkbox to enable report preservation. When enabled,
newly generated reports are archived, organized (by default) by report definition
and date / time.
If Preserve report is enabled, you can also manually enter a History name to use
when organizing your preserved reports, instead of the default date / time naming
method. The History name determines how the reports are organized, and how they
display in both the Report Editor / General’s History window, and in the separate
preserved reports directory created in the disk directory (folder) designated as the
report storage location. The History name field displays “[Date] [Time]” until you type
in the field. If you do not type within the History name field, the preserved report is
named and organized by its date / time.
To assign a manual history name:
•
In the History name field, enter text to identify and organize your preserved
reports, overriding the default date / time history name.
To select the report’s data source:
•
From the Select data source for report window, click to select the appropriate
data source from the displayed hierarchy list.

Use the plus and minus icons to expand the hierarchy as needed
to display sub-items.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
6 - 17
7
Multilog DMx Machine Monitoring Module
Overview
The Intrinsically Safe SKF Multilog DMx Machine Monitoring module is designed to
provide machine monitoring and protection in safe and hazardous areas. Data that is
collected by DMx modules deployed in the plant can be brought into @ptitude Analyst
for analysis and alarming purposes.
Most standard @ptitude Analyst features and functionality also apply to the DMx.
(Refer to the appropriate sections, earlier in this manual, for details.) This chapter
describes setup and functionality that is specific to the DMx.

Where possible, DMx information is included in the related
manual sections. For help locating specific information, refer to
the index.

DMx transient data setup and collection is documented in
Chapter 8, Transient Data Analysis. Because transient data
collection impacts standard DMx data collection, it is
recommended that you read both chapters.
Hardware Configuration
One important difference when using the SKF Multilog DMx Machine Monitoring system
as opposed to conventional Machine Protection systems is that an RS485 field bus,
rather than individual signal wires, is used to transmit data. From the module, a single
or dual field bus cable is used to transfer data to the safe area. Up to 31 DMx modules
can be connected together to share a single field bus cable.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
7-1
Multilog DMx Machine Monitoring Module
Hardware Configuration
Figure 7 - 1.
Sample DMx System Configuration.
The SKF Multilog DMx module has two independent RS485 communication channels.
Each of the channels can be used for the connection to @ptitude Analyst or to the DMx
Manager software.
@ptitude Analyst Monitor is used to acquire data from the DMx devices and bring that
data into @ptitude Analyst. Using the field bus cable, multiple DMx modules can share
a connection to the computer running Monitor.
•
•
If the connection to the computer running Monitor is via a serial port using an
RS485 -PC interface module (which converts the RS485 signal to USB), and both
@ptitude Analyst Monitor and DMx Manager are installed on the same computer,
the following two configuration options are available:
1.
If both RS485 communication channels are available for monitoring, one link
can be used for configuration using DMx Manager and the other for monitoring
using @ptitude Analyst Monitor.
2.
If only one link is available, then only one application may be active and occupy
the available communication port at a time. In this case, you must ensure DMx
Manager is shut down when using @ptitude Analyst Monitor, and vice versa.
If the connection is via Ethernet access to a gateway, the two applications may
reside on different systems.

7-2
Refer to your SKF Multilog DMx hardware manual for more
information on installing your hardware.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Multilog DMx Machine Monitoring Module
Configuring DMx Settings
Configuring DMx Settings
DMx settings allow you to configure communication between @ptitude Analyst Monitor
and the DMx devices.
To access DMx Settings:
•
Select DMx Settings from the Transfer menu’s DMx sub-menu.
The DMx Settings dialog displays.
•
Select the Hosts tab to specify the Monitor hosts used to acquire data from DMx
devices. The Host settings display.
DMx Settings Host Tab
It is possible to have @ptitude Analyst Monitor running on more than one computer.
This tab allows users to ensure that all Monitor host installation(s) being used for
monitoring DMx devices are included and appropriately configured.
Options on this tab include:
Hosts – This list automatically populates with the machine names of any Monitor
installations that have communicated with the @ptitude Analyst database. Select the
host whose settings you would like to configure from the list.
Host name – This field displays the machine name for the selected host. Typically, you
do not need to modify this setting. If the machine name for a computer running
@ptitude Analyst Monitor has changed, enter the new name in this field.
Live data mode – You are able to view a live trace of data collected from DMx devices
in @ptitude Analyst. In addition to scheduled data collection, Monitor keeps a buffer of
overall measurements that is used in the event of an alarm. (Refer to Buffer update
rate, below, for details.) Typically, Monitor buffers data as it comes in, however, this
process can result in a speed impact on the live data display. This field allows you to
specify whether you would like to continue buffering overall measurements from the
DMx modules, or temporarily suspend the buffer while viewing live data. Options are:
Dedicated – This option instructs the Monitor program to suspend buffer data
collection and dedicate resources to updating the live trace.
Interleaved – This option instructs the Monitor program to continue buffering
data while in the live display.
Live Data Resolution – Specify the percentage of the total waveform data captured by
DMx modules that should be transferred to @ptitude Analyst for live data display. A
lower percentage improves the update rate, but offers a lower resolution on the display.
Buffer update rate – When setting up your @ptitude Analyst hierarchy, you are able to
set a data collection schedule for your DMx POINTs. In addition to this scheduled data
collection, Monitor keeps a buffer of overall readings that may be written to the
database as “unscheduled” data in the event of an alarm condition. In the event of an
alarm, the full buffer is written to the @ptitude Analyst hierarchy for the POINT in
alarm, and a single overall value from the buffer is stored for all additional POINTs on
the same DMx device. Specify how often Monitor should buffer data collected from the
DMx modules. Enter an update rate between 2 and 999 seconds.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
7-3
Multilog DMx Machine Monitoring Module
Configuring DMx Settings
Buffer samples – Specify how many measurements should be buffered from each DMx
device. Once the buffer sample limit is met, new data overwrites older data in the
buffer.
Trend mode – The DMx supports two types of measurements: Trend and Transient
(i.e., variable speed) data. (Refer to Chapter 8, Transient Data Analysis for more
information on Transient data POINTs.) This option defines which measurement type(s)
are available for live data display and included in the buffer. Options are:
Interleaved – Both transient and trend data are used.
Transient – Only transient data is used. You will not be able to include normal
trend POINTs (i.e., DMx Processed measurements) in live data display. In the
event of an alarm condition, overall measurements will only be available for
transient POINTs.
Normal – Only trend data is used. You will not be able to include transient
POINTs in live data display. In the event of an alarm condition, overall
measurements will not be available for transient POINTs.

The Trend Mode setting only impacts live data display and the
buffer used for unscheduled data in the event of an alarm. The
non-selected option will continue to be collected according to the
normal data acquisition schedule.

If the Trend Mode is set to Interleaved, a buffer update rate of 2
seconds might be too short to collect both Transient and Trend
data, depending on the number of DMx modules per connection.
In this case, consider increasing the update interval.
Normal data resolution – This setting is similar to Live Data Resolution, but it defines
the waveform/FFT resolution used for scheduled data acquisition.

To speed data collection, if time waveform data is available, FFT is
post-processed from the waveform rather than collected directly
from the DMx. This setting specifies the resolution of the
waveform, and by extension, the FFT. If FFT Data Collection
mode is enabled on the DMx and @ptitude Analyst’s POINT
Properties Save Data field is set to FFT only, FFT is collected
directly from the DMx. In this case, 1000 lines of resolution is
used, regardless of this setting.
Synchronize date/time – Enable to automatically set the time on the DMx devices to
the time on the @ptitude Analyst Monitor computer.
Interval – If Synchronize date/time is enabled, this setting controls how often the time
from the Monitor computer is synchronized to the DMx devices.
Add – If the @ptitude Analyst Monitor host you wish to configure is not in the Hosts list,
click this button to add a new host and enter the machine name where Monitor is
installed in the Host name field.
Save – When changes are made to any of the Properties fields, the Add button toggles
to a Save button. Click to save your changes.
Remove –Click to remove the Monitor host currently selected in the Hosts list.
7-4
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Multilog DMx Machine Monitoring Module
Configuring DMx Settings

If the selected host has been assigned to a connection on the
Connections tab, you must clear the assignment (as well as any
related devices and POINTs) before deleting the host.
Undo – When changes are made to any of the Properties fields, the Remove button
toggles to an Undo button. Click to cancel your changes.
•
When you have set up your host, click the Connections tab. The Connections
settings display.
DMx Settings Connections Tab
A connection group is a group of DMx devices that are connected together and share
the same field bus cable. This tab is used to define the communication protocols for
each connection group communicating with the Monitor hosts.

•
It is possible to have more than one connection group of DMx
devices communicating with the same Monitor host.
Click the Add button to add a new connection group and enter the appropriate
settings in the Properties section.
Options include:
Connections – This list displays all connection groups that have been added.
Connection name – Enter a unique name for the new connection group.
Host – This list displays all Monitor hosts that have been configured on the Hosts tab.
Select the host to use for this connection.
Communication type – Select the communication protocol used for this connection
group. Options include:
Serial port – Select this option if you are connecting through a serial cable.

This can be direct serial ports or emulated serial ports (i.e., USBSerial converters).
TCP/IP – Select this option if you are connecting through a network cable.

TCP/IP operation with the DMx Protection System is only possible
when using TCP/IP to RS485 terminal servers to establish the
required physical serial connection between network and DMx
connection.
Config – Click to access configuration settings for either the serial port or TCP/IP
protocol, depending on your Communication type selection. Refer to the appropriate
Configuration section below for details.
Save – When changes are made to any of the Properties fields, the Add button toggles
to a Save button. Click to save your changes.
Remove – Click to remove the connection group currently selected in the Connections
list.

If the selected connection group has been assigned to a device on
the Devices tab, you must clear the assignment (as well as any
related POINTs) before deleting the connection group.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
7-5
Multilog DMx Machine Monitoring Module
Configuring DMx Settings
Undo – When changes are made to any of the Properties fields, the Remove button
toggles to an Undo button. Click this button to cancel your changes.
DMx Settings - Serial Port Configuration
If the Communication type on the DMx Settings dialog’s Connections tab is set to
Serial port, click the Config button to display the Configure Serial Port dialog.
This dialog lets you specify settings for serial communication from DMx modules to the
@ptitude Analyst Monitor installation.
Options include:
RS485 settings – These settings should reflect how the converter between the serial
port of the host computer and the DMx modules has been configured to handle
communication.
Tx/Rx switching (Auto / RTS) – This setting is used to control how the RS485
connection switches between listen mode and send mode. If you are using a
latest generation USB to RS485 converter, set this Auto. If you are using an
old style converter, you may need to set this to RTS.
Tx message echo (Off / On) – Echo is used as a communication check to verify
that data from the converter is received. With the two-wire, bidirectional
communication system recommended by SKF, echo is not necessary. If you are
using a latest generation USB to RS485 converter, set this to Off. For older
models, Echo may need to be set On.
Serial Port settings
COM port – Enter the COM port on the host machine to which the serial cable
is attached.
Baud rate – Enter the baud rate for the DMx modules, as configured in the
DMx Manager’s Serial Communications settings.

The default baud rate for DMx modules is 38.4 K.
The Stop bits, Data bits, and Flow control settings are fixed within the DMx
modules and provided for reference purposes only.
•
Click OK to return to the DMx Settings dialog.
DMx Settings TCP/IP Configuration
If the Communication type on the DMx Settings dialog’s Connections tab is set to
TCP/IP, click the Config button to display the Configure TCP/IP dialog.
This dialog lets you specify the TCP/IP parameters of the Ethernet to serial converter
used to connect the DMx system to the Ethernet connection.
Options include:
IP Address – Enter the IP address of the Ethernet to serial converter.
Port no. – Enter the port number used by the converter.
•
7-6
Click OK to return to the DMx Settings dialog.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Multilog DMx Machine Monitoring Module
Configuring DMx Settings
DMx Settings Devices Tab
•
When you have set up your communications groups, click the Devices tab. The
Devices settings display.
This tab defines the individual DMx devices. Each definition provides information to
uniquely identify a device within a connection group. Typically, devices are added
automatically when new DMx POINTs are created from the New DMx POINTs option on
the Transfer menu’s DMx sub menu. (See the Creating DMx POINTs section below for
details.) In this case, this screen is informational and no configuration is required.

You must select the New DMx POINTs dialog’s Create from
Monitor Host option to automatically create a device.
In the event a DMx module is added after initial POINT setup, it can be manually
configured here.
•
Click the Add button to add a new device and enter the appropriate settings in the
Properties section.
Options include:
Devices – Lists any devices that have already been configured.
Device name – Enter a unique name to help identify this device.
Connection – This list contains the connection groups that were created on the
Connections tab. Select the appropriate group from the list. The communication
settings for the selected connection group are used for this device.
DAD # – This corresponds to the module address that has been configured on the DMx.
Within each connection, all devices must have a unique address. If you are adding a
new device, obtain the Module Address from DMx Manager software and enter it here.
Add – Click this button to add a new device.
Save – When changes are made to any of the Properties fields, the Add button toggles
to a Save button. Click this button to save your changes.
Remove – Click this button to remove the device.

If any POINTs have been added for this device, they must be
deleted before you can remove the device.
Undo – When changes are made to any of the Properties fields, the Remove button
toggles to an Undo button. Click this button to cancel your changes.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
7-7
Multilog DMx Machine Monitoring Module
Creating DMx POINTs
Creating DMx POINTs
Once connections settings have been configured, @ptitude Analyst POINTs can be
created based on the configuration of the DMx devices. Within DMx Manager, you are
able to set up measurements under Process Channels in the hierarchy and on the
Transient Data tab in Module Properties. (Refer to your DMx Manager documentation
for more information.) A POINT is created in the @ptitude Analyst hierarchy for each of
these measurements that has been configured.

Only Processed Channel and Transient Data measurements are
included. Any other measurement types are not imported into
@ptitude Analyst.
To create DMx POINTs:
•
Select New DMx POINTs from the Transfer menu’s DMx sub-menu.
The New DMx POINTs wizard displays.
Figure 7 - 2.
The New DMx POINTs Wizard.
This dialog offers two options for creating @ptitude Analyst POINTs:
Create from host – This option is used for first time setup of devices on a Monitor host.
Configured connections on the specified Monitor host are scanned for connected
devices. A machine is created in the hierarchy for each device, along with the applicable
measurement POINTs.
7-8
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Multilog DMx Machine Monitoring Module
Creating DMx POINTs
Host name – This list displays all of the hosts configured on the Hosts tab of
the DMx Settings dialog. Select the Monitor host that should be scanned.
Create from device – This option is used to add additional devices to an existing DMx
hierarchy. This is useful if a DMx device has been added to an existing connection.
Rather than re-creating POINTs for all devices associated with a Monitor host, it enables
you to append a machine and the related POINTs to the existing configuration.
Device name – This list displays all of the devices configured on the Devices
tab of the DMx Settings dialog.
Subsequent New DMx POINTs wizard screens vary, depending on which option is
selected. Refer to the appropriate section, below.
Creating New DMx POINTs from a Monitor Host
To create New DMx POINTs from a host:
•
Select the Create from host option button and select the appropriate Monitor host
from the Host name list.
•
Click Next to access the next screen, where you can specify the DMx module
address range to scan.

Monitor must be running to proceed.
This screen lets you limit the DMx device addresses that are scanned. This can be used
to speed up the setup by instructing the system to only scan addresses that are in use.
POINTs are only created for devices that fall within the specified range of addresses.
Scan from address – If desired, enter the starting and ending addresses of the DMx
modules that should be scanned. Modules with addresses falling outside of this range
are ignored.

Refer to the DMx Manager user manual for more information on
module addresses on the DMx.
•
Click Next to proceed to a communication status screen.
•
Click Next to begin adding DMx POINTs.
A SET level item is added to the Primary hierarchy with the name of the selected
Monitor host. Beneath the SET, a machine is added for each DMx device, with related
POINTs branching from the machine. The first measurement value for each POINT is
collected and stored to the database.
The status window updates to list the names of the hierarchy items that are created,
and the total number of POINTs added.
•
When the POINT creation is complete, the Next button toggles with a Finish
button. Click Finish to exit this wizard.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
7-9
Multilog DMx Machine Monitoring Module
Creating DMx POINTs
Creating New DMx POINTs from a DMx Device
To create New DMx POINTs from a DMx device:
•
Select New DMx POINTs from the Transfer menu’s DMx sub-menu to access the
New DMx POINTs Wizard.
•
Select the Create from device option button and select the appropriate DMx device
from the Device name list.
•
Click Next to access the next screen, where you can specify the location in the
hierarchy to add the new DMx machine and related POINTs.

Monitor must be running and the hierarchy selected in Monitor
must match the Primary hierarchy in @ptitude Analyst to
proceed.
Figure 7 - 3.
The New DMx POINTs Wizard’s Select Element Screen.
The Select element hierarchy displays all SET level hierarchy items in the currently
selected Primary hierarchy. The new DMx machine can be placed in the root of the
hierarchy, or beneath an existing SET.

7 - 10
If DMx POINTs have already been created from the Monitor host,
it is recommended that you add the additional device under the
host SET.
•
Select the desired hierarchy item and click Next to proceed to a communication
status screen.
•
Click Next to begin adding DMx POINTs. A new machine and related POINTs are
created under the specified hierarchy location. The first measurement value for
each POINT is collected and stored to the database. The status window updates to
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Multilog DMx Machine Monitoring Module
Viewing DMx Hierarchy Items
list the names of the hierarchy items that are created, and the total number of
POINTs added.
•
When the POINT creation is complete, the Next button toggles with a Finish
button. Click Finish to exit this wizard.
Viewing DMx Hierarchy Items
DMx POINTs appear in the @ptitude Analyst hierarchy.
Figure 7 - 4.
@ptitude Analyst Hierarchy with DMx POINTs.
Monitor host
machine for each DMx device
DMx POINTs
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
7 - 11
Multilog DMx Machine Monitoring Module
Viewing DMx Hierarchy Items
In the hierarchy, the Monitor host appears as the SET. Beneath the set, a machine
appears for each DMx device. Branching from the machines are the measurement
POINTs that were created based on the device settings. The POINT types that may be
created from the DMx include:
•
Single channel measurements. The POINT name includes the channel name and
the type of measurement (e.g., Channel 1.PktoPk).
•
Dual channel Orbit measurements. DMx device setup allows for pairing channels 1
and 2 or channels 3 and 4. This POINT type is created from two single
measurements on the DMx if both channels in a pair have the transducer type set
to Displacement, there is a probe mounting angle difference between 85 and 95
degrees, and they share the same measurement type. An Orbit POINT is also
created if DMx Manager’s TSI Application field for both channels in a pair is set to
Smax. Orbit POINT names include the channel numbers of the channel paring and
the type of measurement (e.g., Ch1.2.PktoPk).
•
Order measurements. This POINT type groups all available order measurements
(magnitude and/or phase) defined for a single channel. The POINT names include
the channel name and Orders (e.g., Channel 1.Orders).

•
Transient measurement POINTs. This measurement type is configured specifically
for use with @ptitude Analyst’s transient data analysis feature. (Refer to Chapter 8
for details.) The POINT names display the channel name, followed by the letter T
(to signify transient data), and the type of measurement (e.g., Channel1T.RPM).

7 - 12
Order measurements are only created if no dual channel Orbit
measurement POINT exists for the channel pair. If Orbit POINTs
are present for the processed channels, the order measurements
will be integrated into the Orbit POINTs.
Transient measurement POINTs may include any of the types
described above.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Multilog DMx Machine Monitoring Module
Viewing DMx Hierarchy Items
DMx Machine Properties
Group Properties for machines created from a DMx device provide the ability to check
the device’s alarm status and setup parameters from within @ptitude Analyst.

For a full discussion of Group Properties, refer to this manual’s
Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy chapter.
To Check DMx Device Status:
•
From the @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy, right click on a DMx machine and select
Properties. The Group Properties screen displays.
•
Select the DMx Status tab. The DMx Status tab displays.
Figure 7 - 5.
The Group Properties Screen’s DMx Status Tab.
•
Click Get Status to collect status for the DMx device. The tab updates with
information from the device.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
7 - 13
Multilog DMx Machine Monitoring Module
Viewing DMx Hierarchy Items
Figure 7 - 6.
The Group Properties Screen’s DMx Status Results.
Alarm status – The DMx offers up to five alarm configuration containers that are used
to create alarms. The alarm status displays green for each container that is not in
alarm, and red for containers that are in alarm.
Channel – Select which channel’s configuration to display in the Device configuration
area.
Device configuration – This box displays detailed information on the configuration of
the selected channel.
DMx POINT Properties
Properties for POINTs created from DMx devices provide information about the POINT
configuration on the DMx and allow configuration of some settings for use with
@ptitude Analyst.
7 - 14

Changes to POINT Properties are internal to @ptitude Analyst.
They are not transferred to the DMx device.

This section only discusses POINT properties that specifically
relate to the DMx. It does not cover properties that operate the
same for DMx POINTs as other POINT types. For a full discussion
of POINT Properties, refer to this manual’s Working With Your
SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy chapter.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Multilog DMx Machine Monitoring Module
Viewing DMx Hierarchy Items
To Access POINT Properties:
•
From the @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy, right click on a DMx POINT and select
Properties. The POINT Properties screen displays.
Figure 7 - 7.
The POINT Properties Screen’s General Tab.
The Application, Sensor type, and Units display information about this measurement
POINT.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
7 - 15
Multilog DMx Machine Monitoring Module
Viewing DMx Hierarchy Items
DMx POINT Properties – Setup Tab
•
Click on the Setup tab to view further information related to the POINT settings.
Figure 7 - 8.
The POINT Properties Screen’s Setup Tab.

The options on this tab vary, depending on the type of POINT
selected.

The DMx Hamming window function is not supported in @ptitude
Analyst. The Hanning window function is used instead.

The DMx Average detection type is not supported in @ptitude
Analyst. RMS detection is used instead.
This tab provides read-only information concerning the measurement settings. In
addition, some POINT types offer the following editable options:
Speed – Enter the nominal shaft speed in CPM or Hz.
Save data – Specify whether data is stored as FFT data, Time data, FFT and Time,
FFT and Phase, or FFT, Time and Phase. (Options vary depending on the Freq. type.)
7 - 16
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Multilog DMx Machine Monitoring Module
Viewing DMx Hierarchy Items

Changes made to POINT Properties do not impact the
configuration on the DMx device.
Low freq. cutoff - Enter a low frequency cutoff filter value for FFT enabled
measurement POINTs. Although values are allowed from 0.0 CPM to 1200 kCPM, the
range for normal measurements is from approximately 200 CPM to 600 CPM, or the
equivalent in Hz. The default value for DMx measurement POINTs is 120 CPM (or 2
Hz).
DMx POINT Properties – Schedule Tab
•
Click the Schedule tab to configure the collection schedule for this POINT. The
Schedule tab displays.
Figure 7 - 9.
The POINT Properties Screen’s Schedule Tab.
@ptitude Analyst Monitor reads and buffers overall measurement readings using the
schedule established on the Hosts tab of the DMx Settings dialog. These readings are
used for alarming, but the measurements are not stored in @ptitude Analyst unless an
alarm is detected.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
7 - 17
Multilog DMx Machine Monitoring Module
Viewing DMx Hierarchy Items
In addition, more complete measurements, including FFT spectrum, if applicable, are
taken and stored to the @ptitude Analyst database using the schedule specified in the
Take Data Every field on this tab.

The default schedule is every 24 hours.
Take data every – Enter a numerical value to indicate how often data should be
collected and select the appropriate units from list box options (Second(s), Minute(s),
Hour(s), Day(s)).
DMx POINT Properties – Band and Envelop Alarms
If the DMx POINT is a Displacement, Velocity, or Acceleration type POINT, the Band
Alarm and Envelope Alarm tabs are available. Band alarm configuration is imported
from the DMx module and can use up to four bands per POINT. They can be modified
in POINT Properties without affecting the configuration on the DMx. Refer to this
manual’s Working With Your SKF @ptitude Analyst Hierarchy chapter for more
information.
DMx POINT Properties - Orbit/SCL Tab
DMx device setup allows for pairing channels 1 and 2 or channels 3 and 4. If both
channels in a pair have the transducer type set to Displacement, there is a probe
mounting angle difference between 85 and 95 degrees, and they share the same
measurement type, a dual channel Orbit POINT is created and the Orbit/SCL tab is
available in POINT Properties.
7 - 18
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Multilog DMx Machine Monitoring Module
Viewing DMx Hierarchy Items
Figure 7 - 10.
The POINT Properties Screen’s Orbit/SCL Tab.
POINT Properties / Orbit/SCL fields may include:
Channel X and Y Settings

For DMx orbit POINTs that pair channels 1 and 2, channel X on
this screen corresponds to channel 1 and channel Y corresponds
to channel 2. For DMx orbit POINTs that pair channels 3 and 4,
channel X corresponds to channel 3 and channel Y corresponds to
channel 4.
X-Input mv/EU – Enter a number to define the sensitivity of the pickup to be
used in taking measurements for channel X.
X-Sensor angle - Specify the angle that defines the X sensors’ physical
location.
Y-Input mv/EU - Enter a number to define the sensitivity of the pickup to be
used in taking measurements for channel Y.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
7 - 19
Multilog DMx Machine Monitoring Module
Viewing DMx Hierarchy Items
Y-Sensor angle - Specify the angle that defines the Y sensors’ physical
location.

The orbit axis may use Scientific or Standard mode for the 0
degree reference point, depending on your Angular axis view
preference setting. This setting should be taken into account
when entering your sensor angles.
Figure 7 - 11.
Diagram Showing Scientific vs. Standard.
Orbit Settings
Top dead center – Specify the label to display at the top of the Orbit/SCL plot.
Display tacho angle – Enable to allow the tacho angle to display on the
Orbit/SCL plot.
Shaft rotation – Specify the shaft rotation direction as either Bidirectional,
Clockwise, or Counter clockwise for reference on the Orbit/SCL plot.
Tacho angle – Specify the angle that defines the tachometer’s physical location
(0 to 359 degrees).
Shaft Centerline Settings
X-Cold gap – Specify the X probe’s cold gap value. Together the X and Y probe
cold gap values define the distance between the displacement probe and the
shaft’s position in the bearing when the machine is at rest.
Y-Cold gap – Specify the Y probe’s cold gap value.
Cold gap position – Define the cold gap position in the bearing clearance circle
when viewing the shaft centerline plot. Choices are Bottom, Center, Left,
Right, and Top.
Bearing clearance – Specify the bearing’s clearance value (typically supplied
by the manufacturer). The expected clearance value is the diametric clearance
between the shaft and bearing.
7 - 20
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Multilog DMx Machine Monitoring Module
Viewing DMx Hierarchy Items
Waveform Tab
When analyzing orbit data, it is desirable to exclude runout of the shaft. This can be
accomplished by capturing a waveform measurement when the shaft is rotating very
slowly (1 – 400 RPM). This “slow roll” waveform highlights the normal variances in the
rotation of the shaft, which can then be factored out when viewing orbit plots.
The Waveform tab in POINT Properties lets you select the desired waveform
measurement.

The POINT Properties / Waveform tab is available only when the
current POINT has stored data. If there is no collected data, or
the POINT type is not Orbit / SCL, the Waveform tab does not
appear.
Figure 7 - 12.
The POINT Properties Screen’s Waveform Tab.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
7 - 21
Multilog DMx Machine Monitoring Module
Viewing DMx Hierarchy Items
To specify a POINT’s waveform measurement:
•
Select the POINT in the hierarchy list.
•
Right-click to display the POINT’s context menu and select the Properties option.
The POINT Properties screen displays.
•
Select the Waveform tab.
Current Waveform
The Current Waveform field lists measurement record timestamps for the POINT’s
stored measurements. Click to specify the measurement to use as the slow roll
waveform. The specified measurement’s time waveforms display graphically in the tab’s
lower area.

A <No waveform> option appears in the drop down list as the
default, and to clear the current waveform selection.
DMx POINT Properties - Vector Tab
Vector compensation allows you to specify known magnitude and phase angle values
that represent shaft runout. This may be used to correct data for Orbit, Bode, and
Nyquist plots.
The Vector tab in POINT Properties lets you enter the magnitude and angle that
should be used to compensate Orbit, Bode, and Nyquist plots for Channel X and
Channel Y at 1X, 2X, and 3X machine running speed.
7 - 22

In DMx Manager’s Measurement Channel Properties, you are able
to Allow free orders. If this is selected, rather than assuming the
first three orders of running speed for a measurement, you may
specify any order (from 1 to 31). In this case, the 1X, 2X, and 3X
settings in Vector Compensation correspond to the first three
defined orders in DMx Manager. The Allow free orders setting
also provides the option to specify a non-integer order (for
example, you may wish to track speed related vibration at 1.5X
running speed). Non-integer orders do not have an associated
phase measurement. If a non-integer order is entered in one of
the first three order fields in DMx Manager, vector compensation
in @ptitude Analyst will not be accurate. It is strongly
recommended that you use the forth order field in DMx Manager
for any non-integer order you wish to track.

The Vector tab only appears if the POINT type is Orbit / SCL or
Order (i.e., Freq. type set to Order Track).
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Multilog DMx Machine Monitoring Module
Viewing DMx Hierarchy Items
Figure 7 - 13.
The POINT Properties Screen’s Vector Tab.
Enable vector compensation – Mark this check box to enable the fields on this tab. If
this is unmarked, no vector compensation is performed for the POINT.

Vector compensation is applied to the measurement as it is stored
to the database. Marking this check box only affects new
measurements. Vector compensation will not be available for any
measurements that were taken with this check box unmarked.
Channel X and Y compensation – The vector compensation settings that should be
used in plots for Channel X and Channel Y data, respectively.
Magnitude (1X, 2X, and 3X Speed) – The magnitude of the vector that should be
factored out of plots at 1X, 2X, and 3X orders. (The magnitude corresponds to the peak
value, using the units defined for the POINT.)
Angle (1X, 2x, and 3X Speed) – The phase angle, in degrees, of the vector that should
be factored out of plots at 1X, 2X, and 3X the machine running speed.

The General Preferences Angular Axis View setting specifies
whether to use Scientific or Standard mode when determining the
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
7 - 23
Multilog DMx Machine Monitoring Module
Viewing DMx Hierarchy Items
0° reference point to define probe placement. This setting should
be taken into account when entering your compensation angles.

The magnitude and angle settings together define the vector.
DMx POINT Properties – Gating Setup
Gating is a method of controlling data collection for one POINT, called a dependent
POINT, based on the current state of a second POINT, called the control POINT.
If the control POINT's conditions are met, the dependent POINT's measurement is
performed. If the control POINT's conditions are not met, the dependent POINT's
measurement is not performed.

Reference Appendix C, Data Collection Gating for more
information about gating.
The Gating Setup tab in Point Properties lets you assign speed and process reference
POINTs to the selected POINT for gating purposes.
Figure 7 - 14.
The POINT Properties Screen’s Gating Setup Tab.
7 - 24
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Multilog DMx Machine Monitoring Module
Viewing DMx Hierarchy Items
Fields include:
Speed Collection – Enter speed collection information in the fields below:

If the selected POINT is a speed POINT, you can enable speed
gating on itself.
Speed reference - To assign a POINT for speed tag reference, click the
Select… button to browse POINTs.

For troubleshooting purposes, it is recommended that you do not
gate the reference POINT.

It is recommended that the reference POINT collects at a faster
schedule than its gated POINTs.
Speed Ratio – Enter a numerical value for the desired multiple in the Ratio
field.
Enable Speed Gating – Click to discard data outside of the specified range.

When you disable speed gating, also clear the reference point
selection to ensure the reference point does not continue to be
flagged as in use.
Min / Max - Enter the Min / Max range at which data collection occurs. Max
range must be less than or equal to the reference POINT’s full scale value. The
max range is automatically adjusted if the Speed Ratio field is modified (for
example, if the max range is 100 RPM, and the speed ratio is changed from 1
to 2, the max range automatically updates to 200 RPM.)
Units – The reference POINT’s units of measurement automatically display. If
the selected POINT is a speed POINT and no reference POINT is specified (selfgating), the selected POINT’s units display.
Process Collection – Enter process collection information in the fields below:

If the selected POINT is a process POINT, you can enable process
gating on itself.
Process reference – To assign a POINT for process reference, click the
Select… button to browse POINTs.

For troubleshooting purposes, it is recommended that you do not
gate the reference POINT.

It is recommended that the reference POINT collects at a faster
schedule than its gated POINTs.
Enable Process Gating – Click to discard data outside of the specified range.

When you disable process gating, also clear the reference point
selection to ensure the reference point does not continue to be
flagged as in use.
Min / Max - Enter the Min / Max range at which data collection occurs. Max
range must be less than or equal to the reference POINT’s full scale value.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
7 - 25
Multilog DMx Machine Monitoring Module
Working with DMx Data
Units – The reference POINT’s units of measurement automatically display. If
the selected POINT is a process POINT and no reference POINT is specified, the
selected POINT’s units display.
Working with DMx Data
As soon as DMx POINTs are created, a measurement is captured and stored to the
@ptitude Analyst database. @ptitude Analyst Monitor continues to take overall readings
on the schedule specified on the DMx Settings dialog’s Hosts tab. Monitor stores these
readings in a buffer. Readings in the buffer are retained until they are overwritten with
new readings when the buffer sample limit is met. Buffered readings are only used in
the event of an alarm condition. (Refer to the DMx Alarms section, below, for details.)
On the schedule specified in POINT Properties, @ptitude Analyst Monitor takes a more
complete reading, including spectral data if applicable, and writes it to the @ptitude
Analyst database.
The status bar at the bottom of the @ptitude Analyst screen provides color-coded
status information. If you are collecting data for the DMx, two Monitor status indicators
appear, one for the DMx, and one for all other online devices. They can be identified by
the icon to the left of the Monitor ID.
Figure 7 - 15.
DMx Monitor Status.
Monitor for DMx
Monitor for other online systems
DMx Monitor right-click menu
The operation of the two status indicators is similar, with the exception of the options
available on the right-click menu.

For more on general operation of the status indicators, refer to
Automatic Data Retrieval in Chapter 4.
The DMx Monitor status indicator’s right-click menu includes a Refresh Monitor option.
This option refreshes Monitor with changes to DMx configuration, without requiring a
restart.
7 - 26
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Multilog DMx Machine Monitoring Module
Working with DMx Data
DMx Alarms
Most alarms for DMx POINTs are configured in DMx Manager. The Monitor program
automatically matches the POINT in @ptitude Analyst to the measurement on the DMx
and captures the alarm status during data collection.
Unlike @ptitude Analyst, alarms in DMx Manager are not configured for each
measurement POINT. Instead, DMx Manager allows up to five Alarm Channels that
provide a logical alarming scheme based on combining multiple measurements,
potentially from different measurement channels.
Because of this, the same measurement POINT may be represented in more than one
Alarm Channel with different alert and danger values. Consequently, the same POINT
may be in alarm in one channel, and not in another. Additionally, a single measurement
within an Alarm Channel may go into alarm without triggering the Alarm Channel. (For
example, the logic may specify that at least two measurements must be in alarm for the
channel to trigger.)
Monitor keeps track of the alarm status for both the five alarm channels, and the
individual measurements used in the alarm logic.

This only applies to General Alarms on the DMx. If you are using
Advanced alarms in DMx Manager, the alarm channel status is
reported but individual measurement alarm status is not
supported in @ptitude Analyst.
If an alarm channel goes into alarm, it is noted in the Event Log and in the DMx
machine’s Group Properties status indicators.
If an individual measurement goes into alarm on any Alarm Channel, the corresponding
POINT in the @ptitude Analyst hierarchy is also placed in alarm, whether or not the
related Alarm Channel is triggered.

Because a POINT in @ptitude Analyst may be in alarm without
triggering the Alarm Channel, @ptitude Analyst POINT status is
not a reliable indicator of DMx Protection System status.
When a POINT goes into alarm, the following occurs:
•
The hierarchy’s status indicators update to reflect the alarm level (alert or danger)
and details of the alarm are made available in the Alarm Details view.
•
A time and/or spectrum measurement is taken for the POINT in alarm, when
applicable.
•
All data in the buffer for the POINT in alarm is immediately written to the @ptitude
Analyst hierarchy.
•
A single overall measurement from the buffer is stored for all other POINTs on the
same DMx machine.
These unscheduled measurements from the buffer provide a “snapshot” reference of
the overall machine condition.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
7 - 27
Multilog DMx Machine Monitoring Module
Working with DMx Data

If a DMx POINT is a Displacement, Velocity, or Acceleration type
POINT, it is also possible to configure Band and Envelope alarms
in @ptitude Analyst. These alarms are treated as standard
@ptitude Analyst alarms and do not result in additional buffer
measurements being written to the hierarchy. They are also
internal to @ptitude Analyst and do not impact the DMx device
(i.e., they are not used by the Protection System) or display in
DMx Manager.
DMx Hierarchy Maintenance
DMx module configuration is performed in DMx Manager. If a change is made to a
measurement in DMx Manager, @ptitude Analyst automatically updates the
corresponding POINT in its hierarchy using the following rules:
•
If the source channel (channel 1-4) and measurement output (detection type: Pk,
RMS, DC, ect.) have not changed, the existing POINT is updated with the changes.
•
If the source channel and measurement output combination exists in @ptitude
Analyst, but the POINT is disabled, it will be enabled again and changes will be
applied.
•
If the source channel and measurement output combination on the DMx does not
exist in @ptitude Analyst, a new POINT is created.
•
If the source channel and measurement output specified in @ptitude Analyst does
not exist anymore in the new setup on the DMx, the measurement POINT is
disabled in @ptitude Analyst.
•
Updates use the same rules followed for creating single @ptitude Analyst POINTs
from multiple DMx channel measurements (i.e., order measurement and dual
channel measurement POINT merging).
Automatic changes to @ptitude Analyst POINTs are noted in the Event Log.

7 - 28
Rather than using the automatic update, you may also delete your
@ptitude Analyst hierarchy and use the New DMx POINTs wizard
to recreate it from the DMx. If you would like to retain past
measurement data for the machine, first export the data using
the File menu’s Export option. Once the machine is recreated,
the data can be imported back into @ptitude Analyst by using the
File menu’s Import option and selecting to Merge
Measurements on the Introduction screen.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Multilog DMx Machine Monitoring Module
Viewing DMx Data in Plots
Viewing DMx Data in Plots
Data from DMx POINTs can be viewed in graphical plots in @ptitude Analyst in the
same manner as other POINTs. In addition, live data can be viewed from the following
plots:
•
Trend plot
•
Spectrum plot
•
Time plot
•
Trend/Spectrum plot
•
Trend/Time plot
•
Trend/Spectrum/Time plot
•
Orbit plot
•
Shaft Centerline plot
•
Bode
•
Nyquist
•
Cascade
•
Topology

Depending on the Live data mode selected on the Hosts tab of
the DMx Settings dialog, data collection may be temporarily
suspended while the live data screen is open.
Refer to the Displaying Graphic Plots chapter for general information on working with
plots and viewing live data.

Bode, Nyquist, Cascade, and Topology plots primarily apply to
transient data. They are documented Chapter 8, Transient Data
Analysis.
In addition, DMx device setup allows for pairing channels 1 and 2 or channels 3 and 4.
If both channels in a pair have the transducer type set to Displacement, there is a probe
mounting angle difference between 85 and 95 degrees, and they share the same
measurement type, a dual channel Orbit POINT is created. Data from Orbit POINTs can
be displayed in Orbit and Shaft Centerline plots.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
7 - 29
Multilog DMx Machine Monitoring Module
Viewing DMx Data in Plots
Orbit Plot
Figure 7 - 16.
Orbit Plot.
directional arrows
flash blank
X channel sensor location
Y channel sensor location
tachometer’s physical location
X Channel Time Plot
Y Channel Time Plot
The Orbit plot displays the shaft’s most recent orbit data for the two input channels (X
and Y). Orbit plots can be used to show the movement of the shaft within the bearing.

The sensor and tachometer angles are adjusted based on your
Angular Axis View preference setting.
Orbit plot labels include:
 - Indicates the direction the shaft is rotating.  indicates the shaft is rotating
counterclockwise,  indicates the shaft is rotating clockwise, and  indicates the
shaft is rotating bi-directional.
T – Indicates the physical location of the tachometer sensor.
X – Indicates the physical location of the channel X sensor.
Y – Indicates the physical location of the channel Y sensor.
Flash blank – Indicates the starting point of the rotation of the shaft. A blank on the
orbit plot precedes the dot for easier identification of the starting point.
7 - 30
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Multilog DMx Machine Monitoring Module
Viewing DMx Data in Plots
Orbit Plot Settings
To access the Orbit Plot Settings dialog:
•
With an orbit plot displayed, select the View menu’s Plot/Settings option, or use
the settings toolbar button.

The Settings dialog is also available from the orbit plot’s rightclick context menu.
Orbit Plot Settings fields include:
Autoscale - Enabling autoscale automatically scales the initial orbit axis so it is
approximately 120% of the largest orbit. Disabling autoscale displays the orbit on the
same full scale axis used when it was recorded.
Mag. Min. / Mag. Max. - Enter the minimum and maximum magnitude scale values in
the designated text boxes.
Orbit settings
Slow roll compensation – Slow roll compensation uses a measurement taken at low
speed when there should be negligible shaft vibration to quantify shaft runnout. Enable
the Slow roll compensation checkbox to allow the plot to compensate based on either
the vector compensation or waveform compensation settings in POINT Properties
(depending on the Filtering settings, below).

Press F2 on your keyboard when viewing the plot to toggle vector
compensation on or off.

Vector compensation must be enabled in POINT Properties prior
to data collection to be used in a plot.
Filtering – Allows you to display the orbit data for a specific frequency. Choices are
Raw, 1x, 2x, 3x. If 1x, 2x, or 3x is selected with Slow roll compensation, the
corresponding 1X, 2X, or 3X vector compensation settings on the Vector tab in POINT
Properties are applied. If Raw is selected along with Slow roll compensation, it uses
the waveform measurement selected in POINT Properties.

Press F3 on your keyboard when viewing the plot to scroll
through the filtering options.
Revolutions – Specify the number of revolutions to display on the orbit plot. Choices
are 1 revolution, 2 revolutions, 3 revolutions, 4 revolutions, 5 revolutions, or All
revolutions.

Press F4 on your keyboard when viewing the plot to scroll
through the revolution options.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
7 - 31
Multilog DMx Machine Monitoring Module
Viewing DMx Data in Plots
Shaft Centerline Plot
Figure 7 - 17.
Example of a Shaft Centerline Plot.
The Shaft Centerline plot displays a trend of the shaft’s average centerline for Orbit
POINTs. Shaft centerline plots can be used to show the movement of the shaft within
the bearing.
Shaft Centerline Plot Settings
To access the SCL Plot Settings dialog:
•
With a Shaft Centerline plot displayed, select the View menu’s Plot/Settings
option, or use the settings toolbar button.

The Settings dialog is also available from the shaft centerline
plot’s right-click context menu.
SCL Plot Settings fields include:
Autoscale - Enabling autoscale automatically scales the initial amplitude axis so it is
approximately 120% of the largest amplitude. Disabling autoscale displays the
spectrum on the same full scale vertical axis used when it was recorded.
Mag. Min. / Mag. Max. - Enter the minimum and maximum magnitude scale values in
the designated text boxes.
Date / Time Scale- Enter the minimum and maximum date / time scale values in the
designated text boxes.
Tag – Allows you to display RPM tags on the plot. Select either No Tag or RPM.
7 - 32
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
8
Transient Data Analysis
Overview
The Transient Data feature is used to collect and analyze run up / coast down data,
intermittent events, and transient vibration signals from non steady state machinery.

At the time of this writing, only the IMx and DMx DADs support
transient data collection.

IMx setup is documented in Chapter 3, Working With Your SKF
@ptitude Analyst Hierarchy. DMx setup is documented in
Chapter 7, Multilog DMx Machine Monitoring Module.
Because transient data collection impacts standard data
collection, it is recommended that you read each section.
For the IMx, configuring @ptitude Analyst to collect transient data is a two step
process:
•
First, create transient POINTs for the device via @ptitude Analyst. These POINTs
can be the same as those used for normal condition monitoring.
•
Next, set up your transient data hierarchy in @ptitude Analyst and add the
transient POINTs.
Once setup is complete, the IMx will monitor for transient events and send transient
data to the IMx Service. For this to happen, the transient data must be transferred
along with the normal condition monitoring POINT data.
For the DMx, configuring @ptitude Analyst to collect transient data is a different
two step process.
•
First, set up transient POINTs for the device via @ptitude Analyst’s Transfer > DMx
> DMx Transient or in the DMx Manager’s Module Properties.
•
Next, set up your transient data hierarchy in @ptitude Analyst and add the
transient POINTs created by @ptitude Analyst Monitor.
Once setup is complete, the DMx will monitor for transient events and send transient
data to @ptitude Analyst Monitor. Transient data may be analyzed using specialized
plots and/or included in reports.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
8-1
Transient Data Analysis
Setting up DMx Transient POINTs
Setting up DMx Transient POINTs
Transient data collection provides multiple “snapshots” of your machinery as the speed
changes. Transient data generally uses Order type POINTs (i.e., magnitude and phase
pairings on the same channel, potentially integrated in dual channel Orbit POINTs)
configured for fast data collection to allow the DMx to rapidly take multiple
measurements during the transient event. A separate setup is provided specifically for
transient data so you can configure transient POINTs without impacting normal data
collection.
Transient POINTs may be configured from within DMx Manager using the Module
Properties Transient Data tab. These POINTs are added to your @ptitude Analyst
hierarchy during normal DMx POINT creation. (Refer to Chapter 7’s Creating DMx
POINTs section for details.) You may also create transient POINTs from within
@ptitude Analyst and transfer them to the DMx device.
To add transient measurements in @ptitude Analyst:
•
Select DMx Transient from the Transfer menu’s DMx sub-menu. The DMx
Transient screen displays.
•
Select the Device Setup tab.
Figure 8 - 1.
The DMx Transient Screen’s Device Setup Tab.
This tab allows you to display transient POINTs that already exist on the DMx device, as
well as configure new transient POINTs.
8-2
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Transient Data Analysis
Setting up DMx Transient POINTs
DMx Manager allows up to 48 transient measurements, of which 11 are reserved for
alarming, speed, and status information. This leaves 37 measurements available for
user defined configuration. This allows configuration of up to all four orders (requiring
eight measurements to describe both amplitude and phase) on all four measurement
channels, with an additional five spaces available for other measurement types.
Before you can add new transient measurements, you must retrieve the existing setup
from the DMx device.
To retrieve transient data configuration:
•
Select the DMx device you would like to use from the DMx device list.
•
Select Get Setup. A progress bar displays as the data is retrieved, then the DMx
channels section updates with information from the selected DMx device.
Options on this tab include:
DMx device – Displays all DMx devices configured on the DMx Settings dialog’s Devices
tab.
DMx Channels – Displays a list of the existing transient measurements on the selected
DMx device. Available information includes the measurement Channel, measurement
Type, the Full Scale limit (i.e., the measurement’s maximum value), and the
measurement Units.
Channel Properties section – Allows you to modify the highlighted transient
measurement. Options include:
Channel – Select the measurement channel (Channel 1 through 4)
corresponding to one of the four sensor inputs on the DMx.
Type – Select the measurement type from the list. Options that are not
configured in DMx Manager for use with the selected channel appear dimmed.

FFT processing is disabled during transient data collection,
therefore, FFT band options are not available for transient
POINTs.

The Units are automatically derived from the Type.
Full Scale – Enter the measurement’s maximum value.
Get Setup – Retrieves transient measurement setup from the selected DMx device.
Add – Click to add a new transient measurement with default settings. The new
measurement is added to the bottom of the list.
Remove – Deletes the highlighted transient measurement.
Download – Saves and transfers the configuration to the DMx device.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
8-3
Transient Data Analysis
Setting up DMx Transient POINTs
To add a new transient measurement:
•
Select a DMx device and click Get Setup. The Add button enables.
•
Click Add. A new measurement is added at the bottom of the list. The
measurement settings default to:
Channel = Channel 1
Type = True peak
Full scale = 32767
•
Scroll to the bottom of the list and highlight the new measurement.
•
Modify the settings in the Channel properties section.
To remove a transient measurement:
•
Highlight the transient measurement you would like to delete and click Remove.
The measurement is removed from the list.

This option removes the measurement from the DMx. If the
corresponding POINT already exists in @ptitude Analyst, it is
disabled.
To save and transfer configuration to the DMx:
•
When you are satisfied with your configuration, click Download. The
measurements are saved and a progress bar appears as the configuration is
transferred to the DMx device.
WARNING!
The DMx device may be unresponsive for several seconds while configuration is
downloaded. This results in a temporary interruption in the protection system.
Changes are reflected on the Transient Data tab in DMx Manager’s Module Properties.
If you have added new transient measurements or modified existing measurements, the
next time @ptitude Analyst is updated with changes from the DMx, the new POINTs are
added to the hierarchy and existing POINTs are updated.
8-4

If a POINT already exists in the @ptitude Analyst hierarchy, only
changes to the Full Scale setting are updated. Changes to the
channel number or measurement type result in a new POINT
being created and the existing POINT being disabled.

If you exit this tab without downloading, you are prompted to save
your configuration. Saving also downloads the changes to the
DMx.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Transient Data Analysis
Transient Hierarchy Configuration
Transient Hierarchy Configuration
The transient hierarchy and captured transient data records are organized in a separate
transient hierarchy window (similar to a ROUTE or workspace window).
The transient window lets you create special groups that define transient data
collection. All of the data collected during a transient event is stored in one
measurement record in the transient window so data is grouped and readily available
for analysis.

Scheduled data collection of POINTs is separate from transient
data collection. Scheduled data continues to be collected and
displayed in the standard Hierarchy window.
How to Create a New Transient Window
Transient windows are added and maintained from the Transient dialog.
To open the Transient dialog:
•
Select View / Transient. The Transient dialog displays a list of any previously
created transient windows.
Options include:
Open – Opens the highlighted transient window.
Add – Opens the Transient Properties dialog and adds a new transient window.
Remove – Removes the highlighted transient window.
Properties – Opens the Transient Properties dialog where you may edit the name and
description of the highlighted transient window.
To create a new Transient window:
•
Click Add. The Transient Properties dialog displays.
•
Enter a Name for the new transient view and provide a Description if desired.
•
Click OK. A new, empty transient window displays.
Figure 8 - 2.
A New Transient Window.
Transient Hierarchy root level – displays the name of the Transient window.
Unlike other hierarchies in @ptitude Analyst, the transient window adds an additional
hierarchy level for the transient group. All SETs, machines, and POINTs are added
beneath this transient group. This window can contain one or more transient groups
that define transient data collection.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
8-5
Transient Data Analysis
Transient Hierarchy Configuration
Important
Although @ptitude Analyst is capable of handling multiple transient groups, keep in
mind that the communication speed of the DMx is restricted for IS compliance. If
you are configuring more than one transient group for the DMx, use the guidelines
below to carefully evaluate your group settings to minimize the data capture
requirements. (For example, consider only capturing overall data rather than
waveform data, or capturing data at greater intervals.) If transient data collection
is initiated for more than one group simultaneously, Monitor may be busy
processing another group and some data may be missed.
How to Create a New Transient Group
To add a transient group:
•
Highlight the root level of the Transient window hierarchy.
•
Select Insert / New Group. The Group Properties screen displays.
Options include:
Name – Enter a unique name to identify the new group.
Description – (optional) Enter a description to further identify the new group.
Type – Select IMx Transient or DMx Transient.
Enable Data Collection – Enable or disable transient data collection for this group.
•
Select the Transient tab.
The Group Properties DMx Transient Tab
Figure 8 - 3.
The Group Properties Screen’s DMx Transient Tab.
8-6
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Transient Data Analysis
Transient Hierarchy Configuration
Options include:
Low / High Speed – Defines the transient event window. Transient data is only
collected if the running speed of the machine falls within the specified range.
Start-up events are initiated when the machine speed increases above the low
speed threshold and stopped when the speed exceeds the high speed
threshold.
Coast down events are initiated when the machine speed drops below the high
speed threshold and stopped when the speed reaches the low speed threshold.
Important
If data collection times out on the DMx before the speed limit is reached, a new
transient event will not be triggered until the running speed falls below the low
speed limit or above the high speed limit. If the high speed limit is set higher than
the maximum machine speed, it effectively turns off transient data collection for
the DMx. If this happens, either select the Refresh Monitor option on the DMx
Monitor status indicator, or stop and restart @ptitude Analyst Monitor to reset the
system.
Overall data sample – Allows definition of data acquisition triggers for overall data,
based on changes in speed and/or time.
Delta speed – Enable to trigger data acquisition at the speed interval specified
in the adjacent RPM field.
Delta time – Enable to trigger data acquisition at the specified time interval.
Enter the time interval in Second(s), Minute(s), or Hour(s).

When data collection is triggered by either one of the options,
both triggers reset and are initialized to current speed and
timestamp values.
Dynamic data sample - Allows definition of data acquisition triggers for dynamic data
(waveform), based on changes in speed and/or time.
Delta speed - Enable to trigger data acquisition at the speed interval specified
in the adjacent RPM field.
Delta time - Enable to trigger data acquisition at the specified time interval.
Enter the time interval in Second(s), Minute(s), or Hour(s).

When data collection is triggered by either one of the options,
both triggers reset and are initialized to current speed and
timestamp values.

Dynamic data acquisition takes considerably more time than
overall data collection. Be aware that during this time, no overall
measurement data is collected.
Data resolution - Allows definition of the approximate resolution for dynamic data
collection by specifying the percentage of the total captured data that should be
transferred to @ptitude Analyst. This allows you to minimize data acquisition and
transfer time.
Maximum duration - Specifies a transient data collection timeout. Transient data
collection will terminate when either the machine speed reaches the defined Low or
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
8-7
Transient Data Analysis
Transient Hierarchy Configuration
High speed limit, or the timeout is reached. Enter a timeout between 1 and 60
Second(s), Minute(s), or Hour(s).
Extra startup sample time (optional) – Allows additional time to be added onto data
collection for a startup event. Once the High speed limit has been met, data collection
will continue for the specified amount of time. Enter a time between 0 and 60
Second(s), Minute(s), or Hour(s). If 0 is entered, data collection terminates as soon as
the high speed limit is reached.

The Maximum duration timer is disabled as soon as the Extra
startup sample time is started, allowing the full additional
sample to be collected.
The Group Properties IMx Transient Tab (IMx)
Figure 8 - 4.
The Group Properties Screen’s IMx Transient Tab.
8-8
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Transient Data Analysis
Transient Hierarchy Configuration
Options include:
Transient ranges area - Defines the transient event window. Transient data is only
collected if the running speed of the machine falls within the specified range. The fields
on the right are read-only, and automatically update when the fields on the left are
modified. A graphical display of the speed ranges displays with different colors
representing each of the transient ranges currently enabled:
Red – overspeed
Green - normal operation
Orange – transient
Pale blue - slow roll event
Blue - machine stopped
Overspeed – Specify the speed at which Overspeed events are initiated. These occur
when the machine speed exceeds the Overspeed threshold. The machine is then shut
down normally by a control system. When this occurs, a transient event collects the
coast down to stopped data.
Normal operation (N.O.) – Specify the speed at which the machine is no longer in a
transient state and normal operation (steady state) data collection begins.
Transient – Click to enable transient data collection. Enter the starting speed at which
transient data collection begins in a run up event, or finishes in a coast down or
overspeed trip event.
Slow roll – Specify the starting speed at which Slow roll measurements are captured.
Transient events are initiated when the machine speed increases into the Transient
speed range. Slow roll measurements are captured using the Normal Operation data
collection schedule.
Stopped – (read-only) Specifies the speed at which the machine is considered to be
stopped. Dynamic measurements in this range are discarded, but static measurements
are saved.
N.O. transient capture timeout – Specifies a transient capture timout after the
machine has reached a steady state. Transient data collection will terminate when the
specified time after the steady state is reached.
Maximum transient event time – Specifies a transient data collection timeout.
Transient data collection will terminate when either the machine speed reaches the
defined Low or High speed limit, or the timeout is reached. Enter a timeout between 1
and 60 Second(s), Minute(s), or Hour(s).
Important
If data collection times out on the IMx before the speed limit is reached, a new
transient event will not be triggered until the running speed falls below the low
speed limit (into slow roll or stopped) or above the high speed limit (into Normal
Operation State). Further transient readings are discarded until machine speed
returns to either transient or overspeed, and a new transient event is captured.
Static measurement area - Allows definition of data acquisition triggers for overall
data, gap and amplitude + phase data, based on changes in speed and/or time.
Delta RPM - Enable to trigger data acquisition at the speed interval specified in the
adjacent RPM field.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
8-9
Transient Data Analysis
Transient Hierarchy Configuration
Delta Time – Enable to trigger data acquisition at the specified time interval. Enter the
time interval in Second(s), Minute(s), or Hour(s).
Dynamic measurement area - Allows definition of data acquisition triggers for dynamic
data (waveform or FFT), based on changes in speed and/or time.
Delta RPM – Enable to trigger data acquisition at the speed interval specified in the
adjacent RPM field.
Delta time - Enable to trigger data acquisition at the specified time interval. Enter the
time interval in Second(s), Minute(s), or Hour(s).

Dynamic data acquisition takes considerably more time than
overall data collection. Be aware that during this time, no overall
measurement data is collected.
Building the Transient Hierarchy
Once the transient group has been created, you can use drag and drop or copy and
paste operations to copy Groups and POINTs from a Hierarchy or Workspace window
into the new transient window to create the new hierarchy list.
DMX Transient Hierarchy Considerations
The following should be kept in mind when building a transient hierarchy:
8 - 10
•
Transient POINTs are identified in the hierarchy with a T following the channel
name (e.g., Channel1T.RMS or Channel1T.Order).
•
Transient data POINTs are processed separately b from trend POINTs (i.e.,
Processed Channel POINTs). Using both trend and transient data in your hierarchy
requires both processing loops to be considered during data collection, impacting
data acquisition speed. It is highly recommended for fast transient events to only
use transient measurement POINTs. If you require a particular trend
measurement in your transient analysis, consider duplicating the configuration in
Transient POINT setup. This provides the same data, without slowing down data
collection.
•
FFT processing on the DMx is suspended during a transient event. If you do include
trend data in your transient hierarchy, it is not recommended that you include
POINTs set to save data as FFT. (If you select POINTs set to save FFT and Time,
the FFT will be processed using the time waveform data.)
•
You may not assign POINTs from a single IMx / DMx machine to multiple transient
groups.
•
DMx hardware setup allows the speed channel of one DMx module to be physically
connected to another DMx module using an assigned opto-output (speed out) and
Logic input (speed input) on the other module. (i.e., You may “daisy chain” multiple
DMx modules on one physical machine.) Since separate “DMx machines” in
@ptitude Analyst are not necessarily on separate physical machines, you may
assign POINTs from multiple DMx machines to the same transient group. This
should only be done if the DMx devices share the same speed reference.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Transient Data Analysis
Transient Hierarchy Configuration
IMx Transient Hierarchy Considerations
The following should be kept in mind when building a transient hierarchy:
•
It is possible to define multiple transient groups on a single IMx. Each transient
must have its own tachometer, and each channel must only be used in a single
transient group.
•
It is not possible to define a transient group that spans multiple IMx units. If this is
required, create multiple transients, each containing channels from a single IMx.
•
It is possible to mix dynamic channels and IMx-M protection channels in a single
IMx transient group.
Transferring DMx Transient Groups to @ptitude Analyst Monitor
Once transient groups have been completely configured (including building the
hierarchy), you must transfer them to SKF @ptitude Analyst Monitor. You must also
retransfer a group if changes have been made to an existing transient hierarchy, such
as modifying the group settings or adding or removing POINTs.

If you disable a group, it is automatically communicated to
Monitor. You do not need to transfer the change.
Transferring DMx Transient Groups
•
Select DMx Transient from the Transfer menu’s DMx sub-menu. The DMx
Transient screen displays.
Figure 8 - 5.
The DMx Transient Screen.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
8 - 11
Transient Data Analysis
Transient Data Collection
•
Highlight the group you would like to download to Monitor and click Download.
•
Click OK at the download confirmation message.
•
If you have multiple transient groups, repeat these steps for each group.

Only enabled Transient Groups are displayed in the DMx
Transient Screen.
Transient Data Collection
Once the hierarchy setup is complete and transient groups have been downloaded,
Monitor starts monitoring your machine for transient events, based on the machine
speed range established for the group.

For DMx transient data, the machine running speed is checked
using the schedule specified in the Buffer Update Rate setting on
the DMx Settings screen’s Host tab.
When a change in machine speed triggers a transient event, normal data collection for
all POINTs under any machine included in the affected transient hierarchy is temporarily
suspended. (This does not impact data collection for POINTs on other machines.) In its
place, data collection commences using the transient group parameters.

During this time, measurements are written to the transient
hierarchy, rather than the main @ptitude Analyst hierarchy.
Monitor creates a measurement record in the transient window hierarchy for each
POINT under the transient group that triggered the event. As the transient event
proceeds, measurements are captured at the specified delta speed and/or delta time,
based on your transient group settings.
The entire data set for the transient event is included in the single transient data record
under each POINT. While the transient event is still active (i.e., transient data collection
is still occurring), the start and end times of the transient data set record are equal.
During the transient event, you are able to view a Live Data display of the transient data
as it is collected. Data is updated in the display using the transient data collection
schedule. Live Data display is temporarily suspended for any POINTs that are not in the
affected transient hierarchy.
When the transient event is complete, the end time of the transient data set record
updates to reflect the actual stop date and time of the event. The transient data set
record is also updated to indicate whether the event was a start-up or a coast-down.
8 - 12
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Transient Data Analysis
Transient Data Collection
Figure 8 - 6.
Sample Transient Start-up Record.
Transient data set for a start-up event.
Additional information about the transient data set is available on the Transient
Measurement Properties dialog.
To view transient measurement properties:
•
In the transient window, navigate to the desired transient data POINT.
•
Highlight the transient data set in the right-hand pane.
•
Select Edit / Properties, or click the Properties icon on the toolbar. The Transient
Measurement Properties dialog displays.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
8 - 13
Transient Data Analysis
Transient Data Collection
Figure 8 - 7.
The Transient Measurement Properties Dialog.
This dialog displays details concerning the transient data record, an overview of the
settings that were used in data collection, and provides an option to use this event as a
baseline measurement.
Options include:
Type – Whether it was a start up or coast down event.
# measurements – The number of individual measurements captured during the
event.
Start and End date/time – The time range when the transient event occurred.
Data Range, Overall data sample, Dynamic data sample – These sections display the
transient group properties that were set at the time the data was captured.
Current baseline – Sets the current data set as the baseline for the corresponding type
of event (start-up or coast down).
8 - 14
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Transient Data Analysis
Viewing Transient Data Plots

The baseline applies to this POINT only. If the same transient
event is recorded under multiple POINTs in the transient
hierarchy, you will need to set the baseline for each POINT.

The baseline is used in reports to provide the percentage of
change between the selected transient data set and the baseline.
Viewing Transient Data Plots
Depending on the type of POINT selected in the transient hierarchy, one or more of the
following standard plot types are available when viewing a transient data set:
Trend
Spectrum
Time
Spectrum Waterfall
Polar Vector
Mag/Phase
Orbit
Shaft Centerline
Mag/Speed

Plots that display a single measurement (e.g., spectrum, time,
orbit) use the measurement with the highest amplitude peak in
the transient data set.
In addition, there is a selection of plots that specifically apply to transient data.

Although these plots are also available for non-transient data,
they are primarily designed to reflect impact on vibration signal
caused by changes in speed during a transient event.
Bode - Plots signal magnitude and phase as a function of running speed.
Nyquist - Plots the movement of the machine shaft within the (sleeve) bearing housing
during the start-up or coast-down of the machine.
Cascade – Plots collected spectra against running speed.
Topology - A top-down view of a cascade or waterfall plot, where color intensity is used
to visualize the spectral peaks.
Bode/Nyquist – A combined Bode and Nyquist plot.
Speed/Bode/Spectrum – Combines a speed trend, Bode, and spectrum plot.
Speed/Bode/Orbit/Spectrum – Combines a speed trend, Bode, orbit, and spectrum
plot.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
8 - 15
Transient Data Analysis
Viewing Transient Data Plots
Bode Plot
Figure 8 - 8.
Bode Plot.
phase angle
signal magnitude
X-axis = machine running speed
right click menu toggles the order being viewed
vector compensation status
The Bode graph plots signal magnitude and phase as a function of running speed. Bode
plots are available for order channel (i.e., Freq. type = Order Track in POINT
Properties) and dual channel POINTs with phase enabled.
You may toggle the order being displayed using the right click menu.

The phase angle scale is adjusted based on your Angular Axis
View preference setting.
Bode Plot Settings
To access the Bode Plot Settings dialog:
•
With a Bode plot displayed, select the View menu’s Plot / Settings option, or use
the settings toolbar button.

The Settings dialog is also available from the Bode plot’s rightclick context menu.
Bode Plot Settings fields include:
Speed Scale – Specify the speed range that should be represented on the X-axis of the
plot.
Magnitude scale – Specify the scaling for the Y-axis of the magnitude plot (bottom
section).
8 - 16
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Transient Data Analysis
Viewing Transient Data Plots
Autoscale - Enabling Autoscale automatically scales the initial amplitude axis
so it is approximately 120% of the largest amplitude. Disabling Autoscale
displays the same full scale vertical axis used when data was recorded.
% Full scale - When enabled, the amplitude axis displays as a % value of the
POINT’s full scale value. Use % Full Scale to compare measurements that do
not have the same units or the same Full Scale value.

If you do not select Autoscale or % Full Scale, you must enter
values to determine the plot’s magnitude scale (Y-axis scaling).
Mag min / max - Enter the minimum and maximum magnitude scale values in
the designated text boxes.
Linear / Logarithmic - Select Linear scaling to space out data equally. Select
Logarithmic scaling to emphasize lower values.
Phase scale - Specify the scaling for the Y-axis of the phase plot (top section).
View (Wrapping or Rolling) – If the phase angle exceeds 360, determines
whether the data should wrap (return to 0) or roll (continue past 360). Choose
Wrapping to have the data line beyond the phase axis range wrap around.
Choose Rolling to have the phase axis scale extend to keep the data line
continuous.
Phase min / max – Specify the phase angle range that should be represented
on the plot. Enter a value between -180 and 360.
Vector compensation - Allows you to filter out known magnitude and phase angle
values that represent inherent impurities in the shaft. Enable to allow the plot to
compensate based on the vector compensation settings in POINT Properties.

Press F2 on your keyboard when viewing the plot to toggle vector
compensation on or off.
Order – Specify the order that is displayed on the plot (1 – 4).
Damping Cursor
Use a damping cursor on a Bode plot to display side bands of three decibels to the left
and right of the cursor position, and the calculated Q-factor (i.e., the rate of energy
dissipation relative to the oscillation frequency; a higher Q factor indicates a lower rate
of dissipation).
To display a damping cursor overlay:
•
With a Bode plot displayed, select the View menu’s Plot / Plot Overlays / Damping
Cursor option, or use the damping cursor toolbar button.
Feedback Area - Displays amplitude, speed, Q-factor, and date/time.
Information Area - Specific information displays on the Bode Damping tab. Tab
information includes POINT name, cursor color, date/time, amplitude, speed, and Qfactor.
Right-Click Context Menu - Right-click on the damping cursor overlay anchor to reveal
its context menu. Available options include:
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
8 - 17
Transient Data Analysis
Viewing Transient Data Plots
Next trace – Toggles between traces when the plot is displaying more than
one trace.
Remove – Removes overlay from the plot.
Keyboard Support – Press Enter to toggle to next trace. Press Delete to remove. Left
and right arrow keys move one measurement in the transient data set at a time.
Available Preferences
Color - Cursor is the color of the next available cursor (as configured in Cursor
/ Color Preferences in the Preferences dialog).
Display Status – Display status (on or off) is configured in the Damping
Cursor / Plot Preferences in the Preferences dialog.

The default status is on.
Nyquist Plot
Figure 8 - 9.
Nyquist Plot.
phase angle
speed labels
amplitude
8 - 18
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Transient Data Analysis
Viewing Transient Data Plots
A Nyquist plot is a Polar plot showing the “path” of the vector against speed. This plot is
a good way of observing the change in amplitude and phase angle during a transient
event. When a critical speed is traversed, there is a 180˚ shift in phase angle. A major
change in the Nyquist “profile” from a normal baseline may indicate a change in the
resonant frequency (critical speed), which is an indicator of a potential structural
problem. Nyquist plots are available for order channel POINTs (i.e., Freq. type = Order
Track in POINT Properties) and dual channel POINTs with phase enabled.
The plot’s right click menu allows you to toggle the order being displayed and turn
speed labels on or off using the Show Amp Labels option.

The phase angle is adjusted based on your Angular Axis View
preference setting.
Nyquist Plot Settings
To access the Nyquist Plot Settings dialog:
•
With a Nyquist plot displayed, select the View menu’s Plot / Settings option, or use
the settings toolbar button.

The Settings dialog is also available from the Nyquist plot’s rightclick context menu.
Nyquist Plot Settings fields include:
Magnitude scale
Autoscale - Enabling Autoscale automatically scales the initial amplitude so it
is approximately 120% of the largest amplitude. Disabling Autoscale allows
you to specify the plot’s maximum magnitude scale.
Mag. Max – If Autoscale is disabled, enter the maximum amplitude that
should be displayed in the plot.
Vector compensation - Allows you to filter out known magnitude and phase angle
values that represent inherent impurities in the shaft. Enable to allow the plot to
compensate based on the vector compensation settings in POINT Properties.

Press F2 on your keyboard when viewing the plot to toggle vector
compensation on or off.
Order – Specify the order that is displayed on the plot (1 – 4).
Tag – Turn speed labels on (Speed) or off (<None>).
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
8 - 19
Transient Data Analysis
Viewing Transient Data Plots
Cascade Plot
Figure 8 - 10.
Cascade Plot.
amplitude
frequency
machine running speed
The Cascade plot is similar to the Waterfall plot, but instead of plotting collected spectra
against time, the data is plotted against running speed on the Z-axis.
Cascade Plot Settings
To access the Cascade Plot Settings dialog:
•
With a Cascade plot displayed, select the View menu’s Plot / Settings option, or
use the settings toolbar button.

The Settings dialog is also available from the Cascade plot’s
right-click context menu.
Cascade Plot Settings fields include:
Speed scale - Specify the scaling for the plot’s Z-axis (speed).
Min / Max – Enter the minimum and maximum machine speed that should be
represented on the plot.
Limit measurement of the same speed – Specify how many measurements
should be represented at each speed interval. This is useful if data was
captured using Delta Time, potentially resulting in multiple measurements at
the same speed.
8 - 20
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Transient Data Analysis
Viewing Transient Data Plots
Amplitude scale - Specify the scaling for the plot’s Y-axis (amplitude).
Min / Max – Enter the minimum and maximum amplitude scale values in the
designated text boxes.
Linear / Logarithmic - Select Linear scaling to space out data equally on the
Y-axis. Select Logarithmic scaling to emphasize lower values.
Frequency scale - Specify the scaling for the plot’s X-axis (frequency).

The X-axis may display frequencies or orders, depends on your
Plot Preferences X-Axis units setting.
Min / Max - Enter the minimum and maximum frequency scale values in the
designated text boxes.
Linear / Logarithmic - Select Linear scaling to space out data equally on the
X-axis. Select Logarithmic scaling to emphasize lower values.
Topology Plot
Figure 8 - 11.
Topology Plot.
highest amplitude and associated color indication
lowest amplitude and associated color indication
The Topology plot is similar to a Cascade or Waterfall plot, but provides a top-down
view of the data using color intensity to visualize the spectral peaks.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
8 - 21
Transient Data Analysis
Viewing Transient Data Plots
Topology Plot Settings
To access the Topology Plot Settings dialog:
•
With a Topology plot displayed, select the View menu’s Plot / Settings option, or
use the settings toolbar button.

The Settings dialog is also available from the Topology plot’s
right-click context menu.
Topology Plot Settings fields include:
X-scale - Specify the scaling for the plot’s X-axis.

The X-axis may display frequencies or orders, depends on your
Plot Preferences X-Axis units setting.
Scale min / max - Enter the minimum and maximum frequency or order
scale values in the designated text boxes.
Linear / Logarithmic - Select Linear scaling to space out data equally on the
X-axis. Select Logarithmic scaling to emphasize lower values.
Y-Scale - Specify the scaling for the plot’s Y-axis.
Axis – Specify whether to show the plot over Speed (Cascade plot) or Time
(Waterfall plot).
Date min / max – If Time is selected for the axis, enter the minimum and
maximum date range that should be reflected on the plot.

This setting primarily applies to non-transient data.
Scale min / max – If the axis is set to Speed, enter the minimum and
maximum machine speed that should be represented on the plot.
If the axis is set to Time, enter the time range that should be included.
Limit measurement of the same speed – If the axis is set to Speed, specify
how many measurements should be represented at each speed interval. This
is useful if data was captured using Delta Time, potentially resulting in multiple
measurements at the same speed.
Magnitude scale – Specify the scaling and display settings for the spectral peaks.
Mag min / max – Specify the colors that should represent the minimum and
maximum amplitudes for spectral peaks on the plot.
Linear / Logarithmic - Select Linear scaling to space out data equally on the
Y-axis. Select Logarithmic scaling to emphasize lower values.
8 - 22
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Transient Data Analysis
Viewing Transient Data Plots
Bode/Nyquist Plot
Figure 8 - 12.
Bode/Nyquist Combined Plot.
This plot combines a Bode plot and a Nyquist plot in one view. You may toggle between
the plots by clicking on them or using the Tab key on your keyboard. The non-selected
plot’s title information area appears dimmed. When you move your cursor on the Bode
plot, the cursor on the Nyquist plot automatically moves to the corresponding
measurement.
Settings for each plot type may be configured individually and are identical to the single
plot options.

This plot is not available for live data display.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
8 - 23
Transient Data Analysis
Viewing Transient Data Plots
Speed/Bode/Spectrum Plot
Figure 8 - 13.
Speed/Bode/Spectrum Combined Plot.
This plot combines a Speed Trend, Bode, and Spectrum plot. It is available for order
channel POINTs (i.e., Freq. type = Order Track in POINT Properties) and dual channel
POINTs with phase enabled. When you move your single cursor overlay on the Speed
Trend plot, the cursor on the Bode plot automatically moves to the corresponding
measurement and the Spectrum plot updates to display the corresponding spectrum.
If you are viewing multiple channels on the plot, the plots default to Channel X. For help
with viewing data from other channels, refer to Multiple Measurements and Channels
in Plots in Chapter 5, Displaying Graphic Plots.
You may toggle between the plots by clicking on them. The non-selected plots’ title
information areas appear dimmed. Cursor movement impacts the active plot.
Settings for each plot type may be configured individually and are identical to the single
plot options.

8 - 24
This plot is not available for live data display.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
Transient Data Analysis
Viewing Transient Data Plots
Speed/Bode/Orbit/Spectrum Plot
Figure 8 - 14.
Speed/Bode/Orbit/Spectrum Combined Plot.
This plot combines a Speed Trend, Bode, Orbit, and Spectrum plot. It is available for
dual-channel POINTs with FFT, Time, and Phase enabled. When you move your single
cursor overlay on the Speed Trend plot, the Bode, Orbit, and Spectrum plots update to
display the corresponding data.
If you are viewing multiple channels on the plot, the plots default to Channel X. For help
with viewing data from other channels, refer to Multiple Measurements and Channels
in Plots in Chapter 5, Displaying Graphic Plots.
You may toggle between the plots by clicking on them. The non-selected plots’ title
information areas appear dimmed. Cursor movement impacts the active plot.
Settings for each plot type may be configured individually and are identical to the single
plot options.

This plot is not available for live data display.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog On-line Systems
User Manual
8 - 25
Appendix A
SKF @ptitude Analyst Toolbars
Toolbar Tools
The following figures display @ptitude Analyst’s default toolbars and their default
toolbar button assignments. Custom toolbar settings are discussed later in this chapter.

Tools for use with online systems that are only available in the full
@ptitude Analyst product (e.g., the DMx) are shown below for
reference. They do not appear with the @ptitude Analyst for SKF
Multilog On-line Systems license.
Primary Toolbar
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog Online Systems
User Manual
A-1
SKF @ptitude Analyst Toolbars
Toolbar Tools
Plots Toolbar
Navigation Toolbar
Hierarchy View Toolbar
A-2
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog Online Systems
User Manual
SKF @ptitude Analyst Toolbars
Toolbar Tools
View Icons Toolbar
Plot Tools Toolbar
Overlays Toolbar
Online Tools Toolbar
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog Online Systems
User Manual
A-3
SKF @ptitude Analyst Toolbars
Custom Toolbars
Custom Toolbars
Toolbar buttons are available for each menu item and available function. By default,
only toolbar buttons for commonly utilized features are active. Buttons are arranged by
related functionality in separate sections of the toolbar area. You can enable any or all
of the available buttons using the Custom Toolbar dialog.
To open the Custom Toolbar dialog:
•
Select the Customize menu’s Toolbars option. The Custom Toolbar dialog
displays.
Figure A - 1.
The Toolbars Dialog.
The Custom Toolbars dialog has two main areas. The Toolbars area displays all
available toolbars, sorted by name. All available buttons (active and non-active) for the
selected toolbar display in the dialog’s second area, Buttons.
You can configure each toolbar to display the buttons you frequently use. You may
activate buttons that are inactive by default, or inactivate buttons that are active by
default.
A-4
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog Online Systems
User Manual
SKF @ptitude Analyst Toolbars
Custom Toolbars
By default, the Hierarchy View, Navigation, Overlays, Plot Views, Plots, Primary,
and View Icons toolbars are activated.
•
Click the checkbox next to the toolbar to activate the toolbar.
•
Click the checkbox next to the individual available buttons to activate the buttons for
the selected toolbar.
•
Click Display toolbar titles to display the toolbar’s descriptive name on the toolbar
itself for easy identification.
•
Click OK to rebuild all toolbars incorporating your selections.

Custom toolbar selections are stored with your user name and
automatically display for you after initial log in.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog Online Systems
User Manual
A-5
Appendix B
Event Log Redirection
Overview
Event Log redirection allows you to automatically capture or print alarm or system
event information by directing the information to either a serial communications port or
to a parallel printer port. Communication parameters (port, baud rate, etc.) are user
selected.
When an alarm(s) is uploaded from an on-line device, or when a system event occurs
(e.g., bad sensor, on-line device LAN communication failure, etc.), @ptitude Analyst
formats each event as it occurs and immediately redirects the formatted output through
the selected port to the connected device or printer. Printed events are formatted
differently than the COM port redirected events.
Example
Following is an example of an Event Log redirected to a printer. Each line was printed
as the alarm or system event occurred.
Figure B - 1.
Example Event Log Redirection to a Printer.
The following are the categories in each redirected event. The same data is included,
regardless of whether it is redirected to a printer or a COM port.
Date / Time Setup (DTS) - 19 characters - MM / DD / YYYY HH:MM:SS
Event type – 20 characters maximum
Alarm Message (MSG) - 240 characters maximum
Machine name – 20 characters maximum
POINT name – 20 characters maximum
Device name – 250 characters maximum (contains / ch#nn at end if there is channel
for the event)
Host name – 15 characters maximum
User name – 30 characters maximum
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog Online Systems
User Manual
B-1
Event Log Redirection
Example
Printed events have labels for each item of data. The labels are defined in the language
file. The channel abbreviation that may be included with the device name also comes
from the language file. Printed lines are wrapped if they exceed 80 characters.
The format for events redirected to COM (serial) ports is as follows:
B-2
Character
Location
Character
Width
DTS
1-19
19
Machine Name
21-40
20
POINT Name
42-61
20
Event Message
63-302
240
Event Type
304-323
20
Device
325-574
250
Host Name
576-590
15
User Name
592-621
30
\r
622
\n
623
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog Online Systems
User Manual
Appendix C
Data Collection Gating
Overview
Gating is a method of controlling data collection for one POINT, called a dependent
POINT, based on the current state of a second POINT, called the control POINT.
If the control POINT's conditions are met, the dependent POINT's measurement is
performed. If the control POINT's conditions are not met, the dependent POINT's
measurement is not performed.

All data collection gating is performed within an on-line device.
Therefore a control POINT and its dependent POINT do not need
to be in the same on-line device, but must be in the same
Hierarchy.
There are five types of gating:
Parametric Gating
Gating
Sensor Bias-Output-Voltage Gating
Tachometer Gating
Parametric Gating
Parametric gating is based on a measured value. Parametric gating was developed to
monitor vibration under consistent running conditions. If a machine being monitored
changes speed or load, its vibration level could change dramatically. This change in
vibration has little correlation to machinery health. Data collected with the machine
running at a consistent speed and load, however, is useful for determining the machine
condition.
Parametric gating allows you to configure the data collection process so that data is
collected on vibration POINTs only when the machine is in a predetermined speed and
load range.

Parametric gating works best with processes that change less
frequently than once in 10 minutes. Do not use it where levels
are actively varying.
Example - A winder in a steel mill operates at varying speeds. Starting from a
standstill, the winder accelerates to 900 RPM, then decelerates as the rolled up product
grows in diameter, and finally decelerates to a standstill. The user wants to collect
vibration data at both 900 and 500 RPM. Vibration data at other speeds is not desired.
To accomplish this, the user creates two RPM POINTs. These RPM POINTs act as
control POINTs. They monitor the machine speed via one of the tachometer inputs.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog Online Systems
User Manual
C-1
Data Collection Gating
Logic Gating
One RPM POINT, 900 LINE SPEED, is set to alarm if the speed is in a window between
850 and 950 RPM. The other, 500 LINE SPEED, is set to alarm between 450 and 550
RPM. The alarm window parameters define the control POINTs' criteria. Only if the
control POINTs' values are within these alarm windows are the conditions met (and the
dependent POINTs' measurements performed).
The user then creates the vibration POINTs (dependent POINTs). These POINTs are
linked to the control POINT by selecting the appropriate RPM POINT in the parametric
gating setup. This guarantees that vibration data can be trended over consistent speed
conditions.
Figure C - 1.
Spectrum Envelope for a Control POINT.
The figure above shows another way to perform parametric speed gating. This method
uses a spectrum envelope for a control POINT. This spectrum envelope creates an
alarm as long as the running speed does not change significantly and the peak value
does not become too low. While the control (RPM) POINT remains in its alarm window,
conditions are considered “true” and the dependent POINT is measured and collected.
If the machine is not running or not running at the correct frequency, the control POINT
does not produce a spectrum alarm and the dependent POINT's measurement is not
performed.
Logic Gating
Logic gating is a type of parametric gating, therefore it can be used in the same
applications. In logic gating, the control POINT is a logic POINT. A logic POINT allows
signals from external control circuitry, such as programmable logic controller outputs,
to make the gating decisions.
When a logic POINT takes data, it checks the state of a TTL logic input (0 to 5 volts). A
value of one (HIGH) or zero (LOW) is saved. If the logic POINT is used to control
another POINT, the logic POINT's input value (HIGH or LOW) determines if data is
collected on the dependent POINT. You can specify which state, high or low, will be the
triggering or Active State.
C-2
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog Online Systems
User Manual
Data Collection Gating
Logic Gating
Figure C - 2.
POINT Setup Fields for Logic Control POINT Setup.
Example - A grinder in an automotive manufacturing plant operates in three modes,
grinding, idle, and stop. In the grinding mode there is so much vibration from the
grinding wheel that vibration data, indicative of the condition of the spindle and its
bearings, is drowned out. During idle mode, the useful machinery condition vibration
signals can easily be detected.
The process is controlled via a programmable logic controller (PLC) in the
manufacturing cell. The PLC has programmable logic outputs. One of these outputs
can be used as a logic input to the on-line device (the control POINT). The control
computer's logic output can be programmed to be high during idle mode and low in
grinding mode.
The user creates a logic control POINT that monitors the appropriate logic input. Since
the signal from the controller is high during idle mode, the logic POINT's Active State
should be set to high. The user then creates vibration monitoring POINTs (dependent
POINTs) and links them to the logic (control) POINT. This allows the collection of
consistent vibration data during the idle mode of operation.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog Online Systems
User Manual
C-3
Data Collection Gating
Sensor Bias-Output-Voltage Gating
Sensor Bias-Output-Voltage Gating
This gating method verifies proper sensor operation and may be used for any channel
using a sensor with a dynamic signal riding on a DC bias voltage. Examples are an
accelerometer with internal electronics or an eddy current displacement probe. The
sensor's bias output voltage value is indicative of its operating condition.
Sensor Bias Output Voltage (BOV) is a DC voltage on which the AC signal rides. The
on-line device can monitor the bias output voltage as well as the AC signal. If the bias
output voltage is outside the sensor manufacturer's specified operating range, the
signal coming from the sensor should probably be disregarded.
Example - Two accelerometers are installed at key points on a motor drive. The
accelerometers are cabled to the first two IMx / WMx sensor inputs. The user has
created one dynamic POINT for each of these channels and has enabled sensor BOV
gating for both POINTs. The lower BOV for each is set to +2 VDC and the upper BOV to
+22 VDC; BOVs outside this window are indicative of failures in the sensor or in its
cabling. The figure below shows the BOV Gating Setup of the Sensor Setup Tab for
one of these dynamic POINTs.)
Figure C - 3.
Sensor Setup Tab.
C-4
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog Online Systems
User Manual
Data Collection Gating
Tachometer Gating
Three months later during routine maintenance of the turbine, one of the sensor cables
is accidentally cut. The sensor BOV rises up to +24V DC (the open circuit voltage). The
IMx / WMx will not collect data for the POINT that uses the channel with the cut cable,
but will continue to collect data on the other dynamic POINT. A non-collection event is
logged for the bad BOV event.
Tachometer Gating
Tachometer gating is used to disable data collection for a POINT when its machine
stops.
Example - In the sensor BOV motor drive example, a tachometer is permanently
mounted on the motor. The output of the tachometer is cabled to the TACH 1 input on
the IMx motherboard. The tachometer outputs a pulse for each revolution of the
motor.
The user has enabled TACH 1 for all POINTs downloaded to the IMx. The IMx waits for
a pulse from the tachometer prior to collecting data on each of the points. If no pulse is
registered after ten seconds (6 RPM), the motor is assumed to have stopped.
This provides consistently trendable vibration data by turning off data logging when the
machine is stopped.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog Online Systems
User Manual
C-5
Glossary of Terms
Acceleration - The time rate of change of
velocity.
Acceleration measurements are
usually made with accelerometers.
Accelerometer - A sensor whose output is
directly proportional to acceleration.
Alignment - A condition whereby the axes of
machine components are either coincident,
parallel, or perpendicular, according to design
requirements.
Amplitude - The magnitude of dynamic motion
or vibration.
Expressed in terms of
peak-to-peak, zero-to-peak, or RMS.
Asynchronous - Vibration components that are
not related to rotating speed.
Averaging - In a dynamic signal analyzer,
digitally averaging several measurements to
improve statistical accuracy or to reduce the
level of random asynchronous components.
Axial - In the same direction as the shaft
centerline.
Axial Vibration - Vibration which is in line with
a shaft centerline.
Axis - The reference plane used in plotting
routines. The X-axis is the frequency plane.
The Y-axis is the amplitude plane.
Balancing - A procedure for adjusting the radial
mass distribution of a rotor so that the
centerline of the mass approaches the
geometric centerline of the rotor.
Band-Pass Filter - A filter with a single
transmission band extending from lower to
upper cutoff frequencies. The width of the band
is determined by the separation of frequencies
at which amplitude is attenuated by 3 dB
(0.707).
Bandwidth - The spacing between frequencies
at which a band-pass filter attenuates the signal
by 3 dB.
Baseline Spectrum - A vibration spectrum
taken when a machine is in good operating
condition; used as a reference for monitoring
and analysis.
Baud Rate - Adjustable serial communication
transfer rate. Measured in bits per second.
Bit - Smallest unit of computer information
storage. Equivalent to a choice of a one or a
zero.
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog Online Systems
User Manual
Byte - A unit of computer information storage
usually equal to eight bits or one character.
Center Frequency - For a bandpass filter, the
center of the transmission band.
Centerline Position - The average location,
relative to the radial bearing centerline, of the
shaft dynamic motion.
Channel - A sensor and the instrumentation
hardware and related software required to
display its output signal.
Condition Monitoring - Determining the
condition of a machine by interpretation of
measurements taken either periodically or
continuously while the machine is running.
CPM - Cycles per minute.
CPS - Cycles per second. Also referred to as
Hertz (Hz).
Critical Speeds - In general, any rotating speed
which is associated with high vibration
amplitude.
Often the rotor speeds which
correspond to natural frequencies of the
system.
Cycle - One complete sequence of values of a
periodic quantity.
Displacement - The change in distance or
position of an object relative to a reference.
Download - Transferring information to the
measurement device from the host computer.
Enable - To activate.
Engineering Units - Physical units in which a
measurement is expressed, such as in/sec,
micrometers, or mils. Selected by the user.
EU - See ENGINEERING UNITS.
External Sampling - In a DSA refers to control
of data sampling by a multiplied tachometer
signal. Provides a stationary display of vibration
with changing speed.
Fast Fourier Transform - A calculation method
of converting a time waveform to a frequency
display that shows the relationship of discrete
frequencies and their amplitudes.
Field - One data item. Examples of fields are
POINT Type, Description, etc.
Filter - An electronic device designed to pass or
reject a specific frequency band.
FFT - See Fast Fourier Transform.
Flat Top Window - DSA window function which
provides the best amplitude accuracy for
measuring discrete frequency components.
Glossary - 1
Frequency - The repetition rate of a periodic
event, usually expressed in cycles per second
(Hz), cycles per minute (CPM), revolutions per
minute (RPM), or multiples of running speed
(orders). Orders are commonly referred to as
1X for running speed, 2X for twice running
speed, and so on.
Frequency Domain - An FFT graph (amplitude
vs. frequency).
Free Running - A term used to describe the
operation of an analyzer or processor which
operates continuously at a fixed rate, not in
synchronism with some external reference
event.
Frequency Range - The frequency range
(bandwidth) over which a measurement is
considered valid.
Usually refers to upper
frequency limit of analysis, considering zero as
the lower analysis limit.
Gap - (See Probe Gap.)
Global Bearing Defect - Relatively large
damage on a bearing element.
Hanning Window - DSA window function that
provides better frequency resolution than the
flat top window, but with reduced amplitude
accuracy.
Hertz (Hz) - Cycles per second. CPM/60.
Hierarchy - A method of organizing equipment
into logical groups or physical areas for ease of
4
access in the PRISM database. This format
consists of Main SETs, Sub-SETs, machines,
and POINTs.
High Pass Filter - A filter with a transmission
band starting at a lower cutoff frequency and
extending to (theoretically) infinite frequency.
Imbalance - A condition such that the mass of a
shaft and its geometric centerlines do not
coincide.
Keyphasor Phase Reference Sensor - A signal
used in rotating machinery measurements,
generated by a sensor observing a
once-per-revolution event. (Keyphasor is a
Bently-Nevada trade name.)
Linear Averaging - In a DSA, averaging of time
records that results in reduction of
asynchronous components.
Lines - Common term used to describe the
filters of a DSA (e.g. 400 line analyzer).
Glossary - 2
Low Pass Filter - A filter whose transmission
band extends from an upper cutoff frequency
down to DC.
Multi-Parameter Monitoring - A condition
monitoring method that uses various
monitoring technologies to best monitor
machine condition.
Natural Frequency - The frequency of free
vibration of a system. The frequency at which
an undamped system with a single degree of
freedom will oscillate upon momentary
displacement from its rest position.
Orbit - The path of shaft centerline motion
during rotation.
Overlap Processing - The concept of
performing a new analysis on a segment of data
in which only a portion of the signal has been
updated (some old data, some new data).
Peak Spectra - A frequency domain
measurement where, in a series of spectral
measurements, the one spectrum with the
highest magnitude at a specified frequency is
retained.
Phase - A measurement of the timing
relationship between two signals, or between a
specific vibration event and a keyphasor pulse.
Phase Reference - A signal used in rotating
machinery measurements, generated by a
sensor observing a once-per-revolution event.
Phase Response - The phase difference (in
degrees) between the filter input and output
signals as frequency varies; usually expressed
as lead and lag referenced to the input.
Phase Spectrum - Phase frequency diagram
obtained as part of the results of a Fournier
transform.
POINT - Defines a machinery location at which
measurement data is collected and the
measurement type.
Probe - An eddy-current sensor, although
sometimes used to describe any vibration
sensor.
Probe Gap - The physical distance between the
face of an eddy probe tip and the observed
surface. The distance can be expressed in
terms of displacement (mils, micrometers) or in
terms of voltage (millivolts), which is the value of
the (negative) dc output signal and is an
electronic representation of the physical gap
distance. Standard polarity convention dictates
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog Online Systems
User Manual
that a decreasing gap results in an increasing
(less negative) output signal; increasing gap
produces a decreasing (more negative) output
signal.
Radial - Direction perpendicular to the shaft
centerline.
Radial Position -The average location, relative
to the radial bearing centerline, of the shaft
dynamic motion.
Radial Vibration - Vibration which is
perpendicular to a shaft's centerline.
Resonance - The condition of vibration
amplitude and phase change response caused
by a corresponding system sensitivity to a
particular forcing frequency. A resonance is
typically identified by a substantial amplitude
increase, and related phase shift.
RMS - The square root of the sum of a set of
squared instantaneous values.
ROUTE - A measurement POINT collection
sequence.
Run Up/Run Down - The monitoring of
machinery conditions during a start up or shut
down process.
Sensitivity - The ratio of magnitude of an
output to the magnitude of a quantity
measured. Also the smallest input signal to
which an instrument can respond.
Sensor - A transducer which senses and
converts a physical phenomenon to an analog
electrical signal.
Signal Analysis - Process of extracting
information about a signal's behavior in the time
domain and/or frequency domain. Describes
the entire process of filtering, sampling,
digitizing, computation, and display of results in
a meaningful format.
Spectrum - A display of discrete frequencies
and their amplitudes.
Spectrum Analyzer - An instrument which
displays the frequency spectrum of an input
signal.
Thermocouple - A temperature sensing device
comprised of two dissimilar metal wires which,
when thermally affected (heated or cooled),
produce a change in electrical potential.
Time Domain - A dynamic amplitude vs. time
graph.
Time Waveform - (See Waveform.)
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog Online Systems
User Manual
Transducer - A device which translates a
physical quantity into an electrical output.
Trend - The measurement of a variable vs.
time.
Trigger - Any event which can be used as a
timing reference.
Upload - Transferring data from the measuring
device to the host computer.
Vibration - The behavior of a machine's
mechanical components as they react to
internal or external forces. Magnitude of cyclic
motion; may be expressed as acceleration,
velocity, or displacement. Defined by frequency
and timebased components.
Waveform - A presentation or display of the
instantaneous amplitude of a signal as a
function of time.
Glossary - 3
Index
A
activity index
diagnostic cursor 5-60
frequency overlay 5-58
harmonic cursor 5-50
add notes 5-40
alarm
DMx alarms 7-27
DMx band 7-18
alarm database
band 3-143
envelope 3-147
overall 3-142
alarm settings 3-138
alarm group 3-149
speed 3-145
anchor symbol 5-8
apply template wizard 3-170
asset name 3-5
assign
report editor 6-11
autorange 3-33
averaging 3-19, 3-26
B
band alarm
load band alarms 3-72, 3-85
band alarm settings 5-55
band trend 5-32
baseline 3-91
set baseline screen 3-91
bearing editor 3-110
bode
damping cursor 8-17
plots 8-16
Bode/Nyquist plot 8-23
BOV
gating 4-7, C-1, C-4
limits overlay 5-14
trend plot 5-14
C
canary lab settings 3-190
cascade plots 8-20
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog Online Systems
User Manual
channel 3-18, 3-24, 3-28, 3-33
check size 4-6
clear all devices 4-6
coast down 8-7
columns
report definition 6-7
configure DMx 7-3
control POINT 3-76, 7-24, C-1
control POINT setup 3-27
crest factor 5-67
custom toolbars A-4
D
DAD / POINT type selection 3-11
DAD status 4-7
damping cursor 8-17
date range
report definition 6-8
DC point 3-32
dependent POINT 7-24, C-1
derived point 3-33, 3-186
calculate 3-96
data input display 3-33
expressions 3-36
functions 3-38
variables 3-36
details 3-10
detection 3-18, 3-24
device activity 4-9
devices
clearing 4-6
DMx
@ptitude Analyst Monitor 7-2
adding POINTs 7-8
alarms 7-27
buffer 7-3
collection schedule 7-17
connections setup 7-5
data collection 7-26
device setup 7-7
device status 7-13
gating setup properties 7-24
hardware configuration 7-1
hierarchy 7-11
hosts 7-3
live data resolution 7-3
machine properties 7-13
normal data resolution 7-4
orbit plot 7-30
Index - 1
orbit POINTs 7-12
orbit properties 7-18
overview 7-1
plots 7-29
POINT properties 7-14
POINT types 7-12
SCL plot 7-32
serial connection 7-6
settings 7-3
TCP/IP connection 7-6
transient groups 8-6
transient hierarchy 8-10
transient points 8-2
transient window 8-5
updates from Manager 7-28
vector properties 7-22
waveform properties 7-21
download 4-5
check size 4-6
E
event
add 3-98
copy 3-98
edit 3-98
remove 3-98
select user 3-100
transaction server 3-100
event log
redirection B-1
event scheduler wizard 3-98
exception report 6-1
extracted band plot 5-35
extracted trend plot 5-34
F
FAM
activity index 5-58
filter keys 3-7, 3-55, 3-81
filter notes 5-41, 6-10
filters 3-172
apply filter 3-174
copy filter 3-173
edit filter 3-174
filter attributes 3-176
filter editor 3-172
managing filters 3-172
new filter 3-172
Index - 2
remove filter 3-174
shared filter 3-175
freq. type 3-18, 3-24
frequency overlay
activity index 5-58
frequency sets 3-108
frequency sets editor
bearings 3-110
general 3-109
other 3-112
frequency settings dialog 5-59
full scale 3-33
G
gating C-1
BOV C-1, C-4
DMx 7-24
logic C-1, C-2
parametric C-1
POINT configutration rules 3-76
rules 3-76
tachometer C-1, C-5
graphic plot display 5-1
group
insert group 3-5
new group 3-5
group properties 3-5
details 3-10
DMx device status 7-13
DMx transient 8-6
filter keys 3-7, 3-55, 3-81
general 3-5
images 3-9
IMx transient 8-8
messages 3-7
notes 3-9
group types
creating group types 3-104
H
HAI 5-50
harmonic cursor
activity index 5-50
HAI 5-50
hierarchy
building 3-1
close hierarchy 3-3
multiple 3-4
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog Online Systems
User Manual
new hierarchy 3-2, 3-4
open hierarchy 3-3
paper copy 3-1
primary 3-4
transient 8-10
history report 6-1
host computer 1-3
I
images 3-9, 3-66
report definition 6-9
IMx
alarm group 3-149
alarm group 3-46
analog 3-116
attributes 3-89
channel 3-24, 3-28, 3-116
Communication 3-126
digital 3-118
download 4-5
download band alarm 3-71
IMx Setup tab 3-46
modify by attribute 3-89
online settings 3-114
Online transfer 4-4
post-processing 3-71, 3-72, 3-146
process reference 7-25
protection digital 3-124
Service 1-7, 1-8, 3-115
setup system 1-7, 1-9
Setup tab 3-23
speed alarm settings 3-145
speed reference 7-25
status 4-7
system 1-5
Transaction Service 1-8
upload 4-10
IMx-M 1-5
IMx-P 1-5
IMx-S 1-5
modbus 3-128, 3-130
IMx-T 1-6
modbus 3-128, 3-130
K
kurtosis 5-67
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog Online Systems
User Manual
L
last measurement report 6-1
linear speed overlay settings 5-39
linear speed settings 5-45
live data
saving 5-72
live data displays 5-71
local data collection 4-8
lock trace 5-9
logic gating C-1, C-2
low frequency cutoff 3-18, 3-26
M
machine priority 3-6
Mag / Speed / Spectrum / Time 5-30
mag / speed / spectrum trend plot 5-29
Mag / Speed / Time 5-31
mag / speed trend plot 5-28
mag/phase / single cursor 5-64
mag/phase settings 5-27, 5-28
mag/phase trend plot 5-27
manual archive 3-97
manual entry 4-12
measurement history
report definition 6-10
measurement properties 3-90
messages
public 3-151
shared 3-8, 3-63
modify by attribute 3-88
Monitor
DMx buffer 7-3
DMx hosts 7-3
transient groups 8-11
multi-channel
plots 5-10
select channel number 5-10
multi-measurement plots 5-10
multiple point properties 3-80
envelope tab 3-86
N
new DMx POINTs 7-8
notes
report definition 6-10
Nyquist plots 8-18
Index - 3
O
Online
transfer overview 4-4
orbit
plots 7-30
shaft centerline plot 7-32
orbit POINTs 7-12
orbit properties 7-18
vector 7-22
waveform 7-21
overdue report 6-1
overlays 5-8
all overlays 5-37
bode/damping cursor 8-17
mag/phase / single cursor 5-64
polar vector/phase alarm 5-64
polar vector/single cursor 5-63
spectrum/band alarm 5-54
spectrum/band cursor 5-49
spectrum/diagnostic cursor 5-60
spectrum/envelope alarm 5-56
spectrum/frequency 5-58
spectrum/harmonic cursor 5-50
spectrum/linear speed 5-57
spectrum/peak 5-53
spectrum/running speed 5-48
spectrum/sideband 5-52
spectrum/single cursor 5-47
time/band 5-67
time/harmonic 5-66, 5-69
time/linear speed 5-69
time/peak 5-68
time/single cursor 5-65
toolbar buttons 5-36
trend/curve fit 5-46
trend/linear speed See
trend/notes 5-40
trend/overall alarm 5-44
trend/single cursor 5-43
waterfall/band cursor 5-62
waterfall/single cursor 5-61
overspeed 8-9
P
paper copy hierarchy 3-1
parametric gating C-1
plots
band trend plot 5-32
Index - 4
Bode 8-16
Bode/Nyquist 8-23
cascade 8-20
extracted band plot 5-35
extracted trend plot 5-34
live data displays 5-71
Mag / Speed / Spectrum / Time trend plot
5-30
mag / speed / spectrum trend plot 5-29
Mag / Speed / Time trend plot 5-31
mag / speed trend plot 5-28
mag/phase trend plot 5-27
multi-measurements 5-10
navigation 5-12
Nyquist 8-18
plot toolbar buttons 5-2, 5-36
plot window 5-6
plot window operations 5-8
polar vector plot 5-26
report definition 6-9
select channel number 5-10
spectrum plot 5-15
speed/Bode/orbit/spectrum 8-25
speed/Bode/spectrum 8-24
time plot 5-20
topology 8-21
transient 8-15
trend plot 5-13
trend/spectrum plot 5-19
trend/spectrum/time plot 5-23
trend/time plot 5-22
waterfall plot 5-24
point
graphic display 5-1
insert point 3-11
new point 3-11
point name 3-1
point properties
band 3-69, 3-84
canary labs 3-35
derived points 3-34
envelope 3-72
expressions 3-36
frequency 3-64
gating 3-50
general 3-12
manual points 3-31
messages 3-62
notes 3-65
orbit/scl 3-29
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog Online Systems
User Manual
overall 3-58, 3-82
phase 3-69
protection threshold levels 3-48
schedule 3-52
threshold 3-47
POINT Setup Validation 3-17, 3-24, 3-31,
3-78
polar vector plot 5-26
polar vector settings 5-26
polar vector/phase alarm 5-64
polar vector/single cursor 5-63
prefix 3-1
primary hierarchy 3-4
print 6-1
priority 3-6
process reference 3-48
public messages
creating 3-151
R
RAM 4-8
report 6-1
report definition
columns 6-7
date range 6-8
images 6-9
measurement history 6-10
notes 6-10
plots 6-9
routes 6-10
report editor
assign 6-11
assign for ROUTE report 6-14
reports
exception report 6-1
history report 6-1
last measurement report 6-1
overdue report 6-1
report editor 6-5
route history 6-1
ROUTE Statistics report 6-1
set statistics 6-1
transaction server 3-100
transient 6-1
upload statistics report 6-1
retry strategy 2-24
route
creating 4-1
new route items 4-3
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog Online Systems
User Manual
paper copy 4-1
report definition 6-10
structured 4-3
route history
report 6-1
route statistics report 6-1
running speed 5-48, 5-51, C-2
S
saving live data 5-72
schedule DMx data collection 7-17
scheduled event
add 3-98
copy 3-98
edit 3-98
remove 3-98
select user 3-100
transaction server 3-100
scheduler 3-98
actions 3-102
current scheduled events 3-98
events 3-101
segment name 3-5
select channel in plots 5-10
self collection 3-48
send message 3-103, 6-3
sensor setup 3-15
sensors
shared 3-16
serial connection for DMx 7-6
set baseline 3-91
set statistics report 6-1
shaft centerline plot 7-32
share alarm 3-59, 3-62, 3-83
share gating 3-51
share message 3-8, 3-63
shared sensors 3-16
skew 5-67
sound byte 5-21
spectrum
combined 5-18
multi channel 5-17
stacked 5-17
spectrum settings 5-16
combined/stacked 5-16
spectrum/band alarm 5-54
spectrum/band cursor 5-49
spectrum/diagnostic cursor 5-60
spectrum/envelope alarm 5-56
Index - 5
spectrum/frequency 5-58
spectrum/harmonic cursor 5-50
spectrum/linear speed 5-57
spectrum/peak 5-53
spectrum/running speed 5-48
spectrum/sideband 5-52
spectrum/single cursor 5-47
speed reference 3-47
speed/Bode/orbit/spectrum plots 8-25
speed/Bode/spectrum plots 8-24
standard deviation 5-67
start-up 8-7
statistical alarms 3-152, 3-157
statistical alarms wizard 3-152, 3-157
status of DMx device 7-13
status, DAD 4-7
suffix 3-1
T
tacho 3-19
tacho pulses / rev 3-19
tachometer gating C-1, C-5
TCP/IP connection for DMx 7-6
temperature 4-8
templates 3-166
apply template 3-170
apply template wizard 3-170
custom names 3-168
managing templates 3-167
new template 3-167
open template 3-169
remove template 3-169
type 3-169
text annotation settings 5-38
time plot 5-20
sound byte 5-21
time plot settings 5-20
time/band 5-67
time/harmonic 5-66, 5-69
time/linear speed 5-69
time/peak 5-68
time/single cursor 5-65
toolbars A-1
custom A-4
topology plot 8-21
cascade vs. waterfall 8-22
transaction server
reports 3-100
scheduled events 3-100
Index - 6
Transaction Service 1-8, 1-9
transient data 8-12
transient plots 8-15
transients 8-1
adding points 8-2
Bode plots 8-16
Bode/Nyquist plots 8-23
cascade plots 8-20
coast down 8-7
data collection 8-12
groups 8-6
hierarchy 8-10
measurement properties 8-13
Nyquist plots 8-18
overspeed 8-9
plots 8-15
report 6-1
setup 8-1
speed/Bode/orbit/spectrum plots 8-25
speed/Bode/spectrum plots 8-24
start-up 8-7
topology plots 8-21
transfer to Monitor 8-11
window 8-5
trend
linear speed 5-44
trend plot 5-13
trend settings 5-13
trend/curve fit 5-46
trend/notes 5-40
trend/overall alarm 5-44
trend/single cursor 5-43
trend/spectrum plot 5-19
trend/spectrum/time plot 5-23
trend/time plot 5-22
trigger timeout 3-19
TTL logic C-2
U
upload statistics report 6-1
V
vector compensation
Bode plots 8-17
Nyquist plots 8-19
orbit plots 7-31
properties 7-22
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog Online Systems
User Manual
W
waterfall plot 5-24
waterfall settings 5-25
waterfall/band cursor 5-62
waterfall/single cursor 5-61
waveform properties 7-21
window
flat top 3-19
hanning 3-19, 3-26
WMx
channel 3-18
Devices 2-1
Service 1-9
Setup tab 3-17
Transaction Service 1-9
Z
zoom operations 5-11
SKF @ptitude Analyst and SKF Multilog Online Systems
User Manual
Index - 7
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement